book 4 of 5 - bidnet.com

PIN: 84116MBSI957 E-PIN: 84116B0019 Book/Receipt No.:

THE CITY OF NEW YORK

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

(“NYCDOT”)

POLLY TROTTENBERG

COMMISSIONER

PROPOSAL FOR BIDS, BID, DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARD CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

FOR

DETAIL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE NEW STATEN ISLAND OLLIS

CLASS FERRY

(the Project)

FOR

THE STATEN ISLAND FERRY DIVISION

(the “Division”)

BOOK 4 of 5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PIN: 84116MBSI957 EPIN: 84116B0019 Ollis-Class Ferry Construction 1

This page has been intentionally left blank.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

20 PAGE GROUP 000 – GENERAL

010 INTENT 000-2

011 PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION 000-2

012 DEFINITIONS 000-3

25 030 CONTRACT 000-4

040 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 000-5

040.1 Progress Schedule 040.2 Plan Schedule 040.3 Progress Monitoring 30 040.4 Buy America Compliance 040.5 Material Substitutions 040.6 Purchase Order Technical Approval

068 REFERENCES 000-10

068.1 Contract Drawings and Documents 35 068.2 Intellectual Property Rights

070 REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 000-13

071 Overhead and Clearances 072 Regulatory Requirements 073 Vibration and Noise

40 074 Welding 076 Guarantee 078 Materials and Workmanship 079 Environmental Conditions

084 EQUIPMENT STORAGE 000-19

45 088 CARE OF VESSEL DURING CONSTRUCTION 000-19

088.1 Fire Protection 088.2 Hull Protection

091 INSPECTION 000-20

096 WEIGHT CONTROL PROGRAM 000-21

50 099 DIGITAL IMAGES 000-21

GROUP 100 - HULL STRUCTURE 100 GENERAL 100-2

100.1 References 100.2 General

55 100.3 Steel Construction 100.4 Testing and Inspection

110 HULL 100-6

110.1 Shell Plating and Keel 110.2 Skegs

60 110.3 Stanchions 110.4 Frames

120 HULL STRUCTURAL BULKHEADS 100-7

125 TANKS AND VOIDS 100-8

130 HULL DECKS 100-8

65 150 SUPERSTRUCTURE 100-8

150.1 Access and Layout 150.2 Superstructure Bulkheads 150.3 Superstructure Decks

151 DECKHOUSE AND PILOT HOUSE 100-9

70 170 STACK 100-9

171 MASTS 100-9

171.1 Navigation Masts 171.2 Flagpoles


172.3 Sight Staffs 75 180 FOUNDATIONS 100-10

180.1 General 180.2 Main Machinery Foundations 180.3 Voith Schneider Propeller Foundations

GROUP 200 - MAIN PROPULSION 80 200 GENERAL 200-3

200.1 References 200.2 General 200.3 Vibration and Noise Control 200.4 Machinery Arrangement

85 200.5 Installation 200.6 Propulsion System Integrator

233 MAIN ENGINES 200-7

241 COMBINING GEARS 200-12

243 SHAFTING 200-13

90 243.1 Torsional Couplings 243.2 Fluid Couplings 243.3 Curved Tooth Couplings 243.4 Line Shafts 243.5 Shaft Couplings

95 243.6 Shaft Bearings 243.7 Bulkhead Seals 243.8 Shaft Locking and Turning Devices 243.9 Clutches

245 VOITH SCHNEIDER PROPELLERS OR APPROVED EQUAL 200-16

100 252 PROPULSION CONTROL SYSTEM 200-19

252.1 General 252.2 Control System Functions 252.3 Control Stations 252.4 Control Transfer

105 252.5 Emergency Stop 252.6 Control System Documentation and Testing

256 MACHINERY COOLING SYSTEMS 200-23

256.1 Seawater Cooling System 256.2 Fresh Water Cooling Systems

110 256.3 Heat Exchangers 256.4 Jacket Water Heaters

259 EXHAUST SYSTEMS 200-26

259.1 General 259.2 Main Engine Exhaust

115 259.3 Generator Exhaust 259.4 Exhaust Insulation 259.5 AUS Dosing System

261 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 200-29

261.1 General 120 261.2 Fuel Oil Service System

261.3 Fuel Oil Transfer System 264 LUBE OIL AND WASTE OIL SYSTEMS 200-30

264.1 General 264.2 Engine Lube Oil Service Systems

125 264.3 VSP Lube Oil Service System 264.4 Combining Gear Lube Oil Service System 264.5 Lube Oil Storage and Transfer System 264.6 VSP Lube Oil Storage Tanks 264.7 Waste Oil System


130 GROUP 300 – ELECTRICAL 300 GENERAL 300-3

300.1 References 300.2 General 300.3 Voltage and Frequency Ratings

135 300.4 Harmonic Interference 300.5 Materials and Equipment 300.6 Electrical Bonding 300.7 Nameplates and Labels 300.8 Documentation

140 300.9 Electrical Test and Trials 302 MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 300-7

302.1 General 302.2 Motors 302.3 Motor Controllers

145 302.4 Variable Speed Drives 302.5 Motor Control Centers 302.6 Fire/Ventilation Shutdown Circuit

303 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 300-10

303.1 General 150 303.2 Generator Circuit Breakers

304 CABLEWAYS AND WIRING 300-11

304.1 Cables 304.2 Cable Installation 304.3 Cable Routing

155 304.4 Cableways and Hangers 304.5 Penetrations 304.6 Cable Identification 304.7 Junction Boxes

310 GENERATOR SETS 300-14

160 310.1 General 310.2 Ship Service Diesel Generator Sets 310.3 Emergency Generator

320 SWITCHBOARDS 300-17

320.1 General 165 320.2 Switchboard Construction

320.3 Main Switchboard Operation 320.4 Switchboard Arrangement and Location 320.5 Emergency Switchboard 320.6 Emergency Switchboard Operation

170 320.7 Emergency Switchboard Arrangement and Location 320.8 Switchboard Instruments

321 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS 300-23

321.1 Distribution Panels and Load Centers 321.2 Enclosures and Interiors

175 321.3 Snack Bar Power 321.4 24 VDC Power Distribution Panels 321.5 Transformers 321.6 Switches

322 RECEPTACLES 300-26

180 322.1 Shore Power Connections 330 LIGHTING 300-27

332 LIGHTING FIXTURES 300-27

332.1 Exit Lighting 332.2 Floodlights

185 332.3 Searchlights


332.4 Pilot House Night Lighting 332.5 Labeling 332.6 Switches and Junction Boxes

340 BATTERIES AND POWER CONDITIONING 300-29

190 340.1 General 340.2 24 VDC Systems 340.3 Engine Starting

GROUP 400 – COMMAND AND SURVEILLANCE / ELECTRONICS 401 GENERAL 400-2

195 401.1 References 401.2 General

421 NON-ELECTRIC NAVIGATION AIDS 400-3

421.1 Clinometers 421.2 Ship's Horn

200 421.3 Fog Bell 422 NAVIGATION LIGHTS 400-3

426 ELECTRICAL NAVIGATION AIDS 400-3

426.1 ECDIS 426.2 Satellite Compass

205 426.3 Depth Sounder 426.4 Speed Log 426.5 AIS 426.6 Digital Weather Stations 426.7 Clock

210 432 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS 400-5

432.1 IP Phone/Command Intercom/Talkback System 432.2 Sound Powered Phone System

433 PUBLIC ADDRESS (P/A) AND GENERAL ALARM SYSTEM 400-7

433.1 Public Address System 215 433.2 General Alarm System

434 SHIP'S NETWORK SYSTEM 400-7

434.1 Broadband Ethernet Antenna 434.2 Ship's Ethernet Network

436 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEMS 400-8

220 436.1 Machinery Alarm and Monitoring System 436.2 Fire Detection and Alarm System 436.3 Fuel Monitoring System 436.4 Tank Level Indication System

437 ENGINE ORDER TELEGRAPH 400-34

225 439 CCTV 400-34

440 PASSENGER COUNTERS 400-36

441 VHF RADIOS 400-36

451 RADAR 400-36

GROUP 500 – AUXILIARY MACHINERY 230 500 GENERAL 500-3

500.1 References 500.2 Introduction 500.3 System Design 500.4 Marking, Nameplates, and Labels

235 500.5 Documentation 503 PUMPS 500-6

505 PIPING 500-7

505.1 General 505.2 Valves, Fittings, and Instrument Piping

240 505.3 Valve Operating Gear


505.4 Takedown Joints 505.5 Pipe Hangers

506 FILLS, VENTS AND SOUNDS 500-12

506.1 General 245 506.2 Tank Level Indication

508 PIPING AND MACHINERY INSULATION 500-13

508.1 General 512 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING REQUIREMENTS 14

512.1 General 250 512.2 Design Conditions

512.3 Noise 512.4 Ducting 512.5 Weather Louvers and Mist Eliminators 512.6 Ventilation Insulation and Lagging

255 512.7 Fire Dampers 512.8 Fans 512.9 Controls 512.10 Heat Pumps

513 MACHINERY SPACE VENTILATION AND HEATING SYSTEMS 500-19

260 513.1 Engine Room 513.2 Auxiliary Machinery Rooms 513.3 Voids 513.4 Propulsion Rooms 513.5 Emergency Diesel Generator Room

265 513.6 Novec Locker 514 PASSENGER AND CREW SPACE HVAC SYSTEMS 500-22

514.1 Passenger Seating Areas 514.2 Stair Towers 514.3 Passenger Area Exhaust

270 514.4 Pilot Houses 514.5 Crew Spaces 514.6 Security Equipment Room 514.7 Engineer's Operating Station

520 SEAWATER SYSTEMS 500-24

275 520.1 Sea Chests 521 FIREMAIN SYSTEM 500-24

526 WEATHER DECK DRAINS 500-25

528 SANITARY SYSTEM 500-26

528.1 General 280 528.2 Interior Deck Drains

528.3 Black and Gray Water Drains 528.4 Sewage Treatment Plant 528.5 Sewage Tank and Discharge Pump

529 DRAINAGE AND BALLAST SYSTEMS 500-29

285 529.1 BILGE AND TRIM (BALLAST) SYSTEM 500-29

529.1 Bilge and Trim (Ballast) System 529.2 Oily Water System

530 TEMPERED WATER SYSTEM 500-30

533 POTABLE AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEMS 500-31

290 533.1 Potable Water System 533.2 Sanitary Water System

551 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 500-33

551.1 General 551.2 High Pressure System

295 551.3 Ship Service Air System 551.4 Compressed Air Supply to AUS Dosing


555 CLEAN AGENT FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 500-35

556 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 500-36

556.1 Remote Valve Shut-Off System 300 558 DECK DE-ICING SYSTEM 500-37

581 ANCHOR HANDLING AND STORAGE SYSTEMS 500-37

581.1 General 581.2 Anchors 581.3 Anchor Chain and Hardware

305 581.4 Anchor Winches 582 MOORING SYSTEMS 500-39

582.1 General 582.2 Mooring Capstan 582.3 Mooring Chocks, Bitts, and Fairleads

310 582.4 Towing Padeyes 583 LIFESAVING APPLIANCES 500-40

583.1 Rescue Boat and Davits 583.2 Life Jackets (PFDs) and Stowage 583.3 Life Rings

315 583.4 Life Rafts and Launching Devices 583.5 Miscellaneous Equipment

585 PASSENGER ELEVATOR 500-42

GROUP 600 – EQUIPMENT AND OUTFIT 600 GENERAL 600-3

320 602 NAMEPLATES AND MARKINGS 600-4

602.1 General 602.2 Ship's Name and Hailing Port 602.3 New York City Department of Transportation 602.4 Lettering, Fonts, and Logos

325 602.5 Builder's Plaque 602.6 Door, Hatch, and Manhole Markings 602.7 System Labels and Nameplates 602.8 Regulatory Markings 602.9 Miscellaneous Labels, Signs, and Markings

330 602.10 Notices and Licenses 602.11 Display Drawings

603 HULL MARKINGS 600-9

603.1 Draft Marks 603.2 UWILD Marks

335 603.3 Official Number 612 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR RAILINGS 600-10

612.1 Interior Railings 612.2 Exterior Railings 612.3 Retractable Passenger Barriers

340 621 JOINER BULKHEADS 600-11

622 FLOOR PLATES AND GRATING 600-11

623 LADDERS 600-12

623.1 Interior Ladders and Stairways 623.2 Exterior Ladders

345 624 NON-STRUCTURAL CLOSURES 600-13

624.1 Doors 624.2 Watertight Doors 624.3 Weathertight Doors 624.4 Fire Screen Doors

350 624.5 Joiner Doors 624.6 Security Screen Gates 624.7 Locks, Keys, and Tags


624.8 Hatches and Manholes 625 WINDOWS AND FIXED LIGHTS 600-16

355 625.1 General 625.2 Pilot House Windows and Wipers

631 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 600-18

631.1 General 631.2 Surface Preparation

360 631.3 Coating System 631.4 Coating - Piping, Machinery, and Electrical

633 CATHODIC PROTECTION 600-26

634 DECK COVERINGS 600-26

634.1 General 365 634.2 Underlayment

634.3 Poured Deck Coverings 634.4 Deck Covering Schedule 634.5 Switchboard and Fatigue Matting 634.6 Safety Treads

370 634.7 Elevator 634.8 Walk Off Mats

635 HULL INSULATION 600-29

635.1 General 635.2 Structural Fire Protection

375 635.3 Thermal Insulation 635.4 Acoustic Insulation 635.5 Machinery and Piping Insulation

637 LININGS AND CEILINGS 600-31

640 OUTFITTING 600-33

380 640.1 General 640.2 Lighting 640.3 Furnishings 640.4 Utility and Storage Spaces 640.5 Pilot House Consoles

385 640.6 EOS Console 640.7 Engine Room Outfit

644 SANITARY FIXTURES 600-40

644.1 General 644.2 Appliances

390 651 FOOD SERVICE FACILITY 600-41

670 UTILITY AND STORAGE SPACES 600-42

671 EMERGENCY AND FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT OUTFIT 600-42

671.1 General 671.2 Portable and Semi-Portable Fire Extinguishers

395 671.3 Fire Axes 671.4 Emergency Gear Lockers

GROUP 800 - INTEGRATION AND ENGINEERING 810 DRAWINGS, CALCULATIONS, AND REVIEW 800-1

810.1 As-Built Drawings 400 810.2 Maintenance Schedule and Asset Hierarchy

810.3 Vendor System Diagrams 810.4 Display Drawings for Mounting On Board 810.5 Docking and Hull Markings Plan 810.6 Tank Sounding Tables

405 810.7 3D Hull Scan 810.8 Builder's Scale Models

833 WEIGHT ESTIMATE 800-6

835 TONNAGE ADMEASUREMENT 800-7


838 FIELD OFFICE FOR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 800-7

410 843 TRIM AND STABILITY BOOKLET 800-8

851 DELIVERY ORIENTATION 800-9

856 TECHNICAL MANUALS AND OTHER DATA 800-10

856.1 General 856.2 Software Programs

415 857 VESSEL SIMULATION 800-11

GROUP 900 – TESTS, TRIALS, AND DELIVERY 982 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND TRIALS 900-1

982.1 Shop Tests 982.2 Installation Tests and Inspections

420 982.3 Operational Tests 982.4 Dock Trials 982.5 Rescue Boat Tests 982.6 Sea Trials (Contract Performance Trials)

983 TRANSIT 900-15

986 COMPLETION AND F 425 INAL ACCEPTANCE 900-15

986.1 Final Acceptance Trials 986.2 Substantial Completion Survey 986.3 Final Acceptance

996 LAUNCHING 900-17


- Page: 000-1

GROUP 000 – GENERAL

010 INTENT 2 011 PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2 012 DEFINITIONS 3 030 CONTRACT 4 5

040 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 5 040.1 Details for Progress Schedule 5 040.2 Plan Schedule 6 040.3 Progress Monitoring 7 040.4 Buy America Compliance 8 10 040.5 Material Substitutions 8 040.6 Purchase Order Technical Approval 9

068 REFERENCES 10 068.1 Contract Drawings and Documents 10 068.2 Intellectual Property Rights 12 15

070 REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 13 071 Overhead and Clearances 13 072 Regulatory Requirements 13 073 Vibration and Noise 14 074 Welding 16 20 076 Guarantee 17 078 Materials and Workmanship 17 079 Environmental Conditions 18

084 EQUIPMENT STORAGE 19 088 CARE OF VESSEL DURING CONSTRUCTION 19 25

088.1 Fire Protection 20 088.2 Hull Protection 20

091 INSPECTION 20 096 WEIGHT CONTROL PROGRAM 21 099 DIGITAL IMAGES 22 30


- Page: 000-2

010 INTENT

The intent of these Technical Specifications and the accompanying plans and attachments, is to describe the construction of three (3) new, diesel-powered, steel-hulled passenger ferries to be 35 constructed for the Staten Island Ferry division of the New York City Department of Transportation (NYCDOT). The vessels shall be complete in all respects, fully equipped and fitted out in accordance with these Specifications, in accordance with best modern shipbuilding practice as defined by ABS and USCG, and in compliance with all applicable regulatory requirements. The vessels shall be delivered to NYCDOT facilities complete and ready for 40 service in accordance with the Contract.

All provisions in the Technical Specifications apply to each vessel, unless otherwise noted.

The Technical Specifications and the accompanying plans are subject to detailed development by the Contractor. The Contractor shall develop the detailed design as necessary to construct the vessel and provide all certificates, documentation, labor, materials, equipment, tools, rigging, 45 staging, transportation, services, and supplies necessary to complete the work in accordance with these Technical Specifications.

Any material or parts, the omission of which would be detrimental to the seaworthiness or serviceability of the vessel, and the inclusion of which is generally accepted best modern shipbuilding practice as defined by ABS and USCG, shall be provided by the Contractor to the 50 satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and without increase in cost to the Owner, whether described in these Technical Specifications, shown on these plans, or otherwise.

Any information shown in one element of the Contract Documents, but not shown in another, shall be construed as equally present in all elements of the Contract Documents, not constituting an inconsistency. 55

It is the Contractor's clear responsibility to carefully review these Technical Specifications, the accompanying plans, and all required regulations. Furthermore, it is the Contractor's clear responsibility to accurately include in its bid, and to be responsible for, all work and costs associated with delivering a suitably constructed vessel in accordance with the Contract and References therein. 60

The intent and spirit of these Technical Specifications is that the Contractor shall deliver vessels that are demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Regulatory Bodies to be complete in all respects, fully certificated, and ready for the service intended. Vessel weight and speed are critical to the success of the vessel. It is imperative that the Contractor shall pay careful attention to Contract requirements. Each vessel shall be delivered to the NYCDOT Ferry 65 Maintenance Facility (FMF) in Staten Island, New York.

011 PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Length Overall 320'-0" Length on Design Load Waterline 308'-3 1/2" Beam, Molded 70'-0" Beam over Guards 70'-3" Depth at Main Deck at Side 21'-6"


- Page: 000-3

Draft to DLWL 13'-0" Displacement (molded) Subdivision 3,380 LT Displacement (molded) at DLWL 3,160 LT Light Ship Weight, Estimated 2,550 LT Gross Tonnage, Estimated 4,570 Tons Installed Horsepower 9,980 Fuel Oil Capacity (95%, approximate) 30,000 gal Minimum Seating Capacity 2,551 Minimum Passenger Capacity 4,500 Crew 16

The vessel is a diesel-powered, steel-hulled, double-ended ferry outfitted for year-round service in New York Harbor. The hull shall be transversely framed and constructed of all-welded steel.

Propulsion shall be provided by two (2) Voith Schneider Propellers (VSP), one (1) at each end of 70 the vessel. Each VSP shall be driven by two (2) diesel engines via a combining gear and conventional shaft lines. The vessel's electrical power requirements shall be met by three (3) diesel powered ship service diesel generators.

012 DEFINITIONS

Owner, NYCDOT These terms refer to the New York City Department of Transportation.

Owner's Representative

In Book 4 of this Contract, this term shall be used interchangeably with the term “Resident Engineer” as defined in Book 1of the Contract.

Contractor These terms refer to the individual, firm or corporation undertaking the execution of the work under the terms of the Contract.

Naval Architect This term refers to the Owner’s designer of record.

Regulatory Bodies This term refers to the appropriate ship classification society, agency and cognizant national and international maritime authorities, which have rules and regulations which may be applied to a vessel of this type, service, nationality, and size, including but not limited to USCG and ABS.

USCG United States Coast Guard

ABS American Bureau of Shipping

Contract Period Shall be as agreed to by the Contractor and the Owner but in no event shall it exceed 1460 days.

75


- Page: 000-4

030 CONTRACT

These Technical Specifications, Contract Drawings, and Contract Guidance Drawings referenced herein form a part of the complete Contract for construction of the vessels.

The shape of the hull shall conform to the Lines Plan, and all lines shall be carefully faired. Except for fairing, the Lines Plan (a Contract Drawing) shall not be deviated from without prior 80 written approval from the Owner's Representative.

The overall arrangements of the vessel shall conform to the Profiles and Arrangements drawing. The size and layout of spaces within the vessel, seating arrangements and other major features shown shall not be changed without written approval of the Owner's Representative.

The Contract Guidance Drawings are for guidance only. The Contract Guidance Drawings show 85 basic technical information, performance requirements, and features necessary for the Contractor to complete the detailed design and to develop and produce Working Drawings with the additional details required for construction and for approval of Regulatory Bodies and the Owner's Representative. They are not intended to show a completed and detailed design.

Contract Guidance Drawings are not intended to restrict the Contractor to the procedures and 90 details shown therein. Equivalent details and procedures, which may make use of more readily available material or permit the use of Contractor's standards or procedures of equal merit and quality, are acceptable. Such changes shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. Changes to major features, functionality, and materials shall not be made without written approval of the Owner's Representative. 95

Working Drawings as used herein include all drawings and documents required for the construction of the ship as listed on the Plan Schedule (Refer to Section 040.2). Working Drawings shall include all required installation drawings and documents even though prepared by a subcontractor or vendor.

The Contractor shall develop the Working Drawings as appropriate and as necessary for 100 construction using sources of information not available during contract design development including certified vendor drawings, templating from actual equipment, or using more detailed information provided by equipment vendors under contract to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall develop a 3D model of the vessel, showing all modeled components of the vessel including structure, piping and machinery, and outfit. The Contractor shall provide a 105 review copy of the model to the Owner's Representative. The review copy shall be updated on a bi-weekly basis throughout the project. A copy of the final 3D model shall be provided to the Owner at Substantial Completion of the third vessel.

Working Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. Working Drawings shall also be submitted to Regulatory Bodies for their review and approval in 110 accordance with Regulatory Body requirements. Any work undertaken in advance of the receipt of Owner or Regulatory Body approvals, shall be solely at the Contractor's own risk. Approval of any Working Drawing shall not constitute approval to deviate from these Technical


- Page: 000-5

Specifications or Contract Guidance Drawings, unless the deviation is specifically pointed out to the Owner's Representative and approval has been given in writing. 115

The Contractor’s book of class approved standard details and all production drawings, such as spools and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review.

System drawings are diagrammatic, the Contractor will be required to develop the systems and conduct its own interference survey. Machinery and equipment shall be arranged so that proper clearance for operating the vessel and performing repairs can be conveniently carried out. 120

The Contractor is cautioned to check and verify dimensions and sizes from the manufacturer's certified drawings or the actual machinery or equipment itself, to ensure that the customary growth in machinery or equipment size does not cause interferences. Large changes in equipment size that may significantly affect the arrangement of equipment must be promptly called to the attention of the Owner's Representative. All additional costs, both engineering and 125 production resulting from changes in equipment will be the Contractor's sole responsibility.

040 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

040.1 Details for Progress Schedule

Following Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall consult with the Owner's Representative and prepare a complete Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Book 1of the Contract. 130

The Progress Schedule shall sequence and schedule all Work detailed in the Contract Documents, in accordance with generally accepted practices for project management. The Progress Schedule shall be a time-phased/resource loaded Gantt Bar Chart. The Contractor shall:

Decompose the activities indicated in the Contract Documents, down to a sufficient number of discrete tasks, to adequately monitor construction and to 135 clearly report progress to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative for the duration of the Work.

Indicate by table or directly on the Gantt Bar Chart, the start and stop dates, free float, and total float for each task

Indicate, by table and by link lines, all predecessor and successor dependencies 140 for each task

Develop and clearly indicate the critical path throughout the project Identify long lead-time equipment and materials, such as VSPs, combining gears

and main engines, in the schedule The Contractor shall maintain an updated Progress Schedule. The updated Progress Schedule 145 shall reflect opened items, additional work, deleted work, and modifications, in addition to work progress and completions. The Progress Schedule shall additionally indicate the starting and completion dates for the following items for each vessel:

A. The Contract NTP date B. Construction Kick-off Meeting 150


- Page: 000-6

C. Commencement and completion of engineering D. Regulatory Body submittal dates for calculations and drawings E. Class Approval F. Long lead time purchase order submittals; anticipated date of delivery of all long lead

time equipment and components and all major equipment 155

G. Construction of the main hull erection jig H. Construction of the superstructure erection jig I. Module break and construction sequence plan J. Prefabrication, fabrication, assembly, and erection of all structural components K. Installation of major machinery components and packaged subassemblies: piping, VSPs, 160

mechanical, electrical, ventilating, coating, and outfitting systems installation L. Factory Shop Tests M. Builder's Trials N. Dock Trials O. Sea Trials (Contract Performance Trials) 165

P. Transit of the vessel from Contractor's Facility to Port of New York / New Jersey Q. Final Acceptance Trials R. Substantial Completion Survey S. Final Acceptance / Delivery to NYCDOT FMF

Review of the Progress Schedule by the Owner's Representative does not relieve the Contractor 170 of the responsibility to adjust labor force, equipment resources, or work schedule, as necessary, to anticipate and ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Period.

Ninety (90) calendar days prior to the scheduled departure of each vessel from the Contractor's facility for transit to NYCDOT FMF, the Contractor shall additionally prepare and submit an Open Task Report. The Open Task Report shall list all remaining open or uncompleted tasks, 175 status of each task, and estimated time to completion. The report shall also identify schedule risks and steps to mitigate for each task where applicable. The Contractor shall update and submit the Open Task Report at each subsequent bi-weekly production meeting, and then daily starting the first (1st) day of the last thirty (30) calendar days of the scheduled performance period. 180

040.2 Plan Schedule

Within thirty (30) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Plan Schedule of Working Drawings for review by the Owner's Representative. The Plan Schedule shall list all drawings and documents required for submittal in these Technical Specifications, Contract Drawings, and Contract Guidance Drawings and as required to meet all regulatory 185 approval requirements. The schedule shall be submitted as paper copy and electronically as an Excel spreadsheet. The Plan Schedule shall include the following:

A. A document number for each document listed


- Page: 000-7

B. The document title C. The scheduled date the document will be submitted by the Contractor for Owner approval 190

D. The scheduled date the document will be submitted by the Contractor for Regulatory Body approvals

E. Columns for recording the actual date of initial submittal, approval dates, and a column showing the current letter revision of each drawing. Include dates for revision and resubmittal if required. 195

F. A list of documents prepared by all subcontractors and vendors The Contractor shall revise and submit the Plan Schedule by the first of each month to show all changes, progress, and delays. Upon completion of the vessel and prior to delivery, the Contractor shall furnish a final copy of this schedule to the Owner's Representative.

040.3 Progress Monitoring 200

The Contractor shall monitor document and report progress to the Owner's Representative.

The Contractor shall schedule and chair bi-weekly (every two weeks) production meetings for attendance by the Owner's Representative, the Naval Architect, and the Contractor's production and engineering managers. The Contractor shall provide arrangements for remote meeting attendance via telephone and web conference (WebEx, GoToMeeting, or similar). 205

In addition, monthly progress review meetings shall be scheduled and held at the Contractor's facility, with the Contractor, Owner, Owner's Representative, and Naval Architect attending on site or via telephone and web conference as appropriate. Every third monthly meeting will be a quarterly meeting with maximum on-site participation from all parties required. ABS and USCG representatives shall be notified of and invited to quarterly meetings. 210

Contractor shall provide monthly updates of Buy American certification, inclusive of detailed, current status of contract percentages. (Refer to Book 3 of the Contract).

An updated Progress Schedule shall be presented to the Owner's Representative prior to each meeting. A Progress Report shall also be presented to the Owner's Representative prior to each meeting. Progress Reports shall indicate percentage of work complete, grouped by activity, in a 215 tabular form and list completed milestones. Progress Reports shall be made available to attendees in both paper and electronic formats.

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility at each meeting to call to the attention of the Owner's Representative any inconsistencies or perceived errors in the Contract Documents which have come to the attention of the Contractor and may need correction or may merit a 220 modification/change to the design, construction and/or testing of the vessel.

The Contractor's failure to call such matters to the attention of Owner's Representative at the time of discovery shall leave the Contractor with sole responsibility for the costs and schedule impacts of any necessary corrective actions, which must, nevertheless, be approved in advance in writing by Owner's Representative. Such notices shall be recorded in the meeting notes, and also 225 submitted to the Owner's Representative in accordance with the Contract. See Book 1.


- Page: 000-8

040.4 Buy America Compliance

The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the governing Buy America Requirements in accordance with Book 1 of the Contract. The Contractor shall monitor the Buy America compliance throughout the duration of the Contract. . 230

040.5 Material Substitutions

Names of manufacturers and items, where mentioned in these Technical Specifications and on the Contract Guidance Drawings as a means of describing the general character and quality of the design, and construction of the various items and articles, shall be understood as meaning the Owner's preference. Substitutions for such items must be of equivalent quality and must be 235 approved by the Owner's Representative in writing in advance of purchase.

An or equal product or material is one which exhibits the same general size, weight, characteristics, performance, reliability, and maintainability as the product or material identified in these Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for demonstrating the or-equal status of any product or material, which is offered as a substitute for those cited in 240 these Technical Specifications.

Requests for substitutions shall be made in writing to the Owner's Representative setting forth the reason for the proposed substitution and providing documented evidence of the substitute's equivalence or superiority to the specified product or material. The request shall also provide the Contractor's assurance that the substitution, if approved, will not result in any increase in the 245 Contract Price nor an extension of the delivery date of the vessel.

Requests for substitutions must include:

A. Regulatory Body approval (as applicable) B. Compliance with FTA Grant requirements (as applicable), such as Buy America

requirements 250

C. Construction to marine appropriate recognized standards (UL, IEEE, ANSI, ASTM, etc.) D. Comprehensive comparison of construction features, quality of fabrication, and materials

of construction between the specified item and the proposed item. Complete drawings and dimensional data shall be submitted for each item. The weight of each item shall be provided. 255

E. Comprehensive comparison of performance and functional characteristics between the specified item and the proposed item, including capacity, safety features, rated service duty life, maintenance life cycle and requirements.

F. Comprehensive list of impacts that the substitution will cause to arrangements, structure and interfacing of piping, ventilation, electrical, and control systems. 260

G. Location of nearest distributor stocking parts for the items and providing field service for the proposed substitution and the specified item.

H. Statement from Contractor indicating that the proposed substitution will not result in a price increase and will not extend the delivery date of the vessel.

Incomplete substitution requests will not be considered. 265


- Page: 000-9

Substitutions will be considered if based upon Contractor preference or familiarity with an item or equipment, provided it can be demonstrated that the item is equal (as defined above) to or better than the specified item. Substitutions for specified items that have been discontinued shall be for the current equivalent or better item from the same manufacturer.

The Owner's Representative will respond to written requests within fourteen (14) calendar days, 270 exclusive of Owner-recognized holidays, of the request and completed submittal of supporting documentation described herein. The decision by the Owner's Representative will be final, and the Contractor shall understand that requests will be rejected if they do not meet the qualification requirements defined above.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all engineering costs, construction costs and delays 275 associated with any Contractor requested substitution.

040.6 Purchase Order Technical Approval

Provide copies of all purchase orders (purchase orders may be unpriced) for materials and equipment over $25,000 and for all items listed in Table 1. The Contractor shall submit purchase orders to Owner's Representative for approval at least four weeks prior to placement of orders. 280 Purchase orders shall contain sufficient specific information, and supporting technical literature where necessary, for the Owner's Representative to evaluate and confirm compliance with all contract and technical specification requirements.

Table 1: Equipment Requiring Purchase Order Technical Approval

Alarm and monitoring system Hatches Air dryers and filters Heat exchangers Air horn & whistle HVAC equipment Air receivers Insulation Anchor, rode and winch/drum Interior hardware Batteries and chargers Interior outfitting (joinery, bulkheads,

lining, doors, ceilings, flooring, etc.) Bearings and glands Lavatory fixtures Boilers Level gauging systems Cable reel and towline Lifesaving equipment Capstans Lighting fixtures (all) Cast deck fittings Main engines Compressors Motors (all) Cu-Ni piping and fittings Patent pipe connectors Doors Piping insulation Drivetrain components (shafts, shaft brakes, couplings, bearings, combining gears)

Propulsion engines


- Page: 000-10

Alarm and monitoring system Hatches Electrical Cables and cable hangers Pumps (all) Electronic navigation aids and communications equipment, including antennae and transducers

Searchlights

Elevators Shore power connector Exhaust hangers Steel plates & shapes (copies of mill

certificates required when available) Exhaust silencers Steel pipe & fittings (copies of mill

certificates required when available) Fans and fan silencers Switchboard/power distribution

equipment (dist. Panels, transformers, motor controllers, etc.)

Filters and separators Tool boxes/cupboards/benches Fire detection/alarm system Valves and valve operators Fire suppression system (machinery space, Novec)

Vent heads

Floor coverings VSP's and controls Furnishings (seats, settees, lockers, etc.)

Windows

Generator sets 285

068 REFERENCES

068.1 Contract Drawings and Documents

The vessel shall be built in accordance with the documents listed below, which form part of these Technical Specifications. The order of precedence for these documents is the Technical Specifications, Contract Drawings, and then Contract Guidance Drawings. 290

The Contract Documents are intended to supplement each other. Items contained in one, but omitted from the other, are intended to be provided and installed by the Contractor.

Table 2: Contract Drawings

Document Number Title

14079-200-100-0 Lines Plan 14079-200-101-0 Profiles and Deck Arrangements

295


- Page: 000-11

Table 3: Contract Guidance Drawings


14079-200-101-3 Life Saving Equipment Arrangement 14079-200-101-4 Pilot House Arrangements 14079-200-101-5 EOS Arrangements 14079-200-101-7 Fire Zone Plan 14079-200-101-8 Emergency Evacuation Plan 14079-200-101-9 Passenger Capacity Plan 14079-200-110-1 Bottom and Side Shell 14079-200-110-2 Skeg 14079-200-120-1 Midship Section 14079-200-120-2 Inboard Structural Profile 14079-200-120-3 Hull Transverse Bulkheads 14079-200-120-4 Hull Transverse Frames 14079-200-120-5 Hull Longitudinal Bulkheads and Girders 14079-200-130-1 Tanks and Platforms 14079-200-130-2 Main Deck 14079-200-150-0 Superstructure Transverse Frames 14079-200-150-1 Exterior Bulkheads Main Deck to Saloon Deck 14079-200-150-2 Exterior Bulkheads Saloon Deck to Hurricane Deck 14079-200-150-3 Saloon Deck and Intermediate Deck 14079-200-150-4 Bridge Deck 14079-200-150-5 Hurricane Deck 14079-200-150-6 Main Deck and Intermediate Deck Interior Bulkheads 14079-200-150-7 Saloon Deck Interior Bulkheads 14079-200-150-8 Bridge Deck Interior Bulkheads 14079-200-150-9 Hurricane Deck House Structure 14079-200-151-1 Pilot House Structure 14079-200-162-1 Stack Plating and Frames 14079-200-170-1 Masts 14079-200-180-1 Main Machinery Foundations 14079-200-180-2 Propulsor Unit Foundations 14079-200-201-1 Machinery Arrangement 14079-200-243-1 Shaft Arrangement 14079-200-256-1 SW Cooling System Diagram 14079-200-256-2 FW Cooling System Diagram 14079-200-259-1 Exhaust Arrangement 14079-200-259-2 AUS Dosing System Diagram 14079-200-261-1 Fuel Oil Piping Diagram 14079-200-264-1 Lube Oil and Waste Oil Piping Diagram 14079-200-304-1 Cableway Arrangement 14079-200-320-1 AC Electrical One Line Diagram 14079-200-320-2 DC Electrical One Line Diagram 14079-200-321-1 Receptacle Plan


- Page: 000-12


14079-200-330-1 Vessel Operating, Emergency and Exterior Lighting 14079-200-422-1 Navigation Light Arrangement and Block Diagram 14079-200-422-2 Navigation Electronics Block and Deck Plans 14079-200-430-1 Interior Comms Arrangement and Block Diagram 14079-200-430-2 Vessel Network Topology Diagram 14079-200-439-1 CCTV Arrangements and Block Diagram 14079-200-506-1 Fills, Vents, and Sounds 14079-200-513-1 Machinery Ventilation Arrangement 14079-200-514-1 Accommodations HVAC Diagram 14079-200-520-1 Sea Chests 14079-200-521-1 Fire Main System Diagram 14079-200-526-1 Deck Drain Piping Diagram 14079-200-528-1 Sanitary Drains Diagram 14079-200-529-1 Bilge and Trim Piping Diagram 14079-200-529-2 Oily Water Piping Diagram 14079-200-530-1 Tempered Water Piping Diagram 14079-200-533-1 Potable and Sanitary Water Piping Diagram 14079-200-551-1 Compressed Air Piping Diagram 14079-200-558-1 Deck De-icing System Diagram 14079-200-581-1 Deck Machinery and Mooring Arrangement 14079-200-602-1 Vessel Drydocking and Hull Markings 14079-200-623-1 Machinery Space Ladders and Gratings 14079-200-623-2 Interior and Exterior Ladders Main Deck and Above 14079-200-624-1 Window Schedule 14079-200-624-2 Door Schedule 14079-200-624-3 Hatch Schedule 14079-200-625-1 Exterior and Interior Railings 14079-200-635-1 Thermal and Acoustic Insulation Plan 14079-200-640-1 Interior Furnishings and Outfit 14079-200-801-1 Weld Schedule

068.2 Intellectual Property Rights

In accordance with Book 1, Article 83 of the Contract, the design described by these Technical Specifications and the above listed drawings and documents are the property of NYCDOT, the 300 Department. They are assigned for use by the Contractor, its subcontractors, and agents for use in prosecution of the Work. They shall not be used in whole or in part for any other purpose. This restriction in use extends to design details developed by the Contractor, its subcontractors, or agents for use in the construction of the Vessels.


- Page: 000-13

070 REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 305

071 Overhead and Clearances

Minimum headroom in passenger spaces shall be 7 feet 0 inches, unless noted otherwise. Minimum headroom in spaces designated as crew only shall also be 7 feet 0 inches, unless noted otherwise. Deviations may be approved by the Owner's Representative on a case-by-case basis where this minimum headroom requirement is impractical. 310

072 Regulatory Requirements

The vessel shall be designed and classified to the requirements of ABS Rules for Classing Steel Vessels for Service on Rivers and Intracoastal Waterways. The vessel shall be assigned the following class notations by ABS: A1, Ferry Service, River Service, AMS notation. The vessel shall be inspected by the USCG as a Subchapter H passenger vessel. 315

Deliver the vessel to the Owner in a material condition ready to receive a valid USCG Certificate of Inspection (COI) for service as a Subchapter H passenger vessel. The COI shall allow the ferry to operate with at least 4,500 persons and 16 crew. The ferry shall be certified for operation in Lakes, Bays, and Sounds.

With the exception of the Owner's crew demonstrating familiarity with the vessel operation (i.e., 320 lifesaving and firefighting) the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for securing all regulatory approvals necessary for the vessel to enter passenger-carrying service as described above at Substantial Completion.

With the exception of documentation fees, all fees entailed in securing certificates, including associated inspection fees, and expenses of Regulatory Body inspectors, shall be paid by the 325 Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain and deliver all necessary certificates and classification reports for the vessel, including but not limited to:

Class certificates, interim and final

Hull and machinery certificates

USCG COI (as described above) 330

Stability letter

Certificate of admeasurement

Equipment safety certificates

FCC certificate

Rescue boat and raft certificates 335

Builder's certificate

Approval of all drawings required for submittal It is intended that the vessel be a part of the Underwater Inspection In Lieu of Drydocking (UWILD) Survey Program. The Contractor shall arrange for preliminary hull surveys and make hull markings and modifications which are required to gain vessel acceptance into the program, 340


- Page: 000-14

as described in 46 CFR115.615, NVIC 1-89, and the ABS Rules for Survey After Construction, and as directed by the USCG and ABS.

It is essential that the intent and specifics of the Passenger Vessel Accessibility Guidelines, as referenced below, are met throughout the completed vessel. The Contract Drawings and Contract Guidance Drawings have endeavored to address these requirements; however, there 345 may be specific instances where details have been inadvertently omitted. It is the Contractor's obligation to bring any omissions to the attention of the Owner's Representative and to deliver a vessel to the Owner that is in compliance. Specific Passenger Vessel Accessibility Guidelines concerns include, but are not limited to:

Elevator installation and access including size, turning radius, ramp slopes, control 350

Signage and emergency signals

Sanitary space access, turning radius, fixtures, grab bars, etc.

Passenger space access door sills, ramps, slopes and flats

Passenger space access door opening force

Hardware 355

Food service access, accessible tables

Wheelchair clearances – interior and exterior The applicable requirements of the various Regulatory Bodies and rules noted below, shall be complied with:

A. ABS: "Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels for Service on Rivers and 360 Intracoastal Waterways"

B. 46 CFR Subchapter H: "Rules for Small Passenger Vessels," other applicable CFRs, and USCG Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circulars (NVIC)

C. IEEE Standard No. 45: "Recommended Practice for Electrical Installations on Shipboard" 365

D. U.S. Public Health Service: "Handbook on Sanitation of Vessel Construction" E. World Health Organization F. Federal Communications Commission G. U.S. Access Board: Passenger Vessel Accessibility Guidelines

The ABS Rules and USCG regulations valid on the date the Contract is fully executed shall be 370 applied.

073 Vibration and Noise

The Contractor is cautioned to pay particular attention to the design and construction of the vessel in order to minimize vibration and airborne noise. The Contractor shall hire a noise and vibration consultant to perform predictions using a detailed analysis approach in an effort to meet 375 the vessel's noise and vibration limits provided in Table 4 and Table 5.


- Page: 000-15

A noise and vibration prediction report shall be created and shall identify baseline noise and vibration levels that result from pertinent excitations, as well as any potential excesses. If excesses are found, solutions shall be identified and implemented to meet the noise and vibration criteria with the approval of the Owner's Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. 380

The noise and vibration consultant shall perform inspections of critical noise control features at one or more points during vessel construction to ensure pertinent noise and vibration control features are properly installed.

During sea trials, the Contractor shall conduct noise and vibration surveys in all of the spaces listed in Table 4 and Table 5 and as described in Section 982. All HVAC equipment shall be 385 operating normally during the trials.

The vessel and all vessel components shall be free from excessive vibration. Vibration is excessive when it exceeds the explicit requirements given in Table 5, results in damage or clear potential damage to vessel structure, machinery, equipment, or systems, or interferes with the proper operation of the vessel or vessel components. Dangerous resonances at normal operating 390 speeds will not be allowed. The design speed of major machinery shall not be reduced to avoid resonances.

The vibration limits provided in Table 5 apply specifically to the deck of passenger and crew working spaces. Vibration criteria are an overall, frequency weighted root mean square (RMS) value that is summed between 1-80 Hz, in accordance with ISO 6954:2000. 395

The vessel's local structure outside of the spaces listed in Table 5 shall have a single frequency, peak response component, structural vibration velocity limit of 30 mm/s for structural response frequencies at or above 5 Hz. The Owner's Representative may, at his discretion, approve vibration velocities in excess of 30 mm/s if the Contractor can satisfactorily demonstrate that vibration velocities in excess of this limit will not result in fatigue cracking or other structural 400 damage.

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and correcting unsatisfactory vibration or noise conditions arising during tests or trials, or subsequently during the guarantee period, which can be attributed to the design or construction of those elements accomplished by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall completely fill all pipe stanchions in each of the propulsion rooms with 405 clean, dry, commercial grade fine sand. The Contractor shall apply a sound damping coating in the Propulsion Room as described in Section 635.4.

Table 4: Noise Limits

Space dB(A)

Main Deck Exterior Passenger Areas 80 Main Deck Stair Tower Frames 48-65, with all doors closed

75

Saloon and Bridge Deck Exterior Passenger Areas 75


- Page: 000-16

Space dB(A)

Main Deck Interior Passenger Seating Areas 70 Saloon Deck and Bridge Deck Interior Passenger Seating Areas

65

Pilot House 65 Officer's Dayroom and Crew Training Room 65 Locker Rooms, Main Deck and Above 70 Sanitary Spaces, Main Deck and Above 75 EOS and Locker Rooms and Sanitary Spaces in hold 75 Machinery Spaces 120

Table 5: Vibration Limits- Maximum Weighted RMS Level, 1-80 Hz per ISO 6954:2000 410 Space Vibration Velocity Limit

(mm/s)

Interior Passenger Areas 4 Exterior Passenger Areas 4 Pilot House 4 Interior Crew Spaces, Main Deck and Above

4

EOS 4

074 Welding

The Contractor shall submit welding procedures and a welding sequence to the Owner's Representative and Regulatory Bodies for approval prior to the start of construction. The welding sequence shall be designed to minimize distortion and locked-in stresses. 415

Welding procedure, size of electrode, type of electrode, current values, and details of welding and reinforcing shall be in accordance with standard practice as approved by the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code- Steel (D1.1), American Welding Society Structural Welding Code- Aluminum (D1.2), and ABS Rules for Materials and Welding, except where such requirements are exceeded by these Technical Specifications or Contract Guidance Drawings. 420 No deviation in the approved weld joint design or procedure will be permitted, without the concurrence of the Owner's Representative and the Regulatory Bodies prior to fabrication. All welding shall be performed by welders holding current ABS certification. Certificates shall be maintained during the Contract performance period.

Continuous welding is required in the fresh water tank, sewage tank, ballast tanks, oily water 425 tank, the waste oil tank, toilet/shower spaces, deckhouse boundary edges, Engine Room and Propulsion Room bilges (structure below the floor plate level) and similar spaces where


- Page: 000-17

intermittent welding would result in corrosion to the weld ends, edges, or faying surfaces of attached members.

Welding in areas exposed to the weather shall be continuous all around. Areas where welding 430 shall be continuous include curtain plates and all exterior exposed structure above the Main Deck including masts, visors, stacks and overhangs.

Fillet welds shall be wrapped around the ends of members, in weld relief locations, and around brackets to eliminate stress risers and corrosion points, and in accordance with ABS Rules.

Welds of poor quality, including cracked or cold tack welds, shall be removed by chipping or 435 grinding. Cold starts, weld cracks, crater cracks, and substandard defects shall be chipped out and repaired.

Errant arc strikes outside the area of permanent welds shall be avoided. The Contractor shall grind smooth any cracks or blemishes caused by errant arc strikes.

Peening or caulking of weld material will not be allowed, except as specifically approved by the 440 Owner's Representative and Regulatory Bodies. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from mill scale, excessive rust, moisture, grease, or other contaminants that would prevent proper welding.

Structural welding shall be carried out in such sequence as to compensate for creeping and shrinkage as the work progresses, keeping distortion within the fairness standards of the International Association of Classification Societies (IACS) Guide No. 47, Shipbuilding and 445 Repair Quality Standard. Special consideration shall be given for minimizing angular plate distortion between stiffeners by weld sequence, panel constraint during fabrication, and minimizing heat input.

076 Guarantee

The Contractor shall guarantee the hull, outfit, and machinery, including work of subcontractors, 450 against defects resulting from faulty material or poor workmanship that may become apparent within twelve (12) months from the date of Substantial Completion of the vessel in accordance with Book 1 of the Contract. The Contractor shall correct such defects at no cost to the Owner in accordance with the terms of the Contract.

For the first thirty (30) days after Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall at its sole risk and 455 expense, place a warranty engineer aboard the vessel for eight (8) hours per day, five (5) days per week. From the thirty-first (31st) day through three hundred sixty-five (365) days after delivery, the Contractor shall have a warranty engineer on call and ready to board the vessel within thirty (30) minutes of notice by NYCDOT.

078 Materials and Workmanship 460

Unless otherwise stated in these Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall supply the necessary labor, material, skill, and equipment required to complete the construction and testing of the vessel. All materials shall be new, of first quality, and of current manufacture, and compliant with ABS and USCG requirements.


- Page: 000-18

Materials used, and workmanship, shall be of the best description and quality throughout and of 465 adequate sizes to accomplish the intended purpose. The work, in every respect, shall be made under the supervision and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Regulatory Bodies.

Defects appearing at any stage of work shall be cause for rejection even though the item in question may have previously been passed as satisfactory. 470

Pipe materials and fittings shall be appropriate to their service type and as noted in the Contract Guidance Drawings. ABS and material certificates for all pipe materials and fittings shall be provided to the Owner and Regulatory Bodies.

Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Guidance Drawings, steel plates, shapes, and bars for use in the hull structure shall be ABS Grade A. ABS and material certificates for all steel shall be 475 provided to the Owner and Regulatory Bodies.

Aluminum material used shall be 5083 H321; extrusions shall be 6061 T6; weld filler wire shall be 5383; and aluminum materials shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM B928/928M. Mill certificates for the aluminum shall be provided to the Owner.

Plates intended for cold flanging shall be flanging quality where required by ABS requirements. 480

Brasses and bronzes shall be mixtures of virgin material of proper proportion for the purpose intended and shall be clean, smooth castings, uniform in texture and finish.

Galvanizing shall be done by the hot-dip process after hot work has been completed. Electro-galvanizing will not be accepted except for pre-manufactured items and as approved by Owner's Representative. Where galvanizing is damaged during construction, the Contractor shall repair 485 the galvanizing using hot stick or zinc-spray metalizing methods in accordance with ASTM A780. Zinc repairs shall be lead free.

Where fasteners, pipe, tube, sheet metal, or plates and shapes are described as being stainless steel, marine grade 300 series stainless steel shall be used in all cases. Fasteners, fluid piping, and hose fittings shall be 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. Piping and materials 490 used for exterior handrails and ladders shall be 316L stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. Where stainless steel is used and wire brushed, only non-ferrous wire brush materials shall be used.

079 Environmental Conditions

All vessel systems, structures, machinery, and outfit shall be capable of sustained operation 495 while subjected to the following conditions:

A. Permanent list of 10 degrees B. Permanent trim of 5 degrees C. Double amplitude roll of 30 degrees in a period of 10 seconds D. Double amplitude pitch of 10 degrees in a period of 5 seconds 500


- Page: 000-19

E. Worst case ambient air and seawater temperatures in Table 6

Table 6: Environmental Conditions

Parameter Units Summer Winter

Air Temperature DB (deg F) 105 -8 Relative Humidity (%) 80 - Seawater Temperature (deg F) 85 28

084 EQUIPMENT STORAGE 505

All equipment purchased by the Contractor for use in the construction of this vessel or Owner furnished shall be securely warehoused by the Contractor and segregated from other projects' equipment. As equipment arrives at the Contractor's facility, inventory and produce a receipt for all items. The Owner's Representative shall be provided access to stored equipment at any time upon his request. 510

The equipment shall be kept in a covered clean, dry environment and relatively constant temperature (less than 30-degree ± from a 70 degree ambient). Equipment requiring special handling by its manufacturer shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Generators shall be kept heated in storage and on board until the generators' integrated heaters can be kept in use. 515

The Contractor shall adequately protect all equipment from overspray of solvents, grit, water, paints, impact damage, and weld or cutting materials while in storage and on board. Temporary fire resistant covers or enclosures shall be placed over all equipment where overhead or adjacent hot work is being performed. Scaffolding or work platforms shall be placed over equipment where overhead work is being performed. In no case shall the Contractor use the installed 520 equipment to stand on or walk across for access overhead or beyond.

The Contractor shall immediately comply with all directives from the Owner's Representative to protect or improve protection of installed equipment and components from physical damage.

088 CARE OF VESSEL DURING CONSTRUCTION

The Contractor is solely responsible for the welfare of the vessel, equipment, and construction 525 materials until Substantial Completion is executed. The Contractor shall maintain the vessel and surrounding worksite in a manner suitable for safe, efficient construction in accordance with best modern shipbuilding practice and applicable regulations. All necessary measures shall be taken to minimize and prevent wear or deterioration due to installation, testing, weather, sunlight, water, dust, or moisture during construction. 530

The Contractor shall ensure that frequent cleaning of the vessel during construction to remove excess debris and components and interim cleanups are performed to maintain a housekeeping standard to the approval of the Owner's Representative.


- Page: 000-20

All joinery and finished surfaces, including equipment components and machinery, installed before delivery shall be protected from scuffs, damage, dirt or debris intrusion, and paint 535 overspray or drips by appropriate covers and shields to the approval of the Owner's Representative. Protective coverings include the use of fire blankets during welding and cutting operations, covering walkways and interior floor finishes with plastic or rubber matting, and fully wrapping equipment, decks, finished surfaces with plastic sheet prior to any painting in the space. The protective covers and shields shall be maintained in satisfactory order during the 540 remainder of construction and delivery and refreshed as needed. Any damaged or inadvertently coated finished surfaces or equipment finishes shall be restored to a like-new condition prior to delivery of the vessel. The Contractor shall remove any adhesive residue left after final removal of the protective covers or shields.

088.1 Fire Protection 545

During construction, flammable material shall not be stored on board the vessel in such a manner as to create a fire hazard. The Contractor shall exercise special care to prevent the possible outbreak of fire and perform periodic cleaning to minimize fire hazards. A pressurized fire system and hoses shall be available and maintained at the vessel construction site at all times.

Hot work shall comply with applicable regulations or orders of OSHA, the USCG and the local 550 fire department. Experienced supervisors shall be present during all hot work.

Where hot work (torch cutting, welding, grinding) is being carried out in the vicinity of combustible material a fire watch, whose sole purpose shall be to watch for fires and keep firefighting equipment on hand, shall be constantly on duty. Provide a fire watch on both sides of bulkheads or decks undergoing hot work. Fire watch personnel shall remain on duty in the 555 same space where hot work was performed for a period of at least 30 minutes after cessation of the hot work.

Spent or partially spent portable fire extinguishers shall be immediately replaced with fully charged extinguishers. The Contractor shall ensure that there are no open fires on or within 50 feet of the vessel at all times while in custody of the Contractor. 560

088.2 Hull Protection

The Contractor shall maintain rigid control of welding and grounding for the protection of the hull, its systems and appendages during the entire time the vessel is in the custody of the Contractor.

091 INSPECTION 565

During construction, and any time prior to the delivery and acceptance, the Owner's inspectors and representatives, and inspectors of Regulatory Bodies, shall be given free access to the Contractor's facility for the purpose of inspecting work and materials. The inspectors and representatives will have the authority to reject any material or workmanship that does not conform to the requirements of these Technical Specifications. 570


- Page: 000-21

Provision shall be made for the Owner's Representative to witness all Regulatory Body Inspections. The Owner's Representative shall be notified of all scheduled ABS, USCG, or other regulatory inspections at least one (1) day in advance.

096 WEIGHT CONTROL PROGRAM

Vessel weight is critical for this project and the ability of the vessel to perform satisfactorily. 575 The Contractor shall not change the structural sizes, exceed the scantlings, or increase the pipe sizes and wall thicknesses described by the Technical Specifications and Contract Guidance Drawings unless demonstrated by the Contractor to be necessary for the suitability of the vessel for its service. Scantlings shall be kept to a reasonable minimum size for foundations, floor plate supports, and other details developed by the Contractor. 580

Within sixty (60) days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Weight Control Plan to the Owner's Representative for review. The Weight Control Plan shall fully describe the Contractor's procedures for monitoring and controlling the changes to the vessel's estimated weight and center of gravity as the construction proceeds during the contract period. The Weight Control Plan shall provide for monthly submittal of weight control reports to the Owner's 585 Representative citing any deviations from the Weight Estimate and recommended corrective actions.

Within ninety (90) days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall prepare a Builder's Weight Estimate and submit it to the Owner's Representative for review. The weight estimate shall consist of a detailed listing of all weights and their centers of gravity, organized by SWBS 590 category to facilitate comparison with the Naval Architect's Weight Estimate. The maximum vessel light ship weight, incorporating all margins shall be clearly identified. Weight data shall include the actual weights and centers of gravity of all items, including operating fluids and similar materials relating to normal operation of machinery. In cases where accurate data are not available, the Contractor shall estimate the weight and center of gravity. 595

After receiving the Contractor's weight estimate, the Owner's Representative will release the Naval Architect's Weight Estimate to the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for bringing disparities to the attention of the Owner's Representative. Disparities between the Naval Architect's Weight Estimate and the Builder's Weight Estimate shall be reconciled through interaction between the Owner's Representative and the Contractor. 600

The Contractor shall incorporate agreed upon changes to the Builder's Weight Estimate, and submit to the Owner's Representative for Approval. Upon final approval, the Builder's Weight Estimate shall establish the approved maximum light ship weight, and the Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the vessel within the limit of the approved maximum light ship weight. The Approved Builder's Weight Estimate will be the basis for weight damages as described in 605 Book 1 of the Contract.

Throughout the construction period, the Contractor shall monitor the actual weight of equipment and materials against the reconciled weight estimate. The Builder's Weight Estimate shall be updated and resubmitted monthly. The Contractor shall provide an As-Built Weight Estimate at completion of construction that is based on the ongoing Builder's Weight Estimate. 610


- Page: 000-22

099 DIGITAL IMAGES

The Contractor shall submit a set of at least 36 digital images in JPEG format every two (2) weeks during the construction period, illustrating work progress. With the submittal provide a digital image file index describing the date, subject, and location corresponding to each file name. Provide the file index and digital image files as a USB drive to the Owner's 615 Representative. Clearly label the USB drive with the date of submittal.


Page: 100-1

GROUP 100 - HULL STRUCTURE

100 GENERAL 2 100.1 References 2 100.2 General 3 100.3 Steel Construction 3 5 100.4 Testing and Inspection 6

110 HULL 6 110.1 Shell Plating and Keel 6 110.2 Skegs 7 110.3 Stanchions 7 10 110.4 Frames 7

120 HULL STRUCTURAL BULKHEADS 7 125 TANKS AND VOIDS 8 130 HULL DECKS 8 150 SUPERSTRUCTURE 8 15

150.1 Access and Layout 8 150.2 Superstructure Bulkheads 8 150.3 Superstructure Decks 9

151 DECKHOUSE AND PILOT HOUSE 9 170 STACK 9 20

171 MASTS 9 171.1 Navigation Masts 9 171.2 Flagpoles 9 172.3 Sight Staffs 10

180 FOUNDATIONS 10 25

180.1 General 10 180.2 Main Machinery Foundations 11 180.3 Voith Schneider Propeller Foundations 11

30


Page: 100-2

100 GENERAL

100.1 References

Table 100 - 1: List of References - Structural

Reference Document Number Title

(1A) 14079-200-100-0 Lines Plan (1B) 14079-200-101-0 Profiles and Arrangements (1C) 14079-200-101-3 Life Saving Equipment Arrangement (1D) 14079-200-101-4 Pilot House Arrangement (1E) 14079-200-101-5 EOS Arrangement (1F) 14079-200-101-7 Fire Zone Plan (1G) 14079-200-101-8 Emergency Evacuation Plan (1H) 14079-200-110-1 Bottom and Side Shell (1I) 14079-200-110-2 Skeg (1J) 14079-200-120-1 Midship Section (1K) 14079-200-120-2 Inboard Structural Profile (1L) 14079-200-120-3 Hull Transverse Bulkheads (1M) 14079-200-120-4 Hull Transverse Frames (1N) 14079-200-120-5 Hull Longitudinal Bulkheads and Girders (1O) 14079-200-120-6 Miscellaneous Tanks (1P) 14079-200-130-1 Tanks and Platforms (1Q) 14079-200-130-2 Main Deck (1R) 14079-200-150-0 Superstructure Transverse Frames (1S) 14079-200-150-1 Exterior Bulkheads Main Deck to Saloon Deck (1T) 14079-200-150-2 Exterior Bulkheads Saloon Deck to Hurricane Deck (1U) 14079-200-150-3 Saloon Deck and Intermediate Deck (1V) 14079-200-150-4 Bridge Deck (1W) 14079-200-150-5 Hurricane Deck (1X) 14079-200-150-6 Main Deck and Intermediate Deck Interior Bulkheads (1Y) 14079-200-150-7 Saloon Deck Interior Bulkheads (1Z) 14079-200-150-8 Bridge Deck Interior Bulkheads (1AA) 14079-200-150-9 Hurricane Deck House Structure (1BB) 14079-200-150-10 Pilot House Structure (1CC) 14079-200-162-1 Stack Plating and Frames (1DD) 14079-200-170-1 Masts (1EE) 14079-200-180-1 Main Machinery Foundations (1FF) 14079-200-180-2 Propulsor Unit Foundations (1GG) 14079-200-624-3 Hatch Schedule


Page: 100-3


(1HH) 14079-200-801-1 Weld Schedule (1II) N/A ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels for

Service on Rivers and Intracoastal Waterways (1JJ) N/A IACS Guide No. 47, Shipbuilding and Repair Quality

Standard (1KK) N/A NVIC 9-97 CH-1, Guide to Structural Fire Protection

100.2 General 35

This section outlines the general steel construction requirements for the vessel. This section is intended to provide guidance, along with the referenced Contract and Contract Guidance Drawings and all required regulations, for the development of a detailed structural design package for the vessel.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all structural alignment, connections, interaction, 40 clearances, and the proper design and construction of all structural components of the vessel in accordance with ABS Rules (1II) and the International Association of Classification Societies (IACS) Guide (1JJ).

100.3 Steel Construction

General Requirements 45

The structural arrangement and scantlings reflected on the Contract Guidance Drawings have been developed in accordance with ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels for Service on Rivers and Intracoastal Waterways, Reference (1II), and in some cases increased above the minimum requirement. Specific requirements and scantlings are detailed in References (1H) through (1HH). Scantlings shall not deviate from those shown on the Contract 50 Guidance Drawings, except as approved in writing by the Owner's Representative.

Structural details and scantlings developed by the Contractor shall be in accordance with Reference (1II) and (1JJ) and shall result in vessel structure that meets the noise and vibration limits of Section 073. Dimensional tolerance, fit, alignment, general workmanship, and finish of new structure shall be in accordance with References (1II) and (1JJ). 55

The hull shall be transversely framed on 24-inch centers and of all welded construction. All materials shall be in accordance with ABS Rules. Welding procedures shall be in accordance with ABS Rules and with Groups 000 and 900 of these Technical Specifications and shall be approved by ABS.

The Contractor shall develop detailed construction drawings. Changes may be required from the 60 structure shown on the Contract Guidance Drawings. The Contractor shall bring such changes to the attention of the Owner's Representative for review and comment. The Contractor is responsible for any drawings, calculations, resolution of interferences, and Regulatory Body


Page: 100-4

approvals which may be associated with changes generated by detailed drawings or other changes proposed by the Contractor. 65

Install brackets, chocks, and clips as required to develop the full strength of the members shown on the Contract Guidance Drawings. All brackets, chocks, and clips shall be in accordance with ABS Rules.

Maintain longitudinal strength by ensuring continuity of main, fore and aft members including the Main Deck, bottom, and deck girders, longitudinal bulkheads, and the shell plating. When 70 cuts or interruptions impair the continuous strength of a main structural member, efficient means of compensation shall be fitted to restore continuity. Cuts in main longitudinal structure and compensation details are subject to approval by the Owner's Representative and ABS.

Care shall be taken to obtain good alignment of structural members, particularly where such members oppose each other on opposite sides of bulkheads or decks. In such cases, 75 misalignment exceeding half the thickness of the thicker member shall be considered cause for rejection. Where discontinuities of structure are unavoidable, suitable brackets or other reinforcement shall be installed and brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative.

The Contractor shall complete the detailed joint design and develop weld procedures and the weld schedule to construct the ship in accordance with References (1II) and (1JJ) and in 80 accordance with Group 000 of these Technical Specifications. Welding processes, sequences, and practices shall be designed, planned, and executed to minimize distortion and locked in stress.

The Contractor shall submit weld procedures to the Owner's Representative and ABS for approval before work commences. No deviation in weld joint design or procedure will be 85 permitted without the approval of the Owner's Representative and the ABS prior to fabrication. All welding shall be performed by welders holding current ABS certification. Certificates shall be maintained during the Contract performance period.

All burning of notches and holes in the structure shall be carefully laid out and shall be regular in outline with jagged edges removed and with rounded corners. Semicircular weld reliefs shall be 90 provided in framing members in way of passing welded seams or butts in the attached plating.

Efficient means of compensation shall be fitted where necessary to provide holes for passage of wiring, piping, or ventilation in important structural members. In general, if such holes remove more than 30 percent of the depth of the web of a member and/or if they are unfavorably located away from the neutral axis of the combined section, reinforcement will be required. Openings in 95 structural members shall be cut as near to the neutral axis of the combined section as possible. Opening details are subject to approval by the Owner's Representative and ABS.

All sharp or ragged edges or corners of structure shall be removed, ground smooth, sniped, or radiused. Grind smooth weld spatter. Break edges on all structural shapes cutouts, weld reliefs, and free plate edges to facilitate coating adherence. 100


Page: 100-5

All new and disturbed penetrations of fire boundaries shall be collared and insulated on both sides of the fire boundary and at all penetration intersections, and as otherwise necessary to meet the requirements of References (1II), (1JJ), and (1KK) .

Where reinforcement is required in way of penetrations of decks, shell, bulkheads or framing members, the use of doubler plates shall be avoided in favor of insert plates or reinforcing rings. 105 Wherever insert plates are used, rounded corners with a radius of not less than 4 inches shall be provided. Insert plate edges shall be tapered in thickness at a minimum 1:4 ratio in accordance with (1JJ) to minimize abrupt plate thickness changes.

All openings in the shell, decks, and structural bulkheads shall be well rounded. Under no circumstances shall square-cornered cuts be made in the vessel's structure. Where it is desired to 110 have a tight corner for installation of a prefabricated door frame or similar, provide a cut radius centered at the corner of the frame to prevent crack formation and remove the stress concentration. Install collars as needed to maintain the required level of fire rating and fume tightness of the boundary.

Coamings installed in the way of deck cuts shall be welded continuously in way of radii. No 115 cuts shall be allowed in the flanges of structural members without approved compensation for strength.

Direct attachment of fittings to oil-tight structure shall be by welding only.

Temporary Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary shoring, stiffening, or other intended means of 120 load distribution as required to adequately support the vessel's structure during construction such as where sub modules or assemblies have not been fully completed and require interim support.

Provide adequate support or constraint for plating during assembly and welding to minimize distortion.

Where hull modules, components, foundations, and other structural members are prefabricated in 125 a shop or assembly area, they shall be well-supported and stiffened as necessary, to avoid buckled surfaces or other objectionable irregularities. Fitting prefabricated structures to the vessel shall employ a proven and documented welding sequence to avoid warping and stress concentrations.

Clips, lugs, temporary handling fittings, and padeyes used for erection purposes shall be 130 removed, as work progresses, in such a fashion so as not to damage plating or other structural members. All pitting, gouging or other damage exceeding the allowable imperfection limits in Reference (1JJ) resulting from improper removal shall be repaired by welding and grinding.

In the fabrication and erection of hull structure, discontinuities, undercutting, notches or other mechanical damage that might initiate or propagate cracks in the structure shall be eliminated or 135 repaired.


Page: 100-6

Fairness Requirements

Plating for bulkheads, shell plating, decks, and plate structural members shall meet the fairness standards of Reference (1JJ). Distortion of completed assemblies that exceeds the fairness standards of Reference (1JJ) shall be brought within the fairness standard at no additional cost to 140 the Owner. Methods used to remedy the unfairness shall be to the approval of ABS and the Owner's Representative.

The Owner requires a delivered vessel that is not only structurally sound, but which is also aesthetically pleasing. It is emphasized that good welding and paint are no substitute for fair plate work as defined above. Coverings, fillers, etc., shall not be used to mask unfair plate. Plate 145 in all areas will be inspected and measured for unfairness by the Owner's Representative during all stages of the construction process and are subject to rejection. The Contractor must be fully aware that repairs to bring plate within tolerances specified in Reference (1JJ), including the removal and replacement of interferences (such as insulation) and coatings which may be damaged during the repair process are to the Contractor's account. 150

100.4 Testing and Inspection

All structure shall be built to the requirements of ABS and the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with Reference (1II) and to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and ABS. The Contractor shall perform Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) using a method mutually agreeable to the Owner's 155 Representative, Contractor, and ABS. Weld acceptance standards shall be in accordance with Reference (1II).

In addition to the required amount and location of NDT specified by ABS, the Contractor shall provide additional NDT inspection for major machinery foundations including the propulsor, main engine, gear, and generator foundations. The extent and location of NDT on the 160 foundations shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and ABS. Approximately twenty (20) additional checkpoints beyond the ABS minimum requirements are anticipated for the foundations.

The final quantity and locations of NDT checkpoints are contingent upon the observed assembly quality. Additional NDT shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. If any non-165 conforming welds are found, the Contractor shall repair and retest until passed at no additional cost to the Owner.

All necessary certificates and/or documents covering the approval and indicating compliance as a result of the contracted work shall be obtained by the Contractor and provided to the Owner's Representative. 170

110 HULL

110.1 Shell Plating and Keel

The thickness of plating shall be as shown in Reference (1H). Maintain the boundaries of differing plate thickness as shown. Locate seams and butts to suit the Contractor's standard practice, and in accordance with these Technical Specifications. Avoid four-way joint 175


Page: 100-7

intersections where practicable. Compensate for shell openings with insert plates with radiused corners.

The Contractor shall fabricate a center vertical keel (CVK) from flat steel plate per Reference (1K). The CVK shall be continuously welded the full length of the ship and of continuous construction throughout at least the middle 40% of vessel length. 180

The CVK shall be oil/watertight where it intersects any transverse oil tight or watertight boundaries.

110.2 Skegs

The skegs shall be fabricated of boxed plate construction generally as shown on Contract Guidance Plans. The skeg shall be an appendage to the hull structure and shall fit up to the flat 185 plate keel as shown on Reference (1I).

The Contractor shall also provide two (2) foil-shaped skegs for directional stability, one (1) to be installed at each end of the vessel as shown on References (1I) and (1K). The skegs shall be constructed in a similar fashion to a spade rudder with internal framing.

Each skeg shall be fitted with bronze fill and drain plugs in stainless half couplings, located to 190 allow for complete drainage of the skeg in dry dock, regardless of the heel or trim of the vessel.

The skegs shall be pressure tested after the completion of fabrication.

The interior surfaces of the skegs shall be coated to the maximum extent practicable with a regulatory approved, float-coat, rust-preventative coating system.

110.3 Stanchions 195

Stanchions shall be provided as shown in References (1M) and (1N). Stanchions shall be constructed of steel pipe.

Hull stanchions shall be fitted at both the top and bottom with sole plates, and the associated girders or plating to which they are attached, shall be reinforced with sufficient bracketing to provide full support. Stanchions shall be welded in place unless the Owner's Representative 200 specifically approves bolting.

110.4 Frames

The Contractor shall detail, layout, and construct frames as shown in the Contract Guidance Drawings. Frames shall be efficiently bracketed to deck beams, girders, and floors where required. 205

120 HULL STRUCTURAL BULKHEADS

The Contractor shall detail, layout, and construct transverse and longitudinal bulkheads in accordance with References (1L) and (1N). Special strengthening shall be used in way of the skegs and girders supporting deck machinery. Double continuous welding shall be used on the perimeter of the hull bulkheads. 210


Page: 100-8

125 TANKS AND VOIDS

Tanks shall be constructed as indicated on References (1L), (1N), and (1O). All welds on tank structure shall be double continuous throughout.

All tank sections, bilges, and spaces shall be accessible for cleaning, painting, and inspection. Access shall be planned, sized, and arranged per References (1B) and (1GG) and Regulatory 215 Body requirements.

Provide limber and vent holes, 1 1/2 inch radius minimum, as necessary, to ensure proper venting and drainage of tanks, compartments, pockets, and voids. Tanks shall have adequate limber holes and vent holes for full capacity flow to suction and vent lines.

130 HULL DECKS 220

The Contractor shall detail, layout, and construct hull decks in accordance with References (1P) and (1Q).

The Contractor shall install insert plates with well radiused corners and provide headers under machinery, heavy equipment, fittings, and fixtures. Design and provide under deck strengthening as required and as shown on the Contract Guidance Drawings. 225

Deck beams shall be either slotted through bulkheads and girders, or bracketed each side in way of tight bulkheads to develop the full strength of the beams through the intersection.

Use flush welds where practicable for deck plating. Remaining weld crown height shall be compatible with the application of deck coverings and not cause visible discontinuity in the finished covering surface. Weld crown shall not exceed the depth of the deck underlayment 230 screed in the vicinity of the weld. Weather Decks, and interior decks in way of wet spaces, shall be continuously welded and proven watertight prior to the installation of any deck or bulkhead covering.

150 SUPERSTRUCTURE

150.1 Access and Layout 235

All points of access to the superstructure, including side doors and bulwark gates shall be compatible with the Owner's facilities and as approved by the Owner's Representative. The bulwark gate shall be compatible with the shore-side gangway with details of interface to be provided by the Owner's Representative.

150.2 Superstructure Bulkheads 240

The Contractor shall detail, layout, and construct superstructure transverse and longitudinal bulkheads in accordance with References (1R), (1S), (1T), (1X), (1Y), (1Z), (1AA), and (1BB) . Interior bulkhead corners shall incorporate radiused corner joinery details for exposed outside corners. Provide a 3-inch radius corner at the outboard bulkhead at Frame 52 on the Bridge Deck as indicated on Reference (1Z). 245


Page: 100-9

150.3 Superstructure Decks

The Contractor shall detail, layout, and construct superstructure decks in accordance with References (1R), (1U), (1V), (1W), and (1BB). Arrange deck stiffeners to align with girders or other stiffeners or brackets to develop full section at the stiffener ends or intersections.

Use flush welds where practicable for interior deck plating which will have deck coverings. 250 Remaining weld crown height shall be compatible with the application of deck coverings and not cause visible discontinuity in the finished covering surface. Weld crown shall not exceed the depth of the deck underlayment screed in the vicinity of the weld. Weather decks, and interior decks in way of wet spaces, shall be continuously welded and proven watertight prior to the installation of any deck or bulkhead covering. 255

151 DECKHOUSE AND PILOT HOUSE

Detail, layout and fabricate the deckhouse, Pilot House, deck erections, and sub-division bulkheads generally as shown in References (1AA) and (1BB).

Corners of openings for doors, ladders, etc. shall be radiused to reduce stress concentrations. Compensation shall be fitted in way of large openings as required, to maintain strength. 260

Non-structural steel bulkheads shall be at least 3/16 inch plate, suitably stiffened.

170 STACK

The Contractor shall detail, layout, and build a stack as shown on the Contract Guidance Drawings. Louvers shall be installed as described in Section 512.

Stack structure shall be adequately supported during assembly and welding to minimize 265 distortion, and bulges. After fabrication, any distortion shall be worked out of the side plate and welded joints ground so that the exterior surfaces are smooth and fair within the standards of Reference (1JJ).

171 MASTS

171.1 Navigation Masts 270

The Contractor shall design and build masts, complete with light, radar, and antenna foundations, per Reference (1DD).

171.2 Flagpoles

The Contractor shall provide and install two (2) aluminum flag poles, located amidships port and starboard, as shown on Reference (1B). Each flagpole shall have a high quality halyard system, 275 complete with a non-fouling, rotating flagpole truck, nylon or Delrin halyard sheaves, cleats, and all fittings required for a good working installation. Halyards shall be 5/16 inch diameter braided nylon or Dacron with bronze snap hooks spliced at each end. Flagpoles shall have hinged bases with removable bracing to allow easy lowering of the flagpoles to the deck for maintenance. Isolate aluminum flag poles from steel supporting structure to prevent corrosion. 280


Page: 100-10

172.3 Sight Staffs

The Contractor shall design, provide, and install two (2) aluminum Pilot House sight staffs. One sight staff shall be mounted in front of each Pilot House, generally where shown On Reference (1B). Mount each staff on a steel mounting base that is welded to the ship's structure. Galvanically isolate the staff from the mounting base. Sight staff arrangement and details shall 285 be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to fabrication.

180 FOUNDATIONS

180.1 General

Design and provide foundations for all machinery and equipment not detailed on the Contract Guidance Plans. The Contractor shall design, layout, and install machinery foundations that 290 conform to manufacturer-furnished certified installation drawings.

Prepare detailed drawings for all foundations. Submit main propulsion, combining gear, and shafting foundation drawings to ABS for approval. Submit foundation details supporting equipment over 200 pounds to the Owner's Representative for review and comments.

Provide appropriate support structure (brackets, etc.) for all equipment, such as electrical panels 295 and instrumentation, regardless of weight. Incorporate containment coamings into foundations around all equipment where oil leakage may occur.

Foundation design shall provide adequate strength to support and maintain alignment of the mounted equipment while operating under maximum loads. Loadings to be considered in design of foundations include the weight of equipment, weight of fluids, dynamic loadings induced by 300 equipment in operation, weights of supported ancillary components and/or systems (e.g., wiring, piping, control equipment, safety shields) and ship motions.

Foundations shall be adequately supported by and braced to the vessel's structural members so that equipment loadings are properly distributed. Provide additional structural support members, headers and chocks as required. Foundations shall not be attached directly to unsupported plate. 305

Design of foundations shall provide for alignment and such other special criteria as may be specified by the equipment manufacturer or ABS. Design of foundations shall permit equipment access as required, and access for maintenance of foundations and adjacent hull structure. Equipment shall be removable without cutting foundations or attachments.

Avoid pockets and inaccessible places where corrosion cannot be controlled or where dirt and 310 debris can accumulate. Foundations shall incorporate suitable supports to prevent excessive or unusual vibration, or vibration that causes excesses of the vessel's noise and vibration requirements provided in Section 073, under the normal range of vessel operating conditions.

Welding of all foundations in bilges, below machinery space gratings, or exposed to weather shall be continuous. 315

The Contractor shall either fully enclose all Weather Deck foundations or permit unrestricted access to all surfaces for maintenance. Enclosed foundations shall be fitted with drain plugs.


Page: 100-11

180.2 Main Machinery Foundations

The Contractor shall layout and install foundations for main machinery generally as shown in Reference (1EE) and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Detailed 320 foundation design drawings and mounting details shall be submitted to the equipment manufacturers, Owner's Representative and ABS for approval prior to construction.

Main engine, combining gear, fluid coupling, and generator set foundations shall be efficiently transitioned to the adjacent hull structure. Brackets shall be installed at every frame except where such brackets interfere with the bolting arrangements. Additional gussets shall be 325 installed under the mounts. Main engine and combining gear foundations shall be double continuous welded.

180.3 Voith Schneider Propeller Foundations

The Contractor shall layout and install foundations for each Voith Schneider Propeller (VSP) per References (1FF) and (1H), and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 330 Detailed foundation design drawings and mounting details shall be submitted to the manufacturer, Owner's Representative and ABS for approval prior to construction.

Welding of the VSP foundations shall be double continuous. Final machining of the foundations, or installation of a pre-machined bolting ring, shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and under direct supervision of a manufacturer's 335 representative.


Page: 200-1

GROUP 200 - MAIN PROPULSION

200 GENERAL 3 200.1 References 3 200.2 General 3 5 200.3 Vibration and Noise Control 4 200.4 Machinery Arrangement 4 200.5 Installation 6 200.6 Propulsion System Integrator 7

233 MAIN ENGINES 8 10

241 COMBINING GEARS 12 242 FLUID COUPLINGS 14

242.1 General 14 242.2 Coupling Oil Tanks 15

243 SHAFTING 16 15

243.1 Torsional Couplings 16 243.2 Curved Tooth Couplings 16 243.3 Line Shafts 16 243.4 Shaft Couplings 17 243.5 Shaft Bearings 17 20 243.6 Bulkhead Seals 17 243.7 Shaft Locking and Turning Devices 17

245 VOITH SCHNEIDER PROPELLERS OR APPROVED EQUAL 18 252 PROPULSION CONTROL SYSTEM 21

252.1 General 21 25 252.2 Control System Functions 21 252.3 Control Stations 23 252.4 Control Transfer 25 252.5 Emergency Stop 25

256 MACHINERY COOLING SYSTEMS 25 30

256.1 Seawater Cooling System 25 256.2 Fresh Water Cooling Systems 26 256.3 Heat Exchangers 27 256.4 Jacket Water Heaters 28

259 EXHAUST SYSTEMS 28 35

259.1 General 28 259.2 Main Engine Exhaust 29 259.3 Generator Exhaust 29 259.4 Exhaust Insulation 29 259.5 AUS Dosing System 29 40

261 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 31 261.1 General 31 261.2 Fuel Oil Service System 31 261.3 Fuel Oil Transfer System 32

264 LUBE OIL AND WASTE OIL SYSTEMS 32 45

264.1 General 32


Page: 200-2

264.2 Engine Lube Oil Service Systems 33 264.3 VSP or Approved Equal Lube Oil Service System 33 264.4 Combining Gear Lube Oil Service System 33 264.5 Lube Oil Storage and Transfer System 33 50 264.6 VSP or Approved Equal Lube Oil Storage Tanks 35 264.7 Waste Oil System 35


Page: 200-3

200 GENERAL

200.1 References 55

Table 200 - 1: List of References - Propulsion


(2A) 14079-200-201-1 Machinery Arrangement (2B) 14079-200-243-1 Shaft Arrangement (2C) 14079-200-256-1 SW Cooling Piping Diagram (2D) 14079-200-256-2 FW Cooling Diagram (2E) 14079-200-259-1 Exhaust Arrangement (2F) 14079-200-259-2 AUS Dosing System Diagram (2G) 14079-200-261-1 Fuel Oil Piping Diagram (2H) 14079-200-264-1 Lube Oil and Waste Oil Piping Diagram (2I) 14079-200-101-5 EOS Arrangement (2J) 14079-200-506-1 Fills, Vents, and Sounds Diagram (2K) 14079-200-520-1 Sea Chests (2L) 14079-200-150-3 Saloon Deck and Intermediate Deck (2M) 14079-200-101-4 Pilot House Arrangement (2N) 14079-200-180-1 Main Machinery Foundations

200.2 General

This section describes requirements for the vessel's main propulsion system and supporting auxiliary systems. Supporting auxiliary systems for other fuel oil consumers including 60 generators and boilers are also described herein as are general machinery arrangement requirements.

The propulsion system is a double-ended, Voith Schneider Propeller (VSP) design or approved equal. Propulsion shall be provided by two (2) VSPs or approved equal, one (1) at each end of the vessel. Each VSP or approved equal shall be driven by two (2) diesel engines via a 65 combining gear, conventional shaft lines, and supporting systems.

Machinery, equipment, and installation shall meet the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies, the requirements listed below, and the general requirements of Section 500 as applicable. Refer to Section 180 for machinery foundation requirements. Each engine and piece of equipment shall be installed, aligned, and fastened within the tolerances prescribed by the manufacturer. 70

Insofar as practicable, similar items of machinery and equipment such as electric motors, starters, controllers, and distribution panels shall be supplied by a single manufacturer for spare parts interchangeability.


Page: 200-4

200.3 Vibration and Noise Control

General 75

Machinery and equipment selections, mounting details and acoustic treatments have been selected to minimize vibration in the equipment and the vessel, and to meet the noise and vibration requirements of Section 073. The propulsion engines shall be isolation mounted as described in Section 233. The generator sets shall be isolation mounted as specified in Section 310. All diesel engine exhausts shall be resiliently mounted as discussed in Section 259. 80

Where necessary to achieve the noise and vibration requirements of Section 073, other machinery shall be isolated from the hull with vibration isolating mounts. All isolated equipment shall incorporate appropriate resilient connections, which may include piping, electrical cables, grounding straps, ducting, and exhaust.

Where the Contractor is responsible for equipment or machinery selection, foundation design or 85 equipment mounting, the Contractor shall ensure that the design and installation minimizes structure-borne and airborne noise, such that the noise limits of Section 073 are not exceeded.

Propulsion System

The Contractor shall perform a complete propulsion system vibration analysis, including torsional and lateral (whirling) vibration and solid body dynamic motion, and submit the analysis 90 and findings to ABS, the Owner's Representative, and each drivetrain component supplier for approval prior to finalizing the system arrangement and start of component fabrication. Approval from each drivetrain component supplier shall include confirmation of the mass and elastic strain data used in the analysis, and confirmation that the findings are within acceptable limits. 95

The propulsion train shall be free from excessive torsional, longitudinal, and flexural vibrations throughout the full range of engine operating speeds in accordance with ABS Rules. The Contractor shall modify the shafting arrangement as necessary to eliminate serious torsional, flexural, and longitudinal vibrations within the normal operating range of the propulsion system. Barred speed ranges within the normal operating speeds of the engine shall be unacceptable, as 100 will raising the idle or lowering the maximum continuous rpm to avoid barred speeds.

200.4 Machinery Arrangement

The Contractor shall design and arrange the Engine Room machinery as shown in Reference (2A).

Machinery shall be installed to allow easy access for operation, maintenance, and disassembly. 105 Strainers, pump packing glands, lubrication fittings, and other items that require regular service shall be readily accessible. Adequate air space shall be allowed around machinery for cooling air circulation. The final location of all machinery shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative.

Obstructions or interferences shall be avoided where possible. The Contractor shall pay 110 particular attention to sharp edges, corners, or protruding appendages of equipment or structure


Page: 200-5

where operating personnel are likely to pass or work. Such obstructions, if unavoidable, shall be provided with guards or other means to protect personnel from injury.

Insofar as practicable, machinery layout shall allow an unobstructed path for removal of major machinery items. To facilitate future machinery removal and reinstallation, route all wiring, and 115 piping in the Engine Room overhead clear of machinery removal hatches.

A drip pan with a threaded drain plug shall be installed under each generator, and piece of rotating machinery that contains oil. The main engine foundations shall form an integral sump below each engine. Refer to Section 500.3 for additional details.

Where jacking bolt or other fixtures are installed to align equipment, such fixtures shall be left in 120 place for future use during maintenance provided doing so would not interfere with safe operation of the equipment or present a hazard to personnel.

Provision shall be made for lifting and maintaining all major components of the main and auxiliary machinery including main engines, VSPs or approved equals, combining gears, generators, motors, pump casings, and bearings. 125

The Contractor shall design, layout and install up to fifty (50) padeyes for equipment removal and maintenance. The padeyes shall be sized and located so that all items of equipment too heavy to lift by hand for maintenance can be tended by one or more padeyes.

Padeyes shall be mounted to primary structure (underlying beams or girders) wherever possible. The capacity of each padeye shall be permanently and prominently labeled. Hoisting padeye 130 holes shall be smooth bored by punching or drilling. Permanently label each padeye, identifying it's design capacity. Where padeyes are located on structure covered with structural fire insulation, they shall extend below the insulation and provided with a removable insulation muff to maintain the fire boundary when not in use.

In addition, the Contractor shall fabricate and install rails and provide lifting devices for 135 servicing and rebuilding the main engines, combining gears and generators in accordance with manufacturer guidelines, and generally shown on Reference (2A). A lifting rail for each VSP or approved equal shall be incorporated into the Saloon Deck structure as shown on Reference (2L).

One additional lifting rail shall be installed in the machinery casing, above the engine room maintenance access door on the main deck, arranged to facilitate lifting engine room components 140 to the main deck level for removal from the vessel.

The Contractor shall develop an Equipment Lifting Plan Arrangement and Details Drawing showing equipment maintenance paths and all padeye and lifting rail locations along with their design ratings. Submit the drawing and supporting calculations to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to fabricating and installing lifting fixtures. Refer to Section 640.7 for Engine 145 Room outfit. The Owner's representative shall approve all maintenance paths.


Page: 200-6

200.5 Installation

The main propulsion machinery shall be installed and aligned within the tolerances prescribed by the manufacturers and in accordance with ABS requirements. Installation and alignment shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and the equipment manufacturer's 150 representatives. The Contractor shall engage the services of manufacturers' representatives to attend this process, along with start-up and sea trials.

An alignment procedure shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval at least 30 days prior to the start of shafting system installation. A description of the intended setup procedures, alignment offsets, alignment equipment to be used, component maximum tolerances, 155 maximum expected engine movements, inspection hold points, and hot and cold loads shall be included in the Contractor's alignment procedure.

Each bulkhead seal and shaft bearing assembly shall be initially aligned using laser or optical alignment systems in accordance with the approved procedure. Shafting shall be final aligned using the strain gauge method. 160

All major machinery shall be installed, all welding of vessel primary structure and superstructure completed, and the vessel shall be afloat with no list or trim, at light operating draft prior to final alignment. Alignment shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative and shall be subject to Owner approval. Final bearing reactions and influence number shall be provided to the Owner's Representative. 165

Alignment results will be reviewed by the Owner's Representative and approved by the manufacturer's representative prior to pouring Chockfast or installing alignment dowels. The contractor shall perform a final alignment check after all chocking is complete and alignment dowels are installed. Include the final readings and approvals with comments as part of the vessel's permanent records. 170

Each main engine shall be mounted on engine manufacturer supplied resilient mounts. Install the engine and mounts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Shim the engines at each resilient mount using Chockfast Orange or equal. Submit design and load calculations for the poured resin chocks to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the building of chocking dams. 175

Each drainable fluid coupling shall be aligned using steel shims or a manufacturer and Owner's Representative approved alternative. Final sizing of all hold down bolts is to be determined according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Mount each combining gear with adjustable steel chocks, Vibracon SM or equal. Final sizing of all hold down bolts is to be determined according to the manufacturer's instructions. 180

Collision chocks are also to be fabricated and installed on all combining gears. The chocks shall allow for thermal growth according to manufacturer's guidelines, but prevent unwanted fore/aft and transverse movement of the propulsion machinery.


Page: 200-7

Each shaft bearing shall be mounted and aligned using adjustable chocks, Vibracon SM or equal. After alignment is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, fitted bolts or 185 dowels shall be installed to maintain alignment.

Upon completion of the installation, strain gauges shall remain in place and protected against damage using rubberized tape.

All piping connections to the main engines are to be made with USCG-approved flexible connections. Flexible connections shall have sufficient flexibility to accommodate the full range 190 of engine motion. The Contractor shall supply all flexible connections required for the engine installation. Refer to Group 500 for details.

The engines shall not be barred over or started for the first time without the prior approval and on-scene presence of the Owner's Representative and the manufacturer's technical representative. Refer to Section 982 for test and trial requirements. 195

200.6 Propulsion System Integrator

The Contractor shall provide a dedicated Propulsion System Integrator (PSI) for the project. The PSI shall be solely responsible for managing, coordinating, and performing design integration, analyses, installation, alignment, testing, documentation, and orientation for all aspects of the propulsion system, and shall ensure that the requirements of each component manufacture are 200 met. The PSI shall attend all propulsion related progress meetings and shall also be responsible for obtaining regulatory body certifications for the propulsion system's primary machinery and equipment components and the final integration of the propulsion system.

Prior to commencing work on the propulsion system, the PSI shall schedule a propulsion system kick-off meeting to establish roles, responsibilities, interface requirements, frequency of 205 subsequent meetings and communication protocols between the various propulsion equipment manufacturers and PSI. Representatives from propulsion equipment manufacturers (to include VSP or approved equal, engine, couplings, gear, propulsion control, and alarm and monitoring systems) and the Owner’s Representative shall be in attendance. Subsequent progress meetings shall be held on a periodic basis as required to coordinate detail design and installation of the 210 propulsion system.

The PSI shall prepare regular progress reports summarizing the status of propulsion system development, integration, and installation. Progress reports shall note current, upcoming, and recently completed propulsion system tasks, and shall describe known issues and risks along with actions to address or mitigate them. Progress reports shall be submitted to the Owner's 215 Representative on a bi-weekly basis.

The PSI shall be a qualified management representative, with a demonstrated successful history of providing propulsion integration services on marine installations classed by ABS, DNV, or LR. The Contractor shall provide qualifications and experience of the PSI for approval by the Owner's Representative prior to the commencement of construction. 220


Page: 200-8

233 MAIN ENGINES

Furnish and install four (4) two-stroke turbocharged/after cooled engines meeting EPA Tier 4 emissions standards with a continuous rating of 2,495 bhp @ 750 rpm, EMD 12 ME23B or approved equal. The engines shall be provided with all necessary documentation to demonstrate compliance with MARPOL Annex VI and EPA emissions requirements. The engines shall burn 225 ultra-low sulfur No. 2 diesel fuel.

All engines shall have Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) standard (counterclockwise when viewed from flywheel end) rotation.

Engines shall be configured for air start, electronic injection, heat exchanger cooled high and low temperature cooling circuits, and engine-driven auxiliary fresh water and seawater pumps. The 230 engines shall be designed, constructed, tested, and approved in accordance with ABS requirements.

Engines will use manufacturer furnished isolation mounts. The isolation system shall be designed to sufficiently minimize vibration transfer to the vessel and allow the vessel to meet the noise and vibration requirements in Section 073. All piping, exhaust, electrical, and propulsion 235 shafting connections to the engine will be resilient and properly designed to sufficiently minimize vibration transfer to the vessel while also allowing for normal movement while the vessel is underway and the machinery is operating. Resilient components not provided by the vendor shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

Each engine shall be furnished with all necessary features, equipment, and accessories necessary 240 for a complete installation including:

Wide flange, half-heavy flywheel. Final flywheel selection is subject to approval by torsional vibration analysis, refer to Section 243.

Marine deep sump oil pan. ABS crankshaft. 245

Electronic fuel injection and engine control system with associated engine control modules and required accessories.

Two (2) local control panels (LEP & Engine Control) designed for local engine control and monitoring of the engine with local display readouts, alarm annunciation, local start/stop controls, local/remote operation switch, emergency stop pushbutton, local speed 250 control, pre-lube and soak-back control with 24 VDC control voltage. Panels will be supplied loose with harness between the two panels for installation and termination by the Contractor.

One (1) low lube oil level switch for alarm only condition. Pressure relief hand hole covers with top deck covers and latches. 255

One (1) engine mounted and driven fuel oil pump. One (1) engine mounted duplex fuel oil filter. One (1) fuel oil manifold including anti-flood valve.


Page: 200-9

Engine mounted and driven lube oil system for main circulation, piston-cooling circulation, and scavenging service. 260

One (1) engine mounted and driven jacket water pump. One (1) engine mounted and driven aftercooler system water pump. One (1) engine mounted and driven seawater pump. Complete separate circuit after cooler system, components mounted on engine or

accessory rack. 265

Individual cylinder compression relief valves. Exhaust manifold with heat shield drilled and tapped to accept exhaust temperature

thermocouples. Main bearing and exhaust thermocouples with two-foot wire leads. Contractor is

responsible for terminating into the local engine panel. 270

Exhaust thermocouple wire trays, shipped loose. Crankcase pressure detector for alarm and shutdown. One (1) marine turbocharger with inlet screen. One (1) turbo exhaust adapter, 90° aft configuration, with inlet matching the EMD turbo

flange or approved equal and 22 in ANSI flanged outlet. 275

One (1) turbocharger priming/soak-back filter, shipped loose. One (1) turbocharger priming/post lube (soak-back) pump assembly, driven by a 230/460

VAC/3-phase/ 60 Hz electric motor, shipped loose. One (1) pre-lube pump assembly with 230/460 VAC/3-phase/60 Hz electric motor,

shipped loose. 280

One (1) air intake filter assembly designed utilizing the standard EMD or approved equal, dry type replaceable element filter elements, shipped loose.

Flywheel guards One (1) AMOT thermostatic control valve for aftercooling system, shipped loose. One (1) set of marine vibration isolating resilient mounts, Christie & Grey TSC-T3 or 285

engine manufacturer and Owners' Representative approved equal, with associated adapters and hardware for mounting engine.

Engine accessories mounted on an EMD or approved equal standard accessory rack and interconnected with preformed pipe and tube assemblies. The accessory rack will be mounted in line with the engine at the free end, and interconnected with the engine. The 290 following components will be delivered mounted and pre-piped on the rack:

o SCR Module o One (1) lube oil filter o One (1) lube oil cooler o One (1) automatic fresh water temperature regulating (AMOT) valve for jacket 295

water cooling system


Page: 200-10

o One (1) triplex fuel oil filter o One (1) electric fuel priming pump o Dial thermometers for fresh water and lube oil inlet and outlet temperatures o Alarm sensors for high fresh water and high lube oil temperature to be used for 300

alarm/shutdown signals to the engine control panel o Accessory rack to be configured for rigid installation with a resiliently mounted

engine, with appropriate flexible connections provided between the rack and engine

Complete lube oil, fuel oil and water piping between accessory rack and the engine. 305

Mounting kits for engine and accessory rack. Air start assembly, including an air starting motor (TDI T115-60075-01R-1-F3 or equal),

air start relay valve (TDI PN RLVA-25683-001-2-01 or equal), regulator (TDI PN 3-30327-002), strainer, shut off valve and associated piping and hoses. Air starters shall be mounted on the right bank of each engine. 310

Complete exhaust after treatment system as required for compliance with EPA Tier 4, including:

o SCR Module (mounted on accessory rack) o AUS/DEF Mixing Tube o DEF Dosing Cabinet 315

o Terminal cabinets, terminal boxes, and wiring harnesses o AUS/DEF transfer pump skids (two (2) per vessel), including transfer pump,

filter, pressure regulator, valving, tank return and motor controls mounted on a common skid with integrated drip pan.

Removable exhaust manifold insulation blankets, minimum 2" thickness, covering the 320 entire exhaust chambers including legs and belly, expansion joints, turbo outlet adapter, and flexible bellows downstream of adapter.

Removable insulation blankets, minimum 2" thickness, for mixing tube and SCR module. Gasket and bolt sets for turbo outlet/exhaust adapter, mixing tube and SCR flanges. One (1) stainless steel multi-ply laminate type flexible bellows, for installation between 325

the turbo exhaust adapter and mixing tube. A flow direction arrow shall be permanently marked on the expansion joint.

Barring device, Ingersoll-Rand T480, driven by compressed air, with four-way valve, pendant control and 30 feet of hose. Shipped loose to be installed by Contractor.

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 200 - 2 with the 330 main engines and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. Quantities listed in Table 200 - 2 are per vessel.

Table 200 - 2: Main engine ABS recommended and operationally required parts

Qty Item


Page: 200-11

Qty Item

2 Power Pack, Fork 2 Power Pack, Blade 4 Container, Metal Storage, Power Pack 6 Fuel Injector, EUI with Fuel Line Assy 4 Power Pack Installation Gasket Kit 4 Cylinder Head Gasket Kit 4 Cylinder Test Valve Assy with CRV Seal 8 Exhaust Valve Bridge Assy 4 Cylinder Head Seat Ring 4 Cylinder Head Crab Bolt 4 Cylinder Head Crab Bolt Nut 4 Piston Cooling Oil P-Pipe Tube Assy 2 Connecting Rod Bearing Shell (Upper) 2 Connecting Rod Bearing Shell (Lower) 48 Handhole Cover Handwheel Gasket 48 Handhole Cover Gasket 4 Seal Cylinder Head Cover 24 Air Intake Filter Element 44 Lube Oil and Soakback Filter Element 4 Lube Oil Filter Cover O-Ring Seal 4 Soakback Filter Cover O-Ring Seal 12 Turbocharger Filter Element with Seal (Spin-On) 16 Fuel Filter Element with Seal (Spin-On) 12 Fuel Strainer Element (30 Micron) with Seal 4 Air Starter Motor (Turbine) - LH Engine 2 Jacket Water Pump (HT - RB) - LH Engine 2 Aftercooling Water Pump (LT - LB) - LH Engine 4 Water Pump Mounting Gasket 4 Water Pump Outlet O-Ring Seal (RB) 8 Elbows to Water Drain Pipe Gasket 8 Water Pump Outlet Pipe Gasket 8 Flange Gasket 4 Water Pump Inlet Gasket (RB) 4 Water Pump Inlet Gasket (LB) 2 Lube Oil Pump 2 Fuel Pump


Page: 200-12

Qty Item

3 Sensor (Fuel, Coolant and Lube Oil Temperature) 2 Sensor (Air Box and Air Inlet Temperature) 4 Sensor (Coolant and Lube Oil Pressure) 3 Sensor (Fuel and Lube Oil Pressure) 1 Sensor (Crankcase Pressure) 1 Sensor (Air Box Pressure) 1 Sensor TRS 1 Sensor SRS 1 Mag Pick-up 16 SCR cassettes 4 Dosing Nozzle 1 Nox sensors 1 Flexible Exhaust Coupling 2 DEF transfer pump 1 DEF float/level indicators

Provide one (1) complete set of special tools (per vessel) as required for main engine operation 335 and maintenance. Special tools are any non-commercial tools, repair appliances, test equipment, diagnostic computers and software, or specialized adaptors, which do not conform to ANSI or other internationally recognized standards. Diagnostic computers or software shall include software updates for the duration of the warranty.

Pilot House and EOS controls, instrumentation, and alarms for the engines shall be as described 340 in Sections 252 and 436.

241 COMBINING GEARS

The Contractor shall furnish and install two (2) marine combining gears, Lufkin CSQ11800 or equal. The combining gears shall be designed, constructed, and certified in accordance with ABS requirements. Each gear shall be furnished with all necessary features, equipment, and 345 accessories necessary for a complete installation including:

1:1 gear ratio Design rating of 5000 hp, unrestricted service. Two (2) parallel input shafts each offset 59 inches outboard of the output shaft, for a total

horizontal offset of 118 inches between input shafts. Each input shaft shall be rated for 350 an input power of 2,500 hp at 750 rpm. 160 mm input shaft end, machined to suit the curved tooth coupling.

Single output shaft, centered between input shafts, 170 mm output shaft diameter, finish machined to match shaft coupling.


Page: 200-13

Double helical pinion, bull, and idler gears 355

Anti-friction roller bearings mounted in removable carriers mounted on all shafts Integral lube oil system including, but not limited to:

o Two (2) gear driven lube oil pumps, one (1) per input shaft, to provide lubrication o One (1) duplex filter with 40 micron elements and transfer valve o One (1) oil sampling valve 360

o Local gauges and thermometers o One (1) oil cooler for seawater cooling with 90/10 Cu-Ni tubes, floating 90/10

Cu-Ni tube sheets, removable tube bundles, bronze end bells, and zinc anodes fitted in inlet heads. The cooler shall be suitable for a maximum cooling water temperature of 85 F 365

o .Thermostatic oil temperature control valve, AMOT or equal o Standby lube oil pump, electric, with 15HP 460V/3-phase/60Hz electric motor,

mounted on combining gear o One (1) temperature switch o One (1) pressure switch, high oil pressure auxiliary pump stop 370

o One (1) pressure switch low oil pressure auxiliary pump start o One (1) pressure transmitter 4-20ma output o One (1) oil temperature transmitter 4-20ma output

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required gear parts listed in Table 200 - 3 and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. Quantities listed in Table 200 - 3 are per 375 vessel.

Table 200 - 3: Combining gear ABS recommended and operationally required parts

Qty Item

1 Bearing set, complete 1 Seal set, complete 1 Pump coupling 1 Pump set, one (1) of each shaft driven 1 Auxiliary pump including motor and coupling 1 Gasket Set 1 A-B Low oil pressure switch 1 A-B High oil pressure switch 1 A-B High oil temperature switch 2 Complete Filter Sets

Provide one (1) complete set of special tools per vessel as required for gear operation and maintenance. Special tools are any non-commercial tools, repair appliances, test equipment, or 380


Page: 200-14

specialized adaptors, which do not conform to ANSI or other internationally recognized standards.

242 FLUID COUPLINGS

242.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish and install four (4) fluid couplings, Voith Turbo1150 TPZSL or 385 approved equal. The fluid couplings shall be designed, constructed, and certified in accordance with ABS requirements.

Each coupling shall have the following capabilities:

Design rating of 2,500 HP at 750 RPM, under continuous operation. Drainable fluid coupling design, providing no-load engine startup and timed coupling 390

filling (engagement). The coupling fill rate shall allow driveline startup with one engine online. The final fill rate shall be determined during detail design, in consultation with the VSP or approved equal, engine, and coupling manufacturers.

The fluid coupling shall be capable of supporting continuous full speed operation with one of two engines on a driveline shut down, while drained, with the output side of the 395 drained coupling driven by the combining gear.

Filling /draining of the coupling shall be controlled from the ship's propulsion control system, refer to Section 252.

All couplings shall be driven by engines with Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) standard rotation (counterclockwise when facing flywheel). 400

Each coupling shall be furnished with all necessary features, equipment, and accessories necessary for a complete installation including:

Complete integral oil system including, but not limited to: o One (1) gear driven oil pump for coupling filling, cooling, and bearing lubrication o One (1) oil cooler for seawater cooling with 90/10 Cu-Ni tubes, floating 90/10 405

Cu-Ni tube sheets, removable tube bundles, bronze end bells, and zinc anodes fitted in inlet heads. The cooler shall be suitable for a maximum cooling water temperature of 85 F

o Thermostatic oil temperature control valve with oil cooler bypass to maintain oil o Electrically operated oil control valve 410

o One (1) duplex lube oil filter with transfer valve o One (1) differential pressure switch, filter change alarm o One (1) pressure switch, VTC On/Off signal o One (1) pressure switch, low lube oil pressure o One (1) pressure switch, filling/standby pump start 415

o One (1) temperature switch, high lube oil temperature o One (1) pressure transducer, remote coupling oil pressure indication


Page: 200-15

o One (1) temperature transducer, remote coupling oil temperature indication o Local gauges and thermometers o Piping, valves and fittings as required 420

One (1) electric oil filling/standby pump, with 7.5 HP 460V/3-phase/60Hz electric motor, pumps arranged for vertical installation, shipped loose

Input shaft, 180mm, machined to match Centa coupling mating flange Output shaft, 180mm, machined to suit SBG 140 curved tooth coupling flange.

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 200 - 4 with the 425 fluid couplings and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. Quantities listed in Table 200 - 4 are per vessel.

Table 200 - 4: Fluid Coupling ABS recommended and operationally required parts

Qty Item

1 Complete bearing set 1 Complete set of removable seals 1 Complete set of temperature & pressure gauges, sensors, and seals 1 Control Valve 4 Complete filter sets 1 Main oil pump 1 Filling/standby oil pump

The contractor shall install each coupling in strict accordance with the manufacturer's 430 requirements. Provide and install piping between the fluid coupling, filling/standby pumps, and coupling oil tank in accordance with coupling requirements. Fill each fluid coupling with oil meeting the manufacturer's specifications. All lubricants are subject to manufacturer and Owner's Representative approval.

242.2 Coupling Oil Tanks 435

Provide and install a Coupling Oil Tank with a capacity of 400 gallons below each fluid coupling. The tank shall be integrated with the main machinery foundations, see Reference (2N). Each sump shall have all features required for interface with the fluid couplings, including but not limited to those listed in Error! Reference source not found.Table 200 - 5.

Table 200 - 5: Coupling Oil Tank Features 440 Qty Item

1 Sounding tube 1 Inspection and access manhole 1 Vent with flame screen, terminating in engine room 1 Tank level sensor, low level, refer to Section 436


Page: 200-16

Qty Item

1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with threaded pipe plug 1 10" (DN 250) flanged connection for coupling drain 2 4" (DN 100) flanged connections for main and stand by pump oil supply 1 3" (DN 80) flanged connection for oil return

Arrange all coupling oil tanks and tank fittings in accordance with coupling manufacturer requirements and regulatory requirements.

243 SHAFTING

The Contractor shall detail design, provide, and install two (2) complete shafting systems as 445 described herein and as shown on Reference (2B). Shafting dimensions and coupling selections shown on Reference (2B) are described herein are preliminary and may change subject to development of the detail design and results of the Contractor's propulsion system vibration analysis and 6 degree of freedom dynamic solid body motion calculations of the engines. Refer to Section 200.3. 450

243.1 Torsional Couplings

Provide and install four (4) torsional coupling and flexible shaft assemblies between each main engine flywheel and fixed propulsion shafting as shown in Reference (2B). Each coupling shall consist of a torsional coupling configured for direct mounting to the engine flywheel, a flexible intermediate shaft assembly, and an output flange sized to fit the input shaft of the fluid coupling. 455

Final torsional coupling and element stiffness shall be selected to suit the torsional characteristics of the shafting system. The coupling assembly shall be suitably flexible to compensate for axial, radial, and angular misalignment due to engine operation on resilient mounts. Calculated reaction forces shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations for the engines or other connected equipment. 460

243.2 Curved Tooth Couplings

Provide and install curved tooth coupling assemblies, where noted in Reference (2B). The curved tooth couplings shall be Renk SBG or equal. The couplings shall be designed, manufactured, and certified in accordance with ABS requirements. The curved tooth couplings installed at the VSP or approved equal shall be Renk SBG 180 or equal manufactured to Voith 465 specifications. Curved tooth couplings between the fluid couplings and combining gears shall be Renk SBG 140 or equal with mating flanges machined to suit the connecting shafts of mating equipment.

243.3 Line Shafts

Shafting shall be steel. All propulsion shafting shall be ABS certified and stamped. 470

Shaft concentricity, surface finish, and other applicable manufacturing details shall be in accordance with the tolerances and limits contained in Mechanical Standard Drawing NAVSHIPS No. 803-2145807 – Propulsion Shafting and Components. Where manufacturers of


Page: 200-17

couplings, seals, bearings, and other shafting system components recommend more stringent manufacturing standards and tolerances in way of connections to their components, these more 475 stringent recommendations shall apply.

243.4 Shaft Couplings

Provide, and install a hydraulic coupling assembly, SKF OKC 170, Voith HYCON S 170 or approved equal, between the reduction gear output and first line shaft segment, and at each connection between shaft segments. Couplings shall be designed and certified in accordance 480 with ABS requirements.

One (1) hand pump shall be provided with the vessel for removal and installation of the couplings.

243.5 Shaft Bearings

Provide, locate, and install split roller bearings, Craft Bearing, or equal, as shown on Reference 485 (2B) and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The bearings shall be factory drilled for installation of resistance temperature detectors (RTD) sensors. The Contractor shall provide the RTD sensors required for remote temperature monitoring, refer to Section 430. Provide one (1) additional bearing cartridge and one (1) RTD sensor with the vessel and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. 490

243.6 Bulkhead Seals

Where the propulsion shafting passes through a watertight bulkhead, an effective bulkhead seal shall be provided and installed.

Where line shaft bearings are located at a watertight bulkhead, the bearing shall be flange mounted and fitted with a lip seal on the front face of the bearing to maintain the watertight 495 integrity of the bulkhead.

Elsewhere bulkhead seals assemblies, Wartsila Floodguard or equal, shall be provided and installed. The bulkhead seals shall be fully split for ease of installation and replacement with the line shaft in place, self-aligning, and capable of automatically sealing the bulkhead in the event of flooding on either side of the bulkhead at all shaft speeds. The seals shall not require 500 lubrication or cooling, nor utilize packing. Tapered dowels shall be provided where removable bulkhead seal housings are fastened to bulkheads to ensure proper realignment of the seals upon reinstallation. Provide one (1) additional bulkhead seal assembly with the vessel and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative

243.7 Shaft Locking and Turning Devices 505

Provide and install shaft locking and turning devices where shown on Reference (2B).

The shaft locking devices installed on the main shaft lines shall be Dellner Brakes STL system model SKD 100 or equal, capable of preventing shaft and VSP or approved equal rotation at speeds up the design speed of the vessel. Shaft turning devices installed on the main shaft lines shall be capable of rotating the full shaft line (including the VSP or approved equal, shaft and 510 combining gears) when both engines are disengaged from the driveline.


Page: 200-18

The status (engaged/disengaged) of each shaft turning and locking device shall be indicated in the ship's alarm and monitoring system. Control interlocks shall be provided such that fluid couplings cannot be filled when turning or locking devices are in use.

245 VOITH SCHNEIDER PROPELLERS OR APPROVED EQUAL 515

The Contractor shall provide and install two (2) Voith Schneider Propellers, VSP 36R6 ECS/285-2 or approved equal. The VSPs or approved equals shall be designed, constructed and certified in accordance with ABS requirements and provided with all required approvals and certificates. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 520

Each propeller shall be provided with all required features and accessories including, but not limited to the following:

Input shaft rotated 22.5 degrees down from horizontal, input rotation clockwise when facing VSP or approved equal input shaft

Complete, integral lube oil system to include: 525

o VSP or approved equal mounted and driven main lube oil pump o Stand-by lube oil pump, electrically driven with 480V/3-phase/60Hz TEFC motor o One (1) oil cooler for seawater cooling with 90/10 Cu-Ni tubes, floating 90/10

Cu-Ni tube sheets, removable tube bundles, bronze end bells, and zinc anodes fitted in inlet heads. The cooler shall be suitable for a maximum cooling water 530 temperature of 85 F

o Duplex lube oil filter o Elevated oil expansion tank o Electric filling pump

Complete, integral control oil system to include: 535

o VSP or approved equal mounted and driven main control oil pump o Stand-by control oil pump, electrically driven with 480V/F3-phase/60Hz TEFC

motor o Control oil valve block o Control oil cooler, for seawater cooling with 90/10 Cu-Ni tubes and tube sheets 540

and bronze bonnets suitable for a maximum cooling water temperature of 85°F o Duplex control oil filter

Automatic blade seal greasing system Propulsion Control System as described in Section 252 Local gauges and thermometers 545

Process connection and sensors for monitoring all required parameters, including lube oil pressure, lube oil temperature, control oil pressure, control oil temperature, rotor oil pressure, and rotor rpm.


Page: 200-19

Process connections and sensors for alarming all required parameters, including lube oil pressure, lube oil temperatures, lube oil head tank level, lube oil filter differential 550 pressure, control oil pressure, control oil temperature, control oil level, control oil filter differential pressure, rotor oil pressure, input speed sensor, lack of control response.

Cathodic protection anodes provided with VSP's or approved equal shall be the same material as those provided for the hull.

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 200 - 6 with the 555 propellers and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. The parts listed in Table 200 - 6 shall be provided with the first vessel only.

Table 200 - 6: VSP or Approved Equal ABS Recommended and operationally required

parts

Qty Item

1 Blade (Dwg No. 111011) 6 End Cap (Dwg No. 111012) 24 Blade Gland Rings (Dwg No. 111020) 12 Upper Blade Bearings (Dwg No. 111030) 12 Lower Blade Bearings (Dwg No. 111040) 6 Junk Excluder (Dwg No. 111080) 12 Outer Packing Rings (Dwg No. 111100) 12 Blade Bearing Carriers (Dwg No. 112010) 2 Main Coupler (Dwg No. 130010) 4 Inner Coupler (Dwg No. 130020) 4 Outer Coupler (Dwg No. 130030) 2 Middle Coupler (Dwg No. 130040) 10 Coupler Bush (Dwg No. 130050) 24 Rocking Arm Bush (Dwg No. 130060) 12 Rocking Arm (Dwg No. 130070) 24 Rocking Arm Bearing Ring (Dwg No. 130080) 12 Connecting Rod (Dwg No. 130180) 48 Bush for Connecting Rod (Dwg No. 130190) 24 Bush for Bearing Plates in Kinematics (Dwg No. 130250) 2 Key for Coupler Sleeve (Dwg No. 130340) 2 Key for Coupler Sleeve (Dwg No. 130350) 2 Lower Spherical Bush (Dwg No. 140100) 2 Intermediate Bush (Dwg No. 140150) 2 Central Spherical Bush (Dwg No. 140300) 2 Articulated Joint Bearing (Dwg No. 140400) 2 Push Rod Sleeve (Dwg No. 140500)


Page: 200-20

Qty Item

2 Key (Dwg No. 140510) 2 Laminum Disc for Retaining Sleeve (Dwg No. 140620) 4 Pin for Servos (Dwg No. 150110) 4 Laminum Disc for Servos (Dwg No. 150160) 8 Copper Sealing Rings (Dwg No. 150230) 2 Bush (Dwg No. 150320) 48 Reactive Anodes (Dwg No. 210070) 4 Copper Washer for Drain Plug (Dwg No. 214020) 2 Gland Ring for Main Seals (Dwg No. 220040) 2 Main Cylindrical Roller Bearings (Dwg No. 220190) 2 Bearing Bush (Dwg No. 350010) 2 Rotary Palm (Dwg No. 350030) 4 Non-Return Valve (Dwg No. 390090) 4 Pressure Transducers (Dwg No. 410500) 2 Pump unit (Dwg No. 410400) 4 Pressure Transducers (Dwg No. 410500) 4 Non-Return Valve (Dwg No. 410550) 4 Pressure Limit Valve (Dwg No. 420410) 4 Filter Element (Dwg No. 426020) 2 Contamination Indicator (Dwg No. 426030) 2 Oil Cooler (Dwg No. 460010) 2 Thermostat for Cooler (Dwg No. 460150) 2 Thermometer for Oil Cooler Piping (Dwg No. 460300) 2 Copper Washer for Oil Cooler Thermometer (Dwg No. 460310) 2 Thermometer (Dwg No. 480030) 2 Temperature Sensor (Dwg No. 480040) 6 Copper Sealing Rings (Dwg No. 480050) 2 Float Switch (Dwg No. 480060) 2 Copper Sealing Rings (Dwg No. 480150) 6 Proximity Switch (Dwg No. 480210) 2 Pressure Switch for Control Oil (Dwg No. 482020) 4 Pressure Switch for Lube and Rotor Oil (Dwg No. 482030) 6 Pressure Switch Connecting Plug (Dwg No. 482050) 4 Pressure Transducers (Dwg No. 485020) 2 Glass Sight for Oil Level in Elevated Oil Tank (Dwg No. 815050) 4 Laminar Ring for Elevated Oil Tank (Dwg No. 815060)


Page: 200-21

Qty Item

2 Float Switch for Elevated Oil Tank (Dwg No. 820010) 2 Float Switch for Elevated Oil Tank (Dwg No.TBD) 4 Copper sealing rings (Dwg No.TBD) 1 Thermometer for Input Gear, L = 40 mm (Dwg No.TBD) 1 Thermometer for Input Gear, L = 160 mm (Dwg No.TBD) 1 Thermometer for Input Gear, L = 200 mm (Dwg No. TBD) 2 Thermometer for Input Gear, L = 280 mm (Dwg No. TBD)

560

Provide one (1) complete set of special tools per vessel as required for VSP or approved equal operation and maintenance. Special tools are any non-commercial tools, repair appliances, test equipment, or specialized adaptors, which do not conform to ANSI or other internationally recognized standards.

Each VSP or approved equal shall be filled with an environmentally acceptable lubricant (EAL), 565 as defined by the EPA Vessel General Permit, which meets the manufacturer's specifications. All lubricants are subject to manufacturer and Owner's Representative approval.

252 PROPULSION CONTROL SYSTEM

252.1 General

Provide and install a microprocessor-based propulsion control systems, Voith ECS control 570 system or approved equal. In the event the Voith ECS control system is selected, the Contractor shall engage the services of Voith Turbo for the design, manufacturing, installation, and commissioning of a control system fully compatible with the installed VSP or approved equal propulsion system.

The control systems for each driveline shall be independent of each other and shall be fully 575 compliant with the requirements for vital automated systems, found in 46 CFR Part 62 (Vital System Automation) and ABS requirements. Each system shall be fully redundant with the redundant (back-up) system running in hot-standby mode. In case of a control system fault, the redundant system shall take over navigation, indicate the fault at the control stations, and raise an alarm in the ship's alarm system. 580

In addition to the remote propulsion controls described herein, each engine, gear and VSP or approved equal shall have local controls located at the equipment in accordance with ABS and USCG requirements.

252.2 Control System Functions

The system shall be capable of controlling all necessary propulsion system parameters for each 585 driveline, including:

Selection of active control station Indication of control system status


Page: 200-22

Thrust quantity and direction of each VSP or approved equal Propulsion engine speed from idle to maximum rated speed. Engine speed shall normally 590

be push button controlled in four increments: Idle, Docked (nominally 600 rpm), Transit (nominally 720 rpm), and Full (750 rpm). The rpm settings shall be adjustable. Starting values shall be determined during detail design and the set points adjusted for best efficiency during commissioning and sea trials.

Coupling engagement (closed/open) for each engine 595

The Control System shall provide visual indication of all necessary parameters at each control station:

Ready indication Alarm indication Station in command 600

Active control system (main or redundant) for each VSP or approved equal Longitudinal and transverse thrust set point of each VSP or approved equal Actual longitudinal and transverse thrust position of each VSP or approved equal Engine rpm, for each engine Coupling Status (closed/open) for each engine 605

Shaft rpm Indicator lights and displays shall be dimmable. Dimmer and lamp push to test controls shall be provided at each station.

Each propulsion train shall be capable of operating with either one (1) or two (2) engines engaged. When both engines on a driveline are engaged, engine speeds shall be synchronized, 610 the two engines shall share the load equally, and engine speed requests from remote stations shall apply to both engines.

Each propulsion train shall also be capable of being started using either of the two connected engines. The propulsion control system shall provide all controls necessary for the startup sequence, including fluid coupling pre-lubrication, selection of startup engine, startup engine 615 RPM setting, and coupling closure.

Each engine shall be started or shutdown at its respective local operating panel in the Engine Room. Individual engine shutdown controls shall also be provided in the EOS. Engine synchronization and coupling closure shall be controlled from the EOS. Engine and coupling status indication at shall be provided at each control station. 620

The vessel's control system shall provide interlocks to prevent coupling closure resulting in an unsafe condition. Coupling closure shall be permitted only when the rpm of the engine to be engaged is synchronized with the shaft rpm or both the engine and shaft line are at appropriate and safe speed for engine engagement.


Page: 200-23

The control system shall include provisions to automatically reduce pitch in the event of an 625 engine overload, and shall also limit maximum blade pitch when a VSP or approved equal is being driven by one engine.

The propulsion control system shall also indicate actual VSP or approved equal pitch and provide a lack of response alarm for each VSP or approved equal. The control system shall monitor requested longitudinal and transverse thrust set points. If the VSP or approved equal 630 does not respond with a matching change in actual thrust position, the control system shall generate an audible and visual alarm in the Pilot House and EOS.

Alarm and monitoring points for each VSP or approved equal and the propulsion control system shall be provided as required by Regulatory Body requirements and per manufacturer recommendations, generally as noted in Section 436. Alarms shall be enunciated by the ship's 635 integrated alarm and monitoring system, as described in Section 436.

252.3 Control Stations

The control system shall have three (3) control stations for the propulsion system: one (1) in each Pilot House and a master unit in the EOS. Control layout shall be generally as shown in References (2I) and (2M). Final control layout is subject to review and approval as described in 640 Sections 640.5 and 640.6.

252.3.1 EOS Control Station

The EOS remote control station shall include the following components:

Two (2) sets of identical controls, one (1) for each VSP or approved equal, consisting of: o One (1) thrust control joystick 645

o One (1) 4-button module for VSP or approved equal operation and control functions including alarm indication, station transfer, standby pump, and active system selection.

o One (1) 4-button module for engine speed selection as described in Section 252.2 above. 650

o One (1) 12 inch touch screen HMI display, for display and control of propulsion system including drive status, states, settings, alarms and warnings, logging and trend graphing.

Independent display of actual VSP or approved equal thrust position for each VSP or approved equal. The displays shall be LED bar graph indicators or similar, which clearly 655 indicate actual longitudinal and transverse VSP or approved equal pitch. The independent displays shall be mounted in the EOS control console.

Coupling controls for each engine, engaged/disengaged for each fluid coupling Digital display of operating rpm for each main engine Digital display of shaft rpm for each main propulsion shaft 660

Individual shutdown controls for each engine Emergency stop controls as described in Section 252.5


Page: 200-24

The VSP or approved equal control joysticks in the EOS control panel shall be arranged such that direction of joystick movement matches the resulting direction of vessel movement.

252.3.2 Pilot House Remote Control Station 665

Each Pilot House remote control station shall include the following components:

Two (2) sets of identical controls, one (1) for each VSP or approved equal, consisting of: o One (1) thrust control joystick o One (1) 4-button modules for VSP or approved equal operation and control

functions including alarm indication, station transfer, standby pump, and active 670 system selection.

o One (1) 4-button module for engine speed selection as described in Section 252.2 above.

o One (1) 7-inch touch screen HMI display for display and control of bridge related propulsion system parameters, alarms and warnings. 675

Independent display of actual VSP or approved equal thrust position. The displays shall be LED bar graph indicators or similar, which clearly indicate actual longitudinal and transverse VSP or approved equal pitch. The independent displays shall be mounted forward of the control consoles, in the pilot's line of sight, generally where shown on Reference (2M). 680

Coupling status indication, open/closed, for each fluid coupling Emergency stop controls shall be provided as described in 252.5.

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 200 - 7 with the control systems and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. Quantities listed in Table 200 - 7 are per vessel. 685

Table 200 - 7: Controls System ABS recommended and operationally required parts

Qty Item

1 Bridge Display, 7 inches 1 EOS Display, 12 inches 2 Operating Unit, - Bedienstreifen 4-Taster 2 Potentiometer, 2 Module, NAR9460005 4 Joystick, - 2 Axes 2 Module, NAR9460002 3 Module, NAR9460007 3 CPU, NAR9460001 1 Speed Detector, FAJ11-0315-E 1 Frequency Converter, BR R417000605


Page: 200-25

252.4 Control Transfer

Transfer of control between any two remote propulsion control stations shall be executed using the VSP or approved equal operating panels. The EOS station shall be the default station in 690 control. A control transfer between stations shall transfer the control functions for both fore and aft drivetrains concurrently.

The transfer of control between any two (2) remote stations shall require the joysticks to be in the zero pitch position.

The transfer of control between the EOS station and any of the other remote stations, or 695 between any station in one Pilot House and a station in the opposite Pilot House, shall be a two-step process: 1) Control transfer shall be initiated by pressing a control release push button at the active station, and 2) control transfer completed by pressing the control transfer button at the inactive station.

At any time, the EOS station may take back control from any of the other two (2) remote 700 propulsion control stations and block unauthorized control from any secondary station.

252.5 Emergency Stop

Independent, guarded, manually actuated emergency shutdown switches shall be provided at each control station. One (1) emergency stop switch shall be provided for each propulsion train, and the switch shall stop both engines connected to that propulsion train. 705

256 MACHINERY COOLING SYSTEMS

Install fresh water and seawater cooling systems to provide machinery-cooling systems, generally as shown on References (2C) and (2D). Arrange major system components generally where shown on Reference (2A). Cooling systems and equipment shall meet the requirements of the engine manufacturer, gear manufacturer, VSP or approved equal manufacturer, and 710 Regulatory Bodies, in addition to the requirements listed below and the general requirements of Group 500.

Machinery cooling systems shall be complete in all respects with all necessary pumps, gauges, controls, strainers, piping, valves, fittings, orifices, indicators, etc., required for efficient operation. 715

256.1 Seawater Cooling System

Provide and install a seawater cooling system serving the vessel's propulsion engines, ship service diesel generators (SSDG), combining gears, fluid couplings, VSPs or approved equals, and EOS AC condenser, and other equipment requiring seawater cooling, generally as shown on Reference (2C). 720

The Engine Room sea chest cross main shall be provided with two (2) simplex strainers, Miller-Leaman CuNi Basket SeaStrainer or equal, one (1) at each sea chest in the Engine Room. Strainers shall be 90/10 copper nickel with two-piece stainless steel baskets. The cross main, strainers, and sea chests shall be sized such that one strainer and sea chest can accommodate the full seawater requirement for the vessel, while the second is shut off for cleaning. 725


Page: 200-26

256.1.1 Main Engine and SSDG Seawater Cooling

Each engine shall be equipped with an engine mounted and driven seawater pump, which takes suction from the sea chest cross main in the Engine Room and delivers seawater to the engine's respective heat exchanger. Seawater leaving the heat exchangers shall be collected in a common header before being discharged overboard. Warm water recirculation shall be provided to each 730 sea chest via the common overboard header.

The Bilge/Trim system shall be configured to provide emergency seawater cooling supply to any one of the main engine heat exchangers. The emergency seawater cooling supply orifice shall be sized to provide enough seawater to cool one (1) main engine.

Main engine heat exchangers are described in Section 256.3. 735

256.1.2 Auxiliary Seawater Cooling

Provide and install an auxiliary seawater cooling system for service to the vessel's combining gears, VSPs or approved equals, fluid couplings, and the EOS AC condenser, generally as shown on Reference (2C).

The auxiliary seawater cooling system shall be served by four (4) pumps total, with two (2) 740 pumps at each end of the vessel. Under normal operation, each end of the vessel will be served by one (1) running pump with the second pump on standby. The running and standby pump shall be user selectable. The standby pump shall be configured to start automatically if the running pump fails.

Each auxiliary seawater pump shall take suction from one of two (2) independent sea chests 745 located in the Auxiliary Machinery Rooms and deliver seawater to the equipment it serves. Each suction shall be equipped with a duplex strainer, Eaton 53 BTX or equal.

The auxiliary seawater pumps shall be end suction, horizontal, centrifugal pumps with structural composite bodies and impellers and mechanical seals, SIMS 4x3x10 or equal. Pumps shall be equipped with 460 VAC/3-phase/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motors. 750

Flow control valves, Hays Measurflo or equal, shall be installed at the supply to each combining gear cooler, VSP or approved equal cooler, Voith fluid coupling heat exchanger, and the EOS AC condenser supply lines. Flow control valves shall be selected to maintain the required seawater flow per the equipment manufacturer.

256.2 Fresh Water Cooling Systems 755

Each propulsion and SSDG shall be fitted with an independent, closed circuit, fresh water cooling system, generally as shown on Reference (2D). Engine cooling fresh water shall be circulated by engine mounted and driven pumps furnished with the engines.

Each propulsion engine jacket water and aftercooler cooling circuit shall be fitted with a combination heat exchanger, refer to Section 256.3. 760


Page: 200-27

A tempered water heat exchanger shall be fitted to each main engine jacket water circuit in parallel with the combination propulsion heat exchangers on each main engine. The flow balance between the propulsion heat exchanger and the tempered water heat exchanger in each circuit shall be controlled by three-way temperature control valve.

Each three-way control valve shall be equipped with an electric valve operator, remote 765 temperature sensor, and a suitable PLC based PID controller. The valve operator shall be supplied with adjustable limit switches, a manual override operator, and shall meet all applicable ABS and USCG requirements. The controller shall be programmed to maintain a constant return jacket water temperature to the engine, by varying amount of flow directed to the tempered water heat exchanger. When the jacket water temperature exceeds the controller set point, more jacket 770 water shall be directed to the propulsion heat exchanger; conversely, when the return temperature is lower more jacket water will be directed to the tempered water cooler. The valve limits shall be adjusted to prevent excessive jacket water flow through the tempered water heat exchanger.

The SSDGs shall be provided with engine mounted fresh water cooling circuits and heat exchanger. 775

The Contractor shall provide and install engine coolant expansion tanks in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Propulsion expansion tanks shall generally be sized to 18-25% of the total volume of the cooling loop. Engine cooling water expansion tanks shall be located above the highest point in the cooling water system and equipped with a 1 inch fill complete with pressure cap, 1 inch drain, low-level alarm, and sight glass. Low-level switches shall initiate 780 alarm when the amount of water in the tank decreases to 5 gallons. Pressure cap shall be set to operate at 7 psig.

Provide and install flexible connections at each engine as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

Provide and install 1/2" valved test cocks in each engine cooling circuit for drawing coolant 785 samples. Test cocks location shall be located in accordance with the engine manufacturer's requirements, and easily accessible to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

256.3 Heat Exchangers

Provide and install four (4) combination heat exchangers, Sperre Pleat Cooler, DN 100-3-2-L or equal, one (1) for each propulsion engine. The heat exchangers shall be universal-cooler type 790 units which provide separate jacket water and after cooler heat exchanger circuits served by common seawater cooling stream. The heat exchangers shall be constructed with multiple gasketed elements mounted on a common steel base frame. Each element shall have pleated titanium heat transfer surfaces mounted in a composite frame. Heat exchangers shall be delivered with a matching counter-flange for each connection, and ABS certification. 795

The SSDG, VSP or approved equal, and combining gear heat exchangers shall be provided with the associated equipment. The tempered water heat exchangers are described in Section 530.

All seawater heat exchangers shall be sized for operation in 85°F seawater.


Page: 200-28

256.4 Jacket Water Heaters

Install forced circulation block heaters for the SSDGs and the emergency generator. Block 800 heaters shall be Hotstart CSM 10301-000 or equal. Each heater shall come complete with thermocouples, pumps and all required controls. Install heaters in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Interlock each heater with the engine it serves so the heater is disabled when the engine is running.

259 EXHAUST SYSTEMS 805

259.1 General

Detail design, provide, and install exhaust systems generally as shown on Reference (2E) and as described in these Technical Specifications. Each diesel engine and boiler shall have an independent exhaust system led to the weather. The Contractor shall ensure that static and dynamic loads on equipment exhaust flanges and exhaust backpressure are in accordance with 810 manufacturer's recommendations. Each system shall be complete with all components necessary for satisfactory operation.

Arrange exhaust piping to minimize water ingress and prevent accumulation of rainwater or condensate. Provide drain pots with 1 1/2 inch gate valves at the lower end of each vertical exhaust pipe run. 815

Provide and install flexible bellows at each engine or boiler exhaust outlet to allow for vibration and thermal deflection. Additional flexible bellows shall be installed in the piping system as needed, to provide for thermal expansion of exhaust piping.

Flexible bellows shall be multi-ply, convoluted, Type 321 stainless steel tube with fine pattern convolutions, flow liners, and flanged ends. Permanently mark the flow direction on the 820 exterior. One flanged end of each flexible bellows shall be Van Stone type.

With the exception of engine manufacturer provided expansion joints, all exhaust system expansion joints shall be American Boa, DME Inc., or equal. To the extent practicable, all additional expansion joints shall be obtained from a single source.

Design, provide, and install hangers and supports for each exhaust pipe and silencer with 825 provision for thermal movement and vibration without straining the piping, machinery, or ship structure. Hangers and supports shall incorporate vibration and thermal isolators. The vibration isolation system shall be designed to reduce vibration transfer from the exhaust to the ship structure and allow the vessel to meet the noise and vibration requirements of Section 073 while avoiding diesel induced excitation of exhaust system resonances. 830

Exhaust system plans, calculations, and analyses, including arrangement and details, thermal expansion, bellows, and hanger support calculations are to be submitted for Owner's Representative approval.

Exhaust systems piping shall be fabricated of steel pipe, ASTM A106 or equal. With the exception of proprietary engine turbo connections, all exhaust pipe, flexible bellows and silencer 835 flange connections shall have an ANSI B16.5, 150# bolting pattern.


Page: 200-29

Provide and install a collar and rain hat on each exhaust system where it exits the ship's structure to weather. The rain hat, centering clips, and the weather-exposed portion of each pipe shall be 316L stainless steel.

Terminate each exhaust system with a 316L stainless steel weather cap. 840

Fit the SSDG and EDG engine exhaust systems with thermocouples and thermowell assemblies for interface with the vessel's alarm system. Install thermocouples near the turbocharger outlet(s).

259.2 Main Engine Exhaust

Each main engine is provided with a selective catalytic reduction (SCR) exhaust after-treatment 845 system, consisting of a mixing tube assembly, SCR module, an aqueous urea solution (AUS) dosing system, and associated controls. Install these components for each main engine in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Provide and install a spark arresting silencer, Maxim MSA11 or equal between the outlet of each engine's SCR module and the exhaust system outlet to weather. 850

259.3 Generator Exhaust

Provide and install a super critical grade, spark arresting silencer, Maxim MSA33-10C1 or equal in each diesel generator exhaust system.

259.4 Exhaust Insulation

The Contractor shall provide and install insulation and lagging on all engine and boiler exhaust 855 piping and silencers from the equipment exhaust outlet up to the stack top plate.

Insulation shall be 2-inch thick removable exhaust blankets. Exhaust blankets shall be fabricated from needled glass mat, JPS Tempmat or equal, with a stainless steel mesh interior liner and silicone impregnated glass cloth, Gray Anchorsil exterior and fastened using stainless steel hooks and lacing. Exhaust insulation sections within the machinery spaces shall be no greater than 6 860 feet to permit removal for maintenance.

Clean exhaust pipe exterior surfaces to bare metal and paint with two (2) coats of heat-resistant aluminum paint before applying insulation. Silencers shall be factory painted with heat-resistant paint suitable for the intended service.

Provide an aluminum sheet metal cover over lagging in way of access areas where the insulation 865 might be damaged.

259.5 AUS Dosing System

Provide and install an AUS (aqueous urea solution) dosing system for each main engine in accordance with manufacturer and Regulatory Body requirements, generally as shown on Reference (2F). The system shall be complete with all components necessary for satisfactory 870 operation.


Page: 200-30

Provide and install one (1) urea tank with capacity 3,000 gallons. The urea tank shall be an independent stainless steel tank and have all features listed in

Table 200 - 8.

Table 200 - 8: Urea Tank Features 875 Qty Item

1 1 1/2 inch fill, routed top Main Deck, with Camlock fitting 1 2 inch vent, routed to Main Deck vent containment 1 Sight gauge, Gems Suresite or equal 1 Tank level indicator (TLI), Refer to Section 506.2 1 Temperature transducer 1 Thermometer 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with plug 1 Bolted inspection and access hatch, on top of tank 1 Fittings as required for transfer pump supply and return

The AUS dosing system shall consist of four (4) AUS dosing cabinets, one (1) for each engine, and two (2) AUS transfer pump skids, supplied with the engines. The transfer pump skids shall be configured to supply AUS to two (2) of the main engines under normal operation. Provide a cross connection between transfer pump skids to allow one (1) transfer pump skid to provide 880 AUS to all four (4) main engines. Each transfer pump skid shall be capable of supplying AUS to all four (4) of the main engines and shall be provided with pump and controls, 100-micron filter, and pressure regulator.

Provide and install secondary filters at each AUS dosing cabinet supply, CAT Part No. 370-6215 or equal with 40-micron stainless steel basket. 885

Provide and install one (1) urea overflow tank as required for collection of AUS overflow from the AUS dosing cabinets. The urea overflow tank shall be an independent stainless steel tank with 20-gallon capacity and have all features listed in Table 200 - 9.

Table 200 - 9: Urea Overflow Tank Features

Qty Item

1 1 inch local discharge with Camlock 4 3/4 inch female SAE J1453 ORFS inlet fittings, for dosing cabinet overflow lines 1 1 1/2 inch vent, routed to Urea Tank 1 Sight gauge, Gems Suresite or equal 1 Tank level indicator (TLI), refer to Section 506.2 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with plug


Page: 200-31

Qty Item

1 Cleanout hatch, on top of tank 890

Refer to Section 551 for compressed air requirements to the AUS dosing cabinets. Provide and install secondary coalescing air filters, Norgren F74C-3AD-QDO or equal at the supply inlet of each AUS dosing cabinet.

All piping and components in contact with AUS shall be stainless steel type 316L, UHMWPE, PTFE, EPDM, NBR, or similar compatible materials. Mild steel, aluminum, and non-ferrous 895 alloys shall not be used.

The AUS dosing system arrangement and equipment shall be confirmed with manufacturer's requirements upon receipt of final engine data.

261 FUEL OIL SYSTEM

261.1 General 900

Provide, and install a fuel oil fill, transfer, and service system as shown on Reference (2G). The system and its equipment shall meet the requirements of the ABS and USCG in addition to the requirements listed below and the general requirements of Group 500.

Refer to Section 506 and Reference (2J) for vents, fills, and sounds. Fuel oil tank level indication is described in Section 506. 905

Provide emergency shut off valves at each tank outlet as required by regulatory requirements. For additional information on the emergency shut off valves, refer to Section 556.1.

261.2 Fuel Oil Service System

Under normal operation, each propulsion engine, SSDG, and boiler shall draw fuel oil from one (1) of two (2) ship's service day tanks as shown in Reference (2G). Fuel return lines from each 910 piece of equipment shall route back to the same day tank. A check valve shall be installed in each return line.

Install a supply cross-connect between the day tanks to allow fuel supply to all equipment from either day tank. Install a return cross-connect between the day tanks to allow fuel return from all equipment to either day tank. Under normal operation, the cross-connect valves shall be closed 915 to divide fuel consumption between the two day tanks.

Install a connection from each fuel oil storage tank to the fuel oil service header for emergency fuel supply. Under normal operation, these connection valves shall be closed.

Each diesel generator and boiler shall have an independent primary filter installed between the supply tank and the consumer's fuel pump. Provide coalescing turbine-type filters, RACOR 920 791000 MAVM, or equal, for each diesel generator and RACOR 751000 MAXM, or equal, for each boiler.


Page: 200-32

Each main engine shall be provided with independent primary filtration between the storage tank and fuel pump.

Provide and install ultrasonic flow meters in the supply and return line to each engine and boiler. 925 Refer to Section 436 for fuel metering system requirements.

Verify that pressure drop through fuel-oil suction and return piping does not exceed the engine or boiler manufacturers' requirements. Piping shall be run below the floor plates except at the primary filters and equipment connections.

261.3 Fuel Oil Transfer System 930

The fuel oil transfer system shall be arranged such that fuel oil can be transferred from either of the main storage tanks to either of the day tanks, the emergency generator tank, or the opposite main storage tank.

The fuel oil storage tanks shall be provided with a fill from the Shore Services Connections Compartment on the Staten Island End, located where shown on Reference (2J). The fill 935 connection shall be fitted with a butterfly valve and a Camlock connection. Containment coamings shall be placed around the fill station. Fill and suction lines shall terminate with a bell mouth near the bottom of the each tank.

The fuel oil system shall be capable of a loading fuel at a rate of 200 gpm to either main storage or day tank. 940

Provide and install one (1) fuel oil transfer pump, Viking L32 or equal. The pump shall be a foot mounted gear pump with cast iron housing, ductile iron gears, integral relief valve, and mechanical seals. Pump shall be equipped with a 460 VAC/3-phase/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motor. Manual start and stop shall be provided near the transfer pump. Remote stop shall be provided in the EOS. Install a simplex basket strainer, Eaton 72 or equal, with cast iron body 945 and 40 mesh stainless steel basket in the pump suction line.

Provide and install one (1) hand operated fuel oil transfer pump, Fill-Rite FR 112 or equal. The pump shall be arranged as shown on Reference (2G) for emergency fuel transfer to the day tanks.

Provide a fuel oil purifier, Alfa-Laval MAB 104B or equal. Configure purifier for separator operation. The fuel oil purifier shall be capable of drawing fuel from any storage tank and 950 delivering it to any day tank on the vessel. The fuel oil purifier shall also be arranged to transfer fuel to the emergency diesel generator tank.

A 1-inch valved penetration with plug shall be installed close to the bottom of each tank to allow for stripping with a portable pump. Where the penetration cannot be located at the bottom of the tank, a pipe shall extend to the bottom of the tank from the penetration. 955


Page: 200-33

264 LUBE OIL AND WASTE OIL SYSTEMS

264.1 General

Provide and install a lube oil and waste oil systems consisting of service, transfer and waste oil piping for the main propulsion engines, SSDGs, combining gears, and VSPs or approved equal s as shown on Reference (2H). The system and its equipment shall meet the requirements of ABS 960 and USCG in addition to the requirements listed below and the general requirements of Group 500.

264.2 Engine Lube Oil Service Systems

Each diesel engine (main and generator) shall have its own self-contained lube oil system with attached components. The main engines are shipped with independent pre-lube and soak back 965 pumps. Install the filters and pumps in accordance with the engine manufacturer's requirements. Engine lube oil alarms and sensors shall be as defined in Sections 233, 310 and 436.

264.3 VSP or Approved Equal Lube Oil Service System

Each VSP shall have its own self-contained lube oil system built onto the VSP. Install and commission the VSP lube oil system in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 970

VSP or approved equal lube oil alarms and sensors are described in Sections 245 and 436.

The Contractor shall install valved quick release connections in each VSP's or approved equal lube oil system for connection of a portable lube oil purifier. The valves and shall be located in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and easily accessible.

The Contractor shall provide one (1) portable, centrifugal lube oil purifier, Alfa-Laval Emmie or 975 equal. The purifier shall be mounted on a wheeled cart and include the following components:

o Built-on screw pump o Collecting tank for oil spill and separated water with overflow switch o Motor starters for the separator and pump o Pressure gauge 980

o Low pressure switch/water seal alarm on outgoing oil o Mobile electric oil pre-heater, fitted with wheels and a handle o Hydraulic hoses with quick release couplings, non-return valves, and a dive pipe

with filter-breather for connecting unit to oil tanks Provide supply and return hoses shall of sufficient length, minimum 30 feet, to reach the oil 985 connections on the VSP or approved equal with the portable purifier located near the Main Deck access door to the propulsion room.

The Contractor shall deliver the portable purifier as directed by the Owner's Representative.


Page: 200-34

264.4 Combining Gear Lube Oil Service System

Each combining gear shall have its own self-contained lube oil system built onto the gear. Install 990 and commission the combining gear lube oil system in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Gear lube oil alarms and sensors are described in Sections 241 and 436.

264.5 Lube Oil Storage and Transfer System

Provide and install one (1) main engine lube oil storage tank with a capacity of 500 gallons, and one (1) auxiliary (SSDG) lube oil tank with a capacity of 60 gallons, both constructed of steel. 995 Locate where shown on Reference (2A). Each tank shall have all features listed in Table 200 - 10 and in Table 200 - 11.

Table 200 - 10: Lube Oil Storage Tank Features

Qty Item

1 2 inch fill, routed to Main Deck with Camlock 1 2 1/2 inch vent, located in Engine Room 1 Sight gauge, Gems Suresite or equal 1 Tank level indicator (TLI), refer to Section 436 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with threaded pipe plug 1 Inspection and access manhole, on top of tank 1 2 inch supply fitting

Table 200 - 11: Auxiliary Lube Oil Storage Tank Features

Qty Item

1 2 inch local fill with Camlock 1 2 1/2 inch vent, located in Engine Room 1 Sight gauge, Gems Suresite or equal 1 Tank level indicator (TLI), refer to Section 436 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with Camlock 1 Inspection and access manhole, on top of tank

Refer to Section 506 and Reference (2J) for vent and fill details. 1000

Provide and install engine sump suction and discharge manifolds, arranged as shown in Reference (2H). Each main engine sump shall be connected to the suction and discharge manifolds with separate lines.

A positive locking ball valve, Jamesbury Style A or equal, shall be provided as near as possible to the connection to each sump. The valve body shall be fitted horizontally with the valve stem 1005 oriented vertically up. Drain piping between this drain valve and the system shall be a flexible hose section with SAE swivel flair connections at each end. Drain valves shall be protected


Page: 200-35

against impact if installed in an exposed location. Access to the drain valves shall be provided by hinged deck plates.

Provide and install one (1) main engine lube oil transfer pump, Viking HL-4195 or equal. The 1010 pump shall be a gear pump with cast iron housing, ductile iron gears, integral relief valve, and mechanical seal. Pump shall be equipped with a 460 VAC/3-phase/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motor and remote shut down. Under normal operations, the pump shall be arranged to take suction from the lube oil tank and discharge to the lube oil discharge manifold. The pump shall also be capable of drawing suction from the lube oil suction manifold and discharging to either 1015 the waste oil tank or the discharge connection on the Main Deck, to serve as a back-up to the waste oil pump.

Provide and install one (1) centrifugal lube oil purifier, Alfa-Laval MAB-104B or equal with integrated heater. Configure purifier for clarifier operation. The lube oil purifier shall be capable of drawing suction from the lube oil suction manifold and discharging to the lube oil 1020 discharge manifold. Route the water outlet connection from the purifier to the lube oil sludge tank.

Fit piping between the main engine lube oil tank, transfer pump, purifier, and main engines served as shown on Reference (2H).

264.6 VSP or Approved Equal Lube Oil Storage Tanks 1025

Provide and install two (2) steel VSP or approved equal lube oil storage tanks, each with a capacity of 2000 gallons. The VSP or approved equal lube oil storage tanks will be normally empty. Locate one (1) storage tank in each Propulsion Room where shown on Reference (2A). Each tank shall have all features listed in Table 200 - 12.

Table 200 - 12: VSP or Approved Equal Lube Oil Storage Tank 1030 Qty Item

1 2 inch local fill with Camlock 1 2 1/2 inch vent, located in Propulsion Room 1 Sight gauge, Gems Suresite or equal 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with threaded pipe plug 1 Inspection and access manhole, on top of tank 1 Sounding tube

Refer to Section 506 and Reference (2J) for vent details.

264.7 Waste Oil System

The waste oil system shall be capable of taking suction from the sump of each main engine and discharging the oil into the waste oil tank. It shall also be capable of taking suction from the waste oil tank and discharging waste oil to the discharge connection on the Main Deck. The 1035 valve arrangement of the waste oil system shall allow evacuation of the waste oil tank via vacuum truck from the deck discharge connection. A 1-inch valved Camlock fitting shall also be


Page: 200-36

installed at the waste oil manifold for draining lube oil tanks or other equipment with a portable hose.

Provide a deck discharge connection located in the Shore Services Connection Compartment 1040 where shown in Reference (2J). The deck discharge shall be fitted with a ball valve and Camlock fitting with lockable dust cap.

Provide and install one (1) waste oil storage tank with a capacity of 650 gallons and one (1) sludge storage tank with capacity of 200 gallons, both of steel construction. Locate the tanks where shown on Reference (2A) and outfit with all features listed in Table 200 - 13. 1045

Table 200 - 13: Waste Oil and Sludge Storage Tank Features

Qty Item

1 2 inch transfer line, terminating 1 inch from bottom of tank 1 2 inch local fill with Camlock (waste oil tank only) 1 2 1/2 inch vent, located in Engine Room 1 Sight gauge, Gems Suresite or equal 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with threaded pipe plug 1 Inspection and access manhole, on top of tank 1 Quick closing fill port with funnel for local filling (waste oil tank only)

Refer to Section 506 and Reference (2J) for vent and discharge details.

The sludge storage tank shall be installed below, and piped to receive sludge and wastewater from, the lube oil purifier, waste oil purifier, and the service sink in the engine room. 1050

Provide and install one (1) waste oil transfer pump, Viking HL-4195 or equal. The pump shall be a gear pump with cast iron housing, ductile iron gears, integral relief valve, and a mechanical seal. Pump shall be equipped with a 460 VAC/3-phase/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motor.

Provide and install one (1) lube oil sludge discharge pump, Viking GG-4195 or equal. The pump shall be a gear pump with cast iron housing, ductile iron gears, integral relief valve, and a 1055 mechanical seal. Pump shall be equipped with a 460 VAC/3-phase/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motor. Arrange the pump to take suction from the lube oil sludge tank and discharge to the discharge connection on the Main Deck.


Page: 300-1

GROUP 300 – ELECTRICAL

300 GENERAL 3 300.1 References 3 300.2 General 3 300.3 Voltage and Frequency Ratings 4 5 300.4 Harmonic Interference 4 300.5 Materials and Equipment 4 300.6 Electrical Bonding 5 300.7 Nameplates and Labels 5 300.8 Documentation 6 10 300.9 Electrical Test and Trials 7

302 MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 7 302.1 General 7 302.2 Motors 7 302.3 Motor Controllers 8 15 302.4 Variable Speed Drives 9 302.5 Motor Control Centers 10 302.6 Fire/Ventilation Shutdown Circuit 10

303 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 10 303.1 General 10 20 303.2 Generator Circuit Breakers 11

304 CABLEWAYS AND WIRING 11 304.1 Cables 11 304.2 Cable Installation 12 304.3 Cable Routing 12 25 304.4 Cableways and Hangers 12 304.5 Penetrations 13 304.6 Cable Identification 13 304.7 Junction Boxes 14

310 GENERATOR SETS 14 30

310.1 General 14 310.2 Ship Service Diesel Generator Sets 14 310.3 Emergency Generator 16

320 SWITCHBOARDS 17 320.1 General 17 35 320.2 Switchboard Construction 18 320.3 Main Switchboard Operation 19 320.4 Switchboard Arrangement and Location 20 320.5 Emergency Switchboard 20 320.6 Emergency Switchboard Operation 21 40 320.7 Emergency Switchboard Arrangement and Location 21 320.8 Switchboard Instruments 21

321 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS 23 321.1 Distribution Panels and Load Centers 23 321.2 Enclosures and Interiors 24 45 321.3 Snack Bar Power 24 321.4 24 VDC Power Distribution Panels 24 321.5 Transformers 25


Page: 300-2

321.6 Switches 25 322 RECEPTACLES 26 50

322.1 Shore Power Connections 26 330 LIGHTING 27 332 LIGHTING FIXTURES 27

332.1 Exit Lighting 28 332.2 Floodlights 28 55 332.3 Searchlights 28 332.4 Pilot House Night Lighting 29 332.5 Labeling 29 332.6 Switches and Junction Boxes 29

340 BATTERIES AND POWER CONDITIONING 29 60

340.1 General 29 340.2 24 VDC Systems 30 340.3 Emergency Diesel Generator Engine Starting 30

65


Page: 300-3

300 GENERAL

300.1 References

Table 300 - 1: List of References - Electrical


(3A) 14079-200-201-1 Machinery Arrangement (3B) 14079-200-304-1 Cableway Arrangement (3C) 14079-200-320-1 AC Electrical One Line Diagram (3D) 14079-200-320-2 DC Electrical One Line Diagram (3E) 14079-200-321-1 Receptacle Plan (3F) 14079-200-330-1 Vessel Operating, Emergency and Exterior Lighting (3G) 14079-200-422-1 Navigation Light Arrangement and Block Diagram (3H) 14079-200-640-1 Interior Furnishings and Outfit (3I) 14079-200-243-1 Shafting Arrangement

300.2 General 70

Provide a complete electrical system, including wiring and equipment, as described in these Technical Specifications and the references listed above.

All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall fully comply with Regulatory Body requirements including ABS, USCG 46 CFR Subchapters H and J, and all other agencies invoked or referenced by them. The installation of electrical equipment and wiring required for 75 items called out in other sections of these Technical Specifications shall be provided and installed whether or not specifically called for in the electrical sections of these Technical Specifications.

Perform independent electrical load analysis and develop all necessary detailed drawings to verify generator selection, panel bus sizing, and distribution breaker selection. Perform fault 80 current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies as required by 46 CFR Subchapter J.

The distribution of electrical power shall be in general accordance with References (3C) and (3D). These plans are intended to cover only the principal features of the distribution system. The Contractor shall not be excused from providing control, protective features, and wiring 85 required for proper operation of the electrical apparatus and equipment of the entire vessel in accordance with the intent of these Technical Specifications and applicable regulations.

The shipboard electrical system shall either derive power from the ship service diesel generators (SSDGs), the emergency generator, or shore power. The ship service switchboard shall be capable of parallel operation of any two (2) generators and momentarily paralleling with shore 90 power.


Page: 300-4

Auxiliary machinery control voltages shall be 120 volts or less, provided by internal and suitably sized control power transformers, when the control circuit extends outside the control enclosure. This includes such circuits as thermostats, motor control, remote shutdowns, and indicator and operator controls. Any deviations from the assigned voltages shall be approved by the Owner's 95 Representative.

300.3 Voltage and Frequency Ratings

Unless otherwise specified, select electric power consuming equipment to have a 60 Hz frequency and one of the following nominal voltage/phase ratings:

1. 480 Volt, 3-phase 100

2. 240Volt, single or 3-phase 3. 120 Volt, single-phase

Equipment shall be 3-phase. Deviations shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. Electric machinery and equipment shall be selected for the highest operating efficiency commensurate with reliability, maintainability, duty cycle, and requirements of minimum size 105 and weight.

300.4 Harmonic Interference

Equipment suppliers of variable speed drives shall ensure that the harmonic distortion level individual equipment shall be less than seven percent. The total harmonic distortion (THD) for the vessel shall be less than eight percent, verified by a harmonic analysis of the electrical system 110 that shall be conducted by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval and confirmed by the ABS Surveyor.

300.5 Materials and Equipment

Equipment, materials, and software shall meet the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies and the requirements listed herein. Equipment and components shall operate with a voltage variation of 115 ±10% for all equipment unless otherwise noted in these Technical Specifications. Intermittent voltage and frequency transients and excursions identified in ABS Rules shall not cause damage to or interruption of service to equipment.

Equipment requiring external wiring shall have terminal boards or blocks with solderless wire terminations to which all connections shall be made. All cable terminations connected to 120 terminal blocks shall be of the compression type.

These Technical Specifications have been written presuming the use of Square D equipment. Except for electrical cabling, and unless specified otherwise, all distribution system components including panels, circuit breakers, switches, enclosures, and indicators shall be manufactured or distributed by Square D Company, or equal. In all cases distribution equipment shall be 125 manufactured by the same company, and shall be NEMA rated.

Connections to terminal strips shall be made with terminal lugs, which shall be installed using a manufacturer's approved crimping device. Stranded wire shall not be directly installed on any


Page: 300-5

terminal strip. Insulation between adjacent terminals shall be either ensured through barriers integral to the terminal strip, or by the use of lugs insulated with soft vinyl. 130

Locate all electrical equipment to be readily accessible for operation, repairs, or removal. Equipment mounted on or adjacent to bulkheads shall be accessible for servicing and adjustment without dismantling panels, etc.

In weather locations and in all wet locations, penetrations shall be made through appropriately sized cable glands or multi cable transits (MCT). Stuffing glands shall be installed in the 135 bottoms of enclosures unless impractical.

Connection boxes, outlet boxes, junction boxes, light fixtures, and similar wiring fittings and fixtures installed in locations exposed to weather, condensation, or excessive dampness shall be watertight. They shall be USCG approved, non-metallic wherever possible. Other USCG approved corrosion resistant materials may be used where non-metallic is not appropriate or 140 available.

Electrical system components shall be securely fastened to ship structure by bolting or welded studs and nuts. The Hilti X-BT fastening system, or equal, may be used in Owner's Representative approved locations and applications. Threaded fasteners shall include provisions to prevent loosening, such as nylon insert nuts, locking washers, or thread adhesive. Cable 145 hangers may be welded to ship structure. Electrical equipment shall be installed independently from piping, ventilation, and other mechanical systems.

300.6 Electrical Bonding

All conductive electrical enclosures or equipment shall be electrically bonded to the vessel's structure. Provide and install bonding/equipment grounding systems in accordance with 46 CFR 150 §111, and any other applicable codes and regulatory requirements.

Bonding shall be ensured by mounting equipment directly to ship structure or by use of flexible copper cable or straps sized per the National Electrical Code (NEC). Either method shall form a positive ground connection from the enclosure to vessel's structure. Ground metal frames of portable lamps, tools and other similar cord and plug apparatuses supplied as ship equipment or 155 Owner-Furnished Equipment (OFE), through a suitable conductor in the power supply cable at the ground pole of all receptacles.

Ensure bonding of the main engine blocks, reduction gears, generator, propulsion shafting, and propulsors.

300.7 Nameplates and Labels 160

Fit electrical equipment with identifying label plates. Label all panels, load centers, junction boxes, special use receptacles, control enclosures, switches (other than ordinary light switches), motor controllers, and similar equipment. Each control and indication device on electrical equipment shall be labeled. Include special instructions or precautions on the label plate or on a separate plate attached to or adjacent to the equipment. 165


Page: 300-6

Distribution panels shall have nameplates listing the panel number, description, voltage, phase, bus current rating, and the feeder designation. The panel name characters shall be 1/2 inch high, and the remaining characters shall be 3/8 inch high.

Instruments such as metering shall be marked with name of circuit application on a separately mounted nameplate. When the entire panel or section is devoted to a single service application 170 and a panel nameplate so indicates, circuit designations of individual instruments may be omitted. Metered values and their parameters shall be indicated on every instrument.

Each circuit breaker on the ship service and emergency switchboards shall have a label plate showing the circuit designation, the circuit breaker trip setting, and maximum load current draw. If a single-phase load, the plate shall include the phases feeding the load. A list of proposed 175 circuit breaker nameplates shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval.

Label plates shall be laminated phenolic. Generally, color should be white characters on black background. For label plates of particular importance, color should be white characters on red background. Inscriptions shall be clear and concise with a minimum of abbreviation. Standard marine abbreviations shall be used. Lettering shall not be less than l/8 inch in height with 180 primary information in letters of larger size than secondary information. Label plates shall be attached using the 3M Scotch type VHB Tape or equal.

Inside enclosures, provide identifying nameplates or labels for all fuses and components. Stamp buses with their function and phase identification in letters at least 1/2 inch high. Mark terminals with their circuit designation. 185

Designations on markers and nameplates shall agree with designations on drawings.

300.8 Documentation

The Contractor shall provide drawings, manuals, and documentation for electrical equipment and systems as described herein and in Section 810. All documentation shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. 190

Production One-Line diagrams and Electrical Load Analysis shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval

A fault current analysis shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner's Representative and ABS for approval to verify the interrupting capacity of the circuit breakers in the switchboards and the distribution panels. 195

A protective device coordination analysis shall be performed and submitted to the Owner's Representative and ABS for approval to verify coordination of protective devices. The analysis shall include the time-current curves of the actual circuit breakers to be used.

The Contractor shall prepare voltage drop calculations per regulatory requirements and submit to the Owner's Representative for approval. 200


Page: 300-7

The Contractor shall develop detailed wiring diagrams for all motor controller circuits, shutdown circuits (fuel system shutdown, ventilation shutdown, and machinery shutdown), motorized ventilation damper circuits, magnetic door holdback circuits, and other ancillary power and control circuits.

300.9 Electrical Test and Trials 205

The Contractor shall perform electrical tests and trials on each system or equipment item to show proper function of the installation. Refer to Section 982.

302 MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS

302.1 General

Provide all watertight electrical equipment, including motors, controllers, and master switches 210 with drain plugs installed at the lowest point of the enclosure. Fit motors and control enclosures located in the weather with heaters to prevent condensation and ensure operation in a -8°F ambient temperature.

Select motor controllers shall be installed at centralized motor control centers (MCCs) in lieu of individual controllers as shown in Reference (3E). All motor controllers shall be of the 215 combination type.

Provide complete motor control wiring diagrams on the interior of all MCC cabinets and free standing motor controllers. This includes OEM controllers supplied with and/or integral to the equipment.

302.2 Motors 220

Motors shall be NEMA premium efficiency motors. Exceptions are permitted for special electrical equipment and small fractional horsepower motors. Deviations shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. Motors located in machinery rooms shall be rated for 50°C (122°F) ambient temperature.

Unless noted otherwise, motors shall be squirrel cage induction type. Three phase motors shall 225 be NEMA Design B unless the characteristics of the driven machine require otherwise. Generally, motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), but shall be totally enclosed air over (TEAO) for in-line ventilation fan use. Motors for pumps are to have the drive end entirely enclosed or designed to prevent leakage from entering the motor. Motors in damp locations such as the Weather Decks and unheated areas shall have the windings encapsulated in epoxy resins. 230 Motors used in variable speed applications shall be inverter duty motors. All motor selections shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Motors shall be from a single United States manufacturer, except as specifically approved by the Owner's Representative. Exceptions are special electrical equipment and small fractional horsepower units or motors provided as integral parts of equipment. 235

Install motors in locations high enough to avoid bilge water. Where motors are installed in interior spaces, they shall be located in dry locations and as far as practical from water and oil piping.


Page: 300-8

Each motor shall be fitted with a nameplate of corrosion-resistant materials. Motors shall be designated as hostile environment motors having a 1.15 service factor, Class F insulation or 240 better and an epoxy coating on the case.

All motors shall be equipped with pre-lubricated, factory-sealed bearings of suitable design to take the required axial and radial loads. Motors shall be equipped so that in-service greasing will not be necessary except during the manufacturer recommended overhaul periods.

Motors of two horsepower and larger shall be suitable for operation on 480 VAC, 3-phase 245 power, unless shown otherwise in Reference (3C). Single phase motors, where employed, shall be high starting torque and shall operate satisfactorily on 240 or 120 VAC power. Motors above 50 hp shall be provided with reduced voltage type motor controllers.

Motor controllers shall be provided per Reference (3C).

Each motor shall be fitted with a nameplate of corrosion resistant material marked permanently 250 with the following information:

Manufacturer's type and frame designation

Rated horsepower

Rating classification Design ambient temperature Temperature rise at rated load Rpm at rated load Voltage Amperes at rated load Number of phases Frequency Code for locked rotor KVA on motors 1/2 hp and larger in accordance with NEMA standards

Bar Code for Asset Identification

The Contractor shall provide a motor data booklet to the Owner's Representative upon delivery of the vessel. The booklets shall list all electric motors throughout the vessel. The booklet shall contain the following information:

Complete nameplate data Location of each motor on the vessel Motor service and circuit number Manufacturer's name, address, local

representative

302.3 Motor Controllers 255

Motor controllers shall be marine type, complying with the requirements of the UL Standard for Industrial Control Equipment, or IEC equivalent, and USCG 46 CFR Subchapter J. Controllers shall be manufactured by Square D or equal. Motor controllers not provided as parts of integrated machinery packages shall be from the same manufacturer.

Controller enclosures shall be USCG approved. Hardware exposed to the weather, dampness or 260 corrosive environments shall be stainless steel, grade 316 or better. Provide filters in the air intake where panels are force ventilated. Controllers installed in interior locations shall have


Page: 300-9

NEMA 12 enclosures. Controllers located in areas accessible to the public shall have locking devices similar to and keyed to match the panel boards.

Provide contactors with as many auxiliary contacts as required for each control, alarm and 265 monitoring function.

Mount operating controls in the front of the enclosure. Provide power available lights, and illuminated pushbuttons for motor running indication. Provide push-to-test pilot lights. Run indicator lights shall be green for single speed motors; amber for low speed and green for high speed in the case of two speed motors. Automatic controllers shall have blue indicator lights for 270 automatic control, and green for motor running on hand-off-auto (HOA) controllers. Indicator lights and controls shall operate at 120 V or less, and shall be powered from the controlled circuit. Provide control transformers as necessary.

Remote operating stations shall be provided where control from more than one location is required, where the motor starter cannot be located near the motor, or as required by the 275 Regulatory Bodies.

All motor controllers shall utilize appropriately rated contactors for the motor horsepower to be controlled. Starters shall have three-pole, external manual melting alloy type thermal overload devices, or have ambient compensated bi-metallic thermal overload relays.

Reduced voltage type controllers shall be required for motors over 50 hp to limit inrush current 280 to acceptable limits for the generator and to minimize voltage dip. Prepare voltage dip calculations to verify proper selection of controllers for the service intended and submit to Owner's Representative for approval.

Motor controllers with a working power rating of 1 hp or greater shall typically be provided with low voltage protection (LVP) to avoid excess starting currents when power is lost and then re-285 established. Employ low voltage release (LVR) on motor controllers vital to the operation of the ship's propulsion, as shown on References Error! Reference source not found. and (3C) and other systems required by regulation.

Motor controllers shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. Single-phase fractional horsepower motors may use manual LVR effect controllers. Label each starter with the load 290 description and circuit number.

Reference (3C) shall be used as a guide for required motor controllers. Final quantities and types are the contractor’s responsibility, subject to approval by the Owner's Representative.

302.4 Variable Speed Drives

Variable speed motor controllers shall meet the requirement of the system load. Where variable 295 frequency drives (VFD) are specified, the VFD shall be supplied by the same vendor as the controlled motor assembly, and shall be programmed during system commissioning to provide for the flow (water or air) required for proper system operation during each mode of operation. Local and remote control stations shall be provided with illuminated pushbuttons that select/indicate the mode of operation. 300


Page: 300-10

Label each VFD with the load description and circuit number.

Reference (3C) shall be used as a guide for required VFDs. Final quantities and types are the Contractor's responsibility, subject to approval by the Owner's Representative.

302.5 Motor Control Centers

Motor control centers (MCCs) shall be used to consolidate certain motor controllers as depicted 305 in References Error! Reference source not found. and (3C). MCCs shall provide electrical services to motor-driven rotating machinery operating on 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded circuits supplied with a nominal voltage of 480 VAC. Each MCC branch circuit motor and motor control system shall provide stand-alone functionality. MCCs shall provide a means of disconnecting and locking out individual motor circuits at the motor control center. The 310 disconnect device is to indicate whether the device is open or closed.

Construct each MCC to meet the degree of protection suitable for the intended location. Design and construct the equipment to provide a dead front degree of construction. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner's Representative, front access for all serviceable components is required. Service access from the rear shall be limited to maintenance of bus connections, circuit breaker 315 stab connections to field loads and making up ship's cable and shipping splits on installation as applicable.

MCCs shall be Square D or equal. Enough sections shall be provided at each MCC to house each motor controller shown in Reference (3C) with a 20% margin for future controller addition or two (2) additional sections, whichever is greater. 320

302.6 Fire/Ventilation Shutdown Circuit

Ventilation fans, fuel consuming machinery, and fuel oil pumps shall be provided with separately fused, remotely tripped motor controllers or under-voltage trip circuit breakers that will shut down upon interruption of the fire relay (FR) shutdown circuit (refer to Reference (3C)). Manual switches capable of interrupting the shutdown circuit shall be located in the Pilot 325 House and EOS. Each switch shall de-energize a control relay that will initiate the shutdown of the connected motors and machinery. Separate shut down circuits shall be provided for accommodation ventilation and engine room ventilation. A red phenolic placard shall be provided adjacent to the switch labeled Fire Shutdown and provide reset procedures.

The shutdown switch for the Emergency Generator Room ventilation fans shall be located 330 immediately outside the space. The shutdown switch for fuel consuming machinery and fuel oil pumps shall be located at an open deck location on the Main Deck near the engine room clean agent release. The final locations shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

303 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

303.1 General 335

Circuit breakers shall be of the molded-case type. Except where noted otherwise, breakers shall be quick-make/quick-break with thermal-magnetic tripping mechanism and shall be trip-free on overload or short circuit. Breakers shall be rated for operation in a 50°C (122°F) ambient temperature. Multi-pole breakers shall have a common trip.


Page: 300-11

Each feeder circuit breaker shall have an interruption rating not less than the maximum fault 340 current available at the point at which the device is installed. Selective trip capability shall be provided between generators, bus feeders, and feeder protective devices.

The Contractor shall provide one (1) additional circuit breaker of each size, type, and rating of installed circuit breaker per vessel and deliver to Staten Island, NY. This requirement is in addition to circuit breakers installed in panel boards and load centers in accordance with 345 Reference (3C).

303.2 Generator Circuit Breakers

The generator circuit breakers shall be Square D or equal, trip-free, draw-out type with adjustable short and long time over current trips. Instantaneous trips shall be disabled. These circuit breakers shall be provided with electric operators. Suitably protect the mechanical close 350 device to prevent accidental operation. Equip circuit breakers with a mechanical means of indicating the open and closed positions. Provide a manual and electrical means of charging the stored energy mechanism.

Provide under-voltage protection to prevent the generator circuit breaker from closing when the generator is not generating voltage within the specified limits. The long time over-current 355 protection is not to exceed 115% of the continuous load rating of the generator set.

Provide one set of any special tools required for removing the draw-out type circuit breakers per vessel. Provide pilot lights to indicate circuit breaker status. Each draw out circuit breaker must be able to be removed from the switchboard without disconnecting the power to the circuit breaker or switchboard. Circuit breakers serving as transfer and/or tie switches shall be capable 360 of more than 3,000 full current switching cycles without requiring service.

Mount each generator circuit breaker in an independent section. In turn, each circuit breaker section shall be compartmentally segregated with sheet metal barrier construction. This construction shall provide a physical barrier between bus-work, control, metering, and distribution compartmental sections. 365

304 CABLEWAYS AND WIRING

304.1 Cables

Electrical distribution cable shall meet the specifications of IEEE-1580 (2001), and shall be labeled as suitable for shipboard use. All insulation shall be type LSE or LSX; halogen free and suitable for operation with 90°C (194°F) conductors. Cable jacketing shall be halogen free, type 370 L or TPO. Cable shall be unarmored, and acceptable to USCG. Cable shall be de-rated as appropriate when banked. The Contract Guidance Drawings reflect the use of IEEE-1580 cable.

The following cable types are acceptable for power distribution:

SLSXL DLSXL TLSXL FLSXL SLSEL DLSEL TLSEL FLSEL SLSXTPO DLSXTPO SLSXTPO FLSXTPO SLSETPO DLSETPO TLSETPO FLSETPO


Page: 300-12

Cable complying with MIL-C-24643 may be substituted for IEEE-1580 cable, with Owner’s Representative's approval. 375

Special USCG approved cable may be required and used for electronic equipment as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and confirmed with the Owner's Representative.

No cable smaller than 4100 circular mils (14 AWG) in size shall be used for general power and lighting service.

Wire sizes indicated in the Contract Guidance Drawings are nominal. It shall be the 380 responsibility of the Contractor to calculate circuit voltage drops and actual amperage to determine final wire size to comply with ABS and USCG requirements, based on actual cable lengths.

304.2 Cable Installation

Cables routed through interior passenger and crew areas on the Main Deck and above shall be 385 concealed. Where bulkhead construction makes concealment demonstrably impractical, wiring shall be neatly formed and installed on the surface in a craftsman-like manner, paying particular attention to the aesthetics of the installation and protection of the cable. Cables shall be concealed from weather to the maximum extent possible.

Exercise extreme care during installation of cable, wire, and other equipment that the external 390 jacket of the cable or wire is not nicked, scraped, abraded, cut, burned, or otherwise damaged. Replace in its entirety any cable or wire that is damaged in any way. Splices are not permitted as a means to repair or extend cables.

304.3 Cable Routing

Run all cable as directly as practicable, avoiding hazardous or otherwise undesirable locations, 395 generally as shown in Reference (3B). Cables shall not be run in way of access cuts and/or patches. Protect cables which may be subject to mechanical damage with metal guards.

Exercise extreme care to ensure that no wireways or cables cross or otherwise interfere with bolted equipment removal patches (BERP) in the mechanical spaces.

Install power and lighting cables in separate wireways from communication, alarm, monitoring, 400 signal, control, and other cables affected by electromagnetic interference. Segregate critical circuits as recommended by the associated equipment manufacturer and as required by 46 CFR §111. The Contractor shall test and demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative that no interference experienced on any control or communication. Where communication, alarm, monitoring, signal, control, and other susceptible cables cross power cables, the crossing shall be 405 at 90 degrees.

304.4 Cableways and Hangers

Cables shall be routed in cableways as shown in Reference (3B). Main cableways shall be provided between the Engine Room and Propulsion Rooms and between the Engine Room and the Pilot Houses. Cableways and MCTs shall be sized to provide 20% capacity unused and 410


Page: 300-13

available for future installations. Signal and power cables shall be separated from one another and shall utilize separate MCTs. MCTs be installed in the Pilot House Deck under each console and below control, monitoring, communications, signal, and power enclosures shall have 50% unused capacity.

Cableways shall be run such that they are easily accessible and not blocked by other 415 infrastructure (HVAC ducts, pipes, etc.).

Cable hangers shall be constructed of steel and shall be welded to the ship structure or affixed with welded studs, nuts, and washers. Cables shall be secured to the hangers with metallic banding in accordance with 46 CFR Subchapter J. Hangers shall be spaced approximately 24 inches apart, and shall be painted or fabricated from stainless steel. 420

304.5 Penetrations

In decks, collars shall extend above the finished deck no less than 6 inches. Deck penetrations susceptible to damage shall have kick-tubes or extended casings that are a minimum of 9 inches above the finished deck.

Watertight, fire-tight and weathertight penetrations for multi-cable runs shall be made using 425 cable transits, RISE/NOFIRNO, or equal. Stuffing tubes shall be used only for individual cable penetrations. Voids created by collars shall be covered so as not to accumulate waste and dirt. Multiple cable transits shall use regulatory approved fire rated sealers such as synthetic rubber blocks and fire sealer. Fire-tight penetrations shall be insulated to the fire rating of the boundary.

Cable transits shall be installed with capacity for future addition of 15% of the average cable size 430 within the transit. However, for primary cable runs, this margin shall be 25%.

When using fire sealer type transits (Rise/NOFIRNO style), avoid over packing the transit. At least 1/2 inch space shall be maintained between each cable, and from each cable to the collar or frame.

Cable penetrations through bulkheads and decks not required to be watertight, weathertight or 435 fire-tight, shall be lined with flat bar or structural tubing to form collars. The collars shall be continuously welded to metal surfaces, and all rough edges shall be smoothed. Cables penetrating such openings shall be secured to prevent chafing.

304.6 Cable Identification

All cables shall be labeled at entrance and exits of stuffing tubes and bulkhead and deck 440 penetrations. Cables shall be permanently labeled at the initial installation on board the vessel. Cables shall be identified at control consoles and junction boxes for signal and/or control cables. Cables shall be labeled with circuit number or cable designation, with embossed aluminum tags or machine printed labels. Cable tags shall be attached to cables by banding or permanent nylon cable ties. Cable identification materials on the exterior shall be UV stabilized. Individual 445 conductors shall be provided with nylon sleeves and unique identifiers for each conductor in a cable.


Page: 300-14

304.7 Junction Boxes

Junction boxes shall be accessible. The Contractor shall not install junction boxes on bulkheads behind joinery. Where practicable, the junction boxes shall be installed in the overhead. In 450 cases where junction boxes must be located on bulkheads behind joinery, the Contractor shall provide for access to the junction box in the finished joinery panel. Clearly label the location of hidden junction boxes on the outside of the ceiling panel or bulkhead. Junction boxes shall be identified with phenolic tags, black with white lettering, which corresponds with the circuit that supplies power to the box. 455

310 GENERATOR SETS

310.1 General

Install the SSDGs and emergency generator as shown in References (3A) and (3C). Each generator shall be provided with an electric heater to prevent condensation in the windings. The heaters shall automatically switch ON when the generator is not running, and OFF when the 460 generator is running. Each generator engine shall be equipped with a forced circulation block heater, refer to Section 256.4.

The neutral conductor is not to be made accessible, and is not to be brought out of the machine. Insulate, tape, and clearly identify the neutral conductors to prevent accidental connection in the future. All cables, pipes, and hoses connected to the generator sets shall be suitably flexible to 465 withstand normal generator vibration without damage.

Each generator shall be complete with manual and automatic voltage regulation control modules, and shall include local and remote monitoring and control. Power the governors, voltage regulators, and other control power consumers from uninterruptible power sources.

Generators shall be equipped with brushless, permanent magnet excitation, digital voltage 470 regulator with reactive droop capability, 3-phase voltage sensing, KVAR/PF modes, and RFI suppression. Generators shall have Marine Class H insulation, Class F temperature rise, surface mount platinum bearing and stator RTDs, and IP23 protection.

310.2 Ship Service Diesel Generator Sets

The Contractor shall provide and install three (3) ABS-certified, marine continuous duty diesel 475 generator sets, Caterpillar C18 or equal, driving 480 V, 60 Hz, 3-phase generators rated at 425 kW at 0.8 P.F., 1800 rpm.

All ship service generator engines shall be heat exchanger cooled with dry exhaust. See Group 200 for supporting engine piping system details. The generator shall be grounded to the hull structure. 480

All ship service generators shall have compressed air starting. Generators shall be equipped with a complete air start system including air start motors (TDI model T306-60015-01R-B or equal) and starting relay valve (TDI PN RLVA-25683-0012-01 or equal).

Generators shall be started at the switchboard by remote push button for run and switchboard generated signal for standby mode and off position. A mounted instrument panel with local 485


Page: 300-15

emergency shutdown shall also be provided. Engine control module (ECM) shutdowns for low lube oil pressure, low oil level, low fuel pressure and high jacket water temperature shall be included. Generators shall be equipped with an electric governor with control.

Each SSDG engine shall be certified to current applicable EPA emissions standards. The engines shall be provided with all necessary documentation to demonstrate compliance with 490 current MARPOL Annex VI and EPA emissions requirements. The engines shall burn ultra-low sulfur No. 2 diesel fuel.

Lube oil system shall have duplex oil filter, center sump oil pan, oil cooler heat exchanger, and gear driven oil pump.

Fuel system shall have duplex fuel filter, and gear driven transfer pump, and manual priming 495 pump.

Each SSDG set shall be mounted on a steel skid foundation with isolation mounts and integral drip pan with drain. The diesel engine and generator shall be directly mounted to the common steel skid with isolation mounts located between the skid and the foundation structure. The combined skid and isolation mount system shall minimize the transfer of engine vibration to the 500 vessel structure. SSDG engine noise and vibration characteristics, including mounting systems shall be included in noise and vibration analyses required in Section 073 of these Technical Specifications.

Each generator shall be supplied with complete, with all required air filters, fuel filters, oil filters, lubricating oil, coolant, belts, and other consumables necessary to provide an operational 505 installation.

The Contractor shall provide one (1) complete set of special tools per vessel as required for generator operation and maintenance. Special tools are any non-commercial tools, repair appliances, test equipment, diagnostic computers and software, or specialized adaptors, which do not conform to ANSI or other internationally recognized standards. Diagnostic computers or 510 software shall include software updates for the duration of the warranty period.

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 300 - 2 with each generator and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative.

Table 300 - 2: Ship Service Genset ABS Recommended and Operationally Required Parts

Qty Item

1 Sea Water pump 1 Jacket Water pump 1 Aftercooler pump 1 Pressure cap 24 Fuel filters 24 Oil filters 24 Crank case filters 1 Starter motor


Page: 300-16

Qty Item

1 Voltage regulator 1 Alternator 1 Serpentine belt (if equipped) 1 Fuel injector 1 Cylinder pack, complete set 1 Cylinder head assembly, complete set 1 Seals, gaskets, and bearing for one cylinder, complete set

515

310.3 Emergency Generator

The Contractor shall provide and install one (1) ABS certified, marine continuous duty diesel emergency generator set, Caterpillar C18 or equal, sized to drive a 480 V, 60 Hz, 3-phase generator rated at 400 kW at 0.8 P.F., 1800 rpm. The Emergency Generator shall be of the same manufacture as the SSDGs. 520

The emergency generator engine shall be certified to current applicable EPA emissions standards. The engine shall be provided with all necessary documentation to demonstrate compliance with current MARPOL Annex VI and EPA emissions requirements. The engine shall burn ultra-low sulfur No. 2 diesel fuel.

Lube oil system shall have duplex oil filter, center sump oil pan, oil cooler heat exchanger, and 525 gear driven oil pump.

Fuel system shall have duplex fuel filter, and gear driven transfer pump, and manual priming pump.

The generator shall be mounted on a fabricated steel skid foundation with isolation mounts and integral drip pan with drain plug. 530

The generator shall be supplied with an automatic cranking cycle control panel, with an interlock to prevent a start attempt while the diesel engine is running. Provide an electric governor with control. The generator shall be provided with 24 VDC electric starting, radiator cooling, and engine driven radiator fan.

Provide the emergency generator with a voltage regulator cutout switch and a manual voltage 535 regulator, both located on the front panel of the generator control section of the emergency switchboard. ECM shutdowns for low lube oil pressure, low oil level and low fuel pressure shall be included. A high jacket water temperature alarm shall also be included.

The engine shall be fitted with engine-mounted gauge panel with manual start/stop and emergency stop button. Alarms shall be integrated with the ship's machinery alarm system. 540

Provide the ABS recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 300 - 3 with the emergency generator and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative.


Page: 300-17

Table 300 - 3: Em. Genset ABS Recommended and Operationally Required Parts

Qty Item

3 Fan belts 1 Sea water pump 1 Jacket water pump 1 Aftercooler pump 1 Pressure cap 24 Fuel filters 24 Oil filters 24 Crank case filters 1 Starter motor 1 Voltage regulator 1 Alternator 1 Serpentine belt (if equipped) 1 Fuel injector 1 Cylinder pack, complete set 1 Cylinder head assembly, complete set 1 Seals, gaskets, and bearing for one cylinder, complete set

320 SWITCHBOARDS 545

320.1 General

The Contractor shall provide a ship service switchboard for the control of SSDGs, connection to shore power, and distribution of the 480 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz power as shown on Reference (3C). A separate switchboard section shall provide for the distribution of the 120 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz for normal power and lighting systems. An emergency switchboard shall be 550 provided for control, operation, and protection of the emergency generator, and distribution of emergency power.

Both the main and emergency switchboards shall be provided by the same manufacturer. The switchboard manufacturer shall be an approved UL 891 facility and shall have been on the UL 891 approved list for at least three (3) years prior to receiving the Contractor's order to build the 555 switchboards.

The switchboards shall be designed for continuous operation at 50°C (122°F) and shall operate satisfactorily when inclined at an angle of 30° in any direction.

The switchboards shall provide all necessary controls, regulation, protective relaying, and load management required for the generators, bus ties, and shore power systems. 560

The Contractor shall provide wiring diagrams and shop drawings of the switchboards to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to fabrication. The drawings shall clearly show


Page: 300-18

design, construction material, finish installation, front layout, point-to-point wiring diagrams, material list, mounting details, and label plate list including floaters for terminal blocks.

320.2 Switchboard Construction 565

Switchboard construction shall be dead front, drip-proof enclosed. Provide a foundation for bolting the switchboard to ship structure. Include sections for:

Generator monitoring and control including indicator lights, volt meter, and frequency meter.

Ground current monitoring including indicator lights and a metering system. 570

Insulation resistance monitoring system. Shore power monitoring including indicator lights, volt meter, and phase rotation

indicator. Instrument fuses, transformers, etc. (Fuses shall be ganged into one panel area and

provide access through a hinged panel). 575

Engine idle/rated rpm switch and frequency adjustment.

Voltage regulation with automatic shutoff to allow engine idling for each SSDG. Instruments shall be standard 250°, 4 1/4 inch rectangular switchboard type. Indicator lights shall be shall be LEDs.

Provide the switchboard with copper bus bars rated and sized to accommodate up to 20% future 580 expansion of loads. The bus shall provide suitable connections for the line side feeders and for future expansion. Bus bars shall be hard drawn, commercially pure copper. The contact surfaces of all bus connections shall be silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.0005 inches. For stud connections, the threads shall be silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.0004 inches. Bolts, washers, and nuts used to maintain bus contact shall be corrosion-resisting material. 585

The Contractor shall prepare and submit detailed fabrications drawings of the switchboard for review and approval by the Owner's Representative.

Generator circuit breakers shall be trip-free, draw-out type with short time delay and long time delay over current trips. Generator circuit breakers shall be provided with electric operators and shall be fitted with plug-in mounting assemblies to provide a draw-out function to be able to 590 isolate the switchboard bus from the respective power sources. Generator circuit breakers and the shore power circuit breaker shall be electrically interlocked so shore power and generator power cannot be closed to the bus simultaneously, except during transition as indicated in Section 320.3.

Distribution breakers shall be molded case, Square D I-Line or equal, with trip and frame sizes as 595 appropriate for the individual loads.

The switchboard shall be constructed such that a lockout device can be fitted to each circuit breaker. Doors shall be equipped with brackets, or locking arms, for holding them in the open position. A horizontal, non-conductive grab rail shall be provided on the front of each section of


Page: 300-19

the switchboard to prevent accidental contact with switchboard components. All panels shall be 600 held closed with captive knurled fasteners.

Maintain proper distances between live parts of different potentials, and structural metal components. Insulating materials shall be suitable for the working potentials of the switchboard.

Provide lighting that adequately illuminates the switchboard without excessive glare. Lighting shall consist of a row of LED lamps, with lenses, that mount integrally to the drip shields and 605 extend the full length of the switchboard. Connect lighting fixtures to the emergency power source.

Each switchboard section which includes IEC style block systems for control wiring shall have ferrules on each conductor. Crimp ferrules shall be in accordance with IEC 60 999-1 and IEC 60 947-1. 610

Where space is provided for the future installation of a circuit breaker, it shall be complete in all respects with the exception of the circuit breaker and lugs. Provide all necessary circuit breaker studs and mounting hardware. The front panel shall be cut out and fitted with a suitable cover plate.

Provide sufficient access space for maintenance of the switchboard per manufacturer's 615 instructions and IEEE-45 (2002). The switchboard cabinet sections shall provide front access only, with arc flash mitigation and arc ducts.

The structural steel switchboard components shall be epoxy powder coated. Other corrosion protection system may be substituted with Owner's Representative approval.

The switchboard control wiring shall be of SIS type, wire rated to 90°C (194°F). The control 620 circuits shall use a shrink tube labeling system for all circuit floaters. All internal wiring floaters must be constructed of polyolefin polymer, or equal, and meet low smoke zero halogen criteria. Before delivery, shrink the tube labels onto their respective conductors.

Dielectric mats shall be provided on the deck in front of the ship service and emergency switchboards. 625

320.3 Main Switchboard Operation

The main switchboard shall provide all the instrumentation, controls, and circuitry required for control and monitoring of the ship service electrical generation and distribution system. One (1) generator provides normal electrical service. The system shall have the ability to run any two (2) generators in parallel. Switchboard interlocks shall prevent the operation of three (3) generators 630 in parallel.

Each SSDG set shall have Run, Standby, and Shut Down operating modes, selectable with a switch on the switchboard. When in Standby mode each SSDG will be ready to automatically start, parallel, and assume its proportional part of the load when load reaches 90% of the capacity of the on-line generator set for 30 seconds. The standby startup load and time delay shall be 635


Page: 300-20

adjustable. Additionally, it shall automatically start, accelerate to rated speed, and connect to the bus upon main bus voltage failure within eight (8) seconds.

The switchboard shall be equipped to allow manual and automatic parallel operation. In Manual Mode the generators operate with speed and voltage droop. The operator manually synchronizes and manually adjusts engine speed and generator voltage. In Automatic Mode the generators 640 synchronize and parallel automatically, and operate isochronously with constant voltage.

Primary control power for switchboards shall be derived from internal control transformers provided with appropriate overcurrent protection. Secondary control power shall be provided from DC uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), NewMar Nav-Pac or equal, as shown in Reference (3D). 645

The switchboard automation shall provide the ability for closed (bumpless) transition between ship supply and shore power, or the reverse. The ship and shore supplies shall operate in parallel for not more than 100 milliseconds. The switchboard shall include monitoring of shore power voltage, frequency, and phase sequence. Before paralleling the ship service bus to shore power, the automatic voltage regulator shall adjust the voltage on the ship service bus to match that of 650 the shore power connection.

Switchboard interlocks shall prevent manual paralleling of the ship service bus and shore power, and shall prevent the operation of the automatic transition function when voltage is not present on both the ship service bus and shore power feed at the switchboard. Interlocks shall also prevent transitioning from generator power to shore power when the load on the ship service bus 655 exceeds the capacity of the shore power feed. The switchboard automation shall open the shore power circuit breaker upon voltage failure from the shore supply.

320.4 Switchboard Arrangement and Location

The switchboard shall be located in the EOS (Reference (3A)) and installed in accordance with 46 CFR §111.30-1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a switchboard arrangement plan to 660 the Owner's Representative for approval prior to placement of the purchase order, and a mockup of the switchboard shall be constructed in accordance with Section 640.6 of these Technical Specifications. The arrangement plan shall be detailed, complete with features and technical data on all devices.

The Contractor shall provide removable closure panels constructed of sheet metal matching the 665 switchboard or joiner panels (refer to Section 621) at the ends of the switchboard as needed to prevent access to the back of the switchboard. Provide louvers or mesh openings in the panels where required for ventilation of switchboard.

320.5 Emergency Switchboard

The Contractor shall arrange the emergency switchboard for control, operation and protection of 670 the emergency diesel generator, including automatic transfer equipment, and distribution of emergency power. Under normal operations, the emergency switchboard loads shall be supplied by the ship service switchboard via the emergency bus tie circuit.


Page: 300-21

Provide the emergency generator control system with an automatic generator starting system including starting battery bank. The battery shall be capable of providing six (6) consecutive 675 starts.

Reference (3C) shows the emergency transformer and emergency 120 V panels in separate enclosures adjacent to the emergency switchboard. At Contractor option, some or all of these items may be integrated into the emergency switchboard.

320.6 Emergency Switchboard Operation 680

If the service from the ship service bus drops to 80% of rated voltage for five (5) seconds, the circuitry shall signal the emergency generator to start. As the emergency generator reaches 90% of rated output voltage, the emergency switchboard loads shall shift from the ship service bus to the emergency generator. The transition shall take less than 15 seconds.

After restoration of rated voltage to the ship service bus, the power supply to emergency loads 685 shall require manual transfer from the emergency generator to the ship service bus. The bus tie circuit breaker on the ship service switchboard shall be manually actuated, and the circuit breakers at the emergency switchboard, which selects the power source to the emergency bus, shall be electrically actuated from the EOS. After load is removed from the emergency generator, the emergency generator shall automatically proceed through a cool down and 690 shutdown sequence. An indication light on the face of the ship service switchboard shall indicate when the emergency generator is operating.

320.7 Emergency Switchboard Arrangement and Location

The emergency switchboard shall be located in the Emergency Generator Room and installed in accordance with USCG requirements. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a switchboard 695 arrangement plan to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to placement of the purchase order. The arrangement plan shall be detailed, complete with features and technical data on all devices.

320.8 Switchboard Instruments

Switchboard instruments shall have an accuracy of ±1%. The instruments shall be suitable for 700 withstanding shipboard vibration and shall operate satisfactorily when inclined 30° in any direction. All switchboard meters shall have 4 1/2 inch diameter dials with 250-degree scale. Multiple function digital meters will be considered for kW, generator current, generator voltage and power factor. Indicator lights shall be LEDs.

Arrange pilot devices and operators in logical groups physically located respective to function. 705 Pilot devices shall be of the illuminated type and provide active illumination when in operation. Pilot lamp and operator terminals mounted on the switchboard doors shall provide finger safe and back of hand safe protection from electrical shock. Provide indicator/pilot lights in the switchboards with momentary push-to-test capability.

The switchboards shall containm at a minimum and not limited to, the instrumentation and 710 control devices listed in Table 300 - 4.


Page: 300-22

Table 300 - 4: Switchboard Instrumentation and Controls

Item Service For

AC ammeter with selector switch 1 for each generator - selector switch allows current to be read in each phase (A, B, C). 1 generator switch shall have an additional position for reading one phase of the shore power

AC voltmeter (0 to 600 Volts) with selector switch

1 for each generator - selector switch allows voltage to be read between each phase pair of generator and one phase of the bus (A-B, B-C, C-A, bus). 1 switch shall have additional positions for reading each phase of the shore power

AC wattmeter 1 for each generator Power factor meter 1 for each generator AC frequency meters (55 to 65 Hz) 1 with selector switch to sense between each

generator and its circuit breaker, and to sense the bus

Indicator light – power available 1 to be permanently connected on the generator side of each generator circuit breaker

Speed control device 1 for each generator prime mover Idle-Run switch 1 for each generator prime mover Reverse power relay 1 for each generator Synchroscope with synchronizing lamps and selector switch

1 to allow paralleling of any generator to the main bus

Synchronizing check relay 1 for each generator circuit breaker to prevent out–of– phase paralleling

Automatic voltage regulator 1 for each generator – unless mounted in generator enclosure or separate generator control unit

Voltage adjusting device 1 for each generator automatic voltage regulator Manual voltage regulator control rheostat with transfer switch

1 for each generator – transfer switch allows transfer between automatic and manual voltage regulator control

Ground fault indicator with push to test switch

Ship service bus

Indicator light – shore power available Senses between shore power circuit breaker and shore power inlet

Phase sequence indicator Compare shore power feed to main bus OFF-STANDBY-ON generator mode switch

1 for each generator

Indication lights – E-Gen Status Green – Auto; Red – not in auto

Use potential transformers (PTs) and current transformers (CTs) with all instruments, meters, and protective relays.

Provide CTs with shorting terminal blocks so that it is possible to short out the current 715 transformer under load. Provide suitable protective devices to prevent high voltages in the event


Page: 300-23

of open circuits. Match instrument and relay CTs to switchboard components and meters to optimize the metering scale.

On each ungrounded system, install a three (3) light ground detection system with momentary disconnect switch to indicate fault conditions. On each grounded system, install a current 720 transformer around the neutral grounding conductor, and connect to a ground current ammeter with disconnect switch. Ground detection shall comply with 46 CFR §111.05 and 111.30-25.

321 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS

The Contractor shall provide distribution of electrical power in general accordance with Reference (3C). All protective and control devices and wiring shall meet ABS and USCG 725 requirements.

The electrical power distribution system shall include all electrical cabling, wiring, transformers, distribution panels, control switching equipment, protective devices, and automatic bus transfer equipment sufficient to make a complete, functional, and fully operational electrical power distribution system. 730

The distribution system shall include an emergency power distribution system. Under normal conditions, the emergency power distribution loads shall be fed from the ship service generator(s), but shall be supplied by the emergency generator during periods when the normal ship service power has been interrupted.

Locate electrical equipment and components in a manner that will most readily facilitate 735 operation and allow for ease of maintenance. Doors and panels must be capable of being fully opened to facilitate maintenance and repair. Provide sufficient clear space in front of major electrical cabinets to allow removal of the largest internal components.

The Contractor remains wholly responsible for ensuring that the loads are correctly connected within the distribution system. Ensure that the design and installation of electrical circuits and 740 systems complies with the Regulatory Body requirements.

Electrical equipment that is not specifically required to be portable shall be permanently connected to the ship's wiring. Where the use of flexible cord is unavoidable, ground the equipment frame by an additional conductor in the cord. Manufactured appliances supplied with plug and cord connections, such as food service area and crew galley equipment, shall be 745 supplied by dedicated receptacles, which include grounding conductors.

On circuits serving multiple loads, such as heaters, lighting, and receptacles, the removal of any device shall not interrupt the continuity of the grounded conductor or equipment grounding conductor.

321.1 Distribution Panels and Load Centers 750

Distribution panels and load centers shall have main lugs only. Bus bars and internal conductors shall be tin or silver plated copper. Circuit breakers shall be plug on type, removable from the front of the panel. Panel bussing shall be braced to withstand the maximum available fault current. Distribution panels and load centers shall have removable sheet metal front covers with


Page: 300-24

a cutout for the circuit breaker toggle, set point, and trip mechanism. Cutouts shall have a gasket 755 to seal the covers around the cutout.

For 480 V, provide power distribution panels manufactured by the Square D Company Class 2110 or equal, I-Line type HCN, for 480 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire service and for the 240 and 120 V 3-phase, 3-wire distribution served directly by transformers.

For 480 V, provide power distribution panels manufactured by the Square D Company type NQ 760 or equal rated for 240 VAC, 3-phase, 4-wire service.

Terminals for all conductors, both feeder and branch circuits, shall be UL listed as suitable for copper conductor material.

Provide and install distribution panels with Square D Class 730 type QO (plug-on) or equal, quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-indicating circuit breakers having a common 765 trip on all multi-pole breakers, unless noted otherwise.

321.2 Enclosures and Interiors

Design panel board interiors so that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units. Interiors shall be designed such that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping. 770

Assembled enclosures shall meet the ingress protection IP rating shown on Reference (3A), with locks keyed alike.

Fit a circuit directory frame and laminated card with a clear plastic covering on the inside of each distribution panel door as required by 46 CFR §111. The directory card shall not be permanently attached to the door but shall be removable for modification. Circuit designations and load 775 description of the circuit shall be typed in the proper place on the directory card, and indicated on individual breaker label plates affixed to each breaker. The circuit designations and load description shall correspond exactly to the FINAL AS BUILT Electrical One-Line Diagrams.

321.3 Snack Bar Power

Connect Snack Bar equipment normally supplied with connection terminals to a dedicated 780 branch circuit, through dedicated watertight junction boxes, under the counters and concealed from public view. These junction boxes shall contain terminal blocks for connection points. The equipment shall have liquid tight flex conduit from the service entrance of the equipment to a through-counter fitting. On the underside of the counter, from the through-counter fitting to the junction box, the continued conduit may be EMT or liquid tight flex conduit. 785

321.4 24 VDC Power Distribution Panels

Provide 24 VDC panels for navigation, control, communication, monitoring, and other DC electronic loads as required. These panels shall be powered from dedicated power supplies.

The 24 VDC power distribution panels shall be Square D, NQ type with two-pole circuit breakers of the appropriate rating. 790


Page: 300-25

Circuit breaker and panel labeling shall be similar to the Square D, NQ panel 240/120 V. Labeling requirements are outlined elsewhere in these Technical Specifications.

321.5 Transformers

Provide ship service and emergency 480 VAC to 120 VAC, 3-phase, enclosed drip-proof, dry type, non-ventilated transformers as shown on Reference (3C). Connect the transformers for 480 795 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta primaries and 120 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta secondaries.

For the Snack Bar area, provide ship service 480 VAC to 240/120 VAC, 3-phase, enclosed drip-proof, dry type, non-ventilated transformers as shown on Reference (3C). Connect the transformers for 480 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta primaries and 240V/120 VAC, 3-phase, 4-wire, delta secondary with a center tap. 800

For the HVAC heat pumps, provide ship service 480 VAC to 240 VAC, 3-phase, enclosed drip-proof, dry type, non-ventilated transformers as shown on Reference (3C). Connect the transformers for 480 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta primaries and 120 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta secondaries.

Transformers may be provided as 3-phase units in a single enclosure, or as three (3) single-phase 805 units connected to form a 3-phase transformer bank. Transformers shall be rated for continuous operation at 50°C (122°F).

Transformers shall comply with the applicable NEMA, IEEE and ANSI standards and shall be of continuous wound construction with electrostatic, box-shielded windings, and tap arrangements in the high voltage windings. 810

Transformers shall be grounded and installed in accordance with 46 CFR §111. Provide grounding through a single conductor of an appropriate size. The conductor shall be as short as is physically practicable. Ground neutrals of wye-connected transformers to the vessel's hull structure at the transformer bank. The shield shall also be grounded to the vessel's structure near the panel. Use different ground cables for the neutral ground and the shield ground. 815

Provide ground CTs on the neutral ground lead of the transformers with the indicating meters required by 46 CFR §111. Provide shorting terminals, using a plug in shorting device, for each ground CT.

321.6 Switches

Switches shall have positive snap action to maintain open or closed position. Switches, other 820 than 20A area lighting toggle switches, shall be equipped to allow locking the switch in the open position. Switches shall be labeled to indicate the function of each handle position. The rated ampacity of each switch shall be at least that of the circuit breaker supplying the circuit.

Area lighting switches shall be 125 V, 20 A, with handle set vertically. The UP position shall correspond to ON for all toggle switches unless the switch is installed in a three or four-way 825 switching configuration. Use watertight switches in exterior locations.


Page: 300-26

Switches mounted in lining panels or non-structural bulkheads shall be mounted with cover plates flush with the surface of the lining panel or non-structural bulkhead wherever possible. Switches shall be rigidly mounted to ship's structure, and shall not be mounted directly to the joiner panels. Use corrosion resistant fasteners to attach the wiring device enclosure to the plate. 830

322 RECEPTACLES

Provide and install receptacles as shown on References (3C) and (3E). Install 120 VAC hospital grade tamper resistant duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire (grounded) for portable equipment in all spaces, including holds, crew's quarters and passenger areas, except within hazardous zones.

Receptacles shall be rated for 15A or 20A, to match the circuit breaker supplying the circuit, and 835 shall use side mounted screw terminals. Push-in type connections shall not be used. Grounding conductors shall be extended to the panel supplying the circuit, and grounded to the hull with a welded stud, washers, and nut.

Each space and each workbench shall have at least one (1) unassigned receptacle. Large spaces shall have receptacles in numbers and locations adequate to provide complete coverage of the 840 space by portable appliances, tools or lights equipped with cords of not more than 25 feet in length, except that cords may be 50 feet long for open deck coverage.

Receptacles in passenger and crew areas shall be Leviton 8300-SGI or equal duplex, hospital grade, and tamper resistant. Receptacle color shall be confirmed by Owner’s Representative.

Use watertight receptacles in exterior locations, Hubbell 60W47H or equal. 845

Provide receptacles with ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection in all food prep areas, cleaning gear lockers, passenger and crew toilet areas, exterior areas, and at workbenches. GFCI protection may be provided via the branch circuit breaker, or with individual GFCI receptacles.

Watertight receptacles shall be provided at exterior flood light locations, as shown on Reference (3F), to provide dedicated plug in power to the floodlights. The receptacles shall be permanently 850 mounted in enclosures to the ship structure.

Receptacles mounted in lining panels or non-structural bulkheads shall be mounted with cover plates flush with the surface of the lining panel or non-structural bulkhead wherever possible. Receptacles shall be rigidly mounted to ships structure and shall not be mounted directly to the joiner panels. Use corrosion resistant fasteners to attach the wiring device enclosure to the plate. 855

322.1 Shore Power Connections

Shore power available at the Owner's terminals is 480 VAC, 3-phase, 3-wire, 200A.

Two (2) 480 VAC, 200A, 3-phase, 60 Hz, 3-wire shore power inlets, Hubbell MB2003W or equal, shall be provided. Locate one (1) at the Staten Island End, and one (1) at the New York End of the vessel, as shown on Reference (3F). A manual bus transfer switch shall be provided 860 near the ship service switchboard to select which shore power connection is in use.


Page: 300-27

330 LIGHTING

Provide and install a complete, functional, operational lighting system, including all wiring, fixtures, switches, controllers, junction boxes, cable transits, cable glands, and other items and devices. References (3F) and (3H) indicate the location of interior lighting. 865

Lighting systems are classified as "Normal" if they are supplied from the ship service switchboard and "Emergency" if they are supplied from the emergency switchboard. These supplies may be direct or indirect via transformers and distribution panels.

After preparing the voltage drop calculations, prepare lighting deck plans to show the actual configuration of the lighting and identify the cable numbering accordingly. The Contractor shall 870 develop a lighting plan to reflect the actual circuits assigned and the wiring architecture to include all junction boxes and switches for approval by the Owner's Representative.

Lighting design for the vessel shall follow the recommendations of the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Publication RP-12, Recommended Practice for Marine Lighting. The contractor shall prepare a lighting level analysis and submit to the Owner’s Representative for approval. 875 After installation, the contractor shall measure the lighting levels throughout the vessel and submit the results of this analysis to the Owner’s Representative to verify that the lighting levels match the approved design.

All lighting fixtures shall be UL 1598A listed, except as otherwise required.

Emergency lighting fixtures in accommodation areas and public spaces shall be drip-proof as a 880 minimum and meet UL 1598A.

332 LIGHTING FIXTURES

Lighting fixtures shall be provided and installed as outlined in these Technical Specifications and shown on References (3C), (3F) and (3H).

Fixture locations are approximate and the Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting fixture 885 location to avoid interferences with structure, piping, ventilation, cableways, and other items. Exact fixture locations may be modified as required to satisfy general illumination requirements, as well as task lighting for gauges, instruments, switchboards, pantry sinks and counters, workbenches, etc. Final light fixture locations are subject to Owner's Representative approval.

Lighting in machinery spaces shall generally be located at the lower extent of ducting, piping, 890 structure, cableways, and exhaust pipes to minimize light obstruction. Lighting in other spaces shall generally be mounted, with standoffs or pendants as necessary, so that the bottom of the fixture is flush with the finished ceiling.

Lighting fixtures installed in suspended grid ceilings shall be designed for the type of installation and shall be light emitting diode (LED) type. Grid mounted fixtures shall be flush or have 895 similar relief to ceiling panels. Lighting fixtures shall have a separate means of support and not be directly connected to bulkhead or ceiling panels. Lamps shall be accessible by means of opening a hinged translucent panel that forms the lighted face of the fixture and shall not require removal of the fixture or any joiner work.


Page: 300-28

Alternative fixtures must be approved by the Owner's Representative, and utilize the same lamp, 900 where replaceable, as the original specified fixture. Alternative fixtures shall be constructed to UL 1598 and 1598A or equivalent, as recognized by USCG.

Fixtures in weather areas and in mechanical spaces and voids shall have unused cable entry holes plugged with drip-proof plugs. Sealing entry holes with caulking does not satisfy this requirement. Fixtures exposed to weather shall be mounted with stainless steel fasteners, grade 905 316.

Interior lighting in voids, mechanical spaces, fan rooms, and other small utility spaces shall be marine grade, LED type fixtures, and as shown on Reference (3F). The fixtures shall have removable gear trays, Aluzinc coated sheet steel housings, epoxy powder coat finish, and IP 54 rating. Battery backups shall be provided when noted with an E on Reference (3F). Fixtures 910 shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz.

Exterior jelly jar style lights shall be Pauluhn ProGard 729/730/al Globe & Guard series, or equal. The fixture, and any substitution, shall be compatible with the Phoenix Products Metallic VP LED Retrofit Kit, or equal. Each light fixture shall have an aluminum body, and aluminum guard surrounding the globe. Globes shall be clear glass. 915

Interior lighting in finished spaces shall be as indicated in the Ceiling & Lighting Fixture Schedule on Reference (3H).

332.1 Exit Lighting

Provide and install illuminated exit signs above doorways, indicating escape paths to open deck, as shown in Reference (3F). Installation shall comply with regulatory requirements. Lights shall 920 satisfy UL 1598A, shall contain internal battery backups adequate to power the fixture for 30 minutes, and shall be powered by the nearest emergency lighting circuit. Exit fixtures shall have text and arrows on one or both sides, as appropriate for the location, to indicate the nearest exit to the stair towers or Weather Decks.

332.2 Floodlights 925

Provide and install floodlights as shown in Reference (3F). Floodlights shall be powered via dedicated watertight plug and receptacle pairs as described in Section 322. Floodlights shall be provided for the launching of the rescue boats and life rafts. Exterior floodlights shall be switched from the Pilot Houses or locally per Reference (3F).

332.3 Searchlights 930

Provide and install four (4), 25 million candlepower 350-watt xenon searchlights, one (1) on each side of both Pilot House tops, as shown in Reference (3F). Each searchlight shall have a remote electric controller unit operable from inside the Pilot House. Searchlights shall be Carlisle & Finch XY3EDE-24ARF3 or equal, with anti-icing heater, beam focus capability and #CFX350 lamp. Final controller location shall be subject to Owner's Representative approval. 935


Page: 300-29

332.4 Pilot House Night Lighting

Provide an independently switched LED lamp with red filter for each Pilot House chart table. Red filter lighting shall also be provided in the hall and stairway leading to each Pilot House. These lamps shall be energized from the emergency circuit. Ceiling mounted fixtures located in the Pilot Houses shall be switched, and independently energized from the main or emergency 940 circuit, as shown on References (3C) and (3F).

Provide red filters or lamps on all instrument lighting, which would interfere with the night vision of Pilot House personnel. Arrange indicator lights on the Pilot House consoles and aft Pilot House bulkheads so they create minimum reflection on Pilot House windows during night operations. Lights used for indication, gauge lighting, or other non-general lighting applications 945 in the Pilot House shall be dimmable.

332.5 Labeling

Provide each emergency battery ballast lighting fixture with an engraved laminated phenolic label having a white letter E on a red background. Locate the label in relation to the fixture to clearly associate one with the other. The letter E shall be 1/2 inch tall. 950

332.6 Switches and Junction Boxes

Provide local switching for the lighting as shown in Reference (3F). When a lighting circuit is required to have a switch, the switch is to be T rated.

The Contractor shall coordinate switch arrangements in the accommodation spaces. The supply circuits are shown on Reference (3C) and the accommodation space lights are shown on 955 Reference (3F). Lights shall be switched in zones as shown in Reference (3F). Switches shall have labels describing the area of lights controlled.

Junction boxes used in emergency lighting circuits are to be watertight with watertight cable glands.

340 BATTERIES AND POWER CONDITIONING 960

340.1 General

Batteries and battery chargers shall be provided per References (3C) and (3D) and as described herein. Battery and charger installations shall comply with 46 CFR Subchapter J and ABS Rules.

Contractor shall provide and install all necessary ancillary materials and equipment, including 965 but not limited to all foundations, enclosures, cables of sufficient size to supply required amperage to all starters, solder type battery lugs, fuses and circuit breakers of proper size and type, wiring, hangers, etc., for a complete and operational system.

All batteries are to be Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) construction, sealed valve regulated lead acid, 12-volt, sized and wired in series/parallel as required. Batteries for power backup shall be 970 NorthStar Batteries NSB Red Battery Series or equal. Engine starting batteries shall be commercial marine grade, Caterpillar 9X-9730 or equal.


Page: 300-30

Battery connections shall be pressure type lugs. Each battery bank shall be contained in vented battery boxes securely mounted in a foundation. Storage batteries shall be located in the hurricane deckhouse battery locker and as shown on References (3A) and (3D). 975

Battery chargers shall be sized to completely charge the associated battery from fully discharged to fully charged in less than 12 hours. Chargers shall be fully automatic and when the battery reaches full charge, the charger shall reduce its charging rate to a trickle current for battery maintenance. Each charger shall have a rate of charge indicator. Battery chargers shall be fitted with drip shields. 980

Battery chargers shall not be installed directly over the batteries.

340.2 24 VDC Systems

Provide and install 24 VDC electrical systems generally as shown in Reference (3D).

The installation shall be complete with chargers, batteries, cabling, connectors, circuit breakers, fuses, enclosures, battery boxes, hardware, controllers, instrumentation, and other materials as 985 necessary to produce a functional system.

Contractor shall verify charger, cable, and battery bank size and capacity with final equipment loads. Details and supporting calculations shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative. For DC systems serving propulsion and navigation electronics, the Contractor shall update equipment sizes and capacities as necessary to provide not less than 30 minutes of operation at 990 factored load and lowest expected ambient temperature.

340.3 Emergency Diesel Generator Engine Starting

The Emergency Diesel Generator engine shall be equipped for electric starting shall be provided with an electric starting motor, batteries, charger, and all necessary appurtenances.

The EDG battery bank shall consist of 8D batteries, located in a vented enclosure adjacent to the 995 engine installation. The battery bank shall be sized per manufacturer and regulatory requirements.

One (1) battery charger shall be provided for the EDG starting system. The EDG battery charger shall also supply a DC UPS, which in turn provides control power to the emergency generator engine. 1000


Page: 400-1

GROUP 400 – COMMAND AND SURVEILLANCE / ELECTRONICS

401 GENERAL 2 401.1 References 2 401.2 General 2

421 NON-ELECTRIC NAVIGATION AIDS 2 5

421.1 Clinometers 2 421.2 Ship's Horn 3 421.3 Fog Bell 3

422 NAVIGATION LIGHTS 3 426 ELECTRICAL NAVIGATION AIDS 3 10

426.1 ECDIS 4 426.2 Satellite Compass 4 426.3 Depth Sounder 4 426.4 Speed Log 4 426.5 AIS 5 15 426.6 Digital Weather Stations 5 426.7 Clock 5

432 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS 5 432.1 IP Phone/Command Intercom/Talkback System 5 432.2 Sound Powered Phone System 5 20

433 PUBLIC ADDRESS (P/A) AND GENERAL ALARM SYSTEM 6 433.1 Public Address System 6 433.2 General Alarm System 7

434 SHIP'S NETWORK SYSTEM 7 434.1 Broadband Ethernet Antenna 7 25 434.2 Ship's Ethernet Network 7

436 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEMS 8 436.1 Machinery Alarm and Monitoring System 8 436.2 Fire Detection and Alarm System 32 436.3 Fuel Monitoring System 32 30 436.4 Tank Level Indication System 32

437 ENGINE ORDER TELEGRAPH 34 439 CCTV 34 440 PASSENGER COUNTERS 36 441 VHF RADIOS 36 35

451 RADAR 36


Page: 400-2

401 GENERAL

401.1 References

Table 400 - 1: References 40 Reference Document Number Title

(4A) 14079-200-101-4 Pilot House Arrangements (4B) 14079-200-101-5 EOS Arrangements (4C) 14079-200-170-1 Masts (4D) 14079-200-320-1 AC Electrical One Line Diagram (4E) 14079-200-422-1 Navigation Light Arrangement and Block Diagram (4F) 14079-200-422-2 Navigation and Electronics Block and Deck Diagram (4G) 14079-200-430-1 Interior Communications Arrangement and Block Diagram (4H) 14079-200-430-2 Vessel Network Topology Diagram (4I) 14079-200-439-1 CCTV Arrangement and Block Diagram (4J) 14079-200-506-1 Fills, Vents and Sounds (4K) 14079-200-624-2 Door Schedule

401.2 General

The electronics equipment described herein shall be provided by the Contractor and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements, and with applicable regulatory requirements. In cases where these requirements contradict, the regulatory 45 requirements shall take precedence.

The navigation and communication electronics listed herein represent current NYC DOT fleet standards. All navigation electronics shall be the latest model available at the time of construction. Prior to purchase and installation, the Contractor shall verify the make and model of all electronics equipment with the Owner's Representative. 50

The Contractor shall provide and install all cables necessary for a complete, functional system installation. Signal cables shall be routed and bundled separately from AC and DC power supply/distribution cables. In general, the routing and installation requirements for electrical supply/distribution cables found in Section 304 shall apply to signal cables installed under this section. 55

The Contractor shall obtain the services of manufacturer's representatives and electronics specialists as necessary to guarantee a fully functional installation. Precautions shall be taken to prevent electromagnetic interference. The Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating that all equipment defined in this section operates without such interference.

421 Non-Electric Navigation Aids421.1 Clinometers 60

Provide three (3) bubble type clinometers, Moeller 456 or equal. Clinometers shall have graduated scales of ± 15 degrees of heel. One (1) clinometer shall be mounted in each Pilot


Page: 400-3

House and one (1) shall be mounted in the Engineer's Operating Station (EOS) as shown in References (4A) and (4B). Final installed locations shall be subject to Owner approval.

421.2 Ship's Horn 65

Provide and install two (2) pneumatic ship's horns as described in Section 551.5.

421.3 Fog Bell

Provide two (2) cast bronze fog bells, 12 inch flare diameter, Perko 01500012PLB or equal, with bracket, clapper, and spliced bell rope. Mount one (1) fog bell on an exterior bulkhead of each Pilot House. Mounting locations shall be approved by the Owner. 70

422 NAVIGATION LIGHTS

Provide and install a navigation light systems suitable for a double-ended ferry in accordance with the U.S. Coast Guard Navigation Rules Handbook, and in accordance with Reference (4E).

Navigation lights shall be Aqua Signal Series 65 Arctic LED, or equal. Each required light shall have duplicate light sources powered by isolated circuits. Navigation light enclosures shall be 75 fitted with internal heating elements to prevent icing or frosting of the lens. Each navigation light shall be installed with a watertight plug and receptacle adjacent to the navigation light. Navigation lights shall be installed to be easily removed for servicing. Navigation light housings shall be fitted with spikes, guards, or other means to deter marine fowl from landing on them.

A surface-mounted navigation light control and indicator panel shall be furnished and installed in 80 each Pilot House as shown in Reference (4A). The panels shall provide visual/audible alarms in the event of a navigation light failure, and shall comply with the requirements of 46 CFR §111.75-17. The navigation light control and indicator panel shall have separate control for the Not Under Control (NUC) light.

Each Pilot House shall have control to switch the navigation lights such that the Pilot House is in 85 control and the lights are configured with that Pilot House as the "forward" end. The control panel shall indicate which end is in control of the navigation lights. Indication of which end is in control of the navigation lights shall also be provided in the EOS.

426 ELECTRICAL NAVIGATION AIDS

The Contractor shall provide and install the following navigation equipment in each end of the 90 vessel. Equipment in each Pilot House shall be identical. Navigation equipment selection and component arrangement shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to installation.

Install equipment per manufacturer's recommendations and according to USCG regulations. Antennas, antenna accessories, and other components necessary for normal operation shall be included for all equipment listed. Antenna locations shall be reviewed and approved by a 95 technician familiar with the transmission interface properties of the transmitters. The Contractor shall be responsible for interfaces, wiring, and similar items not furnished with the equipment. All equipment, including antennas shall be easily accessible for maintenance.


Page: 400-4

426.1 ECDIS

The Contractor shall provide and install two (2) Transas Navi-Sailor Electronic Chart Display & 100 Information System (ECDIS) systems, one (1) in each Pilot House. Each system shall be updated with the most current software and charts available at the time of vessel delivery. The systems shall connect to an Ethernet network allowing each system to display radar overlays from any of the ship's radars in their respective Pilot House. Each system shall also be capable of accepting data from the AIS and GPS units, satellite compass, depth sounder, speed log and 105 ultrasonic anemometer. All components shall be NMEA compatible to facilitate this type of integration. A 24-inch color LCD display will be located in each Pilot House for optimal viewing with the ECDIS control panel installed adjacent to the display.

426.2 Satellite Compass

Provide and install two (2) satellite compass systems, Furuno SC110 or equal, one (1) for each 110 Pilot House. Each system shall have an antenna mounted atop the Pilot House and a flush-mounted digital display unit mounted at the Pilot House console as shown in Reference (4A).

426.3 Depth Sounder

Provide and install two (2) depth sounders, Furuno l FE700 or equal. Each system shall have a transducer assembly and a flush mounted digital display. Mount each transducer near the 115 vessel's keel, one (1) at each end of the vessel, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Submit proposed sensor location(s) to the manufacturer's representative and Owner's Representative for approval prior to installation.

This installation includes a hull penetration for each transducer. The transducers shall be mounted to allow removal and replacement of the transceiver from inside the vessel with the 120 vessel waterborne. A Furuno gate valve and tank assembly, or equivalent, shall be provided for this purpose.

One (1) display unit shall be mounted in each Pilot House console as shown in Reference (4A) and connected to the transducer serving the same end of the vessel.

426.4 Speed Log 125

Provide and install speed log systems in each Pilot House, Furuno DS80 or equal. Each sensor system shall have a speed sensor assembly and a flush mounted digital display. Mount each transducer near the vessel's keel, one (1) at each end of the vessel, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Locate transducers so that they are not affected by propeller wash. Submit proposed sensor location(s) to the manufacturer's representative and Owner's 130 Representative for approval prior to installation.

This installation includes a hull penetration for each transducer. The transducers shall be mounted to allow removal and replacement of the transceiver from inside the vessel with the vessel waterborne. A Furuno gate valve and tank assembly, or equivalent, shall be provided for this purpose. 135

One (1) display unit shall be mounted in each Pilot House console as shown in Reference (4A) and connected to the transducer serving the same end of the vessel.


Page: 400-5

426.5 AIS

Provide and install two (2) Class A automatic identification systems (AIS), Furuno FA150 or equal, one (1) in each Pilot House. The system shall comprise a transponder unit, GPS antenna, 140 combined GPS/VHF antenna, and digital control and display unit.

426.6 Digital Weather Stations

Provide two (2) digital weather stations, MARETRON WSO 100-01 or equal, with display. Mount one (1) in each Pilot House as shown on Reference (4A). Each weather station shall display apparent wind speed, apparent wind angle, outdoor temperature, humidity, and the 145 current time. Final installed location is subject to Owner approval.

426.7 Clock

Provide three (3) surface mounted 12/24-hour battery-operated marine clocks. One (1) clock shall be mounted in each Pilot House and one (1) shall be mounted in the EOS. Final locations shall be approved by the Owner. Each clock shall be connected to ships"Normal" power with 150 battery back-up.

432 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

432.1 IP Phone/Command Intercom/Talkback System

The Contractor shall install a Command Intercom/Talkback System, Vingtor (Zenitel) or equal, in the following locations: 155

• Pilot Houses • Engineer's Operating Station • Main Deck at each end • Main Deck at each side door • Rescue Boat Stations 160

• Saloon Deck at each end • Emergency Generator Room • Security Equipment Room • Locker Rooms • Officer's Day Room 165

• Anchor Windlasses Exterior units shall be of watertight construction, Vingtor or equal.

432.2 Sound Powered Phone System

Provide and install a common talk, selective ring, sound powered phone system, Hose McCann or equal. There shall be a total of twenty-six (26) stations on the vessel as shown in 170 Table 400 - 2 and in Reference (4G). Stations will feature either an integrated handset and/or a plug-in jack for hands free head-set.


Page: 400-6

All phone stations shall be drip-proof with integral selector switch, hand crank (magneto), and siren. Sound powered phone stations in high-noise spaces (as indicated in the table) shall be fitted with externally powered rotating blue beacons and audible alarms which annunciate 175 incoming calls. Alarms shall be audible over the ambient noise in the space. The external audible/visible beacons shall be powered by the nearest emergency lighting circuit. These phones shall be installed in sound deadening enclosures that reduce sound levels by a minimum of 23 decibels. The enclosures shall be Gaitronics 988-60-0002-50 or equal.

Each station fitted with a plug-in jack shall be provided with a portable headset with insulated 180 speaker ear pieces and a noise compensated boom microphone. Each plug-in jack station shall include a rack for stowage of the portable headset.

Phone stations located on Weather Decks shall be mounted entirely in a NEMA 4X enclosure with a hinged access door. The door shall be opened and secured by use of a handle, latch, or other mechanism which does not require tools to operate. 185

The system shall include the capacity to add up to two (2) additional stations throughout the vessel life.

Table 400 - 2: List of Sound Powered Phone Stations

Qty Location Handset Plug-in

Jack

External

Beacons

NEMA

Enclosure

2 Pilot House Console (each end) 2 Propulsion Rooms (each end) 1 EOS 2 Engine Room 1 Emergency Generator Room 1 Officer's Day Room 4 Emerg. Gear Lockers 1 Security Equipment Room 2 Saloon Deck, near each end 2 Main Deck, near each end 4 Main Deck side doors (port, stbd) 2 Anchor Windlass (port, stbd) 2 Auxiliary Machinery Rooms (each end)

433 PUBLIC ADDRESS (P/A) AND GENERAL ALARM SYSTEM 190

The Contractor shall provide an integrated public address and general alarm system as indicated on Reference (4G). The system shall be Zenitel Vingtor SPA-400 V2 or equal with additional requirements as indicated in Sections 433.1 and 433.2.

433.1 Public Address System

The Contractor shall furnish and install an integrated announcing and public address system as 195 indicated on Reference (4G). The system shall be Zenitel Vingtor SPA-400 V2 or equal with the


Page: 400-7

control head in one (1) Pilot House and a redundant control head in the other Pilot House. The system shall be addressable by zones and individual amplifiers shall be provided for each deck as indicated in Reference (4G). All amplifiers shall have a backup amplifier with auto switch over and alarm notification on each console. Microphone stations shall also be located at the control 200 console in each Pilot House.

The system shall be provided with loud hailers on the top of each Pilot House, Vintor DST-40EEXENT or approved equal. The loud hailers shall be configured as independent zones in the system.

The system shall be capable of providing an external signal to allow public address 205 announcements to be mimicked by visual signage.

The system shall support the use of pre-recorded messages. The Owner will provide the Contractor with a list of pre-recorded messages to be loaded into the system. The system shall also support a text to speech function, where messages can be input into the system via the keyboard and broadcast as audible messages. 210

433.2 General Alarm System

The Contractor shall furnish and install a general alarm system as indicated on Reference (4G). The system shall be Zenitel Vingtor SPA-400 V2 or equal, with contact makers in each Pilot House and in the EOS. Alarm bells will be located throughout the vessel as required to meet USCG requirements for sound levels. Rotating beacons shall also be located in the Engine 215 Room and Machinery Rooms.

434 SHIP'S NETWORK SYSTEM

434.1 Broadband Ethernet Antenna

The Contractor shall provide and install a mobile broadband Ethernet antenna with automatic mobile aiming and tracking, BATS or equal. The antenna shall be current best available 220 technology at the time of construction, provide dedicated, 1000 Mbps or better Ethernet connectivity between the vessel and the Owner's facility, and shall be fully compatible with the Owner's network infrastructure. The installation shall include all accessories and cables necessary for a complete, functional system installation. The Contractor shall engage the Owner's preferred CCTV subcontractor for equipment selection and installation. Refer to 225 Section 439.

The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. The antenna shall be installed on its own mast on the Staten Island end Pilot House, generally where shown on Reference (4A). The controller unit shall be installed in the Security Equipment Room.

434.2 Ship's Ethernet Network 230

The Contractor shall provide and install a CAT-6 Ethernet network generally as shown in Reference (4H). Provide data receptacles as generally shown on Reference (4H).The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing cable, patch panels, and terminations. All data cable lengths between the end termination device to the either the security equipment room New York End electronics room or Staten Island End electronics room shall be limited to 300 feet 235


Page: 400-8

(actual cable length). The Contractor shall provide cross connects in intermediate patch panels to one of the three aforementioned locations. All patch panels and multi-conductor cross connect cables shall have a 25 percent minimum spare capacity.

436 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEMS

436.1 Machinery Alarm and Monitoring System 240

Engage Electronic Marine Systems (EMS Marcon) or equal as a subcontractor to furnish and install an integrated machinery alarm and monitoring system that complies with all applicable requirements of 46 CFR Subchapter F (Marine Engineering), 46 CFR Subchapter J (Electrical Engineering) and ABS Rules. The system must have been previously approved by both the USCG and ABS in meeting these requirements. 245

The alarm and monitoring system shall be a microprocessor-based system with a combination of graphical user interface output displays and analog instruments mounted in the EOS and Pilot House consoles. Input signals shall be derived from field instruments, or from serial data generated by equipment control processors such as onboard engine control modules.

The alarm system shall issue visible and/or audible alarms, as required by regulation, to indicate 250 fault conditions or parameters that are outside nominal limits. The alarm system displays shall be dual 32 inch LCDs fitted in the EOS console. Each will be driven by its own CPU and access the vessel's inputs and outputs simultaneously, being both operational and on line at all times.

The monitored alarm channels shall be organized into separate screens, grouped by system or equipment type. Navigation between screens shall be accomplished with keyboard buttons that 255 are integrated into the software interface.

The alarm system central processor shall have a self-diagnostic feature that is activated upon power-up to identify any system errors or deficiencies. System deficiencies shall be displayed on the primary interface screen. The system shall also provide data logging, and secure remote diagnostics and repair via the internet. 260

The display of discrete alarm channels on each screen shall be organized into a matrix configuration with each channel clearly labeled. Each channel shall offer a visual indication of its state; normal, active, or acknowledged. Screen configurations shall be submitted for Owner review and approval.

The displays at the EOS console shall include alarm 'acknowledge' and 'test' buttons. A series of 265 visible/audible alarm beacons shall be integrated with the system and fitted throughout the EOS, Engine Room, and Auxiliary Machinery Rooms.

The system shall have three (3) remote stations with CPU and 24-inch diagonal display and keyboard; one (1) located in each Pilot House and one in the Chief Engineer's office. Each station shall have a keyboard interface and shall offer a menu of summary alarm screens as well 270 as all the full capability of the EOS system for complete redundancy. The bridge units shall have integral annunciators, acknowledge buttons, display dimmer, and 'day/night' mode selector which will alter the illumination of display.


Page: 400-9

Pressing the 'acknowledge' button at an EOS console display screen shall silence the alarms at all monitoring locations. However, pressing the acknowledge button at either of the Pilot House 275 stations shall only silence the alarm at the repeater panel where the button was pushed.

All binary (on/off) alarm input signals originating from field instruments shall be configured as normally closed (supervised) such that an opening in the circuit will cause the alarm to annunciate.

Wherever possible, the propulsion machinery and generator alarms shall be configured so that 280 alarms are not inhibited based on the running/not running status of the engine.

Table 400 - 3 contains a list of recommended alarm monitoring points and is offered as guidance to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a detailed list of alarm monitoring points for Owner review and approval. In general, the Contractor's list of alarm monitoring points shall not omit any of those found in Table 400 - 3 unless there is a practical justification (i.e., the 285 machinery does not have the necessary instrumentation). The Contractor shall submit such justification to the Owner's Representative for approval.

Discrete alarms shall be logged on a hard drive which maintains a continuous rolling record of the previous month. The system shall be capable of generating an output file upon command in .txt, .csv, or similar format. The file shall be retrievable via a USB connection port in the EOS 290 console, or via e-mail sent to the vessel master and chief engineer on the vessel network. The file shall also be retrievable through the wireless network that is connected to shore at all times. The data being logged shall include the following:

Alarm description

Time of initial alarm 295

Time alarm was acknowledged

Time alarm was cleared The continuous monitoring of engineering plant parameters shall be accomplished with a combination of digital display screens and analog instruments fitted in the EOS and Pilot House consoles. Additional analog instruments shall be furnished with the system for display of select 300 parameters.

The alarm and monitoring system shall be capable of transmitting data from any or all alarmed and monitored points to a shore side workstation for review and logging. The system shall provide a configuration page that allows user selection which alarm and monitoring points are transmitted to shore. 305

The system shall provide hour meters for up to 80 shipboard items throughout the vessel, and track and display total operating hours for all major equipment including main engines, SSDG's, EDG, pumps, motors etc. The monitors shall be an integral part of the basic alarm system.

Screen configurations for each display shall be submitted for Owner review and approval. The auxiliary system display screens shall be capable of displaying the parameters from any other 310 screen.


Page: 400-10

The integrated Monitor and Alarm System supplier shall assume the responsibility of "Electronic Systems Integrator" and in that role ensure all of the various vendors supplying data to the integrated monitoring and alarm system meets vessel requirements and in cases of incompatibility will work with that vendor to ensure compliance. 315


Page: 400-11

Table 400 - 3: List of Alarm and Monitoring Points

INDEX SWBS ID EQUIP ITEM PARAM I/O

TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1000 200 AUX EOS CONSOLE TEMP HIGH ALARM DIG TAH 1001 200 AUX NY BRIDGE CONSOLE TEMP HIGH ALARM DIG TAH 1002 200 AUX SI BRIDGE CONSOLE TEMP HIGH ALARM DIG TAH 1003 233 DATA ME # 1 DATA BUS DATA 1004 233 DATA ME # 2 DATA BUS DATA 1005 233 DATA ME # 3 DATA BUS DATA 1006 233 DATA ME # 4 DATA BUS DATA 1007 233 ME #1 #1 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1008 233 ME #1 #10 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1009 233 ME #1 #11 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1010 233 ME #1 #12 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1011 233 ME #1 #2 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1012 233 ME #1 #3 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1013 233 ME #1 #4 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1014 233 ME #1 #5 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1015 233 ME #1 #6 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1016 233 ME #1 #7 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1017 233 ME #1 #8 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1018 233 ME #1 #9 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1019 233 ME #1 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1020 233 ME #1 CHARGE AIR TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1021 233 ME #1 CHECK ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1022 233 ME #1 CRANKCASE PRESSURE HIGH PRESS DIG PAH 1023 233 ME #1 ENGINE RPM RPM ANL 1024 233 ME #1 ENGINE RUNNING STATUS DIG 1025 233 ME #1 EXHAUST COMBINED TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1026 233 ME #1 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE HIGH PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1027 233 ME #1 FO LEAKAGE FROM HP INJECTION PIPE LEVEL DIG LAH 1028 233 ME #1 FO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1029 233 ME #1 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1030 233 ME #1 FW EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL


Page: 400-12


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1031 233 ME #1 FW INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1032 233 ME #1 FW INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1033 233 ME #1 FW OUTLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1034 233 ME #1 FW OUTLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1035 233 ME #1 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1036 233 ME #1 LO INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1037 233 ME #1 LO INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1038 233 ME #1 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1039 233 ME #1 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1040 233 ME #1 LO PRESSURE - TURBO PRESS ANL 1041 233 ME #1 LO PRESSURE SOAKBACK PRESS ANL 1042 233 ME #1 LO SUMP LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1043 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #1 TEMP TEMP ANL 1044 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #2 TEMP TEMP ANL 1045 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #3 TEMP TEMP ANL 1046 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #4 TEMP TEMP ANL 1047 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #5 TEMP TEMP ANL 1048 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #6 TEMP TEMP ANL 1049 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING #7 TEMP TEMP ANL 1050 233 ME #1 MAIN BEARING AVERAGE TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1051 233 ME #1 OVERLOAD ALARM DIG UA 1052 233 ME #1 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1053 233 ME #1 PERCENT ENGINE LOAD STATUS ANL 1054 233 ME #1 SOAKBACK PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1055 233 ME #1 STOP ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1056 233 ME #1 SW DISCH PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1057 233 ME #1 SW PUMP DISCH PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1058 233 ME #2 #1 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1059 233 ME #2 #10 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1060 233 ME #2 #11 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1061 233 ME #2 #12 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1062 233 ME #2 #2 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1063 233 ME #2 #3 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1064 233 ME #2 #4 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL


Page: 400-13


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1065 233 ME #2 #5 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1066 233 ME #2 #6 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1067 233 ME #2 #7 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1068 233 ME #2 #8 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1069 233 ME #2 #9 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1070 233 ME #2 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1071 233 ME #2 CHARGE AIR TEMP TEMP DIG TAH 1072 233 ME #2 CHECK ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1073 233 ME #2 CRANKCASE PRESSURE HIGH PRESS DIG PAH 1074 233 ME #2 ENGINE RPM RPM ANL 1075 233 ME #2 ENGINE RUNNING STATUS DIG 1076 233 ME #2 EXHAUST COMBINED TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1077 233 ME #2 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1078 233 ME #2 FO LEAKAGE FROM HP INJECTION PIPE LEVEL DIG LAH 1079 233 ME #2 FO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1080 233 ME #2 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1081 233 ME #2 FW EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1082 233 ME #2 FW INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1083 233 ME #2 FW INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1084 233 ME #2 FW OUTLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1085 233 ME #2 FW OUTLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1086 233 ME #2 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1087 233 ME #2 LO INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1088 233 ME #2 LO INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1089 233 ME #2 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1090 233 ME #2 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1091 233 ME #2 LO PRESSURE - SOAKBACK PRESS ANL 1092 233 ME #2 LO PRESSURE- TURBO PRESS ANL 1093 233 ME #2 LO SUMP LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1094 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #1 TEMP TEMP ANL 1095 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #2 TEMP TEMP ANL 1096 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #3 TEMP TEMP ANL 1097 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #4 TEMP TEMP ANL 1098 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #5 TEMP TEMP ANL


Page: 400-14


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1099 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #6 TEMP TEMP ANL 1100 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING #7 TEMP TEMP ANL 1101 233 ME #2 MAIN BEARING AVERAGE TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1102 233 ME #2 OVERLOAD ALARM DIG UA 1103 233 ME #2 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1104 233 ME #2 PERCENT ENGINE LOAD STATUS ANL 1105 233 ME #2 SOAKBACK PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1106 233 ME #2 STOP ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1107 233 ME #2 SW DISCH PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1108` 233 ME #2 SW PUMP DISCH PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1109 233 ME #3 #1 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1110 233 ME #3 #10 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1111 233 ME #3 #11 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1112 233 ME #3 #12 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1113 233 ME #3 #2 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1114 233 ME #3 #3 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1115 233 ME #3 #4 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1116 233 ME #3 #5 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1117 233 ME #3 #6 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1118 233 ME #3 #7 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1119 233 ME #3 #8 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1120 233 ME #3 #9 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1121 233 ME #3 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1122 233 ME #3 CHARGE AIR TEMP TEMP DIG TAH 1123 233 ME #3 CHECK ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1124 233 ME #3 CRANKCASE PRESSURE HIGH PRESS DIG PAH 1125 233 ME #3 ENGINE RPM RPM ANL 1126 233 ME #3 ENGINE RUNNING STATUS DIG 1127 233 ME #3 EXHAUST COMBINED TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1128 233 ME #3 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1129 233 ME #3 FO LEAKAGE FROM HP INJECTION PIPE LEVEL DIG LAH 1130 233 ME #3 FO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1131 233 ME #3 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1132 233 ME #3 FW EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL


Page: 400-15


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1133 233 ME #3 FW INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1134 233 ME #3 FW INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1135 233 ME #3 FW OUTLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1136 233 ME #3 FW OUTLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1137 233 ME #3 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1138 233 ME #3 LO INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1139 233 ME #3 LO INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1140 233 ME #3 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1141 233 ME #3 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1142 233 ME #3 LO PRESSURE - SOAKBACK PRESS ANL 1143 233 ME #3 LO PRESSURE- TURBO PRESS ANL 1144 233 ME #3 LO SUMP LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1145 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #1 TEMP TEMP ANL 1146 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #2 TEMP TEMP ANL 1147 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #3 TEMP TEMP ANL 1148 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #4 TEMP TEMP ANL 1149 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #5 TEMP TEMP ANL 1150 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #6 TEMP TEMP ANL 1151 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING #7 TEMP TEMP ANL 1152 233 ME #3 MAIN BEARING AVERAGE TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1153 233 ME #3 OVERLOAD ALARM DIG UA 1154 233 ME #3 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1155 233 ME #3 PERCENT ENGINE LOAD STATUS ANL 1156 233 ME #3 SOAKBACK PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1157 233 ME #3 STOP ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1158 233 ME #3 SW DISCH PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1159 233 ME #3 SW PUMP DISCH PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1160 233 ME #4 #1 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1161 233 ME #4 #10 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1162 233 ME #4 #11 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1163 233 ME #4 #12 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1164 233 ME #4 #2 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1165 233 ME #4 #3 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1166 233 ME #4 #4 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL


Page: 400-16


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1167 233 ME #4 #5 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1168 233 ME #4 #6 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1169 233 ME #4 #7 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1170 233 ME #4 #8 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1171 233 ME #4 #9 CYL EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1172 233 ME #4 CHARGE AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1173 233 ME #4 CHARGE AIR TEMP TEMP DIG TAH 1174 233 ME #4 CHECK ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1175 233 ME #4 CRANKCASE PRESSURE HIGH PRESS DIG PAH 1176 233 ME #4 ENGINE RPM RPM ANL 1177 233 ME #4 ENGINE RUNNING STATUS DIG 1178 233 ME #4 EXHAUST COMBINED TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1179 233 ME #4 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1180 233 ME #4 FO LEAKAGE FROM HP INJECTION PIPE LEVEL DIG LAH 1181 233 ME #4 FO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1182 233 ME #4 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1183 233 ME #4 FW EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1184 233 ME #4 FW INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1185 233 ME #4 FW INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1186 233 ME #4 FW OUTLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1187 233 ME #4 FW OUTLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1188 233 ME #4 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1189 233 ME #4 LO INLET PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1190 233 ME #4 LO INLET PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1191 233 ME #4 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1192 233 ME #4 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1193 233 ME #4 LO PRESSURE - SOAKBACK PRESS ANL 1194 233 ME #4 LO PRESSURE- TURBO PRESS ANL 1195 233 ME #4 LO SUMP LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1196 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #1 TEMP TEMP ANL 1197 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #2 TEMP TEMP ANL 1198 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #3 TEMP TEMP ANL 1199 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #4 TEMP TEMP ANL 1200 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #5 TEMP TEMP ANL


Page: 400-17


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1201 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #6 TEMP TEMP ANL 1202 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING #7 TEMP TEMP ANL 1203 233 ME #4 MAIN BEARING AVERAGE TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1204 233 ME #4 OVERLOAD ALARM DIG UA 1205 233 ME #4 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1206 233 ME #4 PERCENT ENGINE LOAD STATUS ANL 1207 233 ME #4 SOAKBACK PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1208 233 ME #4 STOP ENGINE ALARM DIG UA 1209 233 ME #4 SW DISCH PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1210 233 ME #4 SW PUMP DISCH PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1211 241 NY COMB. GEAR LO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1212 241 NY COMB. GEAR LO SUMP LOW LEVEL LEVEL DIG LAL 1213 241 NY COMB. GEAR LO TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1214 241 NY COMB. GEAR LO TEMPERATURE TEMP ANL 1215 241 NY COMB. GEAR STANDBY LO PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1216 241 SI COMB. GEAR LO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1217 241 SI COMB. GEAR LO SUMP LOW LEVEL LEVEL DIG LAL 1218 241 SI COMB. GEAR LO TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1219 241 SI COMB. GEAR LO TEMPERATURE TEMP ANL 1220 241 SI COMB. GEAR STANDBY LO PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1221 243 SHAFT LOCK ME #1 SHAFT LOCK ENGAGED STATUS DIG 1222 243 SHAFT LOCK ME #2 SHAFT LOCK ENGAGED STATUS DIG 1223 243 SHAFT LOCK ME #3 SHAFT LOCK ENGAGED STATUS DIG 1224 243 SHAFT LOCK ME #4 SHAFT LOCK ENGAGED STATUS DIG 1225 243 CLUTCH #1 CLUTCH OPEN STATUS DIG 1226 243 CLUTCH #2 CLUTCH OPEN STATUS DIG 1227 243 CLUTCH #3 CLUTCH OPEN STATUS DIG 1228 243 CLUTCH #4 CLUTCH OPEN STATUS DIG 1229 243 SHAFT LOCK. &

TURN. DEVICE NY VSP SHAFT LOCKING & TURNING ENGAGED STATUS DIG

1230 243 SHAFT LOCK. & TURN. DEVICE

SI VSP SHAFT LOCKING & TURNING ENGAGED STATUS DIG

1231 243 COUPLING COUPLING #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1232 243 COUPLING COUPLING #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1233 243 COUPLING COUPLING #3 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH


Page: 400-18


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1234 243 COUPLING COUPLING #4 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1235 243 NY LINE SHAFT BEARING #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1236 243 NY LINE SHAFT BEARING #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1237 243 NY LINE SHAFT BEARING #3 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1238 243 NY LINE SHAFT BEARING #4 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1239 243 NY LINE SHAFT BEARING #5 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1240 243 NY LINE SHAFT BULKHEAD SEAL #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1241 243 NY LINE SHAFT BULKHEAD SEAL #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1242 243 NY LINE SHAFT SPEED RPM ANL 1243 243 SI LINE SHAFT BEARING #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1244 243 SI LINE SHAFT BEARING #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1245 243 SI LINE SHAFT BEARING #3 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1246 243 SI LINE SHAFT BEARING #4 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1247 243 SI LINE SHAFT BEARING #5 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1248 243 SI LINE SHAFT BULKHEAD SEAL #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1249 243 SI LINE SHAFT BULKHEAD SEAL #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1250 243 SI LINE SHAFT SPEED RPM ANL 1251 245 NY VSP CONTROL FAULT GATEWAY CPU ALARM DIG UA 1252 245 NY VSP CONTROL OIL DUPLEX FILTER #1 DIFFERENTIAL

PRESS HIGH PRESS DIG PAH

(D) 1253 245 NY VSP CONTROL OIL DUPLEX FILTER #2 DIFFERENTIAL


(D) 1254 245 NY VSP CONTROL OIL LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1255 245 NY VSP CONTROL OIL PRESSURE LOW PRESS ANL 1256 245 NY VSP CONTROL OIL TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1257 245 NY VSP CONTROL SYSTEM 1 ALARM ALARM DIG UA 1258 245 NY VSP CONTROL SYSTEM 2 ALARM ALARM DIG UA 1259 245 NY VSP ELEVATED LUBE OIL TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1260 245 NY VSP FAULT 230VAC POWER ALARM DIG UA 1261 245 NY VSP FAULT 24VDC POWER ALARM DIG UA 1262 245 NY VSP LACK OF RESPONSE ALARM DIG UA 1263 245 NY VSP LUBE OIL DUPLEX FILTER #1 DIFFERENTIAL PRESS

HIGH PRESS DIG PAH

(D)


Page: 400-19


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1264 245 NY VSP LUBE OIL DUPLEX FILTER #2 DIFFERENTIAL PRESS HIGH

PRESS DIG PAH (D)

1265 245 NY VSP LUBE OIL LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1266 245 NY VSP LUBE OIL PRESSURE LOW PRESS ANL 1267 245 NY VSP LUBE OIL TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1268 245 NY VSP ROTOR OIL PRESSURE HIGH PRESS ANL 1269 245 NY VSP BEARING #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1270 245 NY VSP BEARING #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1271 245 NY VSP BEARING #3 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1272 245 NY VSP BEARING #4 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1273 245 SI VSP ALARM KEY ALARM DIG UA 1274 245 SI VSP CONTROL FAULT GATEWAY CPU ALARM DIG UA 1275 245 SI VSP CONTROL OIL DUPLEX FILTER #1 DIFFERENTIAL


(D) 1276 245 SI VSP CONTROL OIL DUPLEX FILTER #2 DIFFERENTIAL


(D) 1277 245 SI VSP CONTROL OIL LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1278 245 SI VSP CONTROL OIL PRESSURE LOW PRESS ANL 1279 245 SI VSP CONTROL OIL TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1280 245 SI VSP CONTROL SYSTEM 1 ALARM ALARM DIG UA 1281 245 SI VSP CONTROL SYSTEM 2 ALARM ALARM DIG UA 1282 245 SI VSP ELEVATED LUBE OIL TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1283 245 SI VSP FAULT 230VAC POWER ALARM DIG UA 1284 245 SI VSP FAULT 24VDC POWER ALARM DIG UA 1285 245 SI VSP LACK OF RESPONSE ALARM DIG UA 1286 245 SI VSP LUBE OIL DUPLEX FILTER #1 DIFFERENTIAL PRESS

HIGH PRESS DIG PAH

(D) 1287 245 SI VSP LUBE OIL DUPLEX FILTER #2 DIFFERENTIAL PRESS

HIGH PRESS DIG PAH

(D) 1288 245 SI VSP LUBE OIL LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1289 245 SI VSP LUBE OIL PRESSURE LOW PRESS ANL 1290 245 SI VSP LUBE OIL TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1291 245 SI VSP ROTOR OIL PRESSURE HIGH PRESS ANL 1292 245 SI VSP BEARING #1 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1293 245 SI VSP BEARING #2 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL


Page: 400-20


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1294 245 SI VSP BEARING #3 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1295 245 SI VSP BEARING #4 TEMP HIGH TEMP ANL 1296 256 SW AUX SEA WATER PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1297 256 SW AUX SEA WATER PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1298 256 SW AUX SEA WATER PUMP #3 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1299 256 SW AUX SEA WATER PUMP #4 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1300 256 SW AUX SEA WATER SYSTEM PRESSURE LOW, NYE PRESS DIG PAL 1301 256 SW AUX SEA WATER SYSTEM PRESSURE LOW, SIE PRESS DIG PAL 1302 256 SW AUX SEA WATER SYSTEM PRESSURE, NYE PRESS ANL 1303 256 SW AUX SEA WATER SYSTEM PRESSURE, SIE PRESS ANL 1304 259 TANK UREA OVERFLOW TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1305 259 TANK UREA TANK LEVEL ANL 1306 259 TANK UREA TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1307 259 TANK UREA TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1308 259 UREA SYSTEM UREA TANK DRIP TRAY LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1309 259 UREA SYSTEM UREA TANK TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1310 261 FO FO PURIFIER RUNNING STATUS DIG 1311 261 FO FO TRANSFER PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1312 261 TANK E GEN FUEL OIL SERVICE TANK LEVEL ANL 1313 261 TANK E GEN FUEL OIL SERVICE TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1314 261 TANK E GEN FUEL OIL SERVICE TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1315 261 TANK PORT FUEL OIL DAY TANK LEVEL ANL 1316 261 TANK PORT FUEL OIL DAY TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1317 261 TANK PORT FUEL OIL DAY TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1318 261 TANK PORT FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK LEVEL ANL 1319 261 TANK PORT FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1320 261 TANK PORT FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1321 261 TANK STBD FUEL OIL DAY TANK LEVEL ANL 1322 261 TANK STBD FUEL OIL DAY TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1323 261 TANK STBD FUEL OIL DAY TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1324 261 TANK STBD FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK LEVEL ANL 1325 261 TANK STBD FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1326 261 TANK STBD FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1327 264 LO LO PURIFIER RUNNING STATUS DIG 1328 264 LO LO SLUDGE DISCHARGE PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG


Page: 400-21


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1329 264 LO LO TRANSFER PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1330 264 LO WO TRANSFER PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1331 264 TANK AUX. LUBE OIL TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1332 264 TANK LUBE OIL SLUDGE TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1333 264 TANK LUBE OIL STORAGE TANK LEVEL ANL 1334 264 TANK LUBE OIL STORAGE TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1335 264 TANK WASTE OIL TANK LEVEL ANL 1336 264 TANK WASTE OIL TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1337 300 ELECTRICAL ALARM BATTERY VOLTAGE STATUS ANL 1338 300 ELECTRICAL ALARM PRIMARY 24VDC POWER FAILURE ALARM DIG EAL 1339 300 ELECTRICAL ALARM SECONDARY 24VDC POWER FAILURE ALARM DIG EAL 1340 300 ELECTRICAL EDG STARTING BATT. CHARGER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1341 300 ELECTRICAL EOS 24VDC BATT. CHARGER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1342 300 ELECTRICAL ER 24VDC BATT. CHARGER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1343 300 ELECTRICAL GROUND AMMETER T211 ALARM DIG UA 1344 300 ELECTRICAL INSULATION MONITOR ET401 ALARM DIG UA 1345 300 ELECTRICAL INSULATION MONITOR T208 ALARM DIG UA 1346 300 ELECTRICAL INSULATION MONITOR T209 ALARM DIG UA 1347 300 ELECTRICAL INSULATION MONITOR T401 ALARM DIG UA 1348 300 ELECTRICAL NY PH 24VDC BATT. CHARGER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1349 300 ELECTRICAL SI PH 24VDC BATT. CHARGER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1350 300 ELECTRICAL SSDG #1 STARTING BATT. CHARGER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1351 310 DATA EDG DATA BUS DATA 1352 310 DATA SSDG #1 DATA BUS DATA 1353 310 DATA SSDG #2 DATA BUS DATA 1354 310 DATA SSDG #3 DATA BUS DATA 1355 310 EMER. GEN. LO LEVEL (SUMP) LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1356 310 EMER. GEN. BEARING TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1357 310 EMER. GEN. CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY BUS ALARM DIG UA 1358 310 EMER. GEN. COOLANT PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1359 310 EMER. GEN. COOLANT PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1360 310 EMER. GEN. COOLANT TEMP TEMP ANL 1361 310 EMER. GEN. COOLANT TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1362 310 EMER. GEN. CURRENT - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL


Page: 400-22


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1363 310 EMER. GEN. EMERGENCY GENERATOR HEATER RUNNING STATUS DIG 1364 310 EMER. GEN. EMERGENCY GENERATOR MALFUNCTION ALARM DIG UA 1365 310 EMER. GEN. EMERGENCY GENERATOR READY TO RUN STATUS DIG 1366 310 EMER. GEN. EMERGENCY GENERATOR RUNNING STATUS DIG 1367 310 EMER. GEN. ENGINE STARTING BATTERY VOLTAGE STATUS ANL 1368 310 EMER. GEN. ENGINE STARTING BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW STATUS DIG EAL 1369 310 EMER. GEN. EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1370 310 EMER. GEN. EXHAUST TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1371 310 EMER. GEN. FO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1372 310 EMER. GEN. FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1373 310 EMER. GEN. FREQUENCY STATUS ANL 1374 310 EMER. GEN. FREQUENCY LOW ALARM DIG UA 1375 310 EMER. GEN. FW COOLANT EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1376 310 EMER. GEN. GENERATOR TRIPPED (UNDERVOLTAGE,

OVERCURRENT) ALARM DIG UA

1377 310 EMER. GEN. LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1378 310 EMER. GEN. LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1379 310 EMER. GEN. LO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1380 310 EMER. GEN. LO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1381 310 EMER. GEN. OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1382 310 EMER. GEN. POWER FACTOR STATUS ANL 1383 310 EMER. GEN. SPEED RPM RATE 1384 310 EMER. GEN. VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1385 310 EMER. GEN. VOLTAGE LOW ALARM DIG EAL 1386 310 SSDG #1 BEARING TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1387 310 SSDG #1 COOLANT EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1388 310 SSDG #1 COOLANT PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1389 310 SSDG #1 COOLANT TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1390 310 SSDG #1 CURRENT - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1391 310 SSDG #1 ENGINE STARTING BATTERY VOLTAGE STATUS ANL 1392 310 SSDG #1 ENGINE STARTING BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW STATUS DIG EAL 1393 310 SSDG #1 EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1394 310 SSDG #1 EXHAUST TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1395 310 SSDG #1 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D)


Page: 400-23


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1396 310 SSDG #1 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1397 310 SSDG #1 FREQUENCY STATUS ANL 1398 310 SSDG #1 FREQUENCY LOW ALARM DIG UA 1399 310 SSDG #1 GENERATOR ONLINE STATUS DIG 1400 310 SSDG #1 GENERATOR HEATER RUNNING STATUS DIG 1401 310 SSDG #1 GENERATOR MALFUNCTION ALARM DIG UA 1402 310 SSDG #1 GENERATOR READY TO RUN STATUS DIG 1403 310 SSDG #1 GENERATOR RUNNING STATUS DIG 1404 310 SSDG #1 GENERATOR TRIPPED (REVERSE POWER,

UNDERVOLTAGE, OVERCURRENT) ALARM DIG UA

1405 310 SSDG #1 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1406 310 SSDG #1 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1407 310 SSDG #1 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1408 310 SSDG #1 LO LEVEL (SUMP) LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1409 310 SSDG #1 LO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1410 310 SSDG #1 LO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1411 310 SSDG #1 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1412 310 SSDG #1 POWER FACTOR STATUS ANL 1413 310 SSDG #1 SPEED RPM RATE 1414 310 SSDG #1 VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1415 310 SSDG #1 VOLTAGE LOW ALARM DIG EAL 1416 310 SSDG #2 BEARING TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1417 310 SSDG #2 COOLANT EXPANSION TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1418 310 SSDG #2 COOLANT PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1419 310 SSDG #2 COOLANT TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1420 310 SSDG #2 CURRENT - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1421 310 SSDG #2 EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1422 310 SSDG #2 EXHAUST TEMP HIGH TRMP DIG TAH 1423 310 SSDG #2 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH 1424 310 SSDG #2 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1425 310 SSDG #2 FREQUENCY STATUS ANL 1426 310 SSDG #2 FREQUENCY LOW ALARM DIG UA 1427 310 SSDG #2 GENERATOR ONLINE STATUS DIG 1428 310 SSDG #2 GENERATOR HEATER RUNNING STATUS DIG


Page: 400-24


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1429 310 SSDG #2 GENERATOR MALFUNCTION ALARM DIG UA 1430 310 SSDG #2 GENERATOR READY TO RUN STATUS DIG 1431 310 SSDG #2 GENERATOR RUNNING STATUS DIG 1432 310 SSDG #2 GENERATOR TRIPPED (REVERSE POWER,


1433 310 SSDG #2 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1434 310 SSDG #2 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1435 310 SSDG #2 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1436 310 SSDG #2 LO LEVEL (SUMP) LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1437 310 SSDG #2 LO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1438 310 SSDG #2 LO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1439 310 SSDG #2 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1440 310 SSDG #2 POWER FACTOR STATUS ANL 1441 310 SSDG #2 SPEED RPM RATE 1442 310 SSDG #2 VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1443 310 SSDG #2 VOLTAGE LOW ALARM DIG EAL 1444 310 SSDG #3 BEARING TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1445 310 SSDG #3 COOLANT EXPANSION TANK LEVEL LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1446 310 SSDG #3 COOLANT PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1447 310 SSDG #3 COOLANT TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1448 310 SSDG #3 CURRENT - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1449 310 SSDG #3 EXHAUST TEMP TEMP ANL 1450 310 SSDG #3 FO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D) 1451 310 SSDG #3 FO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1452 310 SSDG #3 FREQUENCY STATUS ANL 1453 310 SSDG #3 FREQUENCY LOW ALARM DIG UA 1454 310 SSDG #3 GENERATOR HEATER RUNNING STATUS DIG 1455 310 SSDG #3 GENERATOR MALFUNCTION ALARM DIG UA 1456 310 SSDG #3 GENERATOR ONLINE STATUS DIG 1457 310 SSDG #3 GENERATOR READY TO RUN STATUS DIG 1458 310 SSDG #3 GENERATOR RUNNING STATUS DIG 1459 310 SSDG #3 GENERATOR TRIPPED (REVERSE POWER,


1460 310 SSDG #3 LO FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PRESS DIG PAH(D)


Page: 400-25


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1461 310 SSDG #3 LO INLET TEMP TEMP ANL 1462 310 SSDG #3 LO INLET TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1463 310 SSDG #3 LO LEVEL (SUMP) LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1464 310 SSDG #3 LO PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1465 310 SSDG #3 LO PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1466 310 SSDG #3 OVERSPEED ALARM DIG UA 1467 310 SSDG #3 POWER FACTOR STATUS ANL 1468 310 SSDG #3 SPEED RPM RATE 1469 310 SSDG #3 VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1470 310 SSDG #3 VOLTAGE LOW ALARM DIG EAL 1471 310 SSDG #4 EXHAUST TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1472 320 DATA 120V EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD DATA BUS DATA 1473 320 DATA 120V SHIP'S SERVICE SWITCHBOARD DATA BUS DATA 1474 320 DATA EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD DATA BUS DATA 1475 320 DATA SHIP'S SERVICE SWITCHBOARD DATA BUS DATA 1476 320 SHORE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN/CLOSED STATUS DIG 1477 320 SHORE POWER CURRENT - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1478 320 SHORE POWER TRANSFER SWITCH #1 POSITION STATUS DIG 1479 320 SHORE POWER TRANSFER SWITCH #2 POSITION STATUS DIG 1480 320 SHORE POWER TRANSFER SWITCH #3 POSITION STATUS DIG 1481 320 SHORE POWER VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1482 320 SWBD EMERG BUS HIGH CURRENT - 100% CAPACITY ALARM DIG IAH 1483 320 SWBD EMERG BUS HIGH CURRENT - 85% CAPACITY ALARM DIG IAH 1484 320 SWBD EMERG BUS HIGH CURRENT - 95% CAPACITY ALARM DIG IAH 1485 320 SWBD EMERG BUS VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1486 320 SWBD EMERG SWBD FAULT ALARM DIG UA 1487 320 SWBD INSULATION FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1488 320 SWBD MAIN BUS CURRENT – ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1489 320 SWBD MAIN BUS HIGH CURRENT - 100% CAPACITY ALARM DIG IAH 1490 320 SWBD MAIN BUS HIGH CURRENT - 85% CAPACITY ALARM DIG IAH 1491 320 SWBD MAIN BUS HIGH CURRENT - 95% CAPACITY ALARM DIG IAH 1492 320 SWBD MAIN BUS VOLTAGE - ALL PHASES STATUS ANL 1493 320 SWBD MAIN SWBD FAULT ALARM DIG UA 1494 432 AUX IP PHONE POWER FAILURE ALARM DIG EAL


Page: 400-26


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1495 436 FIRE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ALARM ALARM DIG UA 1496 436 FIRE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FAULT ALARM DIG UA 1497 436 FIRE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM POWER FAILURE ALARM DIG UA 1498 436 FUEL MONITOR BOILER #1 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1499 436 FUEL MONITOR BOILER #1 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1500 436 FUEL MONITOR BOILER #2 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1501 436 FUEL MONITOR BOILER #2 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1502 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #1 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1503 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #1 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1504 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #2 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1505 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #2 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1506 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #3 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1507 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #3 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1508 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #4 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1509 436 FUEL MONITOR MAIN ENGINE #4 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1510 436 FUEL MONITOR SSDG #1 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1511 436 FUEL MONITOR SSDG #1 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1512 436 FUEL MONITOR SSDG #2 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1513 436 FUEL MONITOR SSDG #2 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1514 436 FUEL MONITOR SSDG #3 FUEL CONSUMPTION STATUS ANL 1515 436 FUEL MONITOR SSDG #3 TOTAL FUEL CONSUMED STATUS ANL 1516 436 HMMR AUX SEA WATER PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1517 436 HMMR AUX SEA WATER PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1518 436 HMMR AUX SEA WATER PUMP #3 HMMR CALC HMMR 1519 436 HMMR AUX SEA WATER PUMP #4 HMMR CALC HMMR 1520 436 HMMR BILGE PUMP HMMR CALC HMMR 1521 436 HMMR BILGE/TRIM PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1522 436 HMMR BILGE/TRIM PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1523 436 HMMR BOILER #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1524 436 HMMR BOILER #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1525 436 HMMR DEICING PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1526 436 HMMR DEICING PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR


Page: 400-27


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1527 436 HMMR EMERG GEN ROOM EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1528 436 HMMR EMERGENCY GENERATOR HMMR CALC HMMR 1529 436 HMMR ER EXHAUST FAN #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1530 436 HMMR ER EXHAUST FAN #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1531 436 HMMR ER EXHAUST FAN #3 HMMR CALC HMMR 1532 436 HMMR ER SUPPLY FAN #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1533 436 HMMR ER SUPPLY FAN #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1534 436 HMMR ER SUPPLY FAN #3 HMMR CALC HMMR 1535 436 HMMR ER SUPPLY FAN #4 HMMR CALC HMMR 1536 436 HMMR FIRE PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1537 436 HMMR FIRE PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1538 436 HMMR FIRE PUMP #3 HMMR CALC HMMR 1539 436 HMMR FO PURIFIER HMMR CALC HMMR 1540 436 HMMR FO TRANSFER PUMP HMMR CALC HMMR 1541 436 HMMR LO PURIFIER HMMR CALC HMMR 1542 436 HMMR LO TRANSFER PUMP HMMR CALC HMMR 1543 436 HMMR MAIN ENGINE #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1544 436 HMMR MAIN ENGINE #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1545 436 HMMR MAIN ENGINE #3 HMMR CALC HMMR 1546 436 HMMR MAIN ENGINE #4 HMMR CALC HMMR 1547 436 HMMR NON-POTABLE WATER PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1548 436 HMMR NON-POTABLE WATER PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1549 436 HMMR NOVEC LOCKER EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1550 436 HMMR NY AUX MACHY RM EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1551 436 HMMR NY AUX MACHY RM SUPPLY FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1552 436 HMMR NY PROP ROOM EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1553 436 HMMR NY PROP ROOM SUPPLY FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1554 436 HMMR NY VOID EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1555 436 HMMR NY VOID SUPPLY FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1556 436 HMMR POTABLE WATER PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1557 436 HMMR POTABLE WATER PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1558 436 HMMR SEWAGE DISCHARGE PUMP HMMR CALC HMMR 1559 436 HMMR SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT HMMR CALC HMMR 1560 436 HMMR SHIP'S SERVICE AIR COMPRESSOR HMMR CALC HMMR 1561 436 HMMR SI AUX MACHY RM EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1562 436 HMMR SI AUX MACHY RM SUPPLY FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1563 436 HMMR SI PROP ROOM EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR


Page: 400-28


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1564 436 HMMR SI PROP ROOM SUPPLY FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1565 436 HMMR SI VOID EXHAUST FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1566 436 HMMR SI VOID SUPPLY FAN HMMR CALC HMMR 1567 436 HMMR SLUDGE PUMP HMMR CALC HMMR 1568 436 HMMR SSDG #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1569 436 HMMR SSDG #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1570 436 HMMR SSDG #3 HMMR CALC HMMR 1571 436 HMMR STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1572 436 HMMR STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1573 436 HMMR TEMPERED WATER PUMP #1 HMMR CALC HMMR 1574 436 HMMR TEMPERED WATER PUMP #2 HMMR CALC HMMR 1575 436 HMMR WO PUMP HMMR CALC HMMR 1576 436 VESSEL VESSEL SPEED STATUS ANL 1577 439 AUX CCTV TEMPERATURE TEMP ANL 1578 440 AUX PASSENGER COUNTER STATUS ANL 1579 512 FIRE FIRE DAMPER CLOSURES - ACCOM. SPACES STATUS DIG MAC 1580 512 FIRE FIRE DAMPER CLOSURES - MACHY SPACES STATUS DIG MAC 1581 512 FIRE FIRE DAMPER POWER FAILURE ALARM DIG EAL 1582 514 MACHY VENT EMERG GEN ROOM EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1583 514 MACHY VENT ER EXHAUST FAN #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1584 514 MACHY VENT ER EXHAUST FAN #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1585 514 MACHY VENT ER EXHAUST FAN #3 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1586 514 MACHY VENT ER SUPPLY FAN #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1587 514 MACHY VENT ER SUPPLY FAN #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1588 514 MACHY VENT ER SUPPLY FAN #3 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1589 514 MACHY VENT ER SUPPLY FAN #4 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1590 514 MACHY VENT NOVEC LOCKER EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1591 514 MACHY VENT NY AUX MACHY RM EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1592 514 MACHY VENT NY AUX MACHY RM SUPPLY FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1593 514 MACHY VENT NY PROP ROOM EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1594 514 MACHY VENT NY PROP ROOM SUPPLY FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1595 514 MACHY VENT NY VOID EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1596 514 MACHY VENT NY VOID SUPPLY FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1597 514 MACHY VENT SI AUX MACHY RM EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1598 514 MACHY VENT SI AUX MACHY RM SUPPLY FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1599 514 MACHY VENT SI PROP ROOM EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1600 514 MACHY VENT SI PROP ROOM SUPPLY FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG


Page: 400-29


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1601 514 MACHY VENT SI VOID EXHAUST FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1602 514 MACHY VENT SI VOID SUPPLY FAN RUNNING STATUS DIG 1603 521 FIRE MAIN FIRE PUMP #1 DISCHARGE PRESSURE STATUS ANL 1604 521 FIRE MAIN FIRE PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1605 521 FIRE MAIN FIRE PUMP #2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE STATUS ANL 1606 521 FIRE MAIN FIRE PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1607 521 FIRE MAIN FIRE PUMP #3 DISCHARGE PRESSURE STATUS ANL 1608 521 FIRE MAIN FIRE PUMP #3 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1609 528 AUX LIFT STATION PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1610 528 AUX SEWAGE DISCHARGE PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1611 528 AUX SEWAGE PLANT COMMON ALARM STATUS DIG UA 1612 528 AUX SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT RUNNING STATUS DIG 1613 528 TANK SEWAGE TANK LEVEL ANL 1614 528 TANK SEWAGE TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1615 529 BILGE BILGE PUMP RUNNING STATUS DIG 1616 529 BILGE BILGE/TRIM PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1617 529 BILGE BILGE/TRIM PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1618 529 BILGE ENGINE ROOM BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1619 529 BILGE NY AUX MACHY RM BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1620 529 BILGE NY PEAK VOID BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1621 529 BILGE NY PROP ROOM BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1622 529 BILGE NY VOID BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1623 529 BILGE SI AUX MACHY RM BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1624 529 BILGE SI PEAK VOID BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1625 529 BILGE SI PROP ROOM BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1626 529 BILGE SI VOID BILGE LEVEL HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1627 529 TANK NY PORT BALLAST LEVEL ANL 1628 529 TANK NY STBD BALLAST LEVEL ANL 1629 529 TANK OILY WATER TANK LEVEL ANL 1630 529 TANK OILY WATER TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1631 529 TANK SI PORT BALLAST LEVEL ANL 1632 529 TANK SI STBD BALLAST LEVEL ANL 1633 530 TEMP WTR BOILER #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1634 530 TEMP WTR BOILER #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1635 530 TEMP WTR BOILER FLAME SAFETY SHUTDOWN ALARM DIG UA 1636 530 TEMP WTR BOILER WATER TEMP TEMP ANL


Page: 400-30


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1637 530 TEMP WTR BOILER WATER TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH 1638 530 TEMP WTR BOILER WATER TEMP LOW TEMP DIG TAL 1639 530 TEMP WTR TEMPERED WATER CIRC SYS TEMP LOW TEMP DIG TAL 1640 530 TEMP WTR TEMPERED WATER PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1641 530 TEMP WTR TEMPERED WATER PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1642 533 P WTR NON-POTABLE WATER PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1643 533 P WTR NON-POTABLE WATER PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1644 533 P WTR NON-POTABLE WATER SYS PRESS LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1645 533 P WTR NON-POTABLE WATER SYSTEM PRESS PRESS ANL 1646 533 P WTR POTABLE WATER PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1647 533 P WTR POTABLE WATER PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1648 533 P WTR POTABLE WATER SYSTEM PRESS LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1649 533 P WTR POTABLE WATER SYSTEM PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1650 533 TANK NON-POTABLE WATER TANK LEVEL ANL 1651 533 TANK NON-POTABLE WATER TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1652 533 TANK NON-POTABLE WATER TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAH 1653 533 TANK POTABLE WATER TANK LEVEL ANL 1654 533 TANK POTABLE WATER TANK HIGH LEVEL DIG LAH 1655 533 TANK POTABLE WATER TANK LOW LEVEL DIG LAL 1656 551 COMP AIR HORN AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1657 551 COMP AIR HORN AIR PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1658 551 COMP AIR SHIP'S SERVICE AIR COMPRESSOR RUNNING STATUS DIG 1659 551 COMP AIR SHIP'S SERVICE AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1660 551 COMP AIR SHIP'S SERVICE AIR PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1661 551 COMP AIR START AIR PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1662 551 COMP AIR START AIR PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1663 551 COMP AIR STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1664 551 COMP AIR STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1665 555 FIRE EMER. GEN CLEAN AGENT RELEASE STATUS DIG MAC 1666 555 FIRE ENGINE ROOM CLEAN AGENT RELEASE STATUS DIG MAC 1667 555 FIRE EOS CLEAN AGENT RELEASE STATUS DIG MAC 1668 558 DEICING DEICING PUMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE PRESS ANL 1669 558 DEICING DEICING PUMP #1 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1670 558 DEICING DEICING PUMP #2 RUNNING STATUS DIG 1671 558 DEICING DEICING PUMP DISCH. PRESSURE LOW PRESS DIG PAL 1672 558 DEICING DEICING WATER TEMP TEMP ANL 1673 558 DEICING DEICING WATER TEMP HIGH TEMP DIG TAH


Page: 400-31


TYPE

ALRM

KEY

1674 558 DEICING DEICING WATER TEMP LOW TEMP DIG TAL 1675 585 ELEVATORS ELEVATOR #1 FAULT ALARM DIG UA 1676 585 ELEVATORS ELEVATOR #1 POWER STATUS DIG EAL 1677 585 ELEVATORS ELEVATOR #2 FAULT ALARM DIG UA 1678 585 ELEVATORS ELEVATOR #2 POWER STATUS DIG EAL 1679 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #1 CLOSED STATUS DIG 1680 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #1 OPEN STATUS DIG 1681 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #2 CLOSED STATUS DIG 1682 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #2 OPEN STATUS DIG 1683 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #3 CLOSED STATUS DIG 1684 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #3 OPEN STATUS DIG 1685 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #4 CLOSED STATUS DIG 1686 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #4 OPEN STATUS DIG 1687 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #5 CLOSED STATUS DIG 1688 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #5 OPEN STATUS DIG 1689 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #6 CLOSED STATUS DIG 1690 624 WT DOORS WT DOOR #6 OPEN STATUS DIG 1691 633 SEA CHEST ICCP SYSTEM FAULT ALARM DIG EAL

Alarm Type Key PAL Pressure Alarm, Low PAH Pressure Alarm, High 320 PAH (D) Pressure Alarm, High (Differential) LAL Level Alarm, Low LAH Level Alarm, High TAH Temperature Alarm, High TAL Temperature Alarm, Low 325 EAL Voltage Alarm, Low IAH Current Alarm, High UA Multi-Parameter Alarm MAC Manual Activation HMMR Digital Machinery Hour Meter330


Page: 400-32

436.2 Fire Detection and Alarm System

Provide and install UL listed addressable smoke and fire detection system, Simplex or equal as indicated in Reference (4G). The system shall comply with the requirements of 46 CFR §76.05 and ASTM F-1198. The system shall comprise a central monitoring panel located in the Staten 335 Island Pilot House, and repeater panels located in the EOS and New York end Pilot House, and a series of remote smoke and heat detectors and manual pull boxes located throughout the vessel as indicated in Reference (4G). All remote instruments (heat detectors, pull boxes) shall be grouped into zones based on their physical location.

When any one instrument is activated, the central monitoring and repeater panels shall give a 340 visual indication of which zone contains the active alarm. Audible and visible alarm beacons shall be fitted in each Pilot House and EOS and shall issue alarms when a zone alarm becomes active.

The normal source of power shall be single phase, 120 VAC power fed from the emergency bus. The detection system shall have an integrated back-up power supply with sufficient battery 345 capacity to operate the system for 24 hours in standby mode and 5 minutes in alarm mode.

Unless otherwise approved, heat detectors shall be fixed temperature heat detectors. Smoke detection devices or optical flame detectors may be substituted with prior written approval of the Owner. Smoke detectors shall be provided in crew and passenger spaces as indicated in Reference (4G). Smoke detectors shall be an addressable, photoelectric type. Manual call points 350 shall be located along primary egress routes to the stair towers from the major spaces on each deck.

The Contractor shall submit a fire detection plan for Owner approval. The plan shall contain a list of all detectors and pull boxes and shall illustrate where each is located. The plan shall also indicate to which zone each individual detector or pull box is assigned. 355

436.3 Fuel Monitoring System

The Contractor shall provide and install an ultrasonic fuel flowmeter system, Flexim FLUXUS or equal. Provide and install eighteen (18) Clamp-on Ultrasonic flow transducers, Flexim Type Q or equal, one (1) on the fuel supply and return for each main propulsion, auxiliary diesel engine, and boiler. Provide and install nine (9) dual channel flow transmitters, FLUXUS Type 360 704 or equal, one (1) for each engine and boiler, capable of measuring volumetric flow, totalizing flow from the supply and return sensors, and transmitting data to the ship's alarm and monitoring system.

Interface with the ship's alarm and monitoring system to display current and totalized fuel consumption for reach main engine, ship's service generator, and boiler. 365

436.4 Tank Level Indication System

Provide and install a remote tank level indication (TLI) system, level alarm system, and visual tank level indicators. The system shall be an EMS Marcon Tank Manager or equal. The TLI system shall be comprised of a series of individual sensors for continuous or discrete


Page: 400-33

measurement of the liquid level in vessel tanks, interfaced with the machinery alarm and 370 monitoring system. Level indication shall be provided as noted in Table 400 - 4 and Reference (4J).

Table 400 - 4: Tank Level Indication Schedule

Tank Continuous Level Indication Level Alarms

sounding tube sight gauge remote high low

FO Storage Tank STBD FO Storage Tank Port FO Day Tank STBD FO Day Tank Port E GEN FO Tank Urea Tank Urea Overflow Tank NY Port Ballast Tank NY Stbd Ballast Tank SI Port Ballast Tank SI Stbd Ballast Tank Sewage Tank Lube Oil Tank Auxiliary Lube Oil Tank Lube Oil Sludge Tank Waste Oil Tank Oily Water Tank Potable Water Tank Non-Potable Water Tank VSP LO Storage `

The Contractor shall provide calculations, calibrations, and corrections as necessary to provide 375 accurate TLI outputs. The TLI outputs shall be displayed and monitored via the machinery alarm and monitoring system and the system shall be configured to activate level alarms using input from the TLI sensors. TLIs shall measure across the maximum range of tank levels practicable.

A remote display shall be provided at the fill stations on the Main Deck, at each end of the 380 vessel. The Main Deck tank level display units shall be surface mounted, marine duty high-resolution 14-inch LCD flat screens with NEMA 4 stainless steel enclosures. The Main Deck displays shall provide continuous level indication for the fuel oil storage, sewage, potable water, and non-potable water tanks.

High-level alarms shall activate at approximately 90% full volume unless otherwise noted. 385

Where sight gauges are specified, provide Gems SureSite mini or standard, alloy visual float type level gauges, or equal. The gauges shall read over the greatest possible extent of the tank


Page: 400-34

capacity range. Where multiple sight gauges are required to span the height of one tank, the gauges shall overlap.

437 ENGINE ORDER TELEGRAPH 390

Provide and install an engine order telegraph (EOT) system with interface panels located in the Pilot House console at each end of the vessel and the EOS console as indicated in Reference (4F). The EOT shall be EMI or equal. The telegraph system shall be fully compliant with the requirements of 46 CFR §113.35. Each panel shall incorporate two (2) separate telegraphs; one (1) for each propulsion drivetrain. The telegraph for each drivetrain shall be fully compatible 395 with Voith Schneider Propeller (VSP) propulsion, and allow the captain to transmit orders for both ahead/astern and port/starboard propulsion commands. The EOS panel shall also provide indication of vessel direction such that the operator can identify the direction of thrust based on joystick movements.

The EOT panels shall be flush mounted and shall feature a pushbutton style interface and local 400 audible/visual signals.

439 CCTV

Provide and install a closed circuit television (CCTV) system as indicated in Reference (4I). The system shall provide the vessel's crew the ability to monitor passenger spaces, security areas, anchor areas and rescue boats and allow engineering personnel to view vital parts of the vessel's 405 machinery plant.

The Contractor shall work with the Owner's preferred CCTV subcontractor for system design and equipment selection.

The CCTV subcontractor shall provide complete turnkey solution including testing, production, fielding, sustainment, scalability and improvement of CCTV equipment and software. 410 Equipment and software installed shall be compatible with the existing fleet and terminals. The scope shall include installation of the latest technology in IP-based cameras and associated fiber, installation of the latest version of Genetec Video Management System, and the integration of head end equipment. Head end equipment shall include all necessary equipment such as encoders, servers, storage arrays, workstations, and network switches. The Contractor shall 415 provide equipment that meets the minimum requirements as indicated on Reference (4I).

The CCTV system shall have the capability of recording all camera video for up to 60 days.

The CCTV system shall be configured for remote monitoring from any location and from wireless devices. CCTV video and data shall be transmitted between the vessel and terminals via the wireless antenna system described in Section 434. Provide and install all associated 420 equipment and software required for remote monitoring. The Contractor shall provide up to ten (10) compatible devices, Apple iPad or approved equal, for remote monitoring by management staff.

The CCTV subcontractor shall ensure that the system can function properly through its life cycle and that the infrastructure elements necessary for operational support are identified and acquired. 425


Page: 400-35

The major components of the installation shall include, but are not limited to:

1. Install cameras at designated locations as approved by the Owner 2. Install viewing stations at four (4) locations on board: Staten Island End Pilot House,

New York End Pilot House, EOS and Security Equipment Room. 3. Install associated head-end equipment in the Security Equipment Room 430

4. Install wireless equipment to include antennas and software 5. Install the VMS software and apply software licenses 6. Configure cameras to the software including camera name, focus, brightness, contrast and

resolution to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative 7. Configure video recording parameters (i.e. frame rates, quality, bit rate) 435

8. Configure system administration (i.e. security, users, groups) to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative

9. Obtain SMAs and associated warrantees 10. Testing: The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a detailed testing plan that

includes the following at a minimum: 440

a. Cable: i. Test all cable in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 (fiber optic cable)

and ANSI/TIA-1183 (copper cable) standards. The cable shall meet bandwidth, attenuation and throughput requirements of these standards.

ii. The Contractor shall provide a link loss budget for the system cable 445 infrastructure. Final testing shall meet the proposed loss budgets.

b. Network: i. Test network bandwidth, latency and throughput in accordance with IEEE

802.x standards as applicable. ii. Test all remote connections and ship to shore network interface. 450

c. Equipment: i. Each system component shall be tested individually prior to installation to

ensure operation in accordance with the manufacturers specifications. ii. Each system component shall also be tested individually after installation

to ensure proper operation within the installed system. 455

d. Functional Testing: i. After installation and system commissioning, a detailed functional test

shall be performed to ensure proper operation of all system components and capabilities.

The CCTV subcontractor shall provide a progress schedule, installation progress photos, 460 progress reports, testing and test reports, and all other information required for the adequate monitoring and management of the work and its progress by the Contractor and Owner's Representative.


Page: 400-36

Provide four (4) CCTV control and monitoring stations each including a 28.1 inch monitor, or equal. Locate one (1) station in each Pilot House, where shown on Reference (4A),one (1) 465 station in the EOS and one (1) station in the Security Equipment Room, located where shown on Reference (4B).

Install fixed or pan-tilt-zoom dome interior/exterior cameras where shown on Reference (4I). Cameras shall be suspended from the overhead and not mounted to a finished ceiling or bulkhead surface, unless noted otherwise. The final camera locations, orientation, and focal length shall be 470 approved by the Owner with consultation from the system supplier. Cameras shall be located with regard to light sources such as light fixtures and exterior doors to mitigate lens flare.

The system shall have the capacity to add up to twelve (12) additional camera locations throughout the life of the vessel.

Provide and install power and signal cables to each camera location as required as necessary to 475 complete the installation.

Upon system completion and commissioning, the Contractor shall provide a system schematic and wiring diagram, showing the location of each hardware item within the system, cable routing, and identifying all wires, and their connections. A schedule of cable types shall be included. 480

440 PASSENGER COUNTERS

Provide and install optical passenger counters, Hella People Counter APC or equal. Sensor equipment shall be installed on both ends of the vessel at passenger entry points on the Main and Saloon Decks, to provide complete coverage of the passenger embarkation areas. The passenger count shall be displayed in each Pilot House on an LCD screen. The passenger counter system 485 shall also maintain a history of passenger count for a minimum of sixty (60) days, and provide Ethernet connectivity for real-time transmission of passenger counts via the ship's wireless Ethernet system.

441 VHF RADIOS

Provide and install three (3) permanently installed VHF/DSC radios, ICOM M604 or equal, in 490 each Pilot House as shown in Reference (4A). Provide and install one (1) permanently installed VHF/DSC radios, ICOM M604 or equal, in the EOS as shown in Reference (4A). Each radio shall be provided with its own antenna assembly mounted on the Pilot House top and a control panel mounted in the Pilot House console.

Antenna mounting and wiring between the antenna and control unit shall be in accordance with 495 the manufacturer's instructions.

451 RADAR

The Contractor shall provide and install four (4) radar systems. Each Pilot House shall be equipped with two (2) independent X-band radars, 9 GHz, with ARPA, 6.5 foot antenna, 12 kW, 19 inch color LCD display, Furuno FAR2127BB. Equipment shall be the latest technology 500 available and match the existing fleet standard to the extent practicable.


Page: 400-37

Each radar antenna shall be fitted with a self-supporting mast or tripod and shall be suitable for mounting in a marine weather environment. All case penetrations shall be watertight. Radar wave guides shall be provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


Page: 500-1

GROUP 500 – AUXILIARY MACHINERY

500 GENERAL 3 500.1 References 3 500.2 General 3 500.3 System Design 3 5 500.4 Marking, Nameplates, and Labels 5

503 PUMPS 6 505 PIPING 7

505.1 General 7 505.2 Valves, Fittings, and Instrument Piping 9 10 505.3 Valve Operating Gear 10 505.4 Takedown Joints 11 505.5 Pipe Hangers 11

506 FILLS, VENTS AND SOUNDS 12 506.1 General 12 15 506.2 Tank Level Indication 13

508 PIPING AND MACHINERY INSULATION 13 508.1 General 13

512 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING REQUIREMENTS 13 512.1 General 13 20 512.2 Design Conditions 14 512.3 Noise 14 512.4 Ducting 15 512.5 Weather Louvers and Mist Eliminators 16 512.6 Ventilation Insulation and Lagging 17 25 512.7 Fire Dampers 17 512.8 Fans 18 512.9 Controls 18 512.10 Heat Pumps 19

513 MACHINERY SPACE VENTILATION AND HEATING SYSTEMS 19 30

513.1 Engine Room 19 513.2 Auxiliary Machinery Rooms 20 513.3 Voids 20 513.4 Propulsion Rooms 21 513.5 Emergency Diesel Generator Room 21 35 513.6 Novec Locker 22

514 PASSENGER AND CREW SPACE HVAC SYSTEMS 22 514.1 Passenger Seating Areas 22 514.2 Stair Towers 23 514.3 Passenger Area Exhaust 23 40 514.4 Pilot Houses 23 514.5 Crew Spaces 24 514.6 Security Equipment Room 24 514.7 Engineer's Operating Station 24

520 SEAWATER SYSTEMS 24 45

520.1 Sea Chests 24


Page: 500-2

521 FIREMAIN SYSTEM 25 526 WEATHER DECK DRAINS 25 528 SANITARY SYSTEM 26

528.1 General 26 50 528.2 Interior Deck Drains 26 528.3 Black and Gray Water Drains 26 528.4 Sewage Treatment Plant 27 528.5 Sewage Tank and Discharge Pump 28

529 DRAINAGE AND BALLAST SYSTEMS 29 55

529.1 Bilge and Trim (Ballast) System 29 529.2 Oily Water System 30

530 TEMPERED WATER SYSTEM 30 533 POTABLE AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEMS 31

533.1 Potable Water System 31 60 533.2 Sanitary Water System 33

551 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 33 551.1 General 33 551.2 High Pressure System 34 551.3 Ship Service Air System 35 65 551.4 Compressed Air Supply to AUS Dosing 35

555 CLEAN AGENT FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 35 556 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 36

556.1 Remote Valve Shut-Off System 36 558 DECK DE-ICING SYSTEM 37 70

581 ANCHOR HANDLING AND STORAGE SYSTEMS 37 581.1 General 37 581.2 Anchors 37 581.3 Anchor Chain and Hardware 38 581.4 Anchor Winches 38 75

582 MOORING SYSTEMS 39 582.1 General 39 582.2 Mooring Capstan 39 582.3 Mooring Chocks, Bitts, and Fairleads 39 582.4 Towing Padeyes 39 80

583 LIFESAVING APPLIANCES 40 583.1 Rescue Boat and Davits 40 583.2 Life Jackets (PFDs) and Stowage 41 583.3 Life Rings 42 583.4 Life Rafts and Launching Devices 42 85 583.5 Miscellaneous Equipment 42

585 PASSENGER ELEVATOR 42


Page: 500-3

500 GENERAL

500.1 References 90

Table 500 - 1: Reference – Auxiliary Machinery


(5A) 14079-200-506-1 Fills, Vents and Sounds (5B) 14079-200-513-1 Machinery Ventilation Arrangement (5C) 14079-200-514-1 Accommodations HVAC Diagram (5D) 14079-200-520-1 Sea Chests (5E) 14079-200-521-1 Fire Main System Diagram (5F) 14079-200-526-1 Deck Drain Piping Diagram (5G) 14079-200-528-1 Sanitary Drains Diagram (5H) 14079-200-640-1 Interior Furnishings and Outfit (5I) 14079-200-529-1 Bilge and Trim Piping Diagram (5J) 14079-200-529-2 Oily Water Piping Diagram (5K) 14079-200-530-1 Tempered Water Piping Diagram (5L) 14079-200-533-1 Potable & Sanitary Water Piping Diagram (5M) 14079-200-551-1 Compressed Air Piping Diagram (5N) 14079-200-558-1 Deck De-icing System Diagram (5O) 14079-200-581-1 Deck Machinery and Mooring Arrangement (5P) 14079-200-101-3 Lifesaving Equipment Plan (5Q) 14079-200-635-1 Thermal and Acoustic Insulation Plan (5R) 14079-200-101-7 Fire Zone Plan (5S) N/A NVIC 9-97 CH 1, Guide to Structural Fire Protection

500.2 General

This section describes requirements for the vessel's auxiliary systems. The general requirements for all piping systems are addressed herein and the HVAC, seawater, oily water, drainage, de-95 icing and sanitary systems are covered in detail.

500.3 System Design

The Contractor shall design and install piping systems in accordance with the requirements of ABS, the USCG, and other Regulatory Bodies. The Contractor shall prepare calculations and drawings and submit them to the Owner's Representative in accordance with Section 810 and to 100 Regulatory Bodies for approval, as required.

Piping sizes indicated on the Contract Guidance Drawings are given for reference purposes. Final selection of pipe sizes for fabrication and installation is the responsibility of the Contractor.


Page: 500-4

Unions shall not be installed in piping located behind linings, false ceilings, or in other inaccessible locations. 105

Except as noted elsewhere in these Technical Specifications or Contract Guidance Drawings, each bilge branch and fuel oil tank suction connection shall have a suction bell mouth with the inlet diameter not less than 1 1/2 times the pipe diameter. The bottom of the inlet shall be 1/2 the pipe diameter from the bottom of the tank, but not over 1 1/2 inches.

Piping systems that require drainage during start-up or relatively frequent manual drainage in 110 service shall be provided with drain lines fitted with valves. Screwed plugs shall be installed where drainage is required on an infrequent basis such as for periodic inspection, maintenance, or dry-docking. Flanged or bossed drainage fittings shall be installed where an unavoidable low point or pocket exists in a pipe run. Vent fittings shall be provided for removal of air in piping installed with unavoidable high points. The quantity, location, and arrangement of all such 115 fittings shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Flexible connections shall be provided where required to isolate vibration and to accommodate thermal growth. Flexible connections shall also be provided between piping assemblies and resiliently mounted equipment. The Contractor shall ensure that all flexible connections are sufficiently flexible to avoid overstressing the equipment, connected piping, or the flex assembly 120 itself.

In general, fluid piping systems shall use flexible hose assemblies with 37-degree flare, swivel end connections on both ends for connections 2 inches and smaller, and Garlock Style 206 or equal flanged flexible connections for larger connections. Hose assemblies conveying fuel or lube oil shall be USCG-approved flame resistant type, Aeroquip FC 234, Parker Hannifin 125 221FR, or equal. In general, flexible hose assemblies shall not be less than 9 inches length or more than 30 inches length. Flexible hose runs shall not substitute for pipe or tube.

Garlock EZ-Flo flexible couplings, where used, shall be USCG and ABS compliant with steel flange retaining rings, chlorobutyl carcass, Hypalon liner and Neoprene cover, or equal.

Flexible connections for use in the compressed air system and engine exhaust systems are 130 addressed in Sections 259 and 551, respectively.

Isolation capability is required so that individual components may be secured while the vessel is in service. In order to meet operational requirements and to facilitate on-board maintenance, isolation valves shall be incorporated for individual and sectional subdivision, to include all branch lines, mains, and equipment. 135

Piping systems and components shall be insulated in accordance with Section 508.

Drip pans shall be provided to collect normal oil leakage under filters, pumps, strainers and similar equipment. Drip pans shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet metal and equipped with drain valves. Drip pans surrounding large pieces of equipment may be integrated with the equipment's foundation at the Contractor's option provided the resulting drip containment has a 140 valved drain at its low point, prevents oil from entering the bilge, and provides sufficient access for maintenance.


Page: 500-5

Where jacking bolts or other fixtures are installed to align equipment, such fixtures shall be left in place for future use during maintenance provided doing so would not interfere with safe operation of the equipment or present a hazard to personnel. 145

Where valves, cleanouts, or other components requiring access for maintenance or operation are installed behind joinery, suitable access panels shall be provided. In general, such access shall be located in ceilings rather than joiner panels. All access panels in passenger accessible spaces shall be lockable or tamper resistant to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

500.4 Marking, Nameplates, and Labels 150

System and equipment labels or nameplates shall be provided throughout the vessel. All operating systems, associated components and/or equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances shall be readily identifiable. All machinery and equipment not otherwise labeled by its manufacturer shall have a label plate listing the function of the component and other pertinent data. Affix barcodes for asset identification to machinery and equipment. Equipment and valve 155 nameplates or labels shall also include an identifying number.

Except where the function of a valve or component is obvious, such as a fresh water cutout valve immediately adjacent to a lavatory fixture, each valve throughout the vessel shall be identified as to its service and function.

Label plates shall have characters that are 3/8 inches high where possible, but in no case less than 160 3/16 inches high. Primary information shall be in letters of larger size than secondary information.

Metal engraved label plates shall be affixed to all tanks.

All instruments shall have a label listing the purpose of the instrument.

Valve name tags or label plates shall be brass or stainless steel, engraved with a valve number, 165 the system service, and the valve function. The tag or label shall be a circular disk attached to the valve wheel and held in place by the valve wheel nut, or it shall be a rectangular tag attached to the valve operating lever or body by a short brass chain or flexible stainless steel safety lock wire, as appropriate to the type of valve.

All piping shall be stenciled to indicate the medium contained in the system and the normal 170 direction of flow at least once between takedown joints, on each side of bulkhead penetrations, and at least once in each compartment through which the pipe passes. The stenciling letters and numeral shall be proportional to the diameter of the pipe, and the color of the stencil shall provide a sharp contrast to the background (normally black letters on white pipe). Size of letters shall be generally as follows: 175

All insulated pipe ......................................1 1/2 inch high lettering 2 inches and above, bare pipe....................1 1/2 inch high lettering 1 1/2 inch to 1 inch....................................1 inch high lettering 3/4 inch and 1/2 inch ................................1/2 inch high lettering


Page: 500-6

3/8 inch......................................................3/8 inch high lettering 180 Ventilation ducts ......................................1 1/2 inch high lettering

Additionally, all piping below the main deck shall be color banded to describe its function.

Fire main piping shall be painted red throughout.

Fill and discharge connections shall be painted colors to indicate their function.

Notwithstanding the aforementioned sizes and details, all markings, nameplates, and labels shall 185 comply with ABS and USCG requirements.

Prior to fabricating and installing nameplates and labels or painting and marking pipes, the Contractor shall prepare a schedule of markings and labels along with label and nameplate samples to the Owner’s Representative for approval. The schedule shall indicate all text to be included on each label, nameplate, or pipe stencil and indicate colors used for pipe identification. 190

503 PUMPS

The Contractor shall provide pumps that meet the performance requirements and construction features as described herein and elsewhere in these Technical Specifications and Contract Guidance Drawings. Pumps shall be of a high commercial marine standard, built in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and ASTM F-998. 195

Pumps shall be provided with ensured suctions through submergence, foot valves, or priming systems in order that pump operation is immediate and positive. The Contractor shall verify that the installed pumps have sufficient NPSH for the selected service and system.

The performance requirements listed on the Contract Guidance Drawings are based on preliminary equipment selection, pipe size and estimated system routing shown. The Contractor 200 shall supply pumps meeting the required flow and head requirements of the installed piping systems.

Where two (2) or more pumps of the same size and type are specified, they shall be duplicates.

Where two (2) metal parts not of cast iron are in sliding contact, they shall be of dissimilar metals. For cast iron parts of pumps in corrosive services, which require disassembly when 205 servicing pumps, through-bolts or studs shall be used instead of cap bolts. In general, the use of through-bolts and studs is required for securing pump parts where thread corrosion or seizure may be expected in service. Fasteners shall be stainless steel with threads coated with a compatible anti-seize compound.

For horizontal units, except close-coupled pumps, the pump and its driver shall be mounted on a 210 common base of rugged construction. Dowels or fitted bolts shall be fitted, where necessary, to ensure proper alignment.

Close-coupled pumps shall be of the heavy-duty type and shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.


Page: 500-7

Pumps of the coupled type shall be driven through flexible couplings. 215

Each pump shall have a pressure gauge connected on the discharge side and a compound pressure gauge on the suction side. Provision shall be made for using a portable tachometer to determine the speed of motor driven pumps.

All pump connections 1 1/2 inches and over shall be flanged in accordance with American National Standards. Where pump nozzles are of a different size than the connected piping, a 220 tapered transition piece of adequate length shall be used.

A vent tube with a valve shall be located at the top of the casing of all centrifugal pumps and a drain at the bottom. Alternatively, only where it is not possible to provide a vent line directly from the top of the pump casing, the vent line may be located at the discharge from the pump. Vents on seawater pumps shall be fitted with a tube directed to the bilge. Vent valves shall be 225 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch stainless steel or bronze ball valves. Vent tubing shall be stainless steel or bronze.

Mechanical seals shall be provided for all pumps. All pumps shall be equipped with suitable thrust bearings to absorb any primary residual thrust that may occur during operation or when the pump loses suction. In general, pumps shall be equipped with sealed ball bearings contained in 230 housings and removable as a unit with the pump shaft.

During detail design, centrifugal pumps shall be selected to operate at, or near, the maximum efficiency point on the head-capacity curve. The pumps shall have non-overloading power characteristics, and the driver rated horsepower shall at least equal the maximum power requirement of the pump at rated speed without allowance for a service factor. 235

Wearing rings and casing bushings shall be provided of different hardness than adjacent wearing parts. Impellers shall have removable wearing rings wherever practicable.

All pump details shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval.

505 PIPING

505.1 General 240

Pipe, valves, and fitting materials shall conform to the material schedules on the diagrams. The Contractor shall verify the pipe sizes and pump characteristics given on the diagrams.

Piping shall be led as directly as practicable with a minimum number of bends and fittings and with sufficient joints to provide for removal, inspection, servicing, and replacement of piping, valves, fittings and equipment. Piping shall be routed to avoid cutting the ship's structure where 245 possible. Pipe bends shall be used to the maximum extent possible in lieu of elbows.

Approved mechanical fitting systems, such as Viega SeaPress, ProPress, or other systems approved by regulatory agencies may be substituted for welded or brazed joints in water and seawater systems. Such fittings shall only be used where permitted by USCG regulations and in accordance with their approvals. The Contractor shall submit details of proposed fittings to the 250 Owner's Representative for approval prior to detail design of the system. Where mechanical


Page: 500-8

fittings are used, provide three (3) sets of tools per vessel covering all fitting sizes used on the vessel.

Pockets in pipelines shall be avoided. Each system shall be provided with fittings, valves, or traps to enable complete drainage of pipes when desired. Where pockets do occur, bosses and 255 valves or screwed plugs shall be provided for draining. All bosses, plugs, and valves shall be galvanically compatible with the surrounding piping system.

The Contractor shall exercise care to develop the system arrangements and installation of piping aboard the vessel to permit the following:

Free passage along walkways and ladders 260

Free access to perform maintenance

Free access to all doors, hatches, and openings

Ready removal of the vessel's equipment and system components

Piping in the overhead shall be run at sufficient height to maintain finished ceiling heights at a minimum of 7 feet or as noted in the Contract Guidance Drawings. 265

The Contractor shall lay out piping systems, regardless of size or material, for machine bending of pipe to a radius of five times the normal diameter of the pipe wherever practicable, but with a minimum radius of three times the nominal diameter, if necessary.

Where piping penetrates a watertight bulkhead, a deck or a tank top, an approved penetration fitting shall be used to ensure the tightness of the structure. Penetration details shall be 270 developed as shown on the Contract Guidance Drawings and as required to obtain USCG and ABS approval. In no case shall the plating form part of a joint or piping.

Piping in each system shall be arranged to drain naturally to the low end. In addition, compressed air piping shall be sloped to drain into the air receivers.

In order to prevent damage to piping and joints at bulkheads and decks, expansion bends shall be 275 provided, as necessary, to allow for sufficient piping movement due to the working of the vessel’s structure. Expansion joints shall not be used except in engine exhaust.

Ferrous pipe and fittings required to be galvanized shall be galvanized by the hot dip process after fabrication when welding is necessary. Where galvanizing is damaged during construction, the Contractor shall repair the galvanizing using hot stick or zinc-spray metalizing methods in 280 accordance with ASTM A780. Zinc repairs shall be lead free. Cold-galvanizing coatings shall not be used.

Where joints of ferrous and nonferrous materials cannot be avoided, the connection shall be made with a flanged takedown joint fully isolated with gasket and sleeved fasteners using isolating washers under the fastener. 285


Page: 500-9

Pipe welding shall comply with the rules and regulations of the USCG and the details of ASTM F 722.

Piping systems containing oils shall be installed so that flanged connectors are located remotely from exposed surfaces having a temperature in excess of 450°F. Protective shielding shall be provided around the flanged connections to prevent the possibility of spray onto exposed hot 290 surfaces. Piping shall be located at least 18 inches away from surfaces that have temperatures under the insulation in excess of 450°F.

The Contractor shall avoid routing pipes directly over or within 2 feet of electrical equipment. In no case shall flanges or joints be located over electrical equipment.

Pipes shall not be routed directly over engines, except for systems connected to the engine. 295 Pipes shall not obstruct manholes, hatches or other accesses.

505.2 Valves, Fittings, and Instrument Piping

Valves shall be accessible from the grating level whenever possible. Where valves must be located out of easy reach, the Contractor shall install reach rods, remote operators, or some other suitable means of access. 300

Hand wheels for sea valves shall be easily accessible.

Manually operated valves shall be readily operable by one (1) person, directly or through mechanical advantage type operators. Valves or valve hand wheels shall be located so that the operator's hand may easily pass between the hand wheel and any interference, with the hand wheel open, closed, or in between. 305

Except when mounted overhead and arranged for operation from below, manually operated valve stems shall be installed with the valve stem rotated above the horizontal plane. Ball and butterfly valves shall be installed in such a manner that the valve opens and the handle lines up with the piping under normal operating conditions.

Valves shall be right-hand closing and shall have either a rising stem, or an indicator to show 310 whether the valve is open or closed.

Spindles, seats, and disks of valves shall be corrosion-resistant material.

Unless otherwise noted in the Technical Specifications or Contract Guidance Drawings, valves that are 2 1/2 inches and larger, except butterfly valves, shall be flanged with bolted bonnets and packing glands. Valves that are 2 inches and smaller may have union ends and bonnets, socket 315 weld ends, or threaded ends.

The use of threaded valves and fittings in systems containing fuel oil, lube oil or hydraulic oil shall be limited to equipment connections and small fittings such as gauge piping and drain plugs to minimize the potential for leakage.

Check valves shall be installed wherever flow reversal in a system would be detrimental to 320 operational requirements.


Page: 500-10

Stop check valves shall be installed wherever flow reversals could flood a space.

Check valves shall be installed in a horizontal plane and in a fore and aft orientation where possible.

Relief valves shall be provided on the discharge side of all positive displacement pumps and air 325 compressors which do not have built-in relief valves.

In general, gate or ball valves shall be used where shut-off only is required. Globe or angle valves shall be used where throttling is required.

Butterfly valves may be used in pipe 3 inches and over if the seat material suits the maximum operating temperature of the system, only where approved by the Owner's Representative. 330 Butterfly valves shall not be substituted for gate valve or globe valves shown on the Contract Guidance Drawings, and shall not be used on sea chests and overboard shell connections.

Butterfly valves shall have body and disk materials as noted in the materials schedule on the diagrams. Valve stems shall be stainless steel. Valve seats shall be Buna N, Viton, or metallic as required to suit the service. Connections for thermometers with dry wells, and pressure 335 gauges with snubbers, shall be provided to check proper operation of piping and equipment.

Pressure gauges shall be provided with a compound type at the suction side and a pressure type at the discharge side of all pumps. Differential pressure gauges shall be provided at all strainers and filters. The gauges shall be 2 1/2 inch diameter, liquid filled. Pressure gauges shall be provided with shut-off valves and snubbers and shall be mounted on each pump. Gauge piping 340 assemblies shall meet the requirements of ASTM F721.

Valve locking devices shall meet the requirements of ASTM F993, Type II.

505.3 Valve Operating Gear

Provide valve remote operating gear for the peak void bilge suction lines penetrating the collision bulkheads, and elsewhere as required by ABS or USCG requirements and as indicated 345 on the Contract Guidance Drawings.

Remote operating gear shall terminate at the Main Deck or outside the space as required by USCG and USCG. Operating gear shall be rigid or flexible shafting with universal joints.

Deck boxes shall be commercially manufactured of stainless steel. Each shall be provided with a stainless steel or bronze flush cap, permanently stamped or engraved with its function on the cap 350 and on the rim. The deck box shall indicate whether the valve served is open or closed. Deck boxes for the systems described herein and elsewhere in the Technical Specifications shall be of identical manufacture. Provide four (4) identical T-wrenches per vessel, which serve all deck boxes and all sounding tubes. Mount the wrenches as directed by the Owner's Representative.

Refer to Section 556 for remote fuel and lube oil tank emergency shutoff valve operator system 355 requirements.


Page: 500-11

505.4 Takedown Joints

Unless otherwise noted in the Technical Specifications or Contract Guidance Drawings, flanged takedown joints shall be provided in piping 2 1/2 inches and over, and unions may be used in piping 2 inches and smaller. Takedown joints shall be provided to allow removal of all in line 360 equipment, or to allow removal of equipment normally blocked by the pipe. Takedown joints with isolation shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are used as described elsewhere in this section.

Flanges in piping shall conform to ANSI standards for the appropriate service.

Where a steel flange is used with a either a cast iron flange or bronze flange, the steel flange 365 shall have a flat face, and a full-face gasket shall be used. Flange gaskets shall be asbestos free.

Flange gaskets shall be compatible with the piping material, fluid conveyed, design pressure and temperature of the systems in which they are installed, and shall meet all ABS and USCG requirements. Unions in metal piping shall be ground joint type.

Takedown joints in soft copper tubing shall be SAE 45 degrees flare type, with long nuts. 370

505.5 Pipe Hangers

Piping shall be adequately supported by hangers suitable for the material and service, and in compliance with regulatory requirements.

In general, pipe hangers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F708. The Contractor shall adjust the design, spacing, and installation of pipe hangers, as necessary, to provide an installation 375 suitable for carrying the weight of the pipe and its contents, including dynamic loading imposed by the operating conditions of the vessel, and to prevent damage from vibration and thermal expansion.

The following hanger types, applied to suit the Contractor's needs for ease of installation, facilitate maintenance and to minimize maintenance disruption to service may be used: 380

Split cap with standoffs

Strap hanger, (with and without rider bar)

U-bolt, (with and without rider bars)

Nelson hangers

J-band hangers 385

Stauff twin clamp hangers

Crimp on welded stud hangers


Page: 500-12

The Contractor shall submit proposed hanger details to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to fabrication.

Hangers shall be fabricated from carbon steel. Hangers in areas subject to corrosion shall be 390 zinc-plated or coated with a zinc-based primer before painting with the system indicated for the surrounding structure. Where dissimilar materials occur or where hangers support non-ferrous pipe, hangers shall be lined with approved isolation material.

Hangers shall be attached to the pipe with bolted clamps and welded to the basic ship structure. Care shall be exercised to place pipe hangers so that strain is avoided where piping is connected 395 to machinery. Hangers shall not be attached by welding directly to pipes.

Hilti strut based pipe supports and Hilti X-BT mechanical fasteners or equal, used in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and regulatory approvals may be substituted for welded hangers.

For hot engine piping such as exhaust and jacket water, flexible hangers shall be provided to 400 accommodate thermal growth along with flexible pipe connections to the engine. Flexible hangers generally shall be rigid in directions other than parallel to the pipe axis. Exhaust hangers shall thermally isolate the exhaust pipe from the ship's structure.

506 FILLS, VENTS AND SOUNDS

506.1 General 405

Arrange vents, fills and sounding tubes generally as shown on Reference (5A).

Provide and install a sounding tube for each tank per Reference (5A). Lead each sounding tube from approximately 1 inch above the lowest point in the compartment or tank as straight as possible to its upper terminal. Provide a 3/4 inch thick steel striking plate at the bottom of each sounding tube. Sounding tubes that terminate at the Main Deck shall have a flush deck box with 410 a flush bronze cover, engraved deeply in 3/8 inch high letters with the tank identification.

Provide and install quick acting, self-closing gate valves at the tops of the sounding tubes that terminate below the freeboard deck. Provide identifying labels in accordance with Section 500.4. Provide vertical ladders on fuel oil tanks for access to sounding tubes.

Vent terminals shall be flanged vertical ball check type with protective mesh screens, Winteb 415 WIN2000 HIAS or equal. Stainless steel flame screens for fuel, lubricating oil, oily water, and sewage tanks shall meet the requirements of USCG 46 CFR §56.50-85. Potable water tank vents shall be fitted with an insect screen.

Provide and install a urea tank vent with a stainless steel pressure/vacuum relief valve, ERL 2.5 Equate or equal, and spill containment. 420

Provide and install a spill containment with a capacity of at least 42 gallons around each fuel vent.

Arrange fills and vents so that they drain back to the tank they serve.


Page: 500-13

Machinery space and void ventilation is covered in Section 512.

506.2 Tank Level Indication 425

Provide and install sounding tubes and tank level indication as described in Section 436 and Reference (5A).

508 PIPING AND MACHINERY INSULATION

508.1 General

The following describes the thermal and anti-sweat insulation to be applied to all piping systems 430 that operate over 122°F and below 65°F. In general, piping under Engine Room floor plates need not be insulated.

Provide piping insulation for hot and cold fluid piping systems including:

Diesel engine and boiler exhaust pipes and silencers (Refer to Section 259) Low temp services 56ºF to 126°F including cold-water piping such as sanitary, fresh 435

water, and drains where dripping condensate could cause damage Hot water piping, valves, and pump casings Cold potable water piping, valves, and pump casings Tempered water piping, valves, heat exchangers, and pump casings. HVAC ducting 440

Insulation shall also be applied to potable water or other systems for freeze protection where filled piping may be exposed to below freezing ambient conditions.

The selection and application of thermal insulation and lagging for all insulated piping shall be in accordance with ASTM F683, except where specifically required otherwise by these Technical Specifications and shall meet all regulatory requirements. Asbestos or asbestos containing 445 materials shall not be used.

Piping insulation and lagging in accommodation, service, and control spaces shall be Regulatory Body approved incombustible materials. Elastomeric foam plastic insulation shall not be used in these spaces.

Substitute stainless steel lagging for any system installed on piping exposed to weather. 450

Prior to the installation of any insulation and/or lagging, the piping system must have all installation tests and inspections completed and approved. Refer to Section 982 for installation testing requirements.

512 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING REQUIREMENTS

512.1 General 455

Detail design, provide, install and commission heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems for the vessel. System arrangement shall be in general accordance with the Contract Guidance


Page: 500-14

Drawings, References (5B), (5C) and (5K), in accordance with all Regulatory Body requirements, and as described herein and Sections 513 and 514. Duct sizes, capacities and other information shown are based on estimated duct routing and construction. The final design shall 460 be based on the Contractor's own calculations taking into account the as-installed duct construction, routing, and equipment installed on the vessel. Calculations shall be performed in accordance with SNAME T&R 5-14, Recommended Practices for Ship Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Design Calculations. Calculations, drawings, and details shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. 465

The systems shall be complete with all components and controls necessary for satisfactory operation and performance. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all components are properly sized, all necessary controls provided, and that the installation is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

512.2 Design Conditions 470

The heating, ventilation, and air conditioning equipment installed shall be capable of maintaining the indoor design conditions at the design outdoor air conditions noted in Table 500 - 2.

Table 500 - 2: HVAC Design Conditions

Design Condition Winter Summer Outdoor Air 11ºF 94ºF, 42% RH Air Conditioned Spaces 70ºF 75ºF, 50% RH

Ventilated Accommodations 70ºF Natural Vent., Refer to Section 514.1

Machinery Spaces 45ºF Max 21ºF temperature rise

Tempered Water Supply 165ºF ---

Tempered Water Return 140ºF ---

Seawater Temperature 28ºF 85ºF

Additionally, at outdoor temperatures of -15ºF the vessel heating systems shall also be capable of maintaining machinery spaces at 45ºF and accommodations spaces at 65ºF with outdoor air 475 ventilation minimized.

Winter heating requirements assume spaces are empty of people. No credit shall be taken for heat from adjacent spaces, lighting, or equipment.

512.3 Noise

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the installed HVAC systems meet the noise limits 480 described in Section 073. The HVAC noise must be low enough to not cause excess noise when combined with machinery system noise. The Contractor shall select and install insulation and HVAC acoustic treatments as needed to meet the noise and vibration specifications in Section 073. Selection of such treatments will be subject to the details of fan selection and duct routing.


Page: 500-15

As guidance, the noise limits for accommodation heating and ventilating systems should be 485 designed to be 5dB less than the noise limit for each compartment as specified in Section 073. HVAC noise is considered to include the contribution of noise from the fan, ducts, turns, branches, and diffusers. The Contractor shall prepare noise calculations for the installed system in noise critical areas and apply additional acoustical treatments as required to meet noise limits.

512.4 Ducting 490

Fabricate passenger and crew space accommodations ductwork from steel sheet metal in accordance with the standards of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) and USCG requirements. Break large panels to prevent panting. Ducts shall be smooth inside with no protruding edges. All ducts shall be airtight.

Duct joints in passenger and crew spaces shall utilize flanged or approved clamp or sleeve joints 495 with an approved adhesive tape and duct sealer as suitable for the size, shape, and tightness requirements of the duct. All ducts passing over electrical equipment shall be made watertight, insulated and shielded to prevent condensation from dripping upon electrical equipment.

Fabricate machinery space ventilation ducts from 16-gauge hot dipped galvanized sheet steel. Install ducting as close to the overhead as possible. All joints shall be flanged, riveted, or 500 welded; slip joints shall not be used.

Where required by USCG for fire protection, ducts shall be a minimum of 11-gauge (3mm) steel. 11-gauge minimum steel shall be used for sleeves between fire dampers and the adjacent fire boundary, and for ducts passing completely through a space without serving that space.

The Contractor shall size ductwork so that air velocity in any part of the ducting system does not 505 exceed 3000 feet per minute for machinery and hold spaces. Ducting velocities in accommodations spaces shall generally be limited to 2000 feet per minute, however where space conditions necessitate local velocities may be as high as 2500 feet per minute, subject to approval by the Owner's Representative.

Where practicable, fabricate bends and elbows with a throat radius of at least 1 1/2 times the 510 width or diameter of the duct. Where a smaller throat radius is required, splitters or turning vanes shall be used. Round 90º elbows shall be made of at least five (5) parts or vaned turns, which may be used at the Contractor's choice. Accomplish reduction in duct size by long transitions with maximum included angle of 30º.

Where allowed by the arrangement, ducting leading into or out of fans shall be straight for at 515 least three duct diameters in order to reduce noise.

Supply and exhaust ducts shall be fitted with removable access panels at regular intervals of no more than 30 feet. Additional access panels shall be provided in the following locations:

Immediately upstream and downstream of fans and coils or fan coil units. These may be omitted if the ducting in such areas is flexible and/or removable and easily reinstalled. 520

Immediately upstream of dampers In way of duct and trunk low-point drains


Page: 500-16

Bottom of vertical trunks and non-removable ducts All duct access panels shall meet the following requirements: 525

The minimum thickness for access doors shall be consistent with the minimum thickness required for the adjacent ductwork

Fasteners used to secure the duct access doors, such as bolts, weld studs, latches, or wing nuts, shall be carbon steel or stainless steel and shall not penetrate duct walls

Access doors shall seal airtight. Where ducts serve more than one space or cross fire 530 boundaries, access doors shall have a gasket or sealant that is rated for at least 1,500°F

Duct access panels shall be located in readily accessible locations clear of interferences.

The Contractor shall minimize the number of ducts penetrating decks, structural bulkheads, girders or other strength members. Where penetrations are required, provide suitable strength compensation such as sleeves or doublers. 535

If avoidable, ducts shall not penetrate watertight or fire zone boundaries. Penetrations shall maintain the integrity of the boundary and must be approved by the Owner's Representative and USCG. No ventilation ducts shall penetrate transverse watertight bulkheads below the Main Deck. Verify that all plan reviews are completed and approved before fabricating and installing ductwork. 540

Passenger and crew space diffusers shall be the round or square ceiling type, with balancing dampers and shall have noise damping plenums. Diffusers and registers shall have robust, tamper proof construction, and shall be selected and located for proper air diffusion in the space served. Integrate the diffusers with the ceiling system and paint to match the surrounding décor.

512.5 Weather Louvers and Mist Eliminators 545

Fit air inlets leading directly from weather with mist eliminators, Zazz Engineering, Delta T, or equal. Inlet velocities through mist eliminators shall not exceed 1,300 feet per minute based on face area.

Fit exhausts to the weather with aluminum weather louvers. Weather louvers shall be removable and held in place with stainless steel screens. Velocities across exhaust louvers shall be limited 550 to 750 ft per minute based on gross face area.

Weather louvers and mist eliminators shall be fitted with drains to weather deck drains or to weather. Structure supporting louvers and mist eliminators and attached plenums shall also be arranged for complete drainage to prevent corrosion. Drain lines running straight to weather shall run inside structure to within 6 inches of the deck. Structure supporting louvers and mist 555 eliminators shall be arranged for complete drainage to prevent corrosion.

Gooseneck ventilators may also be used for intake and exhaust terminals, as indicated in the Contract Guidance Drawings and where approved by the Owner's Representative.

Provide all supply and exhaust ducts with stainless steel insect screens.


Page: 500-17

512.6 Ventilation Insulation and Lagging 560

Ventilation ducting serving only the space in which it is located need not be insulated. Otherwise, ducting (including equipment, access covers, flanges and re-circulation ducts) for air conditioned spaces shall be insulated and lagged as follows.

Insulation shall be 1-inch thick fibrous glass board with minimum density of 3 pounds per cubic foot for rectangular duct. Insulation on round or flat oval ducts and bends shall be 1-inch thick 565 flexible fibrous glass with a minimum density of 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. Vapor barrier shall be factory-applied aluminum foil, at least 0.002 inches thick. Joints in the vapor barrier shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches and coated with an approved vapor sealing compound. All insulation shall comply with Regulatory Body Requirements.

Insulation shall be secured to the duct with a suitable adhesive. On rectangular ducts over 24 570 inches wide, equipment, and plenums, insulation shall be further secured with metal clips, pins or studs. Adhesive shall be chemically compatible with the insulated surface. Any insulation applied to the inside of ducting shall be specifically designed for that purpose and shall be suitably installed to ensure adherence.

In areas where insulation may be subject to damage, protection such as galvanized metal 575 sheathing or guards shall be provided. Metal sheathing shall be at least 16 gauge. Location and extent of such protective sheathing shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

Acoustical insulation shall be used as required to limit sound levels in passenger areas, in accordance with Section 512.3.

512.7 Fire Dampers 580

Provide and install fire dampers where required by regulation. Fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with applicable USCG and ABS requirements, including the provisions of Reference (5S), using stainless steel fasteners. The Contractor shall minimize the use of fire dampers through use of structural or heavy gauge insulated steel ducts.

Damper sizes and locations shown in References (5B) and (5C) are based on preliminary duct 585 and louver sizes, and fire zones shown in Reference (5R). The final quantity of fire dampers, their locations, and final sizes are subject to detail design of the HVAC ducting.

Where fire dampers are concealed by joinery, provide access panels for inspection and operation of the damper. All access panels in passenger accessible spaces shall be lockable or tamper resistant to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 590

Fire dampers for machinery spaces shall be Halton type FDB2, or equal. All other dampers shall be Halton type FDB2, Halton FDL, or equal. All fire dampers shall be capable of manual operation. All fire dampers shall be stainless steel, with automatic electric actuators, Belimo or equal, power to open/spring closed, and 165°F fusible links.

Provide and install remote closure controls in both Pilot Houses for all fire dampers. Locate 595 controls adjacent to the fire detection panel.


Page: 500-18

If a fire damper is not immediately adjacent to a removable louver, an access door shall be installed in the duct adjacent to the fire damper to allow inspection and cleaning of the fire damper blades.

Fire damper actuators shall be provided with power from the 120 VAC power distribution 600 system and configured so that interruption of the power will initiate closing of dampers and shutdown of ventilation fans. Dampers and fan shutdowns for each system shall be independent. Fire dampers shall meet all requirements set forth in 46 CFR Subchapter H §72.05-50.

512.8 Fans

Fan selections, static pressure ratings and motor horsepower noted in References (5B) and (5C) 605 are estimated based on the approximate duct routing shown. The Contractor shall select and install fans to suit the installed ducting system. Fans selected shall not have flow capacities less than specified in References (5B) and (5C). Fan motors shall be sized so that they will not overload at any air volume within the capacity range of the fan.

All fans, with the exception of those incorporated into packaged air-handling units shall be direct 610 driven. Refer to Section 302 for electric motor requirements. All fans shall be mounted on elastomer vibration isolators. The isolation systems shall be designed so that system resonances are not excited by the fan, and shall have all natural frequencies at least 20% below the rotational frequency of the fan and motor. Provide flexible duct connectors, properly rat-proofed, at the inlet and discharge of each fan as appropriate. 615

All fans shall be selected for efficient and quiet operation consistent with the nature of the spaces involved. Variations in sizes, types, rotation and discharges shall be kept to a minimum.

512.9 Controls

Provide control and monitoring of machinery and passenger space HVAC systems in the EOS. Remote shutdown shall be provided in accordance with USCG requirements. 620

The HVAC control systems shall be based on programmable logic controllers (PLCs) with touch screen human machine interfaces (HMI). The controls shall be used to govern the operation of the tempered water system, machinery space fans, passenger space air handlers, and variable volume dampers. Controlled variables in the system shall include the following:

Automatic start/stop/modulation of the boiler (forced draft fan, fuel pump) based on the 625 temperature measured at the boiler outlet. User input shall be the boiler outlet temperature set point

Automatic and manual start/stop of the hot water circulation pumps. Pumps shall be configured for running/standby operation with automatic starting of the standby pump upon failure of the running pump 630

Automatic and manual start/stop of supply and exhaust fans

Automatic and manual speed control of fans equipped with VFD's, as noted


Page: 500-19

Automatic and manual control of variable volume dampers

Manual change over between operating ,standby, and manual modes

The control system shall be modular; with each separate HVAC zone in the crew spaces, 635 accommodations, and the tempered water system having a dedicated PLC with integrated HMI. Controls for each zone shall operate independently, and shall be separately programmable, permitting the set points to be varied throughout the day using a pre-programmed schedule or manually. All set points and schedules shall be adjustable via the HMI.

A central touch screen HMI shall be installed in the EOS, and configured for remote control of 640 all zones and the tempered water system.

The control systems shall be programmed for unattended operation and include self-diagnostics, and automatic warning and alarm outputs.

HVAC units serving the crew spaces shall be fitted with independent, local thermostatic controls.

Local hot water heaters shall have independent thermostatic control. Heaters in crew and 645 machinery spaces shall be equipped with independent locally adjustable thermostatic control.

Thermostats, controls, and other equipment located in passenger areas shall be arranged to preclude tampering or adjustment by unauthorized personnel.

The Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting the control system set points for efficient operation during commissioning. 650

512.10 Heat Pumps

Where heat pumps are specified or installed, they shall be suitable marine service and provided with marine coated coils, low ambient kits and a wind baffle. Pipe condensate drains from each indoor unit to the nearest deck drain, taking care to slope the drain pipe continuously for complete drainage. Neither the indoor air-handling unit, nor the condensate drain piping shall be 655 led over or near electrical equipment. With the exception of a short piece of hose between the indoor unit and the drain piping, condensate drains shall be fabricated from copper tubing with approved mechanical or brazed fittings.

Heat pumps shall be selected to have low noise and vibration, shall allow the vessel to meet the noise and vibration requirements of Section 073. 660

513 MACHINERY SPACE VENTILATION AND HEATING SYSTEMS

513.1 Engine Room

The Contractor shall detail design, provide, and install a main engine room ventilation system, as generally shown in (5B). The system shall have supply and exhaust fans sized and configured to meet ventilation and heat dissipation requirements of the Engine Room equipment and regulatory 665 requirements.


Page: 500-20

Fresh air shall be taken from weather via demisters located at the Hurricane Deck. Fans located in the Hurricane Deck fan rooms shall supply air to the engine room via structural ventilation trunks. A removable steel transition, 11-gauge minimum, shall be provided at the base of each structural ventilation trunk. Install fire dampers between this transition and each main 670 ventilation branch, and insulate as required maintain structural fire protection boundaries, Reference (5R).

Air shall be distributed through ducts, arranged for appropriate distribution throughout the main Engine Room. Distribution ducts shall be arranged so that no opening or register is located over any electrical switchboard or power panels. Valved drains shall be installed at the base of the 675 plenum. Balancing dampers shall be installed in all duct branches.

The Engine Room ventilation system shall exhaust through the uptake and out through exhaust fans and weather louvers located in the stack. Fire dampers shall be installed at the exhaust fans.

The Engine Room supply and exhaust fans shall automatically shut down and fire dampers close upon actuation of the Engine Room fixed fire extinguishing system. 680

The Engine Room supply and exhaust fans shall be equipped with variable frequency drives. The exhaust fans' speed shall be user selectable via the HVAC control panel in the EOS. The supply fans shall have automatic and manual control. In automatic mode, the supply fans' speed shall be varied to maintain a fixed differential pressure between the engine room and ambient in response to changes in engine demand and exhaust fan flow rate. Pressure set points shall be 685 verified and adjusted during commissioning

Provide controls for the Engine Room fans inside the EOS, and remote shutdown in accordance USCG requirements.

Install hot water unit heaters in the space for winter heating, generally as shown in References and (5K). 690

513.2 Auxiliary Machinery Rooms

The Contractor shall detail design, install, and commission two (2) ventilation systems, one (1) serving each auxiliary machinery room, with mechanical supply and exhaust, generally as shown on (5B). Both the intake and exhaust ducting shall have fire dampers arranged.

The fire damper serving each fan shall be configured to open automatically when the fan starts 695 and close automatically when the fan stops.

Provide controls for the Auxiliary Machinery Room fans inside the EOS, and provide remote shutdown in accordance USCG requirements. Refer to Section 512.8.

Install hot water unit heaters in the space for winter heating, generally as shown in References and (5K). 700

513.3 Voids

Provide mechanical supply and exhaust ventilation in each Void as shown in Reference (5B).


Page: 500-21

Provide controls for all applicable fans in the EOS, and remote shutdown in accordance with USCG requirements. Refer to Section 512.8.

Install hot water unit heaters in the space for winter heating generally as shown in References 705 (5B) and (5K).

513.4 Propulsion Rooms

The Contractor shall design, install, and commission two (2) ventilation systems, one (1) serving each propulsion room, with mechanical supply and exhaust as shown in Reference (5B). Both the intake and exhaust ducting shall have fire dampers arranged. 710

Provide controls for the Propulsion Room fans inside the EOS, and provide remote shutdown in accordance USCG requirements. Refer to Section 512.8.

The fire damper serving each fan shall be configured to open automatically when the fan starts and close automatically when the fan stops.

Install hot water unit heaters in the space for winter heating generally as shown in References 715 (5B) and (5K).

513.5 Emergency Diesel Generator Room

Provide a forced supply, natural exhaust ventilation system in the Emergency Diesel Generator (E-Gen) Room, generally as shown in Reference (5B). The ventilation fan in the E-Gen Room shall be operated by an on/off switch located in the space and shall draw air from a gooseneck 720 located on the housetop. Provide natural exhaust through a second gooseneck on the housetop. Fit the inlet and exhaust ducts with actuated fire dampers. The fan shall shut down and the dampers close automatically upon release of the E-Gen Room fire suppression system.

The E-gen Room shall also be fitted with inlet and exhaust louvers to provide cooling and combustion air for the emergency generator when it is in operation. The louvers shall be sized to 725 accommodate the operating airflow of the emergency generator. Fit an inlet demister in the port emergency generator room bulkhead. Fit the exhaust louver immediately aft of the emergency generator and provide a galvanized sheet metal duct from the emergency generator radiator to the louver. The louvers shall be sized to accommodate the operating airflow of the emergency generator. 730

The E-Gen Room louver and demister shall be fitted with electrically actuated fire dampers, power to open, spring closed with manual backup. The fire dampers serving the emergency generator shall open automatically upon starting of the emergency generator and close upon generator shutdown, or upon release of the fire suppression system in the space.

Install a hot water unit heater in the space for winter heating generally as shown in References 735 (5B) and (5K).


Page: 500-22

513.6 Novec Locker

Provide a fixed volume mechanical ventilation system for the Novec Locker, as shown in Reference (5B).

Provide controls for the Novec Locker fan inside the EOS, and provide remote shutdown in 740 accordance USCG requirements. Refer to Section 512.8.

The fire dampers serving the space shall be configured to open when the fan starts and close when the fan stops.

514 PASSENGER AND CREW SPACE HVAC SYSTEMS

514.1 Passenger Seating Areas 745

The Contractor shall detail design, install, and commission ventilation heating systems for the passenger seating areas with mechanical supply and exhaust, generally as shown in Reference (5C).

The passenger seating areas shall be arranged into six (6) independently controlled heating and ventilation zones, with two (2) zones on each deck, separated by the main vertical zone (MVZ) 750 boundary. Ventilations systems on each side of the MVZ shall be completely independent, and ducting shall not cross the MVZ boundary.

Each zone air distribution system shall incorporate a central air-handling unit comprised of a packaged air handling unit (AHU) Carrier 39L or equal, with variable speed fan, hot water coil for heating and filter, a variable speed exhaust fan, and regulating dampers and controls as 755 required for a complete system, to provide ventilation and heat via dedicated ducting.

During winter operation, each system shall supply heated air to its respective zone. Supply air temperature and total air volume shall be modulated to maintain the space temperature at the design set point and minimize heating load. Supply air temperature shall be modulated by varying the tempered water supply to the AHU heating coil. Total airflow shall be modulated 760 based on temperature and CO2 level in the space served.

The volume of outdoor (fresh) air supplied to the space shall be varied based on the measured CO2 level in the return airflow to match outdoor air requirement to passenger load. Exhaust air (equal in volume to the outside air required) shall be discharged from each zone to atmosphere. Appropriate volume control dampers shall be fitted for this purpose. 765

During summer operation, primary cooling shall be natural ventilation via passenger loading doors and opening windows. The passenger ventilation system shall also be capable of providing supplementary cooling by providing 100% outdoor air. Manual control of the AHU's and exhaust fans from the EOS control panel shall be provided for this purpose.

The passenger ventilation systems shall also have a standby or night mode, selectable from the 770 EOS HVAC control panel. When in standby mode, the passenger space ventilation systems shall operate at half flow when heating is required. The flow supplied to the passenger spaces by each


Page: 500-23

AHU shall be recirculated, with minimal outdoor air drawn into the vessel by the fixed exhaust fans, which serve the passenger restrooms, snack bar, and lockers, see Section 514.3.

514.2 Stair Towers 775

Each stair tower shall be provided with supply and return ducting and fans inside the stairwell, generally as shown in Reference (5C). An AHU consisting of a fan, filter, and hot water coil shall supply ventilation air to the space and preheat the outdoor air.

Air shall be exhausted through a grill and duct at the top of the stair tower and led to weather on the Hurricane Deck. The exhaust duct shall be fitted with a damper adjusted to maintain positive 780 pressure in the stair tower when the fire doors are closed.

Heated air curtains shall be supplied over the passenger loading doors on the Main Deck and Saloon Deck. The heated air curtains shall activate automatically when the passenger doors are opened, and automatically shut down when the doors are closed after a short time delay. One air curtain on each deck at each end shall also be equipped with a thermostatic control to provide 785 supplementary heat in the stair towers.

514.3 Passenger Area Exhaust

The Contractor shall detail design, provide, and install two (2) fixed-volume exhaust systems serving spaces in the passenger areas.

Each system shall serve the passenger space restrooms, Snack Bar and lockers located in the 790 passenger spaces on one side of the MVZ. Air shall be extracted from the spaces served via one or more exhaust grills in each space and ducted to an exhaust fan located fan located on the Bridge Deck, generally as shown on Reference (5C). Each fan shall be ducted to weather on the Hurricane Deck, via a gooseneck ventilator adjacent to the elevator trunk.

514.4 Pilot Houses 795

The Contractor shall provide and install an independent, split heat pump system, Mitsubishi or equal, in each Pilot House. The heat pump shall have a ducted indoor air-handling unit, installed in the overhead of each Pilot House, and a dedicated outdoor condenser unit installed near the Pilot House fan room where shown in Reference (5C).

Outdoor air shall be provided via an inlet louver in the Pilot House side ducted to the Pilot House 800 indoor unit. An exhaust fan located in the Bridge Deck fan room shall extract air from the Pilot House via the connected stair and hallway.

Install hot water heaters in each Pilot House for winter heating, generally as shown in References (5B) and (5K).

The Contractor shall provide and install a defogging system for the Pilot House to ensure that all 805 unheated forward and side facing windows are kept clear of moisture and fog. The system shall recirculate air within the Pilot House, discharging air towards each window from below. The system shall be quiet and consist of a fan delivering air through a duct heater and ducting to slot diffusers under each window. The fan shall have a variable speed controls.


Page: 500-24

514.5 Crew Spaces 810

The crew accommodations on each end of the Bridge Deck shall be served by two (2) independent ducted split heat pump air conditioning systems, Mitsubishi or equal, four (4) total. Each system shall have a ducted indoor air handling unit and a dedicated outdoor condenser unit installed near the Pilot House fan room. Conditioned air shall be ducted to the spaces served generally as shown in Reference (5C). 815

Outdoor air shall be provided via inlet louvers at the Bridge Deck level ducted to each indoor unit. An exhaust fan located in each Bridge Deck fan room shall extract air from the crew spaces via the crew heads and passageways at each end of the vessel.

Install hot water heaters in each crew space for winter heating, generally as shown in References (5C) and (5K). 820

514.6 Security Equipment Room

The Security Equipment Room shall have an independent split heat pump system, Mitsubishi or equal, sized to accommodate the environmental and equipment heat loads in the space, generally as shown in Reference (5C). The space shall also be fitted with a fixed volume exhaust fan and natural inlet for supply of fresh air. Provide a switch for the exhaust fan inside the room. 825

514.7 Engineer's Operating Station

The EOS shall have a self-contained air conditioning unit sized to meet equipment and personnel heat loads. Outdoor shall be supplied to the EOS via a supply duct, lead from weather on the Hurricane Deck. A single exhaust fan and duct to weather shall be provided to complete the ventilation system. 830

520 SEAWATER SYSTEMS

520.1 Sea Chests

Fabricate and install sea chests as shown on (5D). Sea chest strainer plates shall be 1/2 inch thick electrical grade fiberglass (GP-03), or equal, material that can be considered neutrally buoyant when submerged to facilitate underwater removal by divers. Strainer plates shall be 835 fastened with stainless steel studs and stainless steel nuts. Each strainer plate shall be fitted with a retaining cable attached from inside the sea chest to prevent the strainer from being lost when removed for inspection.

Each sea chest shall be fitted with a vent that terminates to weather as shown on Reference (5D). Each sea chest shall also be fitted with a compressed air blow down connection. Refer to 840 Section 551. Both the vent and the blow down connections shall have isolation valves at the sea chest penetration.

The Contractor shall fit each sea chest with an impressed current antifouling system, Cathelco or equal. Antifouling anodes shall be sized to provide continuous treatment without requiring replacement between dry dockings. The anti-fouling system shall be commissioned, tested, and 845 adjusted by a manufacture's authorized representative. The system shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


Page: 500-25

Install sacrificial anodes in each sea chest as described in Section 633.

521 FIREMAIN SYSTEM

Provide and install a fire main system meeting ABS rules and USCG requirements, and as shown 850 on Reference (5E).

Equip each interior and machinery space hydrant with a 2 1/2 inch to 1 1/2 inch Siamese "Y" fitting and a 75-foot length of 1 1/2 inch hose of ABS and USCG approved materials. Equip each exterior hydrant with a 50-foot length of 2 1/2 inch hose of ABS and USCG approved materials. Fire nozzles shall be approved combination type nozzles for solid stream and fog and 855 three-position valves. Interior and machinery space hose nozzles shall have a 5/8 inch solid stream orifice. Exterior hose nozzles shall have a 7/8 inch solid stream orifice. Stainless steel enclosures shall be provided for all hose stations. Quantity and location of hose stations shall meet 46 CFR 76.10-10(d).

One (1) shore connection shall be installed at each end of the vessel. The shore connections shall 860 meet Fire Department City of New York Requirements (3.030"ODMx8 TPI) 2 1/2 inch angled globe hose valve with cap and chain.

The fire main system shall have three (3) pumps: Fire Pump No. 1 and Fire Pump No. 2 in the Engine Room and Fire Pump No. 3 in the NY End Auxiliary Machinery Room. Fire Pump No. 1 and No. 2 shall draw suction from the sea chest cross-main located in the Engine Room. Fire 865 Pump No. 3 shall draw suction from the sea chest located in the NY End Auxiliary Machinery Room.

All fire pumps shall be end suction, horizontal centrifugal pumps, with structural composite bodies, and mechanical seals, SIMS 3x2x8 or equal. Each pump shall be capable of delivering the required flow and head for the whole system. Pumps shall be equipped with 460 870 VAC/3ph/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motors. Each fire pump shall be controlled locally and from the EOS. Fire Pump No. 3 shall be capable of remote start from either Pilot House.

A simplex strainer, Eaton 72 or equal, with bronze body and stainless steel basket, shall be installed at the suction side of Fire Pump No. 3.

526 WEATHER DECK DRAINS 875

Provide and install weather drains to clear all accumulated water from the tops of the houses and decks as shown on Reference (5F). Drains may be combined, provided a cleanout is installed each junction. Where drains combine, they shall do so with sweep tees or wyes. Weather Deck drains shall run inside the structure, behind linings, down to the Main Deck, where the drain shall penetrate the house side at 45 and discharge to the weather just above the deck. Drains 880 shall be routed away from windows and clear openings.

Piping from deck drains to the Main Deck curtain plate shall be constructed using an approved thin wall, push-fit stainless steel drainage system, Blucher Marine or equal. Insulate piping when routed inside accommodation spaces. Where the drains penetrate the house side at the Main Deck, piping shall transition to Schedule 40, stainless steel, outlet spools. The Main Deck 885


Page: 500-26

drains shall be welded and penetrate the side shell. Grind welds around deck drain fittings smooth so they do not trap water or present a tripping hazard.

528 SANITARY SYSTEM

528.1 General

The Contractor shall provide and install a sanitary drains system as shown on Reference (5G). 890 The system shall be constructed of an approved thin wall, push-fit stainless steel drainage system, Blucher Marine or equal. All drains shall lead to the sewage treatment plant. The Main Deck aft cleaning gear locker drains and EOS drains shall lead to a lift station below the EOS with a discharge routed to the sewage treatment plant. The lift station shall be Goulds GWP 1241 or equal, with basin and self-cleaning, submersible grinder pump. The discharge pump 895 shall have float switch for automatic starting. Refer to Section 436 for tank level indication.

Drain piping shall be routed as directly as possible and shall be provided with a sufficient number of accessible cleanout connections for clearing the drain pipes by use of a plumber's snake or a pressurized water hose. Cleanouts shall be provided at a minimum of 1 per 50 feet in straight runs. 900

Where a drain is combined with other drains, "Y" or "Y-Tee" branches or fittings shall be used to facilitate flow. Drains shall be continuously sloped at least 1/8 inch per foot longitudinally and 1/4 inch per foot transversely.

Drain pipes from plumbing fixtures or deck drains combined with other drains located on upper deck levels shall join at least 4 feet below the lowest drain to prevent back flooding under design 905 conditions of list and trim, or the rolling and pitching of the vessel.

All drains shall be independently trapped and provided with an accessible cleanout connection.

Install fixtures and accessories to the vessel's structure in a manner that does not impair the integrity nor damage decorative linings. Provide access to cleanouts behind linings in accordance with Section 500.3. 910

528.2 Interior Deck Drains

The Contractor shall provide interior deck drains with strainer plates and water-sealed traps, located to prevent water standing under ordinary condition of list and trim in the Snack Bar area, cleaning gear lockers, restrooms, and similar wet spaces. Interior deck drains shall be combined with the gray water drains and run to the sewage treatment plant. Accessible cleanouts shall be 915 provided for each run of pipe.

Deck drains shall be fitted with removable stainless steel strainer plates having a free area equal to no less than twice the cross-section of the drain pipe.

528.3 Black and Gray Water Drains

Drains shall be provided from each fixture, through water-sealed (P-type) traps to the sewage 920 treatment plant. Gray water and deck drains shall not be combined with black water drains prior to the sewage treatment plant.


Page: 500-27

Furnish lavatory fixtures complete with valves, faucets, stops, drain fittings, vents, and hangers. Traps shall be adjustable, chrome plated cast brass or stainless steel, with cleanout plugs.

Provide and install sanitary fixtures, partitions, joiner work, rails, and sanitary accessories for the 925 passenger and crew toilet spaces generally where indicated on Reference (5H). Refer to Section 640 for plumbing fixture specifications.

528.4 Sewage Treatment Plant

The Contractor shall provide, and install a membrane bioreactor advanced sewage treatment plant, EVAC MBR-80 or equal. 930

Treated effluent from the treatment plant shall be subjected to secondary disinfection by a proportioning brominator and UV purifier and then discharged to the non-potable water tank.

Provide and install a UV purifier, Aquafine SL 1 or equal, in the effluent discharge line leading from the sewage treatment plant to the non-potable water tank. The UV purifier shall be capable of disinfecting water at a rate of 10 gpm at 94 percent UV transmission. 935

Provide and install a proportioning brominator, Everpure SSFM-50BC 9064-17, or equal, in the effluent discharge line leading from the sewage treatment plant to the non-potable water tank. The proportioning brominator shall be capable of treating water at 10 gpm.

Provide a deck discharge, located on both ends of the vessel as shown on Reference (5A). Discharge piping runs shall be arranged for gravity drainage back to the tank and configured 940 with the minimum number of bends and elbows necessary to complete the route. All piping shall be flange connected. The system shall incorporate sufficient cleanout connections so that the entire system is easily accessible.

Each shore connection shall be fitted with a valve, hose, quick disconnect fitting, vacuum breaker, and cap and chain. The hose shall be adapted for connection to a shore side quick-945 disconnect fitting, Camlock or similar. The vacuum breaker shall be located at the hose end to allow drainage of the hose and pipe to the tank while connected to the shore or with the cap in place. Hose length and fittings to be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Provide arrangements for flushing the discharge line and hose after use.

Provisions shall be made to stow the hose on board without disconnecting from the pump out 950 station.

Provide the vendor recommended and operationally required parts listed in Table 500 - 3 with the Sewage Treatment Plant and deliver as directed by the Owner's Representative. The quantities indicated in Table 500 - 3 are per vessel.


Page: 500-28

Table 500 - 3: STP vendor recommended and operationally required parts 955 Qty Item

1 Shaft seal for Effluent/Permeate pump 2 Part set for Discharge/Feeding pump 1 Bearing for Discharge pump motor 1 Part set for Blower V12YR 1 Impeller for Blower V12YR 1 Check valve for dosing pump 1 Metering hose for dosing pump 1 Metering hose for dosing pump 1 Bottom valve for dosing pump 2 Diaphragm for dosing pump 2 Level switch 1 Level switch 1 Pressure switch 1 Pressure gauge 1 Pressure gauge 1 Shut-off valve, 1 inch 1 Shut-off valve, 1 1/2 inch 1 3-way valve, 1/2 inch 1 Ball valve, 2 inch 1 Non-return valve, 1 1/4 inch 1 Shut-off valve, 1 1/4 inch 1 Non-return valve, 1 inch 1 Solenoid valve 2 Test kits for MBR units

528.5 Sewage Tank and Discharge Pump

Provide and install a freestanding stainless steel sewage tank with 4,000-gallon capacity. All drains and the lift station discharge shall be provided with sewage treatment plant bypasses to the sewage tank. Overflow from the sewage treatment plant shall also be routed to the sewage tank. 960 Locate as described in Section 200.4. Each tank shall have all features listed in Table 500 - 4.

Table 500 - 4: Sewage Tank Features

Qty Item

1 3 inch discharge 1 4 inch vent


Page: 500-29

Qty Item

1 Tank level indicator (TLI), see Section 506.2 1 1 inch valved drain at bottom of tank, with threaded pipe plug 1 Inspection and access manhole, on top of tank

Provide and install a sewage discharge pump, Hydromatic 30 MMP, or equal, for emptying the sewage tank. The pump shall be a self-priming, centrifugal pump with a semi-open impeller, designed to handle solids up to 2 1/2 inches. The pump shall have a cast iron volute case and 965 bearing frame, ductile iron impeller and wear plate, suction valve and dual mechanical seals. The pump shall be capable discharging to the Shore Services Connections Compartment on the Main Deck. Pump shall be equipped with a 460/3Ph/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motor.

529 DRAINAGE AND BALLAST SYSTEMS

529.1 Bilge and Trim (Ballast) System 970

The Contractor shall detail design, provide and install a bilge and trim system as shown on Reference (5I). The system shall comply with USCG regulations and ABS rules. The trim system will be used to maintain draft, trim, and heel of the vessel within nominal operational limits via the transfer of water to, from, and between the ballast tanks. The trim system shall be capable of transferring water between tanks at 1,800 gpm and shall be capable of filling or 975 draining the ballast tanks at the same rate.

In general, all piping for the bilge and trim systems shall be routed below the elevation of the pump inlet/outlet connections and routed as directly as possible with the minimum number of bends and fittings. Bilge suctions shall terminate as close to the vessel's centerline as feasible. All bilge suctions shall be located as close as possible to the lowest point of the space served. 980 Piping shall be run inside of inboard of 1/5th of the beam from the vessel's side and above the T/15 line.

Bilge suctions and suction strainers shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Strainer boxes built in accordance with ASTM F986 shall be installed at the suction end termination of all bilge suction lines. Strainers shall have an open area not less than three times the area of the bilge 985 pipe. Strainer boxes may be either a circular or square style.

Each bilge suction line penetrating a collision bulkhead shall have shut off valves capable of actuation from the Main Deck via a remote operator and flush deck access box.

The bilge system shall be served by three (3) pumps. Under normal operation, two (2) of the pumps will serve as the trim pumps and will be isolated from the bilge system to prevent cross 990 contamination between the systems. The three (3) pumps shall have local start/stop pushbutton controls.

The trim/bilge pumps shall be capable of supplying emergency seawater supply to the main engine heat exchangers via an emergency cross-connect. Refer to Section 256.


Page: 500-30

The trim/bilge pumps shall be self-priming, end suction, horizontal, centrifugal pumps with 995 structural composite casing and impeller and mechanical seals, SIMS 6x4-9 or equal. The trim/bilge pumps shall be equipped with 460 VAC/3ph/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motors.

The bilge pump shall be a self-priming, end suction, horizontal, centrifugal pump with structural composite casing and impeller and mechanical seals, SIMS 4x3-8 or equal. The bilge pump shall be equipped with a 460 VAC/3ph/60Hz TEFC marine duty motor. 1000

The system shall be provided with simplex strainers, Eaton 72 or equal, with bronze body and stainless steel basket on the suction side of each pump.

529.2 Oily Water System

Provide and install an oily water collection and discharge system, generally as shown on Reference (5J). Install a common main system with 1-inch nominal diameter bilge stripping 1005 suctions serving the Engine Room, Auxiliary Machinery Rooms and Propulsion Rooms. Install 1-inch Camlock fittings for connection of auxiliary suction hose in the Engine Room, Auxiliary Machinery Rooms and Propulsion Rooms.

Provide and install an air operated double diaphragm oily water transfer pump, Wilden PS8, or equal. Pump block, wetted parts, air chamber, and valve shall be stainless steel construction. 1010 Pump diaphragms, valve balls and seat shall be Buna-N construction. Arrange the pump to take suction from any of the bilge stripping lines and deliver water to the oily water tank. The pump shall also be arranged to take suction from the oily water tank and deliver water to a discharge connection on the Main Deck. Provide a pump bypass line to allow removal of water from the oily water tank or the bilges via any oily water suction with a vacuum truck. The deck discharge 1015 shall be located where shown on Reference (5A).

The oily water tank shall be fitted with an access and inspection manhole, and a transfer line terminating 1 inch from the bottom of the tank. Refer to Section 436 for the tank level indication system. Provide vents, fills and sounds as described in Section 506 and Reference (5A). 1020

530 TEMPERED WATER SYSTEM

Detail design, provide, and install a closed loop hot water heating system for the vessel serving all spaces requiring heat, generally as shown on Reference (5K). During normal day time operations the tempered water system shall utilize waste heat from the propulsion engine jacket water systems that is generated when the vessel is underway, and supplemented by two oil fired 1025 boilers, as needed. During dockside and nighttime operations, the two oil-fired boilers shall provide the tempered water system with sufficient heat to supply the full load deck deicing system and a reduced HVAC heating load.

The tempered water system shall be sized to support the heating requirements of the vessel HVAC and deck de-icing systems described in Sections 512 through 514 and Section 558. The 1030 system shall operate at a set point of 165ºF and return temperature of 140ºF. All heat exchangers, fan coils, convectors, and unit heaters shall be sized to accommodate the required amount of heat transfer based on these temperatures.


Page: 500-31

Provide and install four (4) stainless steel brazed plate type heat exchangers, Alfa-Laval or equal to collect waste heat, one (1) integrated into the jacket water circuit of each main engine, and 1035 arranged for parallel flow in the tempered water circuit. The combined capacity of the heat exchangers shall be sufficient to supply the full winter heating load of the vessel, when sufficient waste heat is available from the main engines.

Provide and install two (2), 2.5M Btu/hr, diesel-oil fired, auxiliary fire tube hot water boilers, Vapor Power Hi-R-Temp or equal. The boilers shall have modulating burners that allow reduced 1040 water flow to 20% of maximum without risk of tripping. The boiler selection shall be verified by the Contractor. The combined capacity of the boilers shall be sufficient to meet winter heating load during normal operation with the deck de-icing system operating and a maximum of 40% outdoor air capacity supplied to the passenger spaces. Refer to Sections 512 and 514.

Provide and install two (2) hot water circulation pumps, RS Corcoran Series 5000 4x4 or equal. 1045 The pumps shall be configured for operation with one pump running and the second on standby. The circulation pumps shall operate at constant discharge pressure with variable speed drives and will slow or accelerate in response to the heating demands of the system.

Provide and install insulated hot water supply and return piping to the unit heaters, air handling units, convectors, and heat exchangers installed throughout the vessel. Pipe velocities shall 1050 generally be limited to 4 ft/s for pipe 2 inches and smaller. Pipe sizes larger than 2 inch shall be sized for a pressure drop less than than 4 ft H20 per 100 ft of piping.

Prior to placing the system into service, flush the system until clean with a 20-micron temporary filter on the suction side of the pumps and all three-way valves in the bypass position. The tempered water fluid shall be a solution containing a minimum of 25% ethylene glycol in fresh 1055 water.

533 POTABLE AND SANITARY WATER SYSTEMS

Provide and install potable and sanitary water systems as shown in Reference (5L). The systems shall meet all applicable requirements of the USCG, USPHS and World Health Organization.

Provide a means to shut off and drain all water pipes exposed to the weather. Exterior hose bibs 1060 shall be non-freeze types. Interior hose bibs shall be located in lockable enclosures.

Piping shall be copper tubing, ASTM B88 Type K or L with wrought copper solder joint fittings or mechanically pressed fittings, Viega Propress or equal. Copper pipe sizes utilized in the system shall be limited to 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, 1 inch, 1 1/2 inches, 2 inches and 3 inches nominal diameter. Flush and test piping in accordance with Section 982. 1065

533.1 Potable Water System

The potable water system shall be supplied from one (1) 9,000 gallon painted structural steel tank. Provide tank level indication as described in Section 436.

Provide and install two (2) centrifugal potable water pumps. The potable water pumps shall be end suction, horizontal, centrifugal pumps with stainless steel bodies and impellers and 1070


Page: 500-32

mechanical seals, R.S. Corcoran 6000 D (A10) 2x1or equal. Pumps shall be equipped with 460 VAC/3ph/60Hz TEFC marine duty motors.

Install pressure switches to control operation of the pumps. Potable water pump motor controllers shall be configured for automatic starting/stopping based on the pressure in the common supply header. The system shall be equipped with two (2) pressure switches to initiate 1075 pump start and stop. The pressure switches shall be set to the pressures indicated on Reference (5L). The pressure switches shall be connected to the pump motor controllers via a manual selector switch arrangement that allows connection of either pressure switch to either pump motor controller. The intent is that one pump starts at a higher pressure, with ability to select which pump starts at the higher pressure, thereby equalizing the pump run time. 1080

Install a pressure transducer and a pressure switch in the common discharge line, and interface with the ship's alarm and monitoring system to provide continuous pressure indication and a low-pressure alarm.

Provide and install an ASME rated diaphragm-type potable water pressure tank, Amtrol Well-X-Trol WX-452C or equal. The pressure tank shall have a 125-psig pressure rating and a 1085 replaceable NSF 61 butyl bladder.

Install piping to distribute potable water to the vessel's sinks, showers, hose bibs, and technical water services located as shown on Reference (5L). All components in the system shall be rated for a working pressure of 125 psig minimum. Water shall be supplied to the fuel oil purifier, lube oil purifier, and sewage treatment plant in accordance with the manufacturers' requirements. 1090

Domestic Hot Water

Provide and install one (1) ASME rated, cement lined, marine water heater, Hubbell MSH100-0-9SLT4 or equal. The water heater shall have a capacity of at least 100 gallons with 9 kW input at 460 VAC/3ph/60Hz. The water heater shall be fitted with a temperature/pressure relief valve, temperature and pressure gauges, and all other necessary fittings and connections. 1095

Provide and install one (1) ASME rated hot water expansion tank, Amtrol ST-12C or equal. Provide and install local instant hot water heaters, Rheem PROE10-1-RH-POU or equal, serving the crew heads and showers on the Bridge Deck. Provide a booster hot water heater, Hubbell J615T or equal, serving the Snack Bar.

Backflow Prevention 1100

All connections to sanitary fixtures, hoses, and technical or non-potable water systems shall be fitted with an appropriate backflow prevention device. Hose bibs, service sinks, and flush-o-meter valves shall have integrated vacuum breakers.

Water Filling Station

Provide filling stations for the potable system on the Main Deck, one (1) on each end of the 1105 vessel as shown on Reference (5A). Fit each connection with a lockable bronze cap and chain securing the cap to the valve. Mark with an engraved label plate stating POTABLE WATER ONLY. The filling station shall meet the requirements of USPHS.


Page: 500-33

533.2 Sanitary Water System

The sanitary water system shall be supplied from one (1) 9,000 gallon painted structural steel 1110 tank. Provide tank level indication as described in Section 436.

Provide and install two (2) centrifugal sanitary water pumps. The sanitary water pumps shall be end suction, horizontal, centrifugal pumps with stainless steel bodies and impellers and mechanical seals, R.S. Corcoran 6000 D (A10) 2x1or equal. Pumps shall be equipped with 460 VAC/3ph/60Hz, TEFC marine duty motors. 1115

Install pressure switches to control operation of the pumps. Non-potable water pump motor controllers shall be configured for automatic starting/stopping based on the pressure in the common supply header. The system shall be equipped with two (2) pressure switches to initiate pump start and stop. The pressure switches shall be set to the pressures indicated on Reference (5L). The pressure switches shall be connected to the pump motor controllers via a manual 1120 selector switch arrangement that allows connection of either pressure switch to either pump motor controller. The intent is that one pump starts at a higher pressure, with ability to select which pump starts at the higher pressure, thereby equalizing the pump run time.

Install a pressure transducer and a pressure switch in the common discharge line, and interface with the ship's alarm and monitoring system to provide continuous pressure indication and a low-1125 pressure alarm.

Provide and install an ASME rated diaphragm-type sanitary water pressure tank, Amtrol Well-X-Trol WX-452C or equal. The pressure tank shall have a 125-psig pressure rating and a replaceable NSF 61 butyl bladder.

Install piping to distribute sanitary water to the vessel's toilets as shown on Reference (5L). All 1130 components in the system shall be rated for a working pressure of 125 psig minimum.

551 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

551.1 General

Provide a compressed air system as described herein and as shown in Reference (5M). The system shall be configured to store air at high pressure and distribute the air at reduced pressures 1135 for various functions, including: engine starting, AUS dosing, sea chest blowdowns, service air for the ship's horn, and service air stations.

All reducing stations shall be fitted with self-piloted reducing valves. Regulating valves sized 1 1/2 inches or larger shall have an upstream wye strainer, inlet/outlet isolation valves, relief valve, and globe bypass valve as shown in Reference (5M). The wye strainers shall be fitted with 1140 moisture drains and drain ball valves connected at the low point of the strainer housing. Smaller reducing stations shall have isolation valves only.

All air receivers shall be cylindrical with elliptical heads and shall comply with the applicable requirements of the ASME pressure vessel code as referenced in 46 CFR Subchapter F (Marine Engineering). In general, all receivers shall have separate process connections for inlet, outlet, 1145


Page: 500-34

drain, and relief valves. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary foundations or brackets for horizontal or vertical mounting.

In general, all low points where moisture can accumulate shall be fitted with drain valves. Long horizontal runs of piping shall be sloped to allow drainage to the low point drains or to the receivers, whichever is closest. 1150

551.2 High Pressure System

The high-pressure system shall be comprised of the air compressors, moisture traps, storage receivers, and high-pressure distribution piping. The system shall be fitted with two (2) Quincy QR-25 Series D370HP air compressors, or equal. The compressors shall be arranged for loadless starting. Compressors and their motors shall be mounted on common foundation skids and fitted 1155 with belt guards.

Compressor motor controllers shall be configured for automatic starting/stopping based on the pressure in the common supply header. The system shall be equipped with two (2) pressure switches to initiate compressor start and stop. The pressure switches shall be set to the pressures indicated on Reference (5M). The pressure switches shall be connected to the air compressor 1160 motor controllers via a manual selector switch arrangement which allows connection of either pressure switch to either compressor motor controller. The intent is that one compressor starts at a higher pressure, with ability to select which compressor starts at the higher pressure, thereby equalizing the compressor run time.

Air shall be compressed and stored in three (3) 200-gallon air receivers, each at a pressure of 250 1165 psig. Air receivers shall be rated for a MAWP of 300 psig. Each air receiver shall be fitted with a 2 1/2 inch NPT inspection port with threaded cap. Inspection ports shall be located for easy access, clear of structure and installed equipment or piping.

Relief valves on receivers shall vent though a common overboard so as not to impact the sizing of the Engine Room fire suppression system. 1170

Instrumentation for the high-pressure system shall be provided as shown in Reference (5M) to provide signals for low starting air pressure and starting air pressure continuous remote display.

Starting Air System

Starting air shall be provided from the high-pressure system via a 250/100 psig reducing station. The system shall provide starting air for the four (4) propulsion engines and the three (3) ship's 1175 service diesel generators (SSDGs). Instrumentation shall be provided as shown in Reference (5M) to provide the signal for continuous remote display.

Ship's Horn Air System

Air for the ship's horns shall be provided from the high-pressure system via the 250/150 psig reducing station. The system shall supply air to the whistle via a combination manual/solenoid 1180 operated valve.


Page: 500-35

The Contractor shall provide and install two (2) Kahlenberg KM-135-DVM-H-120-24 air-operated whistles, or approved equal. Horns shall be suitable for operation in severe weather and have heated control valves and diaphragms. Each horn shall be brass or bronze construction and shall be mounted in the stack facing the Pilot House it serves. Provide horn controls for the 1185 appropriate whistle in each Pilot House console. Each horn shall be configured with a Kahlenberg fog signal timer and auto/at-will switching.

551.3 Ship Service Air System

Ship service air shall be provided by one (1) rotary screw compressor and receiver, Quincy QGS 20 or equal. The ship service compressor shall be tank mounted, with the compressor, motor, 1190 controller and accessories mounted on a 120-gallon horizontal receiver, and shall be capable of 75 SCFM at 125 psig. The intent is to run lower pressure air continuously for the AUS dosing supply while the main engines are running. Air shall be distributed via a 125/100 psig reducing station to various service air stations located throughout the vessel as shown in Reference (5M).

A cross connection from the high-pressure system via a dedicated 250/100 psig reducing station 1195 shall serve as backup ship service air supply.

Each service air station shall be fitted with an isolation ball valve and female quick disconnect hose fitting. The vessel shall be furnished with four (4), 25-foot portable compressed air hoses. Hoses shall be stowed as directed by the Owner's Representative.

551.4 Compressed Air Supply to AUS Dosing 1200

The quality of ship service air shall meet ISO 8573.1 Class 5 at minimum in accordance with manufacturer's requirements for the AUS dosing system. Provide and install one (1) ship service air filter, Parker Finite HN3S-6C or equal, and one (1) ship service air dryer, Zeks Heatsink 75HSH or equal. Air dryer shall be cycling and capable of 75 SCFM at 100 psig. Install the air dryer and filter in the ship' service air main downstream of the 125/100 psi pressure reducing 1205 station, where shown on Reference (5M).

555 CLEAN AGENT FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

Provide and install fixed fire extinguishing equipment as required by 46 CFR Subchapter H Part 76, ABS Rules and as described herein.

Provide and install a fixed, manually-operated, total flooding clean agent fire extinguishing 1210 system utilizing Novec 1230, Kidde or equal , to meet the vendor specified minimum design concentrations to protect the Engine Room, E Gen Room, and EOS.

The design, installation, testing and maintenance of the clean agent fire extinguishing system shall be in accordance with USCG and NFPA 2001 Rules and Regulations.

The Contractor shall utilize the manufacturer's authorized technicians for final connections and 1215 system tests of the fire extinguishing systems.

All components of the fire extinguishing system shall be products of the same manufacturer or listed by the manufacturer as compatible with those devices, components, and equipment.


Page: 500-36

The remote manual release for each space shall be located immediately outside the space served, and in a location approved by the Owner's Representative. 1220

The clean agent storage cylinders shall be stored in a dedicated storage locker in accordance with USCG regulations and ABS rules.

The system shall include all necessary storage cylinders, piping and control systems, alarms, warning lights, relief valves, discharge nozzles, solenoid shut down and pressure release cylinders, and interfaces with engine, damper, and ventilation controls. 1225

Arrange nozzles to evenly distribute and diffuse the clean agent throughout the protected spaces. Design size and flow requirements per the manufacturer's design manual and Regulatory Body requirements.

Configure pressure switches to stop the ventilation supply and exhaust fans, close the fire dampers, and shut down fuel transfer pumps and all diesel-fired equipment in the protected space 1230 upon release of the clean agent system serving the space protected.

Provide and install cylinder weigh bars over cylinder banks to facilitate weighing of the cylinders. Provide one (1) portable scale per vessel, suitable for use on clean agent cylinders.

Mount all fixed clean agent cylinders on elevated foundations and securely fastened in a vertical position. Secure cylinders with circumferential band/steel strap type bolted clamps around the 1235 cylinder body. Use individual band clamps for each bottle to permit maintenance service and removal.

Clean agent cylinders shall be new, fully charged, and fitted with safety caps where required to protect discharge heads during handling and transportation.

556 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 1240

556.1 Remote Valve Shut-Off System

Provide and install an emergency shut off system to satisfy the requirements for oil tank valve closures found in 46 CFR §56.50-60. Oil supply lines subject to tank head pressure shall be fitted with quick closing, spring-loaded globe valves with hydraulically actuated release pin, LK Valve Series, or equal. 1245

Valve actuation shall be accomplished with a hydraulic system provided by the valve supplier. Hydraulic pressure shall release the locking pins at selected valves, allowing the spring to close the valve. The system shall include a series of hydraulic control stations, each fitted with a hydraulic oil reservoir, hand operated positive displacement pump, and valve selector manifold. Contractor shall confirm shut off station locations with the Owner's Representative as well as 1250 which tank shut-off valves are controlled at each station prior to purchase. Table 500 - 5 provides suggested locations for the tank shut off control stations.


Page: 500-37

Table 500 - 5: Valve Control Station Schedule

Control Station

FO

Sto

rage

Tan

k 1

FO

Sto

rage

Tan

k 2

FO

Day

Tan

k 1

FO

Day

Tan

k 2

E G

EN

FO

Tan

k

EOS

Near Clean Agent Release

Outside of E GEN Room

Equivalent emergency shut off systems may be proposed provided they comply with all USCG and ABS requirements. Submit details to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to 1255 purchase.

558 DECK DE-ICING SYSTEM

Provide and install a deck de-icing system, generally as shown on Reference (5N).

The system shall provide ice and snow melting at the passenger embarkation areas of the Main and Saloon Decks. The underside of these deck areas shall have channel type heating grids. A 1260 hot water solution containing minimum 25% ethylene glycol shall be circulated through the grids. The system shall be closed-loop type, with heat supplied from the ship's tempered water system via a stainless steel brazed plate heat exchanger, Alfa Laval or equal.

The deck drain overboard piping located in the peak void below the Main Deck shall be heat traced with hot water piping and insulated, generally as shown on Reference (5N), to prevent ice 1265 accumulation.

581 ANCHOR HANDLING AND STORAGE SYSTEMS

581.1 General

Provide and install the anchoring arrangement and support structure as shown on Reference (5O), as described in Group 100, and in accordance with ABS Rules. The anchors shall be 1270 stowed on skids arranged for rapid deployment. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an installation that permits deployment and retrieval of the anchor without damage to the vessel or its equipment, and to the satisfaction of USCG, ABS, and the Owner's Representative.

581.2 Anchors

Provide two (2) 4,000 pounds Danforth anchors, or approved equal. Each anchor shall have a 1275 holding power of at least 33,000 pounds in mud. The anchors shall be stored in a recess on both ends of the vessel as shown in Reference (5O).


Page: 500-38

581.3 Anchor Chain and Hardware

Provide each anchor with 3 fathoms of 1 1/4 inch Grade 3 stud link steel anchor chain, shackled to 400 feet of 1 1/2 inch wire rope with a breaking strength of 184,000 pounds. Attach the chain 1280 to the anchor with a pear link and swivel shackle, and fitted with a second swivel shackle and an anchor shackle at the other end. Shackles shall be forged steel, galvanized.

Secure the bitter end of the wire rope to the winch drum by a connection designed to fail in shear at a load less than the breaking strength of the wire rope, but greater than the proof load of the wire rope without failure of any other member and without damage to the winch or its supporting 1285 structure. The connection shall be accessible with all of the rope on the drum. The design shall preclude sharp bending of the wire rope.

Provide a quick release arrangement, complete with a pelican hook, devil's claw, two (2) safety shackles, and a turnbuckle with two (2) eyes. All fittings shall be galvanized.

Provide fairleads to protect wire rope, fittings, and the hull from undue stress or wear. Fairings 1290 may be in the form of half round bars, heavy plate strips, etc., but must be to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

581.4 Anchor Winches

Provide two (2) electric anchor winches. The winches shall be Coastal Marine 1A17-150x1-135-00 or equal. Design and install suitable foundations (as described in Group 100) based on 1295 certified winch plans and specifications. Install each anchor winch where shown in Reference (5O).

The winches shall meet the operational requirements of 46 CFR §77.07-10. It shall have a wire rope drum driven by a single speed reversible AC motor connected to a gear reduction by means of a slip coupling. Provide the winch complete including electric motor, speed controller, master 1300 switch, electric motor brake, hand brake, interlock, and heater. The winch shall be capable of lowering the anchor manually by disengaging the motor and releasing the hand brake with winch under load.

The winch shall be capable of breaking out and hoisting the anchor and all associated ground tackle from a 50-foot water depth at 30 feet per minute. 1305

The winch drum shall have the capacity to carry 400 feet of wire.

The clutch shall be set to slip at approximately 325% of the full load motor torque. Provide access to the clutch to allow setting clutch adjustment.

Winch controls shall be housed in a stainless steel, waterproof box, located near each winch. All shall be located to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 1310

Provide appropriate attachment for the devil's claw.


Page: 500-39

Provide a sign for each anchor winch reading: "Caution: Tripping Hazard" Attach a sign to each anchor winch cable on the Hurricane Deck, between the winch and hawse pipe. The signs shall be easily removable

582 MOORING SYSTEMS 1315

582.1 General

Provide and install the mooring components as shown on Reference (5O).

582.2 Mooring Capstan

Provide and install two (2) mooring capstans, Coastal Marine C14-10-61-21 or equal, one on each end of the vessel as shown on Reference (5O). 1320

Capstan controls shall be provided in handheld, durable, waterproof, rubberized boxes. The wiring to each capstan control shall lead into the shore service connection compartment nearest to each capstan. Each control box shall be provided with sufficient length of wire to move freely about the open deck at the ends, as necessary during mooring operations for the vessel. Mounting hardware for storing the control box and wiring shall be provided on the inboard 1325 bulkhead inside the shore service connection compartment to which the wire is run. All components shall be constructed and located to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

582.3 Mooring Chocks, Bitts, and Fairleads

Provide and install chocks, bitts, and recessed shell bitts as shown on Reference (5O). The chocks and bitts shall have a nominal safe working load appropriate to match the mooring lines. 1330

Chocks shall be 12 x 10 inch Panama chocks, Schoellhorn-Albrecht S1181 or equivalent, mounted as shown.

Recessed bitts, Schoellhorn-Albrecht S1173 or equivalent, shall have a nominal 80 tonne capacity.

All mooring hardware shall be mounted on deck insert plates as referenced on Reference (5O) 1335 and as described in Group 100. Welding shall be double continuous, 100% penetration at fitted joints. The deck under fittings shall be fitted with headers and tripping brackets to suit the design loads of the fittings.

Chock and bitt locations and orientations shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to final installation. 1340

Chocks and bitts shall be smooth in way of the line working surfaces and not have any burrs, sharp edges, or casting flashing that could damage the mooring lines. Grind welds flush as needed to prevent line chafing on fabricated components

582.4 Towing Padeyes

Provide and install four (4) towing padeyes as shown on Reference (5O). Padeyes shall be 1345 mounted on deck insert plates as referenced on Reference (5O) and as described in Group 100.


Page: 500-40

583 LIFESAVING APPLIANCES

583.1 Rescue Boat and Davits

Rescue Boats

Provide and install four (4) USCG approved rescue boats, Willard Marine Sea Force 490 or 1350 equal. Rescue boats shall have a capacity of four (4) persons and shall include the USCG required standard equipment package. The rescue boat outboard motors shall be Evinrude E-Tech 40 HP or equal with electronic fuel injection and electric start. A battery trickle charging station shall be provided and each rescue boat shall include a charger. Each rescue boat outboard shall be fitted with an electric block heater or other means of ensuring the rescue boats are 1355 guaranteed to be operable year-round.

Outfit each rescue boat with USCG-approved equipment in order to comply with the 46 CFR 199. Furnish each rescue boat with a marine grade Owner-approved cover.

The rescue boat shall be designed and constructed to ABYC standards and USCG safety requirements, and all electrical and mechanical components shall be accessible for maintenance 1360 and repair.

Furnish and install four (4) rescue boat cradles, each with nylon facing in way of the boat hull, an adjustable tie down assembly fitted with a quick acting release, and rescue boat handling spreader gear. All fasteners shall be stainless steel.

Provide painters, bowsing lines and deck fittings as necessary for safe and rapid boat launching 1365 and recovery, as approved by the Owner's Representative. The rescue boat shall be equipped with a cleat and bitter end eye for its painter.

Provide a Stokes litter at each rescue boat stowage area; install each Stokes litter on a bulkhead with stainless steel mounting brackets, as approved by the Owner's Representative.

Install the dedicated receptacles provided with rescue boat in a location protected from the 1370 weather and from damage during normal rescue boat operations, but near the rescue boat cradle or davit base to provide power for the rescue boat battery charger and outboard block heater.

Davits

Provide and install four (4) USCG-approved rescue boat davits, completely outfitted per USCG and ABS requirements. The davit shall be an Allied D2500S or Palfinger Ned-Deck SCH 12-3.5 1375 R, or equal, and shall have a working radius of 11.5 to 12 feet, with a lifting capacity of not less than 2,500 pounds. The rescue boat davits and winches shall be rated for lowering and hoisting the rescue boat with four (4) occupants. The davits shall be delivered as a complete pre-assembled and tested unit.

Each davit shall be installed with the structural foundation as described in Group 100 of this 1380 document.

Each davit shall have a pendant wander lead controller in addition to fixed controls. This controller shall be provided with a 20-foot cord and weathertight storage box.


Page: 500-41

Each davit shall be equipped with a limit switch to cut power to the davit winch motor before the hard stop is reached. 1385

Provide the davit complete with a stainless steel wire rope main fall wire, if available from the davit manufacturer, pedestal for deck mounting, and guide block with shackle. The wire rope shall be of sufficient length to lower the rescue boat to the water under conditions of 10º of trim and 20º of list.

A fall hook shall be provided and installed for each davit. Each fall hook shall be USCG or 1390 SOLAS approved. Fall hooks shall be Allied or Palfinger Ned-Deck, or equal, with pull cable and a safe working load of not less than 2,500 pounds.

Install the rescue boat and davit to the satisfaction of the USCG.

Operationally Required Parts

Davit and rescue boat delivery shall include one set of operationally required parts for the davit, 1395 such as motors, control valves, sensors, gaskets, batteries, alarms and fuses, which can readily be changed by trained Owner's personnel. The Contractor shall provide adequate parts to meet this requirement per the manufacturer's recommended operating parts list.

Provide two (2) additional rescue boats, fully outfitted, on trailers and two (2) additional outboard engines with delivery of the first vessel only. 1400

Provide one (1) complete set of special tools per vessel as required for rescue boat and outboard engine operation and maintenance. Special tools are any non-commercial tools, repair appliances, test equipment, diagnostic computers and software, or specialized adaptors, which do not conform to ANSI or other internationally recognized standards. Diagnostic computers or software shall include software updates for the duration of the warranty. 1405

583.2 Life Jackets (PFDs) and Stowage

Provide USCG-approved Type I Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs) as shown in Reference (5P), including 4,760 adult passenger PFDs, 16 adult crew PFDs, and 450 child passenger PFDs. Provide and install metal PFD lockers in the areas depicted and of the capacities listed on Reference (5P). All PFDs and lockers shall be in accordance with the requirements of 46 CFR 1410 Subchapter W. PFD details and installation locations shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative prior to purchase and installation.

PFDs shall be stowed as required by 46 CFR §199.70(b)(2), and all lifejacket lockers and stowage locations shall be stenciled as required by 46 CFR §199.70(b)(2). Child PFDs that are stored together with adult PFDs shall be stowed in separate compartments and clearly marked. 1415 All PFDs shall be stenciled in accordance with 46 CFR §199.70(b)(3).

Adult PFDs shall be Stearns Merchant Mate I adult PFDs, or equal. Child PFDs shall be Stearns Merchant Mate I child PFDs, or equal.


Page: 500-42

583.3 Life Rings

Provide and install twelve (12) stainless steel life ring-mounting brackets. Locate brackets on 1420 vessel to satisfy 46 CFR §199.70(a) and in accordance with the approved lifesaving equipment plan, Reference (5P). Mounting bracket details and installation locations shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative prior to purchase and installation.

Provide twelve (12) 30-inch orange life rings (Jim Buoy HS-30, or equal). Four (4) life rings shall be fitted with self-igniting lights. Two (2) life rings shall be fitted with lines, smoke 1425 signals, and self-igniting lights. Stainless steel mounting brackets shall meet USCG regulations.

Stencil life rings in accordance with USCG requirements.

583.4 Life Rafts and Launching Devices

The Contractor shall furnish and install six (6) 50-person USCG approved B-Pack inflatable life rafts. Install three (3) life rafts on each side of the vessel where shown on Reference (5P). Rafts 1430 shall be stowed with a float free configuration that includes a painter, weak link, and hydrostatic release.

583.5 Miscellaneous Equipment

Provide one (1) each signal flag letter B and P and one diver down flag.

Provide two (2) each 3 foot × 5 foot US flags. 1435

Provide two (2) each 3 foot × 5 foot NY City flags.

585 PASSENGER ELEVATOR

The Contractor shall provide two (2) electro-hydraulic elevators for service between the main, Saloon and the Bridge Decks. Perform installation under the supervision of a manufacturer's technical representative. Qualified vendors include Lift Emotion and Delaware Elevator. 1440

The elevator installation shall comply with the following applicable regulatory requirements, with the exception of certain dimensions and lifting capacity:

USCG 46 CFR, Subchapter H, Passenger Vessel Regulations

ABS, 2014 Steel Vessel Rules

ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines, Chapter 4, Section 407 1445

This elevator shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with ANSI 17.1

The elevator is a vital part of the vessel and must operate with little or no downtime.

The elevators shall have the following features:


Page: 500-43

The car shall be ADA/ABA compliant, size suitable to the elevator trunk size and structure. The elevator car shall be able to fit a standard gurney. 1450

The maximum load rating shall be a minimum of 3,300 pounds.

The total travel distance between the Main Deck and the Bridge Deck is approximately 22 feet 6 inches.

The car shall have a center opening door with a clear opening to meet ADA/ABA requirements. The car door shall be automatic, power-operated. Elevator doors shall 1455 have an infrared safety curtain to prevent closing against a passenger. Doors and frames shall have a brushed 304 stainless steel finish.

Elevator trunks shall have center-opening doors of the same type as the elevator car doors. Trunk doors shall be supplied with the elevator and shall have closers that comply with applicable regulations. Trunk doors shall be noncombustible and meet the 1460 requirements of 46 CFR §116.435. Trunk doorframes shall be stainless steel.

The lifting method shall be hydraulic piston and the car shall be guided in a fixed track by guide rails attached to the bulkhead. The hydraulic cylinder shall have a surge valve built in, or directly attached to it.

Elevator operation shall be automatic. 1465

o In response to a signal from the call station at any of the decks served, the hydraulic power unit shall start, if not already running; the car shall move to the calling deck station and automatically stop with the car floor even with the landing and the doors shall open.

o When the sending button inside the car is pressed, the doors shall close after a 1470 brief, adjustable time delay; the car shall automatically move to the selected deck station and stop with the car floor even with the landing; the doors shall open; and after a brief, adjustable period the doors shall close.

o In the event that no call is received after approximately one (1) minute, the hydraulic pump shall shut down. 1475

o When the call pushbutton is pressed, it shall light up and remain lit until the car reaches the deck station that is calling. When the send pushbutton in the car is pressed, it shall light up and remain lit until the car reaches its destination.

An emergency use control panel shall be provided adjacent to each elevator call station. The panel shall be located within a recessed box with a keyed lock. The emergency use 1480 control panel shall be capable of disabling the controls within the elevator car. It shall also be capable of operating the elevator doors.

Elevator location lights shall be provided at each deck.

Outfit elevators for handicapped passengers according to New York City, state, and federal requirements, including stainless steel grab rails and tactile operating pushbuttons 1485 in the car and at the trunk doors at a height convenient to a passenger in a wheelchair and for the hearing-impaired.


Page: 500-44

Speed shall be at a minimum 80 feet per minute and at a maximum of 100 feet per minute in both the up and down direction.

The elevator car shall be fitted with a ventilation fan as standard equipment. 1490

The elevator car and platforms shall be of steel construction. No wood, wood products or drywall shall be used.

Provide emergency phone or intercom connection between the elevator car and both Pilot Houses. The phone shall be powered from the emergency bus, and shall be operable from all elevator positions. The system shall have local battery backup, or be supplied 1495 from the uninterruptible power supply on the emergency bus. The audible ring in the Pilot House shall be distinct from any other sound in the Pilot House. There shall be a distinctive strobe alarm light on the bulkhead in close proximity to the elevator door on each deck, which will activate from within the car in case of emergency.

The elevator car shall be equipped with data and electrical leads for installation of a 1500 CCTV camera inside the car. Refer to Section 436 for CCTV requirements.

Elevator Hydraulic System

The hydraulic system shall meet the requirements of 46 CFR 58.30 and Section 505 of these Technical Specifications, and shall use a petroleum-based hydraulic fluid. Hydraulic cylinders shall meet the requirements of 46 CFR 58.30-30. Piping and fittings shall meet the requirements 1505 of 46 CFR 58.30-15 and -20. Should conflicts arise between the requirements of 46 CFR 58 and Section 505, the more stringent shall apply. All hydraulic piping shall be stainless steel.

The Contractor shall provide and install the piping necessary for the elevator with the guidance from the elevator manufacturer. All hydraulic piping and hoses shall meet the requirements of 46 CFR 56. Test hydraulic piping and hoses to 2.5 times the working pressure, or as required by 1510 USCG or ABS, whichever is greater and provide a test report to the Owner's Representative.

The hydraulic power unit shall include a sump tank with a capacity of at least three times the extended cylinder volume and a motor-driven pump, valve block with relief valve and control valves, local controls, suction strainer, return filter with differential pressure gauge, and unit-mounted piping. The hydraulic power unit shall be oil tight at all penetrations. A rigid plate 1515 cover, gasketed and bolted to the tank shall form the top and provide access to the interior components. The fill/vent shall be a replaceable filter/breather. Provide a 2-inch deep drip pan under the hydraulic power unit.

Elevator Electrical Power and Controls

Electrical installations and components shall be in accordance with IEEE standards, or 1520 alternative ABS and USCG recognized standards and 46 CFR Subchapter J for installation of electrical items onboard passenger ferries.

The hydraulic pump motor shall operate on 460 VAC/3ph/60Hz electrical power. Motors shall be TEFC, or equal, and shall be to the approval of the Owner's Representative. Similar equivalent submerged pump and motors are acceptable. 1525

Provide electrical power for the elevator, lighting, and controls from the emergency switchboard.


Page: 500-45

Provide motor starters with associated ancillary equipment and a NEMA 3S or IP 54 enclosure for the elevators. Motor starters shall be equipped with control pushbuttons, switches, indicator lights, and similar items that conform to applicable regulations. The motor starter shall have an integral 3-pole disconnect switch actuated by opening the controller door, and motor contactor 1530 with thermal overloads. Provide the motor starter with a 480/120 VAC transformer sized to accommodate the control circuit. The control power shall be fused on the primary side and shall have redundant fuses on the secondary side.

Elevator car lighting shall be ceiling-mounted LED fixtures supplied from a separate 120 VAC circuit. Provide the fluorescent fixtures with battery ballasts for emergency elevator car lighting. 1535 Provide lighting and receptacles in the elevator pit and trunk, and as required by regulations.

Elevator Installation

Install elevators in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Locate supports for the elevator guide rails and hydraulic cylinder to suit the elevator design. Supports shall be continuous from the bottom of the pit to the top of the trunk. Exercise care to 1540 maintain the supports straight and parallel. Guide rail standoffs may be bolted or welded to the support channels. Bolt guide rails to the standoffs using shims and chocks as required for a straight and parallel installation within acceptable tolerances of the elevator manufacturer.

Provide and install foundation and stabilizing supports for the lift cylinder. Design the foundation to transmit the forces into the pit side and supporting structure. 1545

Provide personnel access to the elevator pit for repairs and maintenance.

Provide and install foundation and local stiffening for the car buffer in the elevator pit bottom.

Provide and install landing sill guards at each landing.

Locate the hydraulic power unit and control enclosures in the Auxiliary Machinery Room near the Elevator Trunk. The elevator machinery shall be segregated from the Auxiliary Machinery 1550 Room in an expanded metal cage with door and padlock hasp. Mount the hydraulic power unit (HPU) on its foundation using elastomer resilient mounts.

Provide and install a 1-inch pipe with ball valve for draining the elevator pit.

Provide and install an emergency ladder in the elevator trunk and emergency hatch at the top of the elevator trunk. 1555

Provide and install ventilation fans serving each elevator trunk.

Elevator Interior

The bulkhead linings for the elevator car interior shall be brushed 304 stainless steel.

The cabin ceiling shall be the elevator manufacturer's standard finish.


Page: 500-46

Deck covering inside the elevator car shall be in accordance with Reference (5H) and Section 1560 634.

The elevator shall have a horizontal handrail installed in the elevator car. The handrail shall be rigidly connected to the elevator car structure and have sufficient strength to restrain a handcuffed individual at the back of the car, opposite the door and out of reach of the elevator controls or any other items in the car which can be damaged. 1565

Operationally Required Parts

The elevator package shall include all additional operationally required parts for the elevator door operating system, such as drive motors, switches, rollers, sensors, gaskets, alarms and fuses, which can readily be changed by trained Owner maintenance personnel. The Contractor shall provide adequate parts to meet this requirement per the manufacturer's recommended operating 1570 parts list. Submit the operationally required parts list to the Owner's Representative for approval.


Page: 600-1

GROUP 600 – EQUIPMENT AND OUTFIT

601 GENERAL 3 601.1 References 3 601.2 General 3

602 NAMEPLATES AND MARKINGS 4 5

602.1 General 4 602.2 Ship's Name and Hailing Port 5 602.3 New York City Department of Transportation 5 602.4 Lettering, Fonts, and Logos 5 602.5 Builder's Plaque 6 10 602.6 Door, Hatch, and Manhole Markings 6 602.7 System Labels and Nameplates 7 602.8 Regulatory Markings 7 602.9 Miscellaneous Labels, Signs, and Markings 8 602.10 Notices and Licenses 9 15 602.11 Display Drawings 9

603 HULL MARKINGS 9 603.1 Draft Marks 9 603.2 UWILD Marks 10 603.3 Official Number 10 20

612 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR RAILINGS 10 612.1 Interior Railings 10 612.2 Exterior Railings 11 612.3 Retractable Passenger Barriers 11

621 JOINER BULKHEADS 11 25

622 FLOOR PLATES AND GRATING 12 623 LADDERS 12

623.1 Interior Ladders and Stairways 12 623.2 Exterior Ladders 13

624 NON-STRUCTURAL CLOSURES 13 30

624.1 Doors 13 624.2 Watertight Doors 13 624.3 Weathertight Doors 13 624.4 Fire Screen Doors 14 624.5 Joiner Doors 14 35 624.6 Security Screen Gates 15 624.7 Locks, Keys, and Tags 15 624.8 Hatches and Manholes 16

625 WINDOWS AND FIXED LIGHTS 16 625.1 General 16 40 625.2 Pilot House Windows and Wipers 17

631 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 18 631.1 General 18 631.2 Surface Preparation 20 631.3 Coating System 21 45 631.4 Coating - Piping, Machinery, and Electrical 25


Page: 600-2

633 CATHODIC PROTECTION 25 634 DECK COVERINGS 26

634.1 General 26 634.2 Underlayment 26 50 634.3 Poured Deck Coverings 26 634.4 Deck Covering Schedule 26 634.5 Switchboard and Fatigue Matting 28 634.6 Safety Treads 28 634.7 Elevator 28 55 634.8 Walk Off Mats 28

635 HULL INSULATION 29 635.1 General 29 635.2 Structural Fire Protection 29 635.3 Thermal Insulation 30 60 635.4 Acoustic Insulation 30 635.5 Machinery and Piping Insulation 31

637 LININGS AND CEILINGS 31 640 OUTFITTING 33

640.1 General 33 65 640.2 Lighting 34 640.3 Furnishings 34 640.4 Utility and Storage Spaces 37 640.5 Pilot House Consoles 38 640.6 EOS Console 39 70 640.7 Engine Room Outfit 39

644 SANITARY FIXTURES 40 644.1 General 40 644.2 Appliances 41

651 FOOD SERVICE FACILITY 41 75

670 UTILITY AND STORAGE SPACES 42 671 EMERGENCY AND FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT OUTFIT 42

671.1 General 42 671.2 Portable and Semi-Portable Fire Extinguishers 42 671.3 Fire Axes 43 80 671.4 Emergency Gear Lockers 44


Page: 600-3

601 GENERAL

601.1 References

Table 1: List of References - Outfit 85 Reference Document Number Title

(6A) 14079-200-101-0 Profiles and Arrangements (6B) 14079-200-101-3 Lifesaving Equipment Arrangement (6C) 14079-200-101-4 Pilot House Arrangement (6D) 10479-200-101-5 EOS Arrangement (6E) 14079-200-101-7 Fire Zone Plan (6F) 14079-200-101-8 Emergency Evacuation Plan (6G) 14079-200-201-1 Machinery Arrangement (6H) 14079-200-330-1 Vessel Operating, Emergency and Exterior Lighting (6I) 14079-200-602-1 Vessel Drydocking and Hull Markings (6J) 14079-200-623-1 Machinery Space Ladders and Gratings (6K) 14079-200-623-2 Interior and Exterior Ladders, Main Deck and Above (6L) 14079-200-624-1 Window Schedule (6M) 14079-200-624-2 Door Schedule (6N) 14079-200-624-3 Hatch Schedule (6O) 14079-200-625-1 Exterior Railings (6P) 14079-200-635-1 Thermal and Acoustic Insulation Plan (6Q) 14079-200-640-1 Interior Furnishings and Outfit (6R) NVIC 1-89 Underwater Survey Guidance (6S) NVIC 9-97 Ch. 1 Guide to Structural Fire Protection (6T) N/A Passenger Vessel Accessibility Guidelines (PVAG) 2013 (6U) ASTM F1166 Standard Practice for Human Engineering Design for

Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities (6V) N/A Society for Protective Coatings: SSPC Standards

601.2 General

This section describes requirements for the vessel's outfitting and equipment. The interior and exterior finishes, outfitting and equipment items described herein shall be provided by the Contractor and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and 90 requirements, and with applicable regulatory requirements.

The contractor shall prepare schedules, samples, and plans where described herein and as required to obtain Owner's Representative and Regulatory approvals prior to order and installation. In addition, the Contractor shall prepare true color, high-resolution renderings of the vessel passenger spaces, which accurately depict the selected deck, ceiling, and bulkhead 95


Page: 600-4

treatments along with all major outfitting items, and depict the aesthetics of detailed interior design. The renderings shall be provided prior to the Owner's Representative for approval.

602 NAMEPLATES AND MARKINGS

602.1 General

The Contractor shall provide all applicable nameplates, signs, labels, notices, and other similar 100 markings and devices throughout the vessel as described herein and as required by USCG, and all other cognizant authoritative agencies whether local, state, or federal.

Unless otherwise specified or required by rule, regulation, or law, nameplates, signs, labels, notices, and other similar markings and devices shall be engraved phenolic plastic laminate, brass, or stainless steel. 105

Metal engraved nameplates, signs, labels, notices, and other similar markings and devices shall be on material no less than 0.05 inch thick and the engraving shall be 0.02 inch deep filled with black enamel. Phenolic label plates shall be fabricated high pressure, multi-layer phenolic material no less than 0.0625 inches thick. Engraving shall be done such that the top layer of material is cut away to a depth sufficient to clearly expose the next layer of contrasting color. 110 Colors shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Wording shall be clear and concise with a minimum of abbreviations. Particular attention shall be given to the wording intended for use by the public to ensure that the message is clear and unambiguous. Abbreviations, where used, shall be common to the Owner's standards and the marine transportation industry (in that order of precedence), and as set forth in ASME 115 Y14.38-2007, or equal.

Signage and information signs in passenger accessible areas shall comply with the United States Access Board Proposed Passenger Vessel Accessibility Guidelines (PVAG, July 2013), Reference (6T). The lettering of nameplates, signs, labels, notices, and other similar markings and devices intended for the public shall be of high contrast and shall be sized for the visually 120 impaired passenger in accordance with ADA guidelines.

The Contractor shall prepare and submit a label plate and markings summary to the Owner's Representative for approval. The plan shall list the material, location, and wording for instruction plates, nameplates, markings, signs, notices, and all other similar markings.

The Contractor shall prepare and submit plans for passenger wayfinding placards to the Owner's 125 Representative for approval. Passenger wayfinding placards shall be placed symmetrically on each Passenger Deck, in stair towers, in each interior passenger seating area at both amidships and vessel ends, and in Bridge Deck side exterior passenger seating areas at each end, and amidships and at Bridge Deck vessel end exterior seating areas. Each unique location shall identify the location of the placard on the vessel and be marked with "You are here," or other 130 similar locating information. Placards shall be in conformance with Reference (6T), as appropriate. Final size, design and location of the placards shall be to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall fabricate and install the approved placards.


Page: 600-5

Nameplates, signs, labels, notices, and similar markings and devices shall be firmly attached with 3M Company VHB 4951 Double Coated Acrylic Foam Tape or equal with the approval of 135 the Owner's Representative. Stainless steel screw may be used for attachment in areas other than directly into joiner bulkheads and linings or ceiling, or in other areas with the approval of the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall give special consideration to the prevention of theft and vandalism regarding the installation of labels, notices, frames, signs, and similar items.

Install phenolic label plates on the Pilot House and Engineers Operating Station (EOS) consoles, 140 switchboards, panel boards, gauge panels, etc. to identify instruments, controls and alarms.

602.2 Ship's Name and Hailing Port

The Contractor shall install 1/4 inch thick steel plate letters for the name on the port and starboard side of the curtain plate, centered at approximately Frame 64. Letters shall be 12 inches tall and painted blue. Provide the hailing port (NEW YORK) below the vessel's name. 145 Letters shall be 6 inches tall and painted blue. Paint used shall conform to the paint specifications described herein and selected colors shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

The Contractor shall fabricate and install two (2) wraparound name boards with raised letters; one (1) for each Hurricane Deck end coaming. Name boards shall be installed after all exterior 150 superstructure painting has been completed. The name boards shall be steel, 16 inches high. The letters shall be routed out using block type letters and shall be 11 inches high. The name boards shall be black with white letters and final design and locations shall be to the approval of the Owner's Representative.

The name boards shall be securely bolted, using type 316 stainless steel fasteners, to clips 155 welded to the vessel's structure with sufficient standoff from the Pilot House plating to permit maintenance of the painted surface behind the boards without having to remove the boards. Final location of name boards shall be as directed by the Owner's Representative.

602.3 New York City Department of Transportation

The New York City Department of Transportation (NYCDOT) insignia shall be mounted on the 160 Hurricane Deck, outboard of the stacks and flagpoles and above the railings at midships as shown in Reference (6A). Metal signs containing the NYCDOT insignia shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall fabricate metal frames for the insignia and paint them to match the Hurricane Deck bulkheads. The height and location of the frames shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to fabrication. Flood lighting shall be installed to light the insignia 165 as shown on Reference (6H). Final location shall be as directed by the Owner's Representative.

602.4 Lettering, Fonts, and Logos

The Contractor shall be responsible for reproducing all logos, fonts, and lettering painted on the exterior of the existing vessels that are considered to be fleet standards. Image files of existing vessel logos shall be created that will enable successful replication of the overall look of the 170 fleet.


Page: 600-6

Particular attention shall be paid to the script "Staten Island Ferry" logo painted on the side of each existing vessel, which features a distinct, hand-lettered look. The Contractor shall be aware that there is variation in the look of the logo on vessels throughout the fleet. The Owner's Representative will advise from which vessel the logo shall be replicated into digital form, and 175 this selected logo will become the new uniform fleet standard. These digital files shall then be used to create either stencils for painting the logo on the vessel or decals of marine grade vinyl for application to the vessel. The digital logo shall also be converted to CAD form for use in creating a Computer Numerically Controlled (CNC) weld bead tracing out the logos on each side of the vessel. Paint used shall conform to the paint specifications described herein and all 180 appropriate painting requirements shall be followed to ensure satisfactory durability and maintainability of the lettering. Application of vinyl decals if used shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer's specifications. Selected colors shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

The Contractor shall prepare and provide a plan locating all exterior vessel nameplates and 185 markings. Details of the design of vessel naming and hailing port, name boards, sign boards and logos, including all lettering, fonts, sizes and locations necessary to be painted and attached on the exterior of the vessel shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to application. Final image files, font files, and AutoCAD drawing files developed for designing and applying vessel logos and lettering shall be provided to the Owner's Representative for future use. 190

602.5 Builder's Plaque

The Contractor shall allocate space on board the vessel, provide, and install one (1) builder's plaque. The plaque shall be of cast bronze with raised letters and shall give the vessel's name, year of building, names of selected NYCDOT officials (to be provided by the Owner's Representative), the builder, builder's hull number, location, and the naval architect (Elliott Bay 195 Design Group). The location on board the vessel and layout of the plaque shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for timely approval prior to manufacture.

Attachment bolting shall be capped with anti-theft rosettes of like material as the plaque.

The plaque shall have a smooth bright finish and be finish coated with two (2) coats of NYALIC Marine Ultra-Clear, or equal, and shall be installed in a location to be designated by the Owner's 200 Representative.

602.6 Door, Hatch, and Manhole Markings

Escape hatches and all access manholes shall be labeled with engraved CRES identification plates. Characters shall be at least 3/8 inches high. The labels shall identify each space by its designation and deck-frame-side-end as approved by the Owner's Representative. 205

Provide identifying labels to show the compartment designation and deck-frame-side-end of each door-accessible space in the vessel. Affix labels to, or just above, the center of the upper horizontal frame of each access door. Compartment designations shall be as shown on the Profiles and Arrangements, Reference (6A).

Provide identifying labels on the outside of each watertight hatch and manhole cover in the 210 vessel, except doors and hatches in the superstructure side. Label height shall be a minimum of


Page: 600-7

1 inch with 1/2 inch tall lettering, and shall identify the compartment designation and deck-frame-side-end of the space to which access is made.

Labels shall be stainless steel or phenolic with engraved letters. Letters shall be filled black.

602.7 System Labels and Nameplates 215

Provide system and equipment labels or nameplates throughout the vessel. Refer to Groups 300 and 500 for details.

602.8 Regulatory Markings

Provide label plates, markings, signs, and instruction plates required to comply with the cognizant local, state, and federal regulatory agencies. These include, but are not limited to, exit 220 signs, pollution abatement, engine orders, non-smoking signs, fire alarm bells, fire alarm pull-boxes, and aids to mobility impaired persons. All signage shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to purchase.

Lifesaving Equipment

Provide identification labels and instructions concerning the use and operation of PFD lockers, 225 davits, and rescue boats.

Fire Extinguishing Equipment

Provide labels for the identification and use of fire stations, fire hoses, portable extinguishers, fixed system alarms, fire sprinkling control station, general alarm, ventilation shutdown mechanisms, fire dampers, and other emergency systems. 230

Passenger Deck Signage

Provide photo luminescent striping for emergency escape as required by USCG. Provide tactile signage in compliance with the PVAG July 2013, Reference (6T).

Provide the following signs and markings at a minimum:

1. EXIT signs over all doors leading to the exterior areas of the Passenger Decks. 235

2. WOMEN, MEN RESTROOM signs in sufficient quantity to direct the public to the head spaces.

3. ELEVATOR signs with directional arrows in sufficient quantity on the Passenger Decks to direct the public to the elevators.

4. TO SALOON DECK signs on the Main Deck, with a directional arrow underneath the 240 lettering. Signs shall be painted over the forward and aft exterior doors leading to the Saloon Deck stairwells approximately 7.5 feet above the deck. Signs shall have 3 inch black lettering and shall be painted over a white, contrasting background.

5. TO MAIN DECK and TO BRIDGE DECK signs in the Saloon Deck stair tower, with directional arrows underneath the lettering. Signs shall be above the stairs to indicate 245 their destination, and approximately 7 feet above the deck. Signs shall have 3 inch black lettering and shall be painted over a white, contrasting background.


Page: 600-8

6. TO SALOON DECK signs in the Bridge Deck stair tower, with a directional arrow underneath the lettering. Signs shall be above the stairs to indicate their destination, and approximately 7 feet above the deck. Signs shall have 3 inch black lettering and shall be 250 painted over a white, contrasting background.

7. Provide NO SMOKING notice signs throughout the passenger and crew areas, including the men's and women's restrooms and throughout exterior passenger areas. Provide and post NO SMOKING signs in the Engine Room, EOS, and Propulsion Rooms.

8. Provide signs to direct passengers to the life preserver lockers. 255

Instruction Plates

The Contractor shall provide and install plastic instruction plates for operating instructions and emergency procedures as required to safely navigate and operate the vessel. The full list of instruction plates and all detailed instructions for each plate shall be submitted the Owner's Representative for review. Instruction plates shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 260

Pilot House: Emergency ventilation shutdown procedure

Switchboard: Generator startup procedure Shore power connection and switching procedure 265 Emergency ventilation shutdown procedure

Sprinkling System Manifold: Fire pump startup instructions Sprinkling system setup and operating procedure

Main Deck: 270 Shore power connection procedure

Engine Room, EOS, Auxiliary Machinery Room, Propulsion Rooms, and Emergency Generator Room:

Oil pollution prevention procedure Main Engine startup procedure 275 Engine Order Telegraph / Emergency maneuvering procedures

Elevator: Emergency call pushbutton operating instructions

602.9 Miscellaneous Labels, Signs, and Markings

Provide restricted area signs reading: 280

RESTRICTED AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

Unauthorized Presence Constitutes a Breach of Security


Page: 600-9

Locate restricted area signs at all doors and stairs providing access below the Main Deck, crew areas on the Hurricane Deck and Bridge Deck, access to the Intermediate Deck, rescue boat 285 areas, at fueling and potable water fill stations, and elsewhere as required by 33 CFR 104.270.

Provide stainless steel attachment points, a stainless steel removable chain with clips at each end at the top and bottom of each passenger stairway. Yellow steel signs that read CREW ONLY and STAY OFF STAIRS UNTIL VESSEL IS DOCKED shall be included with each chain.

Provide plastic laminate signs for each of the flashing lights or beacons installed in the Engine 290 Room. The signs shall identify the function of each light with large lettering easily visible from across the space.

Provide signs reading WATCH YOUR STEP wherever passengers may encounter a change in walking surface height of more than 1/2 inch. Locate the signs for high visibility to passengers. Letters shall be 8 inches high and painted with a contrasting color and white background. 295

Post HIGH NOISE AREA - HEARING PROTECTION REQUIRED notices at entrances to the Engine Room, Auxiliary Machinery Room, Propulsion Room, and Emergency Generator Room entrances.

602.10 Notices and Licenses

Metal frames with glazed permanent or hinged fronts shall be provided and installed for all 300 certificates, licenses, and notices provided and/or required to be posted by regulatory agencies.

The notices include, but are not limited to, the following: USCG Stability Letter USCG Certificate of Inspection (COI) Radio Operator Licenses 305

FCC Licenses

Where multiple notices or licenses will be mounted in one location, provide a single large frame of sufficient size as practicable for the available space (Section 810). Final locations are shall be approved by Owner's Representative.

602.11 Display Drawings 310

Metal frames with glazed permanent or hinged fronts shall be provided and installed for all display drawings provided and/or required to be posted by regulatory agencies.

603 HULL MARKINGS

The Contractor shall submit a layout of all hull markings described in this section to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. 315

603.1 Draft Marks

Draft marks shall be located at each end of the vessel at approximately Frame 74. Marks shall be located on both sides at each end of the vessel. Numbering shall be Arabic numerals with a


Page: 600-10

projected height of 6 inches. Marks shall be fabricated from 1/4 inch steel plate, seal welded, ground smooth, and painted white. The bottom of each figure shall be at integral feet above the 320 bottom of the keel. The numbers shall be cut using a computer-controlled cutter.

603.2 UWILD Marks

Per the requirements of vessels participating in the UWILD program, including Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circular (NVIC) 1-89, Reference (6R), reference marks shall be added to the underwater portion of the exterior hull surface, generally as depicted on Reference (6I). All sea 325 valves and hull penetrations shall be permanently marked on the hull. Reference marks or targets that can be used to determine a diver's position along the hull shall be added in pre-determined locations. All markings shall be in accordance with recommendations from the USCG and ABS.

The Contractor shall provide original video or photographic evidence of the vessel's hull marking 330 system to ABS to provide a baseline for all future surveys. The video or photographs must be done with the vessel out of water. The Contractor shall also provide the Owner's Representative with a copy of the video or photographic evidence submitted to ABS.

603.3 Official Number

The vessel's Official Number shall be permanently marked on the aft face of the transverse web 335 frame beneath the Saloon Deck at Frame 60 on the Staten Island end. Characters shall be block-type Arabic numerals at least 3 inches tall. Characters shall be outlined by deep center punching and painted with high-gloss black epoxy paint.

612 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR RAILINGS

Locations and details of railings and grab rails are shown on References (6K), (6O), and (6Q). 340 Railings shall be fitted without any sharp ends or edges. Interior stainless railings and grab rails shall remain unpainted.

612.1 Interior Railings

Provide railings and grab rails generally as shown on References (6K) and (6Q). Interior railings and grab rails in the passenger stairwells, passenger spaces, and crew spaces above main deck 345 shall be fabricated from 1 1/2 inch stainless steel pipe. Railings shall be fitted with stand-offs and radiused returns. Interior railings shall have routed ends and no protrusions. Mitered joints shall be avoided unless specifically approved by the Owner's Representative. Commercial grade grab rails may be used in lieu of fabricated pipe rails.

Grab rails in spaces accessible by passengers shall satisfy the requirements of the PVAG July 350 2013, Reference (6T).

Any open railings in exterior passenger spaces shall be closed up with 1 inch × 1 inch aluminum mesh in an aluminum frame and attached to the rails with 316L stainless steel clips. The fill panels shall be removable for maintenance.

As shown in Reference (6J), removable handrails shall be provided in below-deck machinery 355 spaces at the perimeter of raised gratings, on inclined ladders, and in any locations where


Page: 600-11

required to prevent falling. Handrails shall be fabricated from 1 1/4 inch schedule 40 steel pipe. Handrail stanchions shall be supported at the lower end by bosses fabricated from 1 1/2 inch steel pipe. Support bosses shall be welded to the grating support framework or inclined ladder frame as applicable. Rails shall be fastened to their bosses with stainless steel fasteners. 360

612.2 Exterior Railings

Provide rails and guards to meet USCG requirements and as shown on Reference (6O). Rails shall be free of clothes-entangling projections. Grind smooth all welds. Form rails with radiused corners; storm rails shall return against the bulkhead.

Provide exterior railings along deck edges as shown in Reference (6O). Stanchions, courses and 365 braces shall be 316L stainless steel. Fill panels and frames, where required, shall be 6061 aluminum alloy with 1 inch × 1 inch aluminum mesh in an aluminum frame and attached to the rails with 316L stainless steel clips. The fill panels shall be removable for maintenance.

The maximum allowed gap in railing and at bottom of rail at deck edge in passenger accessible areas is 2 inches. The top edge of passenger accessible area handrails shall not be less than 42 370 inches off the finished deck. The maximum distance between courses is 60 inches, unless alternate provision for passenger protection is provided, as shown on Reference (6O).

612.3 Retractable Passenger Barriers

Folding gates, posts, and fittings shall be provided and installed at both ends of the ferry on Main Deck and Saloon Deck levels. Because of the excessive span, the gates shall have corrosion 375 resistant casters with swivel bearings and non-marking rubber wheels. Gates shall be designed to be operationally safe to personnel and passengers. Gates shall have frames of mitered extruded aluminum, anodized silver finish, with provisions for locking and push bars to sit in deck when in the closed position. Gates shall have stainless steel mesh with all hardware of stainless steel. Gates shall be arranged to hinge and fold in sections. 380

All posts and other accessory material shall be supplied by the Contractor. The Owner's Representative will provide a sample of the gate assembly used elsewhere on its existing vessels for fabrication by the Contractor. Gate hardware shall be interchangeable with the gates found on the rest of the fleet. Contractor shall submit drawings showing proposed designs of folding gates to the Owner's Representative for approval. 385

621 JOINER BULKHEADS

The Contractor shall design, layout, and install joiner bulkheads as shown in References (6E), (6P), and (6Q). The bulkhead system shall be Norac A600/50 aluminum panel system, or equal having USCG type approvals conforming to Annex 1 of IMO FTP Code. Joiner bulkheads shall have a minimum of an STC 32 room-to-room Sound Reduction Class and shall carry a B-15 fire 390 rating. An approved equal joiner bulkhead system must have the same or lower total installed weight per square foot, and shall meet all other requirements for the joiner bulkhead system, regulatory and otherwise. Final colors and pattern of joiner bulkheads shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.


Page: 600-12

622 FLOOR PLATES AND GRATING 395

The Contractor shall design and install grating, platforms, and deck plates as necessary for convenient safe access and operation of machinery, apparatus, and controls as shown on Reference (6J). Deck plates shall be installed throughout the Engine Room, Auxiliary Machinery Rooms, and Propulsion Rooms. Deck plates shall be located close in around each engine, Voith Schneider Propeller, generator, and all other major machinery to allow easy 400 personnel access for maintenance.

Deck plates shall be 1/4 inch aluminum with a raised four-way anti-slip diamond pattern, or as required by the Regulatory Bodies. Deck plates shall be sized to accommodate convenient one (1) person handling and in no case larger than 10.75 square feet or heavier than 55 pounds. Sharp edges on deck plates and supports shall be ground smooth. 405

Plating shall be supported on 2 1/2 inch 2 1/2 inch 1/4 inch steel angles, fitted with 1/4 inch stainless steel flush socket head cap screws, countersunk into the floor plates, near the corner of each plate. Fit resilient pads between support angles and deck plates to minimize vibration. At the floor plate boundaries, the angles shall be inverted to contain the grating. All floor plate edges shall be supported with angle. Hinged plates with flush type grabs shall be provided for 410 access to equipment and valves below the deck plates. Valve hand wheels and rising stems shall not protrude through the floor plates in normal walking area. Coaming bars shall be fitted around permanent openings. Supports and coaming angles shall be bolted where necessary to permit removal for overhaul or removal of machinery.

623 LADDERS 415

The Contractor shall design and install inclined and vertical ladders generally as shown on References (6A), (6J), and (6K).

Stairway slope, materials and width shall be in accordance with ADA requirements for passenger spaces and USCG requirements for crew spaces. Topside steel inclined ladders shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Inclined ladder treads shall be no-slip type. 420

Vertical ladders shall be constructed with 4 inch 3/8 inch flat bar steel stringers and 3/4 inch square bar rungs welded all around. Typical rung spacing shall be 12 inches. Topside vertical ladders shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

The Contractor shall design and install steel vertical ladders or stirrup rungs as required for access to all tanks, cofferdams, and voids below the Main Deck, and on the masts. Stirrup rungs, 425 if used, shall be constructed with 3/4 inch square bar, welded all around to the bulkhead, with a step clearance of 4 1/2 inches and a length of 16 3/4 inches. Vertical ladders shall conform to the standards outlined in ASTM F1166, Standard Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities, Reference (6U). Ladders shall be affixed to bulkhead-mounted flat bar tabs using stainless steel fasteners to facilitate removal. 430

623.1 Interior Ladders and Stairways

Inclined ladders and stairs in interior passenger areas shall be fabricated plate style construction. As specified in References (6K) and (6Q) replaceable non-slip safety treads, Amstep 700 series non-slip treads, or equal, installed with stainless steel fasteners shall be provided for all interior stairs and fabricated plate stairs. 435


Page: 600-13

Passenger stairs that provide passage from the Main Deck to the Bridge Deck shall be provided at each end of the vessel as shown in References (6A) and (6K). These stair towers shall meet all of the USCG requirements for Type 1 stair towers.

Crew-only stairs and ladders shall be provided as shown in References (6A) and (6K).

623.2 Exterior Ladders 440

Provide exterior ladders as shown on Reference (6K).

624 NON-STRUCTURAL CLOSURES

624.1 Doors

Weather doors shall be filled with fibrous glass thermal insulation. Fire-rated doors shall be filled with approved structural insulation necessary to comply with the structural fire protection 445 requirements. Door frames shall be filled with insulation of the same type and rating as the door. Gaskets shall be fitted between the door and frame stops of weather and fire rated doors.

Doors shall be operable from both sides, complete with hardware, latches, locks, hasps, holdbacks, doorstops, and automatic closers, as required for the application. Hardware and locks shall be stainless steel, manufactured compatible with marine service. Doors shall be rectangular 450 rather than beveled to suit sheer and camber.

Doors with individual dogs shall have two (2) pipe extension handles mounted on the bulkhead adjacent to the door, one (1) each inside and outside.

Exterior doors shall have watersheds over them where not otherwise protected.

All sliding doors shall remain unpainted. Joiner panels and pockets enclosing sliding doors shall 455 be removable or otherwise capable of being opened such that the tracks and mechanisms for each door can be accessed for maintenance.

624.2 Watertight Doors

The Contractor shall provide and install sliding watertight doors in the transverse bulkheads below the Main Deck where shown on References (6A) and (6M). The doors shall be IMS or 460 equal, electro-hydraulic type suitable for remote operation.

624.3 Weathertight Doors

The Contractor shall provide and install aluminum, insulated, bi-parting, sliding weathertight doors at the entrances to the stair towers on the Main Deck and Saloon Deck and at entrances to exterior seating areas on the Bridge Deck as shown on References (6A) and (6M). Sliding doors 465 shall be Pacific Coast Marine or equal, fitted with single glazed windows with safety glass in the top half. Sliding doors shall have a maximum continuous opening force of five pounds or less. The sills of the doors shall not be recessed into the deck, nor shall they protrude more than 0.5 inches above the top of the deck covering. Sliding doors shall conform to the requirements of Reference (6T), including, but not limited to, requirements for opening force and sill heights. 470

The Contractor shall provide and install aluminum, insulated, hinged, weathertight doors at the entrances to the Pilot Houses. Doors shall be Pacific Coast Marine or equal, fitted with double glazed windows in the top half and with four (4) stainless dogs and a lockset. Dogs shall have a plastic coating if available.


Page: 600-14

Weathertight doors to the Pilot Houses shall have a minimum noise transmission rating of 475 STC32 or higher. The STC rating shall apply when the door is closed. Seals around the doors shall be selected to allow for a proper seal and maintain STC rating. Special attention shall be paid to the Pilot House doors in order to meet the required noise limits given in Section 073. Careful attention shall also be paid to any weather tight doors to the Bridge Deck passenger spaces under fan rooms. 480

All other weathertight doors shall be steel two-dog doors, Pacific Coast Marine or equal.

624.4 Fire Screen Doors

Fire screen doors shall be installed in locations as shown in Reference (6A) and (6M). Fire screen doors shall be filled with USCG-approved structural insulation necessary to comply with the structural fire protection requirements shown in Reference (6M). Door frames shall be filled 485 with insulation of the same type and rating as the door. Provide certification with each door that clearly indicates that each door is in full compliance with the required structural fire rating.

The sills of fire doors within passenger spaces shall not be recessed into the deck, nor shall they protrude more than 0.5 inches above the top of the deck covering. Sliding fire screen doors shall be Pacific Coast Marine or equal. Hinged fire screen doors shall be Deansteel Manufacturing 490 Company or equal.

The elevator trunk shall be effectively protected by A-60 rated fire doors. External elevator fire screen doors may be omitted if the elevator is supplied with A-60 fire rated doors at each deck.

Fire doors using hold backs shall use magnetic style, remote release hold backs. The magnetic hold backs shall be operable from the Fire Control Station in the Pilot House or locally at the 495 door. Magnetic hold backs and all other door hardware and framing shall be installed directly to steel bulkheads. In no case shall any door hardware be fitted to the joiner bulkheads unless specifically approved by the Owner's Representative.

624.5 Joiner Doors

The Contractor shall provide and install flush hollow metal construction joiner doors, Deansteel 500 Manufacturing Company or equivalent, as shown in References (6A) and (6M) to provide the required fire rating, in all interior spaces. Joiner doors may also be selected to integrate with a fire rated modular partition and lining system for passenger accommodations.

Accesses to crew toilet and shower compartment and utility wet spaces, shall have a nominal 3-inch sill. All other interior accesses shall have a nominal 3/16 inch sill. Sills shall have stainless 505 steel caps.

Joiner doors shall have a noise transmission rating of STC32 or higher. The STC rating shall apply when the door is closed. Seals around the doors shall be selected to allow for a proper seal and maintain STC rating. In order to maintain noise levels below the limits outlined in Section 073, particular attention shall be paid to doors in the following areas during the development of 510 the noise analysis:

EOS and EOS vestibule doors

Engine Room access door on Main Deck

Propulsion Room access doors on Main Deck


Page: 600-15

All Fan Room doors 515

All Electrical Service and Vent Trunk doors Rubber snubbers shall be fitted to joiner doors to prevent rattles.

624.6 Security Screen Gates

The Contractor shall install security screen gates as shown on References (6A) and (6M). Security screen gates shall be wire mesh or expanded metal rectangular doors. They shall be 520 constructed of 1/2 inch mesh, #11 gage or equal, and approved welded wire fabric or flat rolled expanded metal.

Frames shall be 1 inch × 1 inch × 3/16 inch galvanized angles with galvanized plate brackets welded in corners. Doors shall have diagonal bracing. All edges shall be well rounded. Hasp and staple shall be fitted for locking, in addition to other usual hardware. Door stops and 525 hardware shall be provided to allow the gates to be locked in both the fully open and fully closed positions.

ASTM F1072, "Standard Specification for Expanded –Metal Doors," shall be used as construction guidance.

A complete fixed wire mesh or expanded metal security screen shall fill in the remaining open 530 area not covered by the gate. Final design of the security screen shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to construction.

624.7 Locks, Keys, and Tags

The Contractor shall provide and install locks as follows:

Exterior doors Main Deck Cylinder locksets

Exterior doors Saloon Deck Cylinder locksets, keyed alike with exterior door locks on Main Deck

Exterior doors Bridge Deck Cylinder locksets, keyed alike with exterior door locks on Main Deck

Pilot House doors Programmable pushbutton locksets

Crew-only Stair Tower Programmable pushbutton locksets

Lavatories Cylinder locksets, keyed alike with exterior door locks on Main Deck

Officer and Crew Locker Rooms Programmable pushbutton locksets

Deck Gear Lockers Programmable pushbutton locksets

Emergency Gear Lockers Programmable pushbutton locksets

Propulsion Rooms Programmable pushbutton locksets

Electronic Equipment Room Programmable pushbutton locksets

Fan Rooms on Hurricane Deck Programmable pushbutton locksets

Emergency Generator Room Programmable pushbutton locksets


Page: 600-16

Uptakes on Hurricane Deck Padlock and hasp, keyed alike with exterior door locks on Main Deck

Engine Room Stores Programmable pushbutton locksets

Crew lavatories and other Owner's Representative-designated non-secure spaces shall be fitted 535 with inside-only knob operated latch bolts.

The Contractor shall provide two (2) keys for every cylinder lockset and padlock installed on the vessel. All keyed locks on the vessels of this class shall use the same master key.

Door locks shall in no way compromise or alter the fire rating of the door into which they are installed. 540

624.8 Hatches and Manholes

The Contractor shall provide, layout, and install hatches and manholes generally as indicated on Reference (6N). Provide manholes for access to all tanks, voids, and other spaces unless other types of openings are specified. Escape hatches opening into passenger areas shall be installed such that they are flush with the finished deck surface and shall not be blocked or obstructed 545 from opening.

Manholes shall be in accordance with the standards of ASTM Volume 01.07 "Shipbuilding," F-1142 and F-1143. All hatches shall be Freeman Marine or equal. Hatches larger than 15 inch by 23 inch shall feature spring-assist opening.

Manholes on inclined or vertical surfaces shall use bulkhead-mounted studs for ease of hanging 550 and aligning the hatch cover. Manholes and access hatches on inclined or vertical surfaces shall be provided with handles.

Hatches and manholes shall have a zinc primer coating and shall be finished to a similar schedule as the surrounding bulkheads after installation. Hardware and mechanisms of quick-acting hatches shall retain their factory applied finish or be left unpainted, per manufacturer guidance. 555 The EOS escape hatch shall be installed such that it is flush with finished deck coating surface of Main Deck as described in Section 634. Flush mounted manholes shall be used in all traffic areas and on the Main Deck. Tamper resistant cover plates shall be provided for each flush mounted manhole in the passenger spaces.

The Contractor shall provide and install 15 inch × 23 inch oval manholes in all tanks and 560 accessible voids. Manhole hatch rings and covers shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with a standard marine fitting configuration. Raised and deck ring type bolted manholes shall be fitted with hex bolt, nut, and washer fasteners made of stainless steel, with the head welded to the underside of the angle flange to permit nut installation from the topside. Flush manholes shall be configured with blind tapped holes and socket head countersunk machine screws. 565

625 WINDOWS AND FIXED LIGHTS

625.1 General

The Contractor shall provide and install windows and fixed lights generally as shown on References (6A) and (6L). All exterior windows shall be installed in aluminum frames with metal glazing bead or angle. Wire-inserted glass shall be used only where required by USCG 570 requirements.


Page: 600-17

Windows shall have a frame design that allows for replacement of glass without removing the frame. Window frame installation shall generally be accomplished from the interior of the vessel, unless specifically allowed for by the Owner's Representative. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. Use releasable silicon sealant between window frames and structure. All 575 windows shall have fire clips. All glass shall be tempered.

Window thicknesses shall be in accordance with USCG requirements. Windows shall be minimum 1/4 inch laminated safety glass. Unless specified, all windows shall be clamp-in type. Window mullions shall be no more than 4 inches wide.

Passenger area windows shall be fixed or three (3) part windows with the upper portion of the 580 center part being a vertical drop as shown in Reference (6L), Pacific Coast Marine or equal. Windows shall be fitted in aluminum clamp-in frames with 4-inch radiused corners. Frames shall be clear anodized finish.

Windows in passenger and crew areas shall have double pane thermal glass with Low-E coating and low solar heat gain. 585

Windows at the EOS shall be A-60 fire rated windows with steel frames, Deansteel Manufacturing Company or equal. EOS windows shall have a noise transmission rating of STC 43 or greater. Particular attention shall be paid to these windows during development of the noise analysis in order to maintain noise levels below the limits outlined in Section 073. Windows at the MVZ bulkhead shall be A-60 fire rated windows with steel frames, Deansteel 590 Manufacturing Company or equal.

A-60 windows may alternately be DH-60 rated, or OH-60 rated if the test was performed with steel construction, as allowed for in NVIC 9-97, Change 1, Reference (6S).

The Contractor shall accurately lay out all windows to determine the exact size and shape required for each location. A window schedule shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative 595 for review and approval prior to window purchase.

625.2 Pilot House Windows and Wipers

Pilot House windows shall be single pane windows. All Pilot House windows shall be bolt in, minimum 1/4 inch thick.

Forward-facing and forward-side sloping Pilot House windows shall be heated windows with 600 integral electric heating elements. Heated windows shall have laminated construction. Monolithic outer panes shall meet USCG thickness requirements. An inner lamination of 1/4 inch thickness shall be bonded to the outer pane.

One (1) window on each outboard side of the Pilot Houses shall be a horizontal sliding window. Windows shall slide forward and shall be fitted with Lexan dams on the inside tracks. 605

The Contractor shall pay special attention to the noise transmission rating of the windows on the sides of the Pilot Houses, particularly with respect to noise from the Fan Rooms near midship on the Hurricane Deck.

The Contractor shall provide and install ten (10) electric pendulum-type heavy-duty window wipers, Wynn Mfg. Co. or Cornell Carr or approved equal, on Pilot House windows designated 610 by the Owner's Representative (five (5) wipers on each Pilot House). Wiper motors shall be mounted internally with the wiper actuators extending weathertight through the forward facing


Page: 600-18

bulkhead. Wiper motors shall operate on single phase, 120 VAC, 60 Hz power. A central control panel located in the Pilot House console shall be used to control the wipers and window heating elements. Controls shall offer 2-speed and intermittent operation with self-parking. 615

The Contractor shall provide and install a retractable solar shade on each Pilot House window as approved by the Owner's Representative. The shades shall be suitable for limiting glare and heat from the sun, while still providing visibility in all stages of deployment. One (1) replacement shade system shall be provided for each individual shape of window provided.

631 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 620

631.1 General

Paints and paint materials shall be PPG Protective and Marine Coatings or equal, except as noted in the paint schedule or an Owner's Representative-approved substitute. Verify that paint products listed herein are acceptable for use in the state and local regulatory jurisdictions where the vessel is constructed. All paint, coatings, etc. used and methods used shall meet 625 requirements of all applicable regulatory bodies, including the EPA. Where government specifications are employed, the materials furnished shall comply with the applicable specifications. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a painting schedule for the review and approval of the Owner's Representative.

The Owner's Representative shall provide paint color samples matching NYCDOT fleet 630 standards for reference. The colors of installed coatings shall match the samples to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

All steel, stainless steel, and exposed aluminum surfaces shall be painted, except as specifically excluded by these Technical Specifications. Steel surfaces, not otherwise lined, shall be provided with finish coats in accordance with the paint schedule described herein. 635

If a location is not specifically identified herein, use the painting description most appropriate to the location.

Prior to fabrication ALL structural steel used for the construction of the vessel shall be wheelabrated and primed with inorganic zinc preconstruction primer immediately after blasting. Blasting, priming, and coating welded assemblies after weld out will not be accepted by the 640 Owner's Representative.

All plates and shapes used in construction shall be wheelabrated or abrasive blasted to completely remove scale, rust, and other surface contaminants to a near white surface profile in accordance with SSPC SP-10. The abrasive chosen shall produce a uniform anchor pattern with a 2.5 mil maximum profile height. If steel shot is used, a suitable proportion of iron grit shall be 645 mixed with the shot to remove rust, scale, or other impurities peened into the surface by the shot and to produce a sharp, jagged profile.

The Contractor shall apply primer coats with inorganic zinc pre-construction primer to clean metal surfaces per the manufacturer's specifications. All plates and shapes, including the shell exterior, shall receive one (1) coat, 1.0-1.5 mils dry film thickness (DFT), of pre-construction 650 primer. Primer shall be uniform, free of pinholes and holidays, and compatible with specified coating systems.


Page: 600-19

After erection, all weld lines and other areas on the vessel exterior where the priming system has been burned or abraded, shall be mechanically cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-11 to produce a minimum 1.0 mil profile and stripe coated. 655

Grind off all weld slag and weld splatter prior to abrasive blasting. Fill weld undercuts and weld pinholes with weld material. Areas where temporary erection structure has been removed shall be ground smooth and gouges shall be filled with weld and ground smooth. Prior to abrasive blast cleaning of steel, remove oil, grease, weld smoke, and other contamination with a suitable detergent followed by a thorough high-pressure, fresh water wash down. 660

The Contractor shall seal off valves, machinery, equipment, exterior aerials, and all openings in way of abrasive blast operations to prevent damage from grit and paint. Engine room intakes, exhaust ports, ventilation louvers, and all other louvers and screens must be sealed during blasting and painting in order to prevent internal spaces from being contaminated.

Where wire brushing of steel surfaces prior to coating is specified, the use of a power wire-brush 665 or the equivalent is intended to remove all mill scale and rust.

All hardware, windows, light fixtures, placards and signs, nameplates, gages, thermometers, and adjacent equipment and structure shall be properly masked off when the surrounding areas are being painted. Masking tape shall be removed within 24 hours from when it was applied. Items and surfaces to be protected may be removed, moved, or otherwise protected, at the preference of 670 the Contractor, but shall be restored to their pre-removal form, appearance, and function at completion of the paintwork.

Stripe-coat all structural edges, rat holes, behind angle stiffeners, welds, and difficult areas to coat prior to each full coat application.

The Contractor shall mask hoses, gauges, and bright work prior to painting. Painted hoses shall 675 be replaced, even if only partially painted.

The shell in way of keel and bilge blocks shall be protected from components in the wood blocking by means of aluminum foil, at least 0.002 inch thick, or an equivalent alternate protection of oiled paper.

Unless otherwise specified, or approved of by the manufacturer, paint and other coating 680 materials are not to be thinned with solvent, or altered in any manner by the Contractor.

Where minimum dry film thickness (MDFT) requirements are specified they shall have precedence over the number of coats specified. The readings shall be made with a coating thickness gauge, Elcometer, Microtest, or other approved gauge, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 685

All topcoats shall be from the same lot, applied in continuous fashion. No curtains, holidays, or shadows. If any discoloration or fading of topcoat is evident at the completion of construction the topcoat shall be reapplied.


Page: 600-20

631.2 Surface Preparation

All surface preparation shall be in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council's 690 (SSPC) Steel Structures Painting Manual. In application of these standards, regardless of surface preparation method, the coating manufacturer's recommended surface profiles shall be explicitly followed.

After blasting and before any coating is applied, the prepared surfaces shall be cleaned by detergent wash, allowed to dry, and then carefully blown down with dry air to ensure all grease, 695 loose dust, dirt, etc. is removed. The prepared surfaces shall be inspected by the Owner's Representative and the Coating Manufacturer's Representative for residual dust and other surface contamination and to ensure that the minimum or higher surface preparation was achieved. The Contractor shall give as much advance notice as is possible of the time the surface will be ready for inspection. The minimum time notice of an upcoming inspection is one hour. 700

When high pressure water washing is being used to pre-clean surfaces, the nozzles must be kept close enough to the surface being cleaned to work properly. In the case of hand held nozzles the maximum effective distance is approximately 6 inches. The high pressure water washing units must be of sufficient size and pressure to properly clean the surfaces. The wetting of a surface with a high pressure water gun does not constitute high pressure washing; it must be done 705 correctly. If oil or grease is present, then a proper de-greaser must be used in conjunction with the high-pressure washing.

The quality of the surface preparation specified is the minimum quality that is acceptable on the metal's surface at the time of the paint application. Previously accepted surfaces may be rejected if excess metal turning occurs prior to the completion of painting. 710

Dry Abrasive Grit Blasting

Abrasive grit blasting shall be done using clean, oil-free, after-cooled compressed air. The compressed air used for blasting shall be dried with properly sized, working air filters and drying units, located just prior to the blast machines. The air pressure and air volume shall be sufficient to ensure at least 90 psi air pressure at all nozzles during the normal blasting operations. Care is 715 to be taken to blast only those areas that can be coated within a short time. This must be determined in advance and agreed upon by the Contractor, the Coating Manufacturer's Representative, and the Owner's Representative based on atmospheric conditions at the time.

The grit used for blasting work shall be dry, oil free, clean, and essentially free of harmful contamination such as chloride and sulfate. The conductivity of the grit shall not exceed 300 720 micro-siemens when equal volumes of grit and distilled water are mixed together (per ASTM-D4940 testing). The grit stored at the site shall be kept in properly closed and clean storage containers. The grit size used shall consist of a mix of fine and coarse grit particles to ensure thorough surface cleaning.

High and Ultra-High Pressure Water Jetting 725

The Contractor shall not use water jetting if steel has be previously grit blasted. The Contractor chooses to use high or ultra-high pressure water jetting prior to recoating in lieu of a specified grit blasting method, then the Contractor shall adhere to the Joint Surface Preparation Standard,


Page: 600-21

NACE No. 5/SSPC-SP-12, steel structure painting manual. The use of this method of removal does not alleviate the Contractor from performance of the same or higher standard expected from 730 the equivalent grit blasting method, as defined by the Visual Surface Preparation Definitions (WJ 1-4).

Surface Preparation Standards

All steel surfaces shall be blasted to SSPC SP-10, "Near White" metal.

Hull surfaces up to 12 inches above the design load waterline shall be blasted to SSPC SP-10 735 unless the selected vendor specifically, and in writing, permits a lesser degree of blast. The Contractor shall guarantee that coating life with a lesser degree of blast shall be no shorter than that attainable with the specified blast.

Contractor's paint schedule shall include a statement of the degree of blast to be utilized for each coating system selected. 740

All welds and disturbed areas above the waterline shall be prepared to SSPC SP-5.

Prepare surfaces to SSPC SP-7 to remove contaminants and zinc salt, if remaining after high-pressure wash

631.3 Coating System

The coating system specified herein represents a system as mainly supplied by one (1) 745 manufacturer with extensive successful marine experience. Other coating systems provided by other manufacturers may be considered, if they have equivalent successful marine experience and if their product is equal to the type specified. The Owner's Representative shall make the sole determination of whether the alternative system is satisfactory.

Primers 750

Prime coat aluminum, galvanized, and stainless steel with:

Full coat Sigmaweld 199US at 1.0-1.5 mils DFT

Keel to Subdivision Draft Line

Note: Vessel shall be delivered with satisfactory anti-corrosive and anti-fouling coatings intact as approved by the Owner's Representative, regardless of the final construction methodology. The 755 Contractor shall apply one full coat of anti-fouling just prior to delivery in as specified in Section 983.

1st coat Amercoat 235 Multi-purpose Epoxy 6 mils DFT

2nd coat Amercoat 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy 4 mils DFT

3rd coat Amercoat ABC 3 Black 4 mils DFT

4th coat Amercoat ABC 3 Red 4 mils DFT


Page: 600-22

5 th coat Amercoat ABC 3 Red 4 mils DFT

Sea Chests and Around Propeller Discs

Approximately 200 square feet of hull at each end around the propeller disc areas and within the sea chests shall be painted with Amercoat 238 at two coats of 5 mils DFT each; followed by 760 coats 2, 3, and 4 as listed in the previous section for the hull from the keel to deep load line.

Hull Above Deep Load Line


2nd coat Amercoat 235 Multi-purpose Epoxy 4 mils DFT

Finish coat PSX 700 Polysiloxane Finish 5 mils DFT

Exposed Weather Decks (Non-Passenger)



Finish coat PSX 700 Polysiloxane Finish 5 mils with non-skid

Exposed Weather Decks (Passenger Decks) 765

1st coat Amercoat 240 Primer 5.0 mils DFT

2nd coat Polyspec Flex FR Elastomer Basecoat 125 mils DFT

3rd coat Amercoat 385ASA Non-skid 10-15 mils DFT

4th coat Amershield Polyurethane Color coat 2.5 mils DFT

External Superstructure



Finish coat PSX 700 Polysiloxane Finish 5 mils DFT

Passenger Areas (Bulkheads and Overhead)

1st coat Amercoat 5105 2 mils DFT

2nd coat Amercoat 5105 2 mils DFT

3rd coat Amercoat 5450 1.5 mils DFT


Page: 600-23

4th coat Amercoat 5450 1.5 mils DFT

Passenger Areas (Interior Decks)*



* Contractor shall verify approved deck primer prior to the application of the underlayment of the poured deck coating (Refer to Section 634.2). 770

Machinery Space, Auxiliary Machinery Rooms, and Propulsion Rooms

Bilges


2nd coat Amercoat 235 Multi-purpose Epoxy Stripecoat

3rd coat Amercoat 235 Multi-purpose Epoxy Stripecoat

4th coat Amercoat 235 Multi-purpose Epoxy 4 mils DFT

Decks and Flats




Behind Insulation and Under Deck Coverings



Overhead and Sides 775




Water Ballast, Oily Water, Sludge, and Waste Oil Tanks

1st coat Amercoat 240 Universal Epoxy 5 mils DFT

2nd coat Amercoat 240 Universal Epoxy Stripecoat


Page: 600-24

3rd coat Amercoat 240 Universal Epoxy Stripecoat

4th coat Amercoat 240 Universal Epoxy 5 mils DFT

Potable and Non-Potable Water Tanks

1st coat Amercoat 133 NSF Approved Epoxy 4 mils DFT

2nd coat Amercoat 133 NSF Approved Epoxy Stripecoat

3rd coat Amercoat 333 NSF Approved Epoxy 10 mils DFT

Prior to delivery, flush the water tanks with chlorine to suit New York City Board of Health and FDA requirements.

Voids 780

Voids and interior surfaces within the hull not covered by any other portion of this section shall receive two coats of tank coating, Amercoat 235 or equal and as approved, to an MDFT of 8-10 mils.

Fuel Oil Tanks

All fuel oil tanks shall be treated frequently after construction with sufficient fuel oil to prevent 785 the formation of any rust.

Oil Tanks

All other oil tanks, unless otherwise specified, shall be treated frequently after construction with lubricating oil preservative MIL-L-3150 medium, in order to prevent the formation of any rust.

Miscellaneous Spaces 790

Miscellaneous spaces shall be coated as follows:

Vent ducts when made of other than sheet metal shall be coated the same as voids. Fan rooms shall receive inorganic zinc silicate throughout, including the same overcoat

system as the superstructure exterior and Hurricane Deck in plenums and where not insulated. Where insulated, coat the same as other insulated spaces. 795

Miscellaneous trunks shall be coated the same as voids. Cleaning gear and other lockers shall be coated the same as water ballast, oily water,

sludge, and waste oil tanks. Diesel engine exhausts shall receive two coats of heat resistant silicone paint MIL-P-14276. Prime unlagged pipe to suit material. Overcoat primer and lagged pipe with materials to 800

match surroundings. Any other space or item not described herein shall be coated as appropriate for similar

spaces, in accordance with the manufacturer, and as approved by the Owner's Representative.


Page: 600-25

631.4 Coating - Piping, Machinery, and Electrical 805

Piping

In general, coat piping with a glossy finish in accordance with the paint requirements for the area through which the piping passes or is installed. Exceptions include the fire main and sprinkling systems, which shall be painted red. Paint rigid pipe insulation as described herein for piping. Do not paint insulation blankets. 810

Do not paint flexible hoses, hose sleeves, and flexible connections. Mask all electrical cable to prevent coating and overspray. Flexible hoses, hose sleeves, and flexible connections with paint or overspray shall be rejected and require replacement.

Machinery

New machinery and equipment in non-weather spaces shall retain the coating supplied by the 815 factory, provided the coat is a finish coat, and shall not be further coated to match the above paint schemes. Where machinery coating is damaged during construction, carefully feather the edges and paint to match factory coating. Equipment that is delivered with only a factory-applied primer coat shall be coated with:

Full coat Amerlock 2/400 Epoxy at 6 mils DFT 820

Full coat Amerlock 2/400 Epoxy at 4 mils DFT

Paint deck machinery and equipment installed in the weather or in public spaces in accordance with color schemes approved by the Owner' Representative.

Electrical

Do not paint electrical cable. Mask all electrical cable to prevent coating and overspray. Any 825 painted electrical cable shall be replaced, even if only partially painted.

Electrical components such as power distribution panels, motor control enclosures, junction boxes, etc., shall retain the color and coating as supplied from the factory provided the coating is a finish coat.

Equipment that is delivered with only a factory-applied primer coat shall be coated with: 830



Protect and mask off factory lenses, switches, pushbuttons, label plates, etc. from damage by the coating.

633 CATHODIC PROTECTION 835

The Contractor shall provide and install sacrificial anodes on the submerged portions of the hull including the skegs, sea chests, and ballast tanks. An anode shall be fitted in every sea chest.


Page: 600-26

The Contractor shall perform calculations to determine the required number of anodes and submit along with an anode plan for Owner's Representative review and approval.

For bid and planning purposes assume no more than 80 anodes, Performance Metal Products or 840 Farwest Corrosion Control Company or equal. Anodes shall be high purity zinc meeting MIL-DTL-18001K specification or approved aluminum meeting MIL-DTL-24779B, as approved by the Owner's Representative. Anodes shall be bolt through type, approximately 12 inches × 6 inches × 1 1/4 inches, with bolt holes 6 inches apart. Anodes shall be affixed to the hull with stainless steel studs, washers, and Nylock nuts. A minimum of three (3) threads shall remain 845 exposed with washer and nut in place.

634 DECK COVERINGS

634.1 General

Steel decks shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared to SSPC SP-10 as described in Section 631. Deck coverings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Colors 850 and pattern of deck coverings shall be selected by the Owner's Representative.

Deck covering shall be laid under furniture except where the furniture is built-in to the vessel structure. Cove base shall be installed around boundaries, including built-in furniture.

634.2 Underlayment

The Contractor shall provide and install Boliscreed or equal leveling underlayment, throughout 855 the vessel where Bolideck synthetic floor coverings are specified. Paint the steel decks with manufacturer's approved primer prior to application of the underlayment. The deck covering shall be approved in accordance with USCG and ABS requirements.

The Contractor shall level and fair other interior decks with a flexible underlayment applied to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 860 Underlayment shall be suitable for application of the specified flooring. Irregularities in the surface of the deck in way of carpet and rubber flooring shall be eliminated and the finished surface troweled smooth.

634.3 Poured Deck Coverings

The Contractor shall provide and install synthetic poured deck coverings, Bolidt Bolideck 525 or 865 equal, with minimum 3-inch coves in lavatory and toilet spaces and utility wet spaces. The deck covering shall be sloped to deck drains at the low points. Minimum thickness shall be 1/4 inch. The colors specified in Reference (6Q) shall be Owner's Representative approved prior to purchase.

634.4 Deck Covering Schedule 870

Hurricane Deck

Pilot Houses

Exterior

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Non-skid paint


Page: 600-27

Fan Rooms

Emergency Generator Room

Security Equipment Room

Paint

Paint

Paint

Bridge Deck

Interior Passenger Areas

Emergency Gear Lockers

Cleaning Gear Lockers

Crew Training Room

Crew & Officer Locker Rooms

Passageways

Heads and Showers

Stair Towers

Passenger Restrooms

Electrical Service and Vent Trunks

Fan Rooms

Exterior Passenger Areas

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525 TF



Paint

Paint

Non-skid Paint

Saloon Deck

Passenger Area

Stair Towers

Passenger Restrooms

Snack Bar and Storage Locker

Cleaning Gear Lockers

Emergency Gear & Deck Lockers

Exterior Decks


Bolidt Bolideck 525




Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525

Non-skid Paint

Paint

Main Deck

Passenger Area

Stair Towers

Cleaning Gear Locker

Emergency Gear Lockers

Bolidt Bolideck 525


Bolidt Bolideck 525

Bolidt Bolideck 525


Page: 600-28

Exterior Decks


Non-skid Paint

Paint

Hold 875

Engine Room

Propulsion Rooms

Machinery Spaces and Voids

EOS

Locker Rooms

Heads

Paint or Grating

Paint or Grating

Paint or Grating

Bolidt Bolideck 525 STATO



634.5 Switchboard and Fatigue Matting

Provide 36 inch wide matting in front of the main and emergency switchboards for their full length as approved by the Owner's Representative. Matting shall meet the requirements of ASTM D-178 and Mil Spec M-15562F.

Provide and install anti fatigue mats on the deck in each Pilot House as approved by the Owner's 880 Representative.

Provide portable, rubber anti-fatigue mats for each cleaning gear locker.

634.6 Safety Treads

Install pressure sensitive, fabric-backed, silicon carbide safety treads at the head and foot of all interior and exterior stairways, inclined and vertical ladders, both sides of exterior doors (except 885 in way of entrance matting), outside of the passenger elevator doors, and in other locations where it is necessary to ensure safe footing. Do not apply treads to non-skid surfaces. Locations and extent of safety treads shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Install safety treads on surfaces that have been thoroughly cleaned of waxes, sealers, oils, and other contaminants that might prevent firm adhesion to the deck. 890

634.7 Elevator

Deck covering for the elevator floor shall be as described in Section 585.

634.8 Walk Off Mats

The Contractor shall provide rubber scraper walk off mats, American Floor Mats or equal, for placement in front of each weathertight sliding door on the vessel intended for regular passenger 895 use. Each vessel shall require twenty (20) total mats, twelve (12) for the stair towers and eight (8) for the Bridge Deck exterior doors. Each mat shall be sized to fit the width of the door next to which it is located and shall be of a sufficient length to suit the space. Final design, color, layout, and size of the mats shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall also provide two (2) additional mats of each size. 900


Page: 600-29

635 HULL INSULATION

635.1 General

The Contractor shall design, layout, and install a complete insulation system that meets the thermal, acoustic, and structural fire protection requirements given in these Technical Specifications and as shown in References (6E) and (6P). Prepare surfaces to which insulation is 905 applied in accordance with Section 631.

The thermal and acoustic insulation requirements are in addition to the regulatory requirements for structural fire protection. The total combined insulation installed shall meet the structural fire protection requirements first, with additional insulation in order to meet the thermal and acoustic insulation requirements. All insulation shall be installed prior to installation of the joinery, 910 facing, sheathing, and/or lining materials.

Insulation materials shall be USCG-approved and certified for the intended use and shall be free of asbestos containing materials. Provide documented proof of USCG certification to the Owner's Representative prior to installation of insulation materials.

Provide a vapor barrier wherever insulation contacts weather or exterior surfaces. 915

Install insulation with weld pin hangers spaced on 12-inch centers for bulkheads and 9-inch centers for overheads, with button-head washer caps over the insulation.

Install mineral wool batts or blankets tight to the surface being protected. Contour insulation around angles and tees to ensure that there is no reduction in cross section, and that there is minimal loss of contact with the structure. 920

Submit arrangement and detail drawings for the insulation and linings to the Owner's Representative for review and approval.

In way of bolted access plates, tonnage openings, and other openings insulation shall be installed in such a manner as to permit the use of the opening or access without the necessity of totally removing or damaging the insulation and sheathing. The outline of the bolted access plate shall 925 be stenciled on the sheathing or insulation in a visible contrasting color.

635.2 Structural Fire Protection

Complete the detail design, provide, and install lightweight structural fire insulation to the thickness necessary for the bulkhead or deck classification required by the USCG. References (6E) and (6P) are provided for guidance and to assist in interpreting the intent of these Technical 930 Specifications. The inclusion of this Contract Guidance Drawing does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for ensuring that all currently applicable structural fire protection requirements are met.

Insulation for structural fire protection shall have an overall density of approximately 2.5 per cubic food (SeaRox FB 6020, or equal). Insulation shall be approved by the USCG under Series 935 164.007 Structural Insulation and shall be installed in batts or blankets. Insulation shall be faced, sheathed, and/or lined per Reference (6E). Attach facings using a USCG-approved adhesive.


Page: 600-30

The assembled insulation blankets or batts shall maintain the required fire rating for the given installed locations as shown in Reference (6E). Seams shall be sealed with fiberglass cloth strips and the surface of the cloth coated with two (2) coats of Eco-Perm Coating No. 11-02, or equal. 940

Note that Reference (6E) describes the minimum regulatory requirements for structural fire protection. The Engine Room uptakes shall be outfitted with A-60 or A-0 structural fire protection, as required, and entirely and uniformly lined with perforated stainless steel sheet metal.

635.3 Thermal Insulation 945

The Contractor shall complete the detail design, provide and apply thermal insulation on the bulkheads and overheads as shown on References (6P).

The Contractor shall provide and install Johns-Manville Marine Microlite type bats or blankets, 0.75 lbs/cubic ft density or Owner's Representative-approved equal thermal insulation. Insulation shall be USCG-approved under series 164.009 Non-Combustible Materials. 950

Insulation shall be installed on the inside surfaces of all boundary structure that separates heated spaces from non-heated spaces. This includes but is not limited to bulkheads, side shell and deck heads bounding the passenger seating areas, passenger stair towers, and crew spaces, including the Pilot House, toilet and shower spaces, locker rooms, and crew day room.

The material shall not be compressed or packed in; density of the installed insulation shall be the 955 same as supplied by the manufacturer.

Blanket insulation shall be secured to the steelwork with welded stud-pins and speed clips spaced not more than 12 inches.

Blankets of 2-inch thickness shall be used between frames, stiffeners or beams. Blankets of 1-inch thickness shall be used around and over frames, stiffeners or beams. 960

Extend thermal insulation 12 inches past the edge of the boundary area being insulated. Seal edges and joints of insulation with tape as recommended by the insulation manufacturer to present a smooth, continuously sealed surface.

Surfaces shall be prepared as described in Section 631 before the installation of thermal insulation. 965

In way of bare steel at windows and mullions, spray structure with 80 mils DFT of ceramic insulation coating, Advanced Coating Solutions or equal. The Coating shall extend for 12 inches beyond the adjacent thermal insulation and shall be finished with two (2) coats of urethane washable finish (6-8 mils DFT), color to be approved by the Owner's Representative.

635.4 Acoustic Insulation 970

The Contractor shall install an acoustic insulation system in order to meet the noise requirements detailed in Section 073. Reference (6P) specifies areas of coverage for acoustic insulation,


Page: 600-31

though additional insulation may be required in order to meet the noise requirements detailed in Section 073.

Surfaces shall be prepared as described in Section 631 before the installation of acoustic 975 insulation.

Acoustic insulation shall be applied to the overhead of the Engine Room and Propulsion Rooms and around the interior of the uptakes in order to isolate the noise generating spaces of the vessel from the passenger areas. Engine Room and Propulsion Room overheads shall have a single insulation type that meets both structural fire protection and acoustic requirements. The 980 Contractor shall also pay specific attention to the insulation around the EOS, fan rooms and surrounding areas.

The Contractor shall apply a spray-type sound damping coating, Mascoat Sound Control-dB or equal, to the overhead structure and structure at Frame 48 of the Propulsion Room. The sound damping coating is to be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, including 985 any recommended topcoatings and under the supervision of an authorized vendor.

635.5 Machinery and Piping Insulation

Refer to Sections 259 and 508 for machinery and piping insulation requirements.

637 LININGS AND CEILINGS

The Contractor shall design, layout, and install linings for all interior spaces as described on 990 Reference (6Q). This includes, but is not limited to, all stair towers, passenger seating areas, restrooms, food service areas, crew spaces, Pilot Houses, and toilet and shower spaces. Where possible, ducts, pipes, etc. shall be installed behind linings. Otherwise, they shall be boxed in with removable panels.

An aluminum honeycomb panel bulkhead lining joinery system, Ayers Ayrlite or equal having 995 USCG type approvals conforming to Annex 1 of IMO FTP Code shall be used by the Contractor to finish passenger and crew spaces as described in Reference (6Q). The joiner system shall utilize a non-progressive, spline and retainer panel mounting system that allows easy removal of individual panels.

The Contractor shall completely finish the interior of the vessel, with each compartment 1000 trimmed, finished and furnished as necessary to suit its function. Any approved equal bulkhead and lining system shall have the same or lower total installed weight per square foot, and shall meet all other requirements for the complete joinery system, both regulatory and otherwise.

Lining panel mounting details shall at a minimum be in accordance with manufacturer requirements. However, the areas identified below require additional isolation between the 1005 manufacturer's mounting system and ship structure to further decouple the panel from the underlying structure to minimize the re-radiation of noise. Special attention shall be paid to the bulkhead and lining mounting and isolation details in the following areas to maintain the noise levels within the limits specified in Section 073:

Main Deck stair towers (noise from Propulsion Rooms) 1010


Page: 600-32

Main Deck passenger area ends (noise from Propulsion Rooms) All bulkheads between passenger areas and the machinery casing (noise from Engine

Room) All bulkhead liner panels within the EOS (noise from Engine Room)

Linings in way of stiffeners and ceilings shall be supported by a system of metal furring with 1015 elastomer vibration isolation. Fastenings shall be stainless steel, bronze, or galvanized.

Fixed lights and windows in way of insulation and linings shall be integrated with stainless steel boxes. The edges of the boxes shall lap behind the adjoining lining and shall be carried under the airport, fixed light, or window frames to make a watertight connection.

The finished interior shall not have openings in the linings, partitions, or ceilings, nor shall the 1020 linings, partitions, or ceilings create small inconspicuous or hidden voids that could be used to hide foreign objects.

In no case shall equipment such as lighting, outlets, door hardware, or other outfit be supported by joiner panels, joiner bulkhead, or ceilings unless specifically approved by the Owner's Representative. The items shall instead be fastened to rigid backing structure welded to the 1025 vessel.

The Contractor shall select final surface finishes as shown in Reference (6Q) from manufacturer's standard offerings and as approved by the Owner's Representative. Ceilings shall be arranged generally as shown in Reference (6Q). Ceilings shall allow full access to the spaces above using aluminum panels up to 30 inches × 60 inches nominal in a gauge and thickness that 1030 will not show "oil canning" or deflection. Panels shall be fastened to the suspension members with concealed torsion springs. Suspension system to be fabricated to accept torsion springs. Panels shall require tools to remove.

Ceilings shall be hung using a resilient element, either a soft spring or elastomer, between the structure and the ceiling panel in order to isolate the panel from structural vibration and creating 1035 noise in excess of the limits in Section 073. Ceiling panels shall be supported at the edges by joiner facings or panels, and include an elastomer trim piece that limits the transmission of vibration from the bulkhead to the ceiling.

The passenger area ceiling system shall include perimeter trims and pocket as shown in Reference (6Q). Ceilings and support structure shall be non-combustible, in accordance with 1040 USCG requirements.

Ceiling panels in passenger areas shall be acoustical, made up of a perforated metal panel with an acoustical backing material. Acoustical ceiling shall meet a minimum NRC value of 0.70. Ceiling panels, Gordon Incorporated R116-532DG12, or equal, have an open perforation area of 12% with a 1/2 inch non-perforated border on the panel face and a 1-inch thick x 1.5 pcf density, 1045 black PVC encapsulated acoustic backing media and meet or exceed these criteria.


Page: 600-33

Ceiling panels in EOS shall be acoustical with similar construction. Acoustical ceiling shall meet a minimum NRC value of 0.90, and shall be Rockfon Planostile perforated ceiling panels combined with 1-inch thick x 1.5 pcf density acoustical pad, or equal.

Ceilings in all areas shall integrate the lighting fixtures, HVAC terminals, signage, ceiling 1050 speakers, etc. for a pleasing aesthetic effect. The Contractor shall select final surface finishes as shown in Reference (6Q) from manufacturer's standard offerings and as approved by the Owner's Representative.

Install draft stops as required by USCG NVIC 9-97, Reference (6S).

The Contractor shall present a trim and finish schedule, including material samples, with color 1055 and pattern selection for approval by the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative must approve substitution of any component or feature.

640 OUTFITTING

640.1 General

Outfitting shall be in accordance with Reference (6Q). 1060

Outfitting of all spaces shall be in accordance with the fire load restrictions applicable to their space designations in Reference (6E) and as defined in Reference (6S). Fire load in all passenger and accommodation spaces shall be calculated and documented to be less than 3 pounds per square foot. Note that this weight includes all combustible portions of furniture, furnishings, fixtures, deck coverings, insulation, cables, life jackets, etc. PFDs in enclosed metal lockers may 1065 be excluded from the fire load calculation.

The Contractor shall provide and install Owner's Representative approved built-in and loose furniture and outfit items per these Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish the accommodation generally as illustrated in the References (6A) through (6Q). Each space shown in the References shall be equipped and outfitted completely by the Contractor. 1070

Built-in furniture shall meet the rat-proofing requirements of the CDC. The Contractor shall accurately measure the space available so that furniture and furnishings fit smartly with efficient use of space.

The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner's Representative and its consultants to select accommodation furniture and outfit. 1075

The Contractor shall design and install suitable stainless steel lockers for life jackets storage throughout the passenger spaces. The design of the lockers shall be presented to the Owner's Representative for approval before construction. Refer to Group 500 for further information regarding life jacket storage.

Furniture and fabric colors, themes, and patterns will be selected by the Owner's Representative. 1080


Page: 600-34

640.2 Lighting

Install lighting throughout accommodations in accordance with References (6H), (6Q) and Sections 330 and 332.

640.3 Furnishings

Furnishings shall be generally in accordance with References (6A), (6C), (6D) and (6Q). The 1085 Contractor shall accurately measure the space available so that furniture and furnishings fit smartly with efficient use of space. All furniture shall be of commercial grade with non-combustible frames with finishes.

The Contractor shall submit vendor documentation for all furniture and furnishings, including construction drawings, upholstery samples, plastic laminate samples, and colors to Owner's 1090 Representative for approval prior to purchase.

Provide furniture and furnishings without sharp edges, sharp corners, or burrs. Built-in furniture, seating, and shelves shall be secured to the deck or other substantial structure per the manufacturer's installation drawings. Install 5/16 inch or thicker doubler plates under table support stanchions. Securing devices shall be of rugged design capable of developing full 1095 strength in all possible directions of pull without bending fittings or creating failures.

Drawers shall be drop-track suspended on steel tracks with nylon slides. Provide drawers with positive stops to prevent them from falling out when open. Drawers shall have positive means to prevent opening in a seaway.

Fit legs of all portable furniture with non-marking, non-skid glides retained in stainless steel 1100 caps.

Pilot Houses

As shown on Reference (6C), each Pilot House shall be furnished with at least the following items:

Aluminum Consoles (refer to Section 640.5) 1105 Sliding Pilot's Chair Chart Table Raised Settee Painted Steel Storage Cabinet Coffee Counter 1110

Passenger Seating Areas

Passenger seating areas shall be outfitted with built-in, bench-type seating. Seating shall be completely open from seat to floor for ease of cleaning underneath and for security and screening considerations. Seating quantities and arrangements shall be as generally shown in References (6A) and (6Q). Potential sources include Anova, Turnbull Enterprises, and UES Seating. 1115 Seating shall be robustly constructed, with an aluminum frame, and be delivered with a 30-year structural warranty. The use of fasteners shall be minimized with welded or interlocking joints.


Page: 600-35

Where fasteners are used they shall be 316L stainless steel. All hardware and fittings shall be suitably resistant to corrosion and vandalism.

Seats shall be constructed with a slot or other means to prevent liquids from collecting in the 1120 bottom of each seat. Construction shall not allow spaces for catching clothing, straps on baggage, etc., and all edges shall be smooth with no sharp corners or protrusions.

Seats shall have pedestal style or other approved non-continuous deck mounting system to maintain open bases for ease of cleaning and security. Seats shall be fastened to the deck using welding studs, weld nuts, or approved mechanical fasteners such as Click-Bond adhesive studs. 1125 Mounting details shall meet seat manufacturer recommendations and be approved by the Owner's Representative.

The seats shall be finished with a graffiti and scratch resistant nonflammable finish that is durable and that can be easily maintained or repaired. Interior seats shall have a textured, simulated woodgrain color or finish. Exterior seats shall have a similar textured surface finished 1130 matching the finish exterior color of the vessel. Final colors and coatings shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

As shown in References (6A) and (6Q), seating shall be arranged in rows, either in single rows or configured back-to-back. The number of seats in each row will range from two (2) to thirteen (13). Each row of seats may consist of multiple shorter sections of seats, provided that that the 1135 complete row is uniform in appearance.

Nominal seat width shall be 20 inches. Benches may be continuous or have individual seats. Continuous benches may have indentations nominally 20 inches apart to imply individual seats. Where individual seats are provided the seats shall be a minimum of 19.5 inches wide with a center-to-center distance of 20 inches between seats. The average seat weight (total weight of 1140 seating and deck connections divided by the total number of installed seats) shall not be more than 30 pounds per seat.

The seats shall have a smooth, curved profile with ergonomic and comfortable back support and a seat bottom with a radiused seat nose. The transition between the seat base and back shall be blended with a radius of approximately 3 to 4 inches. 1145

The seat bottoms shall have a horizontal length of at least 17 inches measured from the nose of the seat to the seat back, and shall have an approximate angle of 5 degrees with the lower end at the seat back. The recline angle of the seat back shall be approximately 12 to 15 degrees, and the top of the seat back shall be 34 to 36 inches above the deck.

Where seating is installed in a back-to-back arrangement the maximum horizontal dimension of 1150 the seat bases (from nose to nose) shall not exceed 46 inches. The distance between facing seats shall not be less than 34 inches. The combined overall seat pitch (center-to-center distance) shall be 80 inches unless otherwise indicated on References (6A) and (6Q).

A mock-up of seating is required from the vendor for review by the Owner's Representative prior to acceptance to establish compliance with seat geometry requirements. In addition to the mock-1155 up, the vendor shall submit a structural evaluation of seating components and assemblies,


Page: 600-36

material specifications, detailed drawings, and performance test data for review by the Owner's Representative. Test reports by the vendor shall include test diagrams, photos, and results on representative seats completely assembled and fastened to a simulated deck in the manner they will be installed aboard the vessel. Seating must meet all applicable USCG, ABS, and BIFMA 1160 requirements. Performance tests shall include:

1. Demonstration of sufficient strength for the service intended, including deck attachments, by withstanding loads of 300 lbs per seat dropped from 6 inches above the center of the seat bottom without change in structural integrity.

2. Demonstration of sufficient durability of the seating by dropping a 125 lb weight from a 1165 height of 2 inches above the center of the seat bottom 100,000 cycles without structural breakage or loss of serviceability.

3. Demonstration of sufficient strength for the service intended, including deck attachments, by withstanding static loads of 250 lbs of force applied to the chair back without change in structural integrity. 1170

Crew Spaces

Crew spaces listed below in this Section shall be outfitted with the equipment listed herein and as shown in Reference (6Q). Final selection of furnishings is to be approved by the Owner's Representative. Officer's Day Room and Crew Training Room 1175

Table with twelve (12) Chairs Bulletin Board White Board Counter and Cupboards Sink 1180 Coffee Maker Microwave Refrigerator

Crew Pantry

Pantry storage shelving 1185

Licensed Female Locker Room

Stackable, half-height lockers for 18 people Aluminum benches with powder-coat finish Bulletin Board

1190 Licensed Male Locker Room


1195


Page: 600-37

Unlicensed Female Locker Room Stackable, half-height lockers for 24 people Aluminum benches with powder-coat finish Bulletin Board

1200 Unlicensed Male Locker Room


Engineer's Operating Station and Office 1205

Aluminum Console (Refer to Section 640.6) Two (2) painted steel desks with chairs Painted steel bookcase Painted steel file cabinet Counter and Cupboard 1210 Sink Coffee Maker Microwave Refrigerator

1215 Licensed Crew Locker Room (Hold Level)

Full-height lockers for eight (8) people Aluminum bench with powder-coat finish Bulletin Board 1220

Unlicensed Crew Locker Room (Hold Level) Full-height lockers for six (6) people Stackable, half-height lockers for four (4) people Aluminum bench with powder-coat finish Bulletin Board 1225

640.4 Utility and Storage Spaces

Spaces and lockers not specifically mentioned herein, but which normally require shelving, etc. shall be suitably equipped in keeping with the requirements for similar spaces. Provide stainless steel racks, rods, hooks, etc., as necessary for proper stowage of gear and supplies in accordance with the requirements of vessel operation in normal service. All shelving shall be adequately 1230 braced and supported and shall be fitted with removable sea rails. Final outfit items selected for the spaces below shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Cleaning Supply Closets

Cleaning supply closets shall be suitably equipped in keeping with the requirements for use of the space. Provide and install service sinks and faucets as shown in Reference (6Q). Provide 1235 and install stainless steel shelves, racks, hooks, etc. as necessary for proper stowage of gear and


Page: 600-38

supplies in accordance with the requirements of the vessel operation in normal service. All shelving shall be adequately braced and supported and shall be fitted with removable sea rails. Standard layout for all cleaning supply closets shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

Emergency Gear Lockers 1240

Fit the emergency gear lockers with stainless steel shelving, hooks, and racks appropriate for the gear. The lockers shall be equipped for hanging of the required gear with one (1) bulkhead fitted with four (4) shelves. The configuration of the lockers is subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative.

Parts Storage 1245

All additional operationally required parts shall be boxed for long-term stowage, marked, and stowed in secure areas (unless otherwise directed). They shall then be delivered directly to the Owner's facility as directed by the Owner's Representative.

640.5 Pilot House Consoles

Provide and install consoles in each Pilot House, EMS Marcon or equal. The Pilot House 1250 Console arrangement and outfitting shall be in accordance with Reference (6C). Final arrangement details are subject to the approval of Owner's Representative.

Develop the console configuration in compliance with the recommendations of ABS Guidance Notes on Ergonomic Design of Navigation Bridges. Mount controls and instruments indicated on the Drawings and as described elsewhere in these Technical Specifications on the consoles. 1255

Submit the finish and color of the consoles to Owner's Representative for approval. Protect corners and edges against damage with finished hardwood or polished metal trim pieces. Fit the front and sides of each console with hinged doors fitted with ventilation louvers to permit convenient access to all internal components. Provide sufficient fixed LED lighting and electrical outlets under console for maintenance and electrical equipment. Lights shall be 1260 switched inside and the switches shall be convenient to access doors.

The Contractor shall build a full-scale mock-up of the entire Pilot House including consoles for Owner's Representative approval before construction of the consoles. The mock-up shall be fabricated plywood and foam core cutouts and shall have dimensionally accurate representations of controls and instrumentation, furniture, and major Pilot House features such as windows. An 1265 Owner's Representative and Contractor's Representative shall attend the console mock-up review at the Contractor's venue for approval prior to finalizing and constructing the consoles.

To the maximum practical extent, the Contractor shall also utilize the Pilot House mockup to support the simulator described in Section 857.

Install a minimum of four (4) multi-cable transits (MCTs) in the Pilot House deck, two (2) under 1270 each Pilot House console. One (1) MCT shall be for power cables and one (1) for control and signal cables, at least 50% of the available capacity shall remain unused. Install one (1) unused 120 VAC duplex receptacle on each side of the console, and two (2) unused 120 VAC duplex receptacles inside the console.


Page: 600-39

640.6 EOS Console 1275

Provide and install an aluminum control console, EMS Marcon or equal, within the Engineer's Operating Station (EOS), generally as shown on Reference (6D). Develop the console configuration in accordance with the recommendations of ABS Guidance Notes for the Application of Ergonomics to Marine Systems and ASTM F1166 Standard Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities as applicable. Final 1280 arrangements are subject to approval by the Owner's Representative.

The console shall have a durable finish epoxy or powder coat finish. Submit finish sample and color to the Owner's Representative for approval. Protect corners and edges against damage with polished metal trim pieces. Fit the front and one side with hinged doors to permit convenient access to all internal components. Provide ventilation louvers in console doors and elsewhere as 1285 needed to minimize heat buildup. Provide sufficient lighting and electrical outlets under the console for maintenance and electrical equipment. Lights shall be LED, switched inside, and convenient to access doors.

Run control and instrument leads from the console underside through the EOS platform deck. Install a minimum of two (2) multi-cable transits (MCTs), in the EOS platform deck under the 1290 console. One (1) MCT shall be for power cables and one (1) for control and signal cables, at least 50% of the available capacity shall remain unused. Install an unused 120 VAC duplex receptacle on the side of the console and an unused 120 VAC duplex receptacle inside the console. Refer to Group 300 for required separation of power and control cables.

Prior to construction of the EOS console and switchboard, the Contractor shall submit layout 1295 drawings of the EOS, EOS console and switchboard for Owner's Representative approval. The Contractor shall build a full scale mock-up of the EOS, console and switchboards, based on the approved layout drawings, and conduct a review of the mockup for approval. An Owner's Representative and Contractor's Representative shall attend the mock-up review at the Contractor's venue. 1300

The mock-up shall be fabricated plywood cutouts or foam core with geometry matching the EOS, consoles, and switchboard. Dimensionally accurate representations of all controls, displays, and instrumentation, with labels, shall be arranged on the console and switchboard mockups. These representations may be fabricated using design drawings, printed at full scale and affixed to foam core then trimmed to size. The EOS mockup shall include simplified 1305 representations of major features, such as windows and furniture.

640.7 Engine Room Outfit

As shown on Reference (6G), the Engine Room shall be furnished with the following outfit items:

Workbench 1310 Storage Locker Clean Rag Locker Oily Waste Rag Storage


Page: 600-40

644 SANITARY FIXTURES

644.1 General 1315

The Contractor shall select, provide, and install sanitary fixtures and equipment as shown in Reference (6Q). All fixtures shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. Trim and exposed metal fixtures and accessories shall be satin finished stainless steel.

Plumbing fixtures, fittings, and accessories shall be suitable for marine service. Where not specified in Reference (6Q), they shall be finished with stainless steel or chrome plated cast brass 1320 trim and accessories.

Furnish lavatory fixtures complete with valves, faucets, stops, drain fittings, vents, and hangers. Traps shall be adjustable, chrome plated cast brass, with cleanout plugs. Lavatories shall be surface mounted.

Install toilets over finish deck coverings for removal ease and maintenance. Provide and install 1325 manufacturer recommended closet flanges for steel deck applications.

Provide and install completely enclosed shower stalls. Furnish each shower with a soap dish, grab rod, and curtain rod. Shower fixtures shall incorporate an anti-scald safety feature.

The Contractor shall provide and install toilet stall partitions and urinal privacy screens, AJW Architectural Products, Royal Blue, or equal. Fabricate partitions and screens from Class-B fire-1330 rated HDPE solid plastic panels, with 1-inch thick pilasters, doors and panels. Pilasters to be floor mounted and overhead braced. Fit doors with continuous stainless steel helix and 54 inch continuous aluminum hinges and brackets. Provide barrier-free partition installations for accessibility designated stalls and aluminum emergency egress.

All partitions shall be fastened to the ship's structure with supplied anchors. Lavatories in 1335 passenger restrooms shall be installed with proper clearance below for mobility-impaired passengers, in accordance with current Access Board guidelines (6T).

The maximum unsupported distance between countertop supports shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended span. Use manufacturer's recommended adhesives for countertop joints. Use manufacturer's recommended mounting hardware for lavatories and faucets; seal all 1340 lavatory and countertop seams and faying surfaces and faucet mounts with a manufacturer recommended silicone sealant.

Provide finished sample blocks for color and pattern selection to the Owner's Representative for approval. The selected sample block will also be used as the finish comparator, for final acceptance. Cover and protect to prevent impact damage and staining for the duration of the 1345 vessel construction project.

Install fixtures and accessories to the vessel's structure in a manner that does not impair the integrity nor damage decorative linings.


Page: 600-41

644.2 Appliances

The Contractor shall provide the following fixtures and accessories, or approved equals: 1350

Fixture Model

Public Toilet Acorn Engineering Penal-Ware® 1684 Series - Siphon Jet toilet on Floor, 1684-W-2-HET1.28GPF-FVH-ADA-FVT-HET-SWTBD

Public Urinal Acorn Engineering Penal-Ware® 1709HEU Series - ADA Compliant High Efficiency Urinal, 1709HEU-W-1-0.5GPF-FVH

Public Lavatory Acorn Engineering Meridian 3711 Series - Meridian Stainless Steel Straight Front Uni-Basin - ADA Compliant, 3711-1-H-DML-DMP-ME-SSN

Crew Lavatory Acorn Engineering Meridian 3711 Series - Meridian Stainless Steel Straight Front Uni-Basin - ADA Compliant, 3711-1-H-DML-DMP-ME-SSN

Crew Toilet Acorn Engineering Dura-Ware® 2120 Series Siphon Jet Toilet - On Floor - Floor Outlet, 2120-T-3-HET1.28GPF-FV- ADA-HET-HS

Crew Shower Acorn Engineering Penal-Ware® 1730FA Series Cabinet Shower - Front Access, 1736FA-8

Each lavatory shall be provided with an 18-inch 24-inch shatterproof mirror with stainless steel trim and a wall mounted soap dispenser, or as approved by the Owner's Representative. All restrooms shall be generally outfitted with hand dryers, paper towel / waste receptacles and soap dispensers in accordance with Reference (6Q).

Shower stalls shall be modular construction. Showers shall each be furnished with a soap dish, 1355 grab rod, curtain rod and towel bar.

651 FOOD SERVICE FACILITY

The Contractor shall build a fully furnished food service area generally as shown on Reference (6Q). Food service equipment labeled "Supplied by Concessionaire" in Reference (6Q) are not in the Contractor's scope of supply. Counters, backsplashes, and drain boards shall be 1360 constructed of 14 gage stainless steel, ANSI 304 finish No. 4, continuously butt-welded, ground flush and polished at joints, with marine detailing.

Frames and foundations for the installation of equipment shall be standard marine construction, all type 304 SS, angle bar boxes, welded and finished approximately 4 inches above the finished deck with 4 1/2 inches toe space along the front. Angle bar along bulkheads and unexposed 1365 sides shall be flanged toward the center of the unit.

The Contractor shall select and install cupboards and cabinets in the food service area as shown on Reference (6Q) and as approved by the Owner's Representative. Cabinets and counters shall be all stainless steel construction. Cabinet drawers and doors shall include "slam" latches, marine detailing, and sea rails where appropriate. Hinges and all other fittings shall be stainless 1370 steel.


Page: 600-42

Grills or access openings shall be rat-proofed by limiting the areas to 1/2 inch clear openings.

The Owner's Representative shall approve colors and trim style prior to ordering and construction.

670 UTILITY AND STORAGE SPACES 1375

Spaces and lockers not specifically mentioned herein, but which normally require shelving, etc. shall be suitably equipped in keeping with the requirements for similar spaces. Provide racks, rods, hooks, etc., as necessary for proper stowage of gear and supplies in accordance with the requirements of vessel operation in normal service. All shelving shall be adequately braced and supported and shall be fitted with removable sea rails. 1380

671 EMERGENCY AND FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT OUTFIT

671.1 General

All emergency and firefighting equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of 46 CFR Subchapter H.

The Contractor shall provide and install emergency equipment in the emergency gear lockers on 1385 the Main Deck and Saloon Deck. Gear lockers shall be provided with shelving, hooks, and racks as necessary to securely stow the gear, constructed of stainless steel.

Additionally, the Contractor shall provide and install four (4) emergency escape breathing devices, Scott ELSA 10-minute or approved equal; two (2) shall be mounted in the Engine Room and two (2) shall be mounted in the EOS. The locations shall be in accordance with USCG 1390 requirements and approved by the Owner's Representative.

671.2 Portable and Semi-Portable Fire Extinguishers

Provide and install portable and semi-portable fire extinguishers as indicated in Table 600 - 1 and as required by 46 CFR Part 76. Install extinguishers on manufacturer-matched and recommended brackets for stored pressure and cartridge activated extinguishers. Extinguisher 1395 brackets shall be USCG-approved. Extinguishers shall be Ansul or equal. The following list provides the minimum acceptable quantity, type and location for fire extinguishers to be installed. The final quantity, location and size shall be provided as determined by USCG inspection and approval but not less than shown in this list.

Table 600 - 1: Portable Fire Extinguishers 1400 Location Quantity and Type

Pilot Houses 1 each of: 2.5 gal Foam, 15# CO2, and 10# Dry Chemical

Main Deck Passenger Spaces, Each End 3 each of: 2.5 gal Foam

Saloon Deck Passenger Spaces, Each End 2 each of: 2.5 gal Foam

Snack Bar 1 each of: 15# CO2


Page: 600-43

Location Quantity and Type

Bridge Deck Passenger Spaces, Each End 2 each of: 2.5 gal Foam

Engine Room 6 each of: 15# CO2 3 each of: 10# Dry Chemical 1 each of: 50# Dry Chemical

Auxiliary Machinery Rooms Served by Engine Room CO2 Extinguishers. Locate 1 near each entry

Propulsion Rooms 1 each of: 10# Dry Chemical

Emergency Generator Room 1 each of: 10# Dry Chemical

One (1) complete additional set of fire extinguishers shall be provided to meet operational requirements and shall be provided with manufacturer matched and recommended brackets for stored pressure and cartridge activated extinguishers. Extinguisher brackets shall be USCG-approved.

The number and location of fire extinguishers shall meet or exceed USCG requirements. Each 1405 extinguisher shall be labeled with a number corresponding to a number on or adjacent to its bracket. Provide additional extinguisher charges in accordance with 46 CFR Subpart §76.50-15, including sufficient charges for each size and variety of hand portable fire extinguisher onboard.

Provide semi-recessed or fully recessed cabinets for portable extinguishers in interior passenger spaces. 1410

671.3 Fire Axes

The Contractor shall provide at a minimum eight (8) fire axes as required by the 46 CFR Subchapter H Subpart §76.60. Locate where noted in Table 600 - 2 unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative or USCG.

With exception to the Emergency Gear Lockers, fire axes shall be bulkhead mounted at an 1415 appropriate height above the deck in USCG-approved mounts in crew spaces and cabinets in passenger spaces.

Table 600 - 2: Fire Axes

Quantity Location

2 Pilot Houses 2 Main Deck 2 Saloon Deck 2 Bridge Deck


Page: 600-44

671.4 Emergency Gear Lockers

Provide and install the following equipment, or equal, in each emergency gear locker. Final 1420 outfit of the Emergency Gear Lockers shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. Stencil each item with the vessel name.

1. Two (2) Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), Scott Air-Pak 75 2.2. SCBA's shall be provided with carbon-fiber cylinders. Stow SCBAs in wall mounted walk-off brackets. 1425

2. Two (2) SCBA Cylinders, Scott 2.2, aluminum. 3. Two (2) sets Fire coat and pants, Fire-Dex Deluxe Opportunity Gear, (size L and XL) 4. Two (2) pairs Fire gloves, Shelby style no. 5280G (size L and XL) 5. Two (2) Helmet, Cairns Metro 660 6. Two (2) Fire Fighter hoods, Fire-Dex H81(NE) 1430 7. Two (2) pairs Bunker boots, rubber, Black Diamond Rubber Fire Boot (size 12) 8. Two (2) Hose, fire 1 1/2 inch NH thread × 50 feet 9. Two (2) Nozzle, fire 1 1/2 inch NH thread, Akron Brass CG-15 #2032, includes 2033

fog tip with chain (or equal) 10. One (1) Applicator, fog, 1 1/2 inch × 4 feet, Akron Brass #2415 (or equal) 1435 11. One (1) Applicator, fog, 1 1/2 inch × 10 feet, Akron Brass #2015 (or equal) 12. Two (2) Spanner wrench, universal 13. One (1) Nozzle, piercing, Flamefighter 902 (or equal) 14. Two (2) Flashlight, Streamlight 3C, LED propolymer (or equal) 15. One (1) Safety Line 3/16 inch stainless steel wire, 50 feet long with snap hooks at 1440

both ends 16. Additional fire extinguishers and charges as required by USCG 17. One (1) Halligan tool and stow in the Main Deck Emergency Gear Locker


Page: 800-1

GROUP 800 - INTEGRATION AND ENGINEERING

810 DRAWINGS, CALCULATIONS, AND REVIEW 1 810.1 As-Built Drawings 3 810.2 Maintenance Schedule and Asset Hierarchy 3 810.3 Vendor System Diagrams 4 5 810.4 Display Drawings for Mounting On Board 5 810.5 Docking and Hull Markings Plan 5 810.6 Tank Sounding Tables 6 810.7 3D Vessel Scan 6 810.8 Builder's Scale Models 6 10

833 WEIGHT ESTIMATE 6 835 TONNAGE ADMEASUREMENT 7 838 FIELD OFFICE FOR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 7 843 TRIM AND STABILITY BOOKLET 8 851 DELIVERY ORIENTATION 9 15

856 TECHNICAL MANUALS AND OTHER DATA 10 856.1 General 10 856.2 Software Programs 11

857 VESSEL SIMULATION 11

20 810 DRAWINGS, CALCULATIONS, AND REVIEW

The Contractor shall provide all engineering services necessary for the work in accordance with these Technical Specifications. Services shall include technical calculations, surveys, material selection, preparation of diagrams, sketches, schedules, data, and preparation of all working drawings and as-built drawings. 25

Drawings shall be complete in all detail, serve to gain regulatory approval, and facilitate future use by the NYCDOT for maintenance and repair activity.

All drawings shall be produced using Computer Aided Design (CAD) in AutoCAD 2015 or most current format. Provide the data files electronically in AutoCAD and PDF as applicable and as 11 inch × 17 inch paper format. The Contractor shall provide full scale printed drawings larger 30 than 11 inch ×17 inch upon request of the Owner's Representative. All delivered PDF files shall be searchable.

The Contractor shall submit a full sample-drawing format showing a typical sheet one and sheet two, including title block, reference, general notes, and revision table format to the Owner's Representative for approval. 35

The Owner's Representative will review the Contractor's detailed design to determine compliance with the Drawings, Technical Specifications, and Contract. The Owner Representative's review will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from these Technical Specifications unless the Contractor has provided written notification of any deviation at the time of drawing submittal. Approval of a drawing does not constitute approval of a 40 deviation, mistake, or omission.


Page: 800-2

The Owner Representative's approval of a deviation from these Technical Specifications will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for satisfactory operation of the system or equipment. Work performed by the Contractor prior to the Owner Representative's review and approval, or any required regulatory approval, of the Contractor's drawings will be at the Contractor's own 45 risk.

Booklets of details and calculations may be on sheets 11 inch × 17 inch or 8 1/2 inch × 11 inch.

The Contractor shall provide copies of all ABS approved standard details including but not limited to structural, piping, outfit, and electrical.

Drawings shall be organized using Owner's numbering convention, which shall be provided by 50 the Owner's Representative.

Symbols on drawings shall conform to recognized marine commercial standards.

Complete bills of materials shall be shown on drawings. Materials on drawings shall have item numbers and be identified in a material list by material specifications, ASTM, ANSI, NEMA, etc., as appropriate. 55

Valves and equipment on drawings shall have an identifying number, matching the number inscribed on the label or nameplate for that item.

Each drawing shall contain a view showing the entire system covered by the drawing. All drawings shall be initialed in the title block by the drafter and the engineer responsible for the design prior to submittal to the Owner's Representative. 60

Each drawing shall be checked and finished before submitting. Drawings without appropriate signatures and drawings that are not complete or contain excessive errors will not be reviewed by the Owner's Representative and will be returned to the Contractor for completion. Returned drawing submittals do not count towards fulfilling the Contractor's obligations with regard for scheduling, i.e., all returned drawings must be resubmitted complete within the scheduled time. 65

Furnish a copy of all written or email correspondence sent to and from regulatory agencies, including vendor submissions, to the Owner's Representative at the time they are sent. A consolidated list of comments shall be maintained by the Contractor and provided to the Owner's Representative.

The Contractor shall submit drawings and engineering calculations, including vendor system 70 drawings and calculations, to the Owner's Representative in a timely fashion according to the approved Master Construction Schedule and the Plan Schedule. Drawing submittals shall generally be scheduled such that no more than 120 sheets or pages are submitted for review in a given two-week period. The Owner's Representative will respond to submittals normally not later than fourteen (14) days after receipt with "reviewed", "approved," "conditionally approved 75 subject to comments," or "returned for revision and resubmittal" action. Review responses shall be via mail or email.


Page: 800-3

Repeated submittal of quality deficient drawings without addressing/correction of comments may result in reduction of the delivery grace period.

When submitting system design drawings, such as piping diagrams and wiring diagrams, include 80 the calculations by which the system components were sized. The Owner's Representative will not review these drawings without supporting calculations, equipment drawings and cut sheets.

The Contractor shall furnish two (2) paper copies and one (1) electronic file copy of each drawing, document, or calculation when submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. The Contractor shall use a transmittal form for each submittal giving the drawing number, 85 revision letter, title, date submitted, and spaces for the Owner's Representative to enter the return date, approval action, comments, reviewer's name, and the signature of the Owner's Representative. Drawings for submittal shall be complete in all respects with all material and equipment shown and shall be accompanied by supporting calculations.

810.1 As-Built Drawings 90

Update all Working Drawings to conform to an as-built condition and stamp AS-BUILT FINAL in the title block and collate into an AS-BUILT FINAL plan set. The final drawing set shall be complete and reflect a fully developed and reconciled set of plans representing all systems, arrangement, and structure for each vessel as completed and approved.

As-built drawings shall be organized using Owner's numbering convention, which shall be 95 provided by Owner.

Within forty-five (45) days of the delivery of the vessel to the Owner, the Contractor shall deliver: three (3) D-size folded; three (3) bound 11 inch × 17 inch drawing sets; and three (3) electronic copies of the AS-BUILT FINAL drawing set. The electronic files shall be in AutoCAD 2015 (or current version) .dwg format and in PDF format. All PDF files shall be 100 searchable.

810.2 Maintenance Schedule and Asset Hierarchy

The Contractor shall develop and provide a consolidated maintenance schedule for all machinery and systems on board the vessel. The maintenance schedule shall be provided as either an Excel spreadsheet or an Access database file. The file shall include all equipment data and attributes 105 required for import into the Owner's asset management system, IBM Maximo, in a compatible format. The Owner's Representative shall provide an electronic file template for the Contractor's use in developing the maintenance schedule. The completed schedule shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner's Representative.

The maintenance schedule shall include all maintenance requirements for systems and machinery 110 for daily maintenance to five (5) year maintenance intervals or first major maintenance interval. Each individual maintenance task shall be entered as a separate record (or row if in Excel format). Where possible, the maintenance task will reference the location of the manufacturer's manual where the instructions for completion of the maintenance task are described (see Instruction Books described elsewhere in this section of the Technical Specifications), a list of 115 required parts and consumables, and estimated time and resources to complete the task. The maintenance schedules shall include comprehensive nameplate data for all installed machinery.


Page: 800-4

The consolidated maintenance schedule shall be provided to the Owner's Representative as a printed book and in electronic file format.

The Contractor shall provide an asset hierarchy for all valves and equipment with installed 120 locations. Items listed in the equipment hierarchy shall be labeled with a barcode asset tag. (Refer to Sections 302.2 and 500.4). The Owner's Representative shall provide a file template for the Contractor's use in developing the asset hierarchy and a specification for the barcode asset tags. The completed asset hierarchy shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner's Representative. 125

810.3 Vendor System Diagrams

All vendor-supplied systems are to include piping and electrical system diagrams detailing the ship specific system configurations. The Contractor shall develop or procure electrical wiring and piping diagrams for all vendor provided machinery systems, including, but not limited to:

1. Main Engines 130 2. Reduction Gears 3. Voith Schneider Propellers (VSP) 4. Propulsion Control 5. Generator Sets, (ship service and emergency) 6. Switchboards 135 7. Boilers 8. Machinery Alarm and Monitoring System 9. All Ventilation Systems, Power, Control, and Sensing 10. HVAC System, including Control 11. Rescue Boat Davits 140 12. Anchor Winch 13. Tank Level Indication 14. Elevators 15. Air Compressors 16. Fire Detection 145 17. Fire Door Magnetic Hold Back 18. Public Address/General Alarm 19. IP Phone System 20. Sound Powered Phone System 21. Internal Communication Systems 150 22. Radar / ECDIS 23. Gyrocompass 24. Navigation Lights Control Panel

Wiring and cabling diagrams shall include the cable type and unique designations for each cable. 155 As-built versions of these vendor diagrams shall be provided by the Contractor prior to sea-trials for review by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall collate all vendor diagrams and deliver to the Owner's Representative three (3) paper sets and one (1) electronic set on a USB drive.


Page: 800-5

810.4 Display Drawings for Mounting On Board 160

The Contractor shall provide the following reduced size, nonfading positive prints of drawings to be mounted in the locations noted on board the vessel. These drawings shall be mounted prior to delivery of the vessel to the NYCDOT FMF. Unless otherwise indicated, mount all drawings in anodized aluminum or stainless steel frames with glass covers or in tubes as listed below. Tube-mounted drawings shall be completely enclosed in clear plastic. 165

The set of prints shall include:

Qty. Description

3 Fire and Safety Plan. The plan shall indicate the locations of all fire, safety and lifesaving equipment. SOLAS symbols shall be used. Laminated copies of each of the vessel Safety Plan shall be mounted in each Pilot House and the Engineer's Operating Station (EOS). Provide tube mounted Fire and Safety Plan drawings where required by USCG.

3 Fuel System Diagram. The plan shall indicate the fuel filling and transfer system in diagrammatic format. Three (3) laminated copies shall be located at the fuel filling station, at the fuel pump, and manifold and in the EOS.

2 Electric power distribution system. One-line wiring diagram, laminated, single sided, 11 inches × 17 inches mounted in the EOS. Frame one (1) in the EOS near the ship service switchboard and the other in the Emergency Generator Room.

2 VSP piping diagram, wiring diagram, operating and lubrication instructions, one (1) mounted in each Propulsion Room.

Additionally, the Contractor shall provide and place on board all plans and documents required by Regulatory Agencies. Prior to delivery, obtain a Stability Letter. Mount a copy of the letter under glass in anodized aluminum frames in each Pilot House. The final location shall be 170 approved by the Owner's Representative.

810.5 Docking and Hull Markings Plan

The Contractor shall update the Vessel Dry Docking and Hull Markings Plan to reflect as-built conditions. This plan shall show the required keel block heights and minimum contact areas, cross-sections of the hull for building bilge blocks, keel block loads at full fuel load 175 displacement, locations of all propellers, drain plugs, sea chests, grid coolers, anodes, over boards and through-hull appurtenances as the speed log and the depth transducer.

The Docking Plan shall show keel and bilge block locations in two (2) configurations for use in alternate dry-dockings. The block configurations shall be such that the same hull surfaces are not under blocks in both configurations. Locations of all items shall be with dimensions to 180 physical common reference points.

Show the following on the Docking Plan:

All overboard and hull projections


Page: 800-6

Vessel particulars including major dimensions, tank capacities, draft and light ship weight 185

Locational references that correspond to the underwater hull markings for UWILD survey program

The Contractor shall provide notification to the USCG and allow for their inspection of the vessel hull markings and sea chests prior to launching the vessel for compliance with UWILD requirements. 190

810.6 Tank Sounding Tables

The Contractor shall prepare and furnish tank-sounding tables for all tanks in the vessel. These tanks include, but are not limited to, fuel oil storage, lube oil storage, ballast, potable water, non-potable water, and urea. Provide sounding tables for additional tanks as directed by the Owner's Representative. 195

The tables shall show actual gallons in each tank for each inch of depth of innage and ullage as measured in the sounding tube for that tank. The Contractor shall deliver these tables to the vessel prior to sea trials.

One (1) copy of the table for each tank shall be laminated and mounted at or near the tank sounding location. Final locations shall be approved by the Owner's Representative. 200

810.7 3D Vessel Scan

The Contractor shall provide a 3D scan of the as-built hull, the exterior of the superstructure, and the interior of the engine rooms, auxiliary machinery spaces and propulsion rooms, and provide the results as a 3D point cloud files. The scan shall be produced after construction is complete, immediately prior to final launching and delivery. The Contractor shall deliver the point cloud 205 files to the Owner's Representative in the scanner's native file format, LAS point cloud format, and as a structured ASCII text file format.

810.8 Builder's Scale Models

The Contractor shall delivery two (2) builder's scale models of the vessel prior to delivery of the first vessel in the Contract. Each model shall be of presentation quality, and built to 1:110 scale, 210 mounted on a wood base of teak or oak and fitted glass cover. Each model shall be delivered in a durable shipping crate equipped with hinges and latches suitable easy reuse for transportation of the model.

All exterior details of the vessel shall be shown with accurate colors in accordance with the Contractor’s approved design and the requirements of these Technical Specifications. Show 215 major items visible through the Pilot House windows but not passenger compartment furniture.

833 WEIGHT ESTIMATE

The Contractor shall provide an as-built weight estimate upon completion of the vessel. Refer to Section 096 for details.


Page: 800-7

835 TONNAGE ADMEASUREMENT 220

The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting a tonnage survey. Tonnage admeasurement will include calculation of ITC69 and US regulatory tonnages and issuance of a US National Tonnage Certificate.

838 FIELD OFFICE FOR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

Provide office facilities and telephone service at the Contractor's facilities for ten (10) Owner's 225 Representative staff no later than three (3) weeks after NTP until the end of the Contract Performance Period. The expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.

The field office shall be within short walking distance of the construction site and Contractor project management and engineering offices, nominally less than 200 yards. Such office may be a part of the Contractor's building, in which case it shall be completely partitioned off from the 230 balance of the structure, and shall be provided with a separate outside door equipped with a lock.

The office shall be equipped with complete sanitary facilities (such sanitary facilities shall be located within the confines of the office), including hot and cold potable water and shower. The office shall have a minimum of 1,500 square feet of floor space, excluding the sanitary facility, and a minimum of 90 square feet of window area. The office shall have 120 volt/60 hertz power, 235 adequate electrical outlets, and lighting. Office facilities shall have proper ventilation and shall be heated and air-conditioned. Weekly janitorial and daily trash pickup shall be provided.

Table 800 - 1 below lists the minimum of what the office facilities shall include.

Table 800 - 1: Office Facility Requirements

Qty Item

10 Desks with chairs

10 Side chairs

4 Legal size, 4-drawer file cabinets

3 Drawing review tables

10 Dedicated phone lines capable of long distance calls

1 High speed internet connection sufficient to support 10 users

10 Telephones, one (1) with conference calling capability

1 1.7 cubic foot (apartment size) refrigerator

10 Dedicated parking spaces


Page: 800-8

Qty Item

1 Laser printer and copier, capable of printing at least 30 pages per minute, scanning, and copying documents up to 11 × 17 format, on its own stand, with a minimum of letter and 11 × 17 size paper trays, auto feed, auto collate and required toner and service contract for the duration of the contract performance period.

- Lockable door with keys

10 Laptop computers, each with two (2) free standing monitors of 22 inches or greater, keyboard, mouse, Microsoft Office (latest version), AutoCAD viewer, and Adobe Acrobat; laptops shall have multi-core Intel Core or Xeon processors or newer, 3.0GHz or higher, 8 GB RAM minimum, and Windows 7 or newer.

1 AutoCAD 2015, or latest version, licensed and installed on one (1) of the computers above.

- Access to a conference room

- Shipping and mailing capabilities, including USPS and FedEx, or equal.

240

The Owner's Representatives shall be granted unhindered access to the Contractor's construction and shop areas. All costs associated with this section shall be included in the Contract Price.

843 TRIM AND STABILITY BOOKLET

The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting an inclining experiment in accordance with the requirements of USCG NVIC 17-91 and ASTM F1321-14, Standard Guide for Conducting a 245 Stability Test (Lightweight Survey and Inclining Experiment) to Determine the Lightweight Displacement and Centers of Gravity of a Vessel to the satisfaction of the USCG, ABS and the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment, inclining weights, measures, cranes, and services.

The Contractor shall be responsible for planning the inclining experiment and obtaining USCG 250 and ABS approval of the plan. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, of the date for the inclining experiment at least thirty (30) days in advance. The Owner's Representative and the Naval Architect's Representative shall witness the inclining experiment.

For the second and subsequent vessels, a separate incline experiment is not required provided the Contractor satisfies all USCG requirements as described in NVIC 14-81. However, the 255 Contractor shall perform a deadweight survey for the second and each subsequent vessel for use in confirming sister vessel status and to validate the light ship weight to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.


Page: 800-9

Using the results of the stability test, the Contractor shall prepare a stability test report and establish the vessel's light ship weight and center of gravity. The Contractor shall prepare a trim 260 and stability booklet and secure USCG, ABS, and Owner's Representative approval. The trim and stability booklet shall set forth the stability data necessary to permit safe and efficient handling of the vessel. The booklet shall include loading examples at least with conditions of light ship, full load operating, 10% consumables with full load of passengers, and worst case loading. Calculations shall be produced using General Hydrostatics (GHS) computer software 265 and the Contractor shall provide the data files on USB drive.

Before delivery of each vessel, the Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies of the USCG-approved trim and stability booklet for that vessel.

851 DELIVERY ORIENTATION

Onboard delivery orientation shall be provided by the Contractor after completion of the work on 270 the Engine Room systems. Such orientation shall take place aboard the vessel soon after delivery of the vessel to the Owner's facility utilizing the technical documentation listed in Section 810. The Contractor shall allow for up to ten (10) days of orientation, consisting of up to four (4) separate, possibly non-consecutive sessions. The Contractor shall assume twelve (12) Staten Island Ferry personnel will attend at each session. 275

An orientation manual shall be provided for each attendee and include an agenda for the training session and copies of all presentation slides prepared for the orientation sessions along with supporting materials and cross references to the engineering operations manual. The orientation associated with this section shall be coordinated with that required by other sections.

Contractor shall develop an engineering operations manual provided bound in loose leaf, 3-ring 280 binders appropriately marked on the front cover as to the content. The content shall include, but not be limited to the following equipment and systems:

1. Main Engines 2. VSPs and Combining Gears 3. Propulsion and Steering Controls 285

4. Machinery Alarm and Monitoring System 5. Ship Service Switchboard and Generators 6. Navigation and Communication Equipment 7. Boilers and HVAC Equipment 8. Fire Detection and Suppression Equipment 290

9. Lifesaving Equipment, including rescue boats and davits 10. Mooring Equipment including anchors and capstans

The Contractor shall ensure that equipment suppliers and technical representatives are present and conduct the orientation program to the extent required to convey a full and complete 295 understanding of the equipment they supplied, including:


Page: 800-10

1. Complete start-up and shut-down procedures 2. Operational checks while the equipment is running 3. Mode-specific operational procedures or requirements 4. Equipment specific programming and adjustments 300

5. Troubleshooting and repair/parts replacement 6. Testing including USCG recertification inspections 7. Routine maintenance procedures

856 TECHNICAL MANUALS AND OTHER DATA

856.1 General 305

The Contractor shall prepare a list of operating manuals and instruction books to be provided with the vessel. The list shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review no later than 90 days before delivery of the vessel. The Owner's Representative will review this list for omissions and corrections, and return the document to the Contractor for revision.

One (1) draft copy of each instruction book shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for 310 review and approval of format no later than 60 calendar days before the vessel is delivered to the Owner.

The Contractor shall prepare or obtain instruction books for all Contractor-furnished machinery, equipment and systems provided by the Contractor for the vessel. Instruction books shall contain complete operating, installation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair instructions 315 and parts lists in sufficient detail for the operating personnel to operate, maintain, and repair ALL equipment. Parts lists shall be complete with the parts described so that required spares may be easily identified and ordered by the operating personnel. Where ABS or other regulatory certificates are required and provided with equipment, copies of these certificates shall be provided in each manual. 320

The Contractor shall not use operating manuals intended for final delivery to the Owner as working manuals for use in installing and operating the equipment. If the Contractor requires this information, then additional operating manuals must be ordered for that use with the attendant cost borne by the Contractor. Instruction manuals and books clearly showing misuse will not be accepted. 325

Items that are merely advertisements shall not be included in the books.

Photocopies of original manufacturers' manuals will not be accepted and do not count towards fulfillment of this requirement. Each instruction book will be complete with factory or manufacturer original information. The cost incurred from the purchase of original manufacturer manuals shall be borne by the Contractor. 330

Instruction books shall contain information at least equivalent to that available to mechanics at an authorized overhaul facility of the manufacturer of the machinery or equipment covered. Omission of information due to reasons such as not normally furnished by the manufacturer or factory only is not acceptable.


Page: 800-11

The Contractor shall deliver three (3) copies of the finished instruction books. Final copies shall 335 be provided bound in loose leaf, 3-ring binders appropriately marked on the front cover as to the content. The instruction books shall also be provided in electronic file format. The vessel shall not be accepted without first receiving the final copies of all instruction books.

856.2 Software Programs

Where equipment or systems are programmed for use on this vessel such as may be used in 340 monitoring systems, PLCs, HMI, door locks, etc., the Owner's Representative shall be provided with the specific program as installed on the vessel and such licensed programs to allow their viewing, modification, updating and troubleshooting. NYCDOT shall be the licensed owner/registered user of all programs provided. The Owner's Representative shall be provided with all data link cables for connection between the equipment and a Windows operating system 345 computer.

857 VESSEL SIMULATION

NYCDOT wishes to familiarize its masters with the operating characteristics of the vessel prior to the vessel entering service. To that end, Maritime Research Institute Netherlands (MARIN) Proposal No. 29194.3, Real Time Simulations, NYCDOT 4500 Double-Ended Passenger Ferry, 350 shall be considered a baseline for the purposes of bidding. However the Contractor is free to propose an alternate vendor to supply simulation services. The Contractor shall contract for and provide simulation services described therein prior to delivery of the first vessel, allowing ample time for familiarization. Contractor shall utilize pilot house mock-up required in Section 640.5 of these Technical Specifications in conjunction with vessel simulations services. 355


Page: 900-1

GROUP 900 – TESTS, TRIALS, AND DELIVERY

982 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND TRIALS 1 982.1 Shop Tests 2 982.2 Installation Tests and Inspections 5 982.3 Operational Tests 8 5 982.4 Dock Trials 11 982.5 Rescue Boat Tests 12 982.6 Sea Trials (Contract Performance Trials) 13

983 TRANSIT 17 986 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 18 10

986.1 Final Acceptance Trials 18 986.2 Criteria for Substantial Completion and Substantial Completion Survey 18 986.3 Final Acceptance 19

996 LAUNCHING 19

15

982 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND TRIALS

The Contractor shall develop and conduct a comprehensive test program to demonstrate the installation, capability, and performance of all ship systems to the satisfaction of USCG, ABS and the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall satisfy the regulatory testing requirements of USCG 46 CFR Subchapter H and ABS, as well as the general testing requirements described 20 in these Technical Specifications. The content of this section is for guidance purposes to the Contractor and is not intended to be an exhaustive set of requirements.

The Contractor shall develop test memoranda, which shall be filled out for each test for Owner's Representative review and approval. The Contractor shall develop a complete testing and trials plan and schedule. The test and trials plan and schedule shall be submitted to the Owner's 25 Representative for approval not less than 90 days prior to commencement of the first test.

Test plans requiring USCG or ABS approval must be submitted (to Regulatory Bodies by Contractor, copy to Owner's Representative) not less than 90 days prior to commencement of testing. All shop tests, ship installation tests, and trial tests shall be scheduled and completed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Regulatory Bodies. 30

Tests that are not completed successfully or do not pass the Technical Specifications criteria on the first attempt shall be repeated until such deficiencies are cleared. Record the date, any deficiencies and corrections, and the date of satisfactory completion of each test.

The Contractor shall hire such specialist subcontractors, or field service representatives, and/or utilize such additional equipment as necessary to accomplish the objectives of system testing at 35 no additional cost to the Owner.

The Contractor shall ensure that manufacturer's technical representatives attend commissioning, testing, and trials for major equipment and systems, including but not limited to:


Page: 900-2

Main engines Combining gears 40 Voith Schneider Propellers (VSP) Propulsion controls Navigation equipment Alarm and monitoring system Switchgear and electrical distribution and control equipment 45 Main and emergency generator sets Rescue boat davits Anchor winch Elevator Boilers 50 HVAC equipment

Testing shall occur in the following sequence:

1. Shop Tests

2. Installation Tests and Inspections

3. Operational Tests 55

4. Dock Trials

5. Sea Trials (Contract Performance Trials)

6. Final Acceptance Trials

Note: Testing related to the vessel's stability is addressed in Section 843 of these Technical Specifications. 60

The Contractor shall be responsible for all consumables required to successfully complete all testing and trials, including cooling system additives, lube oil, fuel oil, and hydraulic oil. The Contractor shall be responsible for pilotage and manning of the vessel.

982.1 Shop Tests

982.1.1 Testing of Equipment 65

All manufactured equipment shall have passed factory shop tests before delivery to the Contractor's facility. The manufacturers or suppliers shall provide the Contractor with certificates demonstrating compliance with this requirement. Testing shall be in accordance with the recommendations of SNAME T&R 3-39 Guide for Shop and Installation Tests.

Arrangements shall be made for Owner's Representative attendance at shop tests. The Owner's 70 Representative shall be notified 30 days prior to each test.

Equipment tests shall include, but is not be limited to, the following:

Each propulsion engine, complete with accessory rack and SCRs shall be tested to demonstrate operation over the entire range of engine speeds and loads, and compliance


Page: 900-3

with Regulatory Body performance and emission requirements. Measure all relevant 75 parameters to demonstrate engine performance. Test all safety and interlock devices. Perform post-run inspections of critical components.

Combining gear shall be inspected and tested. Tests shall include gear tooth contact and casing alignment inspection, operational testing of lube oil/hydraulic oil system operation, operation of the gear at rated speed for one (1) hour, and post run inspections 80 of critical components, including re-inspection of gear tooth contact areas.

VSPs shall be shop tested and inspected to demonstrate proper operation of the propellers, propeller lube oil and hydraulic system and controls, and to demonstrate compliance with all Regulatory Body requirements.

Boilers shall be hydrostatically tested and inspected in accordance with Regulatory Body 85 requirements, and operationally tested to demonstrate proper operation.

Pumps shall be hydrostatically tested and inspected in accordance with Hydraulic Institute standards and as required by Regulatory Requirements. Pumps serving vital systems, and pumps serving non-vital systems that exceed 5 HP, shall be operated at design conditions for one (1) hour. 90

Anchor winches and capstans shall be operationally tested to verify correct operation of brakes, clutches, controls, and safety devices.

All switchboards shall be tested as required by the ABS Rules.

Alarm, monitoring, and control systems shall be tested to demonstrate operability and continuity of control logic, and as required by Regulatory Bodies. 95

Safety relief valves shall be tested and calibrated.

Test and calibrate all mechanical system field instruments including analog pressure/temperature gauges, continuous pressure/temperature signal transmitters, pressure/temperature switches.

Electronics and navigation equipment shall be tested at the manufacturer's facility to 100 assure proper operation.

982.1.2 Piping and Mechanical Systems

Pipes, valves and fittings shall have material and pressure test certificates if required by the Regulatory Bodies.

Prior to installation onboard, hydrostatic testing of pipe spools shall be carried out in accordance 105 with the applicable USCG and ABS requirements. Test pressures and test fluids for piping systems shall be in accordance with Table 900-1. Where it is not possible to carry out the required hydrostatic testing for all pipe segments and integral fittings before installation, the remaining segments, including closing seams may be tested after installation.


Page: 900-4

Pipe segments may be painted after successful completion of hydrostatic testing and prior to 110 installation onboard. Untested segments shall be left unpainted and un-insulated until successful completion of all installation and operational testing procedures.

Pneumatic testing in lieu of hydrostatic tests is only acceptable when approved by ABS.

After hydrostatic testing, each piping system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed of all foreign matter with the applicable system's medium or an Owner's Representative-approved 115 substitute.

Systems conveying hydraulic oil shall be cleaned after spool fabrication by pickling in hot acid. Following the acid bath spools shall be washed, acid neutralized, washed again, dried and internally coated with oil.

Table 900-1: Hydrostatic Test Pressures/Fluids 120

System Test Pressure Test Fluid

Seawater cooling 55 psig fresh water

Fresh water cooling 128 psig fresh water

Fuel oil service and transfer 150 psig oil and service fluid

Lube oil and waste oil 120 psig oil and service fluid

AUS dosing 113 psig fresh water

Sounding tubes, vents, overflows fill system to top fixture or vent

fresh water

Fire main 173 psig fresh water

Bilge and trim system 83 psig fresh water

Plumbing drains, interior/exterior deck drains

fill system to top fixture or vent

fresh water

Oily water 75 psig fresh water

Potable water 130 psig fresh water

Tempered water system 90 psig fresh water

Compressed air, high pressure 413 psig fresh water

Compressed air, 150 psi and below 225 psig fresh water


Page: 900-5

System Test Pressure Test Fluid

Hydraulics, valve actuation system (reserved) hydraulic oil

VSP control oil system (reserved) hydraulic oil

Clean agent fixed firefighting system (reserved) fresh water

982.2 Installation Tests and Inspections

Upon completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried out. Additional preparatory measures are also described.

982.2.1 Structure 125

The Contractor shall demonstrate watertightness and fairness of the structure and fittings. It is further intended that the Contractor demonstrate the satisfactory installation and operation, where applicable, of all items of outfit.

The Contractor shall prepare a structural inspection plan and protocol and submit it to the Owner's Representative for approval 90 days prior to commencement of inspections and tests. 130

Structural welds shall undergo visual inspection and non-destructive testing as prescribed by ABS and the requirements of Section 100.

All weathertight and watertight hull structures shall be tested to demonstrate their integrity. Completed structure shall undergo air lance and soap, or vacuum box test. Perform all tests prior to paint out. 135

Structural ducts and main ventilation trunks shall be air tested to verify tightness of structure. Completed structure shall undergo air lance and soap test. Perform all tests prior to paint out.

Hose test windows and fixed lights in conjunction with the testing of the adjacent plating. Hose testing shall be accomplished by directing a stream of fresh water against the 140 structure at a pressure of not less than 30 psig from a minimum 1/2 inch inside diameter nozzle held at a distance of five (5) feet from the structure.

Chalk test doors, scuttles, manholes, and similar gasketed closures to prove full gasket contact. Visually inspect other doors, scuttles, manholes, and closures to demonstrate proper workmanship and operation. 145

Hydrostatically test deep tanks independently by filling each with fresh water to the height of the overflow. Perform tests after air pipes, sounding tubes, and all other connections have been fitted but prior to paint-out. Pneumatic testing in lieu of hydrostatic testing is only acceptable when approved by ABS.


Page: 900-6

982.2.2 Piping and Mechanical Systems 150

Visually inspect all installed piping systems to ensure proper workmanship and completion of tasks in accordance with the Technical Specifications requirements.

After installation, each piping system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed of all foreign matter with the applicable system's medium or an Owner's Representative-approved substitute. Flushing shall be conducted at above-normal line velocity. The flushing fluid shall be filtered 155 during the flushing process using temporary in-line filters. The system tanks shall also be cleaned.

Prior to flushing operations, engineered units capable of internally trapping foreign matter (such as heat exchangers, control valves, etc.) shall be removed or blanked-off and bypassed.

After installation and flushing, all piping systems shall be tested at working pressure and 160 checked for leakage. Any pipe segments, fittings or joints not previously shop tested in accordance with Table 900-1, shall be so tested after installation. Piping segments to be tested after installation shall be left unpainted and un-insulated until successful completion of all installation and operational testing procedures. Manually operate all valves from stop to stop to demonstrate free operation without binding. Remote valve operators (reach rods, hydraulically 165 actuated quick closing devices, etc.) shall be tested to demonstrate proper operation. Valve identification tags shall be checked for accuracy.

Demonstrate that all relief valves and pressure safety devices operate at their set pressure or provide current test certification. Provide all pressure gauges with lab calibration test and certification stickers along with certifying documents. 170

982.2.3 Fuel Oil, Lube Oil, and Hydraulic Systems

After installation, systems conveying fuel oil shall be tested to 1.5 times the system working pressure.

After installation and testing, the systems conveying fuel oil, lube oil, and hydraulic oil shall be cleaned by continuously circulating hot oil at above-normal line velocity, at not less than 140°F 175 using temporary strainers and filters until a clean system is obtained. Line vibrators or temporary in-line and/or portable hand types shall be employed. Flushing oil shall be removed and system flooded again using the normal system fluid, placing a lint-free 905 cloth bag over the temporary strainer, and flushed for at least one (1) hour, or until a clean bag is obtained.

Each system shall be flushed to ISO 4406 18/16/13 cleanliness or as required by manufacturer 180 requirements of attached equipment. All system tanks shall also be cleaned. After flushing and cleaning, samples shall be taken and sent to an independent laboratory to confirm cleanliness. Where laboratory results in indicate the required ISO cleanliness level has not been achieved, the Contractor shall perform additional flushing and retested until achieved at no additional cost to the Owner. 185

Cleanliness test reports shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative.

After cleaning, the Contractor shall drain the system and refill with new, normal system fluid.


Page: 900-7

982.2.4 Electrical System

Insulation resistance (megger) test all power distribution cables, insulated motor and generator windings in accordance with the applicable USCG and ABS requirements. 190

Visually inspect motor alignment with driven load (in instances where the load is not close-coupled).

Manually operate all circuit breakers, disconnect switches, mode selectors, and pushbuttons to demonstrate correct operation.

Bump test to verify that motors operate in the correct direction of rotation. 195

All GFCI circuits shall be tested to verify correct function.

982.2.5 HVAC Systems

Visually inspect all installed HVAC systems to ensure proper workmanship and completion of tasks in accordance with the Technical Specifications requirements prior to system operation. This includes, but is not limited to, verification of the following: 200

All fans, pumps, and heaters are properly wired, piped and operational. All control panels, alarm panels, and monitoring sensors are installed and operational. All fans, pumps, and motors rotate in the correct direction. All bulkhead penetrations are air tight where required. Power is available to the system. 205

System filters are properly installed and clean. System balancing and fire dampers demonstrate free operation without binding. Nameplate data matches the system drawings.

982.2.6 Electronics and Navigation Equipment

Visually inspect all installed Navigation and Electronics systems under the supervision of the 210 equipment manufacturer's representative to ensure proper workmanship and completion of tasks in accordance with the Technical Specifications and manufacturer's requirements. This includes, but is not limited to, verification that all components are properly wired and operational, power is available to the system, initial adjustments and configurations are complete, and the system is ready for operation. 215

982.2.7 Anchor and Mooring Equipment

Prior to the installation of any anchor winch wire rope, anchor chain or mooring lines, the Contractor shall test each anchor winch and mooring capstan to ensure proper workmanship, including but not limited to the following:

Check operation of controls, indicators, switch, alarms, selectors, clutches, etc. 220

Operate for one-half hour at no load in each direction.


Page: 900-8

Test rope drums and capstan heads under a static load

Check safety and regulating devices

982.3 Operational Tests

All systems and equipment shall be tested in operation to demonstrate proper performance that 225 complies with the regulatory requirements, manufacturer-stated performance expectations, and the intent of these Technical Specifications. Such operational testing shall include, but not limited to the following.

982.3.1 Piping and Mechanical Systems

All pumps, fans, compressors, boilers, heat exchangers, and equipment shall be tested in 230 operation to demonstrate the movement and processing of fluids at the correct flow rates, temperatures, and pressures. Equipment shall be run at steady state for a period of one (1) hour or one (1) full duty cycle, whichever is less. For systems with multiple alternative flow paths, flow through all parallel branches or anticipated system line-up configurations shall be tested for the minimum duration specified. Where fitted, bypasses shall be tested. 235

Prior to operational testing of pumps, the Contractor shall verify that all pumps are adequately primed with their respective service fluids. The Contractor shall abide by instructions in the manufacturer's literature or those given by on-site manufacturer's representatives for this purpose.

During the above testing, the following steady state conditions shall be measured and recorded: 240

For centrifugal pumps: pump suction and discharge pressures, flow rate, and motor current.

For positive displacement pumps: pump differential pressure, flow rate, and motor current.

For fans: fan static pressure, flow rate, and motor current. 245

Flow through balancing orifices shall be measured by use of pressure sensing ports located upstream and downstream of the orifice. Orifice sizes shall be altered, as needed, to achieve the desired system flow rate.

All modes of equipment control (i.e., hand/off/auto, local/remote) shall be tested. Auto start/stop control shall be demonstrated to initiate action at the correct set points. Pressure and temperature 250 settings of control instrumentation shall be adjusted as needed.

Pressure/temperature regulating valves or control features shall be tested to demonstrate that the correct set point is maintained. Set points shall be adjusted as needed to ensure proper system function. Mechanized control actuators for valves and dampers shall be tested for proper operation. 255


Page: 900-9

Verify that heat exchangers operate as intended and that temperature stabilization is achieved during steady state operations at full machinery power.

Verify compressed air system receiver charge time from atmospheric pressure to 250 psig utilizing one (1) compressor. Confirm that compressed air system can support the requisite number of engine starts. Confirm correct airflow rate and pressure to all installed equipment, 260 including, but not limited to, main engine SCR's, boilers, and ship's horns.

982.3.2 Electrical Systems

Demonstrate the operation of the electrical distribution system on both shore power and ship's power. Test the operation of the main bus synchroscope and demonstrate the paralleling capability of the ship's generators. Test the generator reverse power relays for proper operation. 265

Test auxiliary engines and generators to demonstrate operation over the entire range of loads. Generators shall be reactive load tested, with the load built up in 25% increments of 30 minutes each to 100%, which shall be maintained for four (4) hours, followed by 110% rated load for two (2) hours. Loading shall be based on current (Amperes) and a power factor of 0.8.

Demonstrate automatic starting of the emergency diesel generator and connection. Verify that 270 back-up DC power supplies maintain power as required during transition.

Check all equipment while under normal operational load and record operating current. Check all switches, control devices, sensing devices, alarms, fail safe features, safety trips, interlocks, emergency shutdowns, etc., for proper function.

Manually open circuit breakers under load. 275

Test all motor controllers. Verify that LVP and LVR controllers function correctly. Verify run indicators, interlocks, thermal overloads, and resets operate properly. Verify control transfer and motor speed control functions operate correctly. Operate motors at steady state for a period of one (1) hour or one (1) full duty cycle, whichever is less. Measure voltage and amperage in all phases; measure motor speed. 280

Calibrate and check automatic thermal control devices, alarm and indicator devices. Check overload-tripping devices for the proper size heater element and freedom of operation.

982.3.3 HVAC Systems

Balance and test each system to assure delivery of designed air quantities. Adjust balancing dampers as required. Before testing and balancing, systems shall be clean, normally open 285 weather closures and dampers shall be open, fans and motors shall run in the proper direction of rotation with correct speed, and filters shall be in place.

Balance the passenger and crew spaces ventilation systems so that the total flow from all terminals is equal to the design flow +5%/-0%, and the flow from any individual terminal is equal to the design flow ±10% of the design. 290


Page: 900-10

Balance each machinery space ventilation system so that the total flow from all terminals is not less than the design flow.

Operate each system at full design capacity and measure airflow.

Test all controls in the heating and ventilation systems to ensure that they function properly upon passing control limits. These tests may be made by changing control limits in lieu of changing 295 space conditions. Test each component before installation to ensure proper calibration.

Adjust control system set points for efficient operation.

982.3.4 Alarm and Monitoring Systems

Each discrete alarm point shall be tested to demonstrate actuation at the correct set points. Each alarm channel shall be tested independently to demonstrate that audible/visual alarm indication is 300 given. Wherever possible, this testing shall exercise both the mechanical and electrical processes of a given source instrument. For instance, pressure switches shall be subjected to a false pressure signal to test the internal pressure-sensing and switching capability. False electrical signals or the alteration of alarm system set-points to mimic alarm conditions are prohibited, except in cases where it is necessary to protect equipment from damage or is impractical to do 305 otherwise.

Demonstrate that alarm and trip circuits do not alarm or trip under normal transient conditions when equipment is being started or shutdown, or during operator command changes such as rapid rpm or power output reduction of the main propulsion system. Adjust delay timers and dead band settings as necessary to avoid nuisance alarms. 310

Verify that remote display readouts in the EOS console give the same indication as local reading analog gauges.

982.3.5 VSP Propulsion System

Cycle blade pitch from full astern to full ahead, and to each side. Demonstrate proper operation of the input and follow-up mechanisms. Verify that operating pressures are within nominal 315 limits.

Verify that pitch indication (local/remote) is correct.

Adjust Voith Turbo coupling oil fill level to achieve equal power distribution between engines operating in parallel on each drive train.

Verify that all supporting auxiliary systems achieve steady state flow, temperature, and pressure 320 during engine operation.

Inspect all critical engine, gear, and shafting components after the endurance trials.


Page: 900-11

982.3.6 Electronics and Navigation Equipment

Check all electronics and navigation equipment for proper function under the supervision of the equipment manufacturer's representative, to determine that equipment meets the manufacturer's 325 specified characteristics and performance levels.

Perform all checks and operations necessary to obtain required licenses for radio frequency electronics. The radio frequency electronic systems shall not be considered complete until the FCC inspection and certification has been accomplished.

982.4 Dock Trials 330

Dock trials consisting of simultaneous dockside operation of the machinery plant, machinery plant controls and associated auxiliaries shall be conducted to demonstrate readiness for sea trials. Preparation, testing and data collection shall be carried out in accordance with the recommendations of Section 3.0 of SNAME T&R 3-39 Guide for Shop & Installation Tests. Dock Trials shall be used to demonstrate the satisfactory operation of all ship systems. All 335 testing shall be performed to the satisfaction of USCG, ABS and the Owner's Representative.

982.4.1 Main Propulsion Spin Tests

Operate the propulsion engines at rated speed with the propellers set at zero pitch.

Verify that all supporting auxiliary systems achieve steady state flow, temperature, and pressure during engine operation. Conduct post-run inspections of critical engine, gear, and shafting 340 components. Obtain oil samples and provide wear metal and contaminate spectrum analysis after operation. Provide a report with interpretation to the Owner's Representative.

982.4.2 Main Propulsion Load Tests

Demonstrate operation of the engines allowing the engines to be warmed up in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and to allow for operation at maximum dock trial speed, ahead and 345 astern for sufficient time for temperatures to stabilize. Testing shall include two hours at maximum ahead dock trial rpm and 30 minutes of maximum astern dock trial rpm. In each case, propellers shall be set at maximum dock trial blade pitch. Obtain lube oil and fuel oil samples during testing. Regulatory starting requirements shall be demonstrated during testing. Following testing, combining gears shall be inspected for tooth contact. Provide a report with 350 interpretation to the Owner's Representative.

982.4.3 Propulsion Controls

Test engine starting and stopping (local and remote) for proper operation.

Test local engine speed controls.

Demonstrate remote engine speed and propeller pitch control from each of the remote propulsion 355 control stations.

Demonstrate that the transfer of control functions operate properly.

Demonstrate an emergency propulsion engine shutdown at each remote station.


Page: 900-12

Demonstrate operation of the propulsion controls in all modes. Verify that switching between modes operates as intended. 360

Verify that all remote indicators for drive rpm, propeller pitch, and direction function properly.

Verify that back-up (redundant) operational modes are tested.

Provide a report with interpretation to the Owner's Representative.

982.4.4 Auxiliary Systems and Equipment

Prior to Dock Trials, installation and operational testing of all auxiliary systems shall be 365 completed prior to dock trials. All operational features of auxiliary systems shall be checked and demonstrated to the satisfaction of USCG, ABS and the Owner's Representative.

982.4.5 Vital System Automation Documentation and Testing

The Contractor shall develop procedures for and perform Design Verification Test Procedures (DVTP) and Periodic Safety Test Procedures (PSTP) as required by the Regulatory Bodies for all 370 automated vital systems.

The Contractor's Propulsion System Integrator shall develop all required documentation for submittal to the Owner's Representative, USCG, and ABS. These include but are not limited to: a Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA), a Periodic Safety Test Procedure (PSTP), and Design Verification Test Procedure (DVTP). 375

Prior to developing the procedures, the Contractor shall develop an outline procedure delineating the equipment and systems to be included and submit to USCG and the Owner's Representative for Review.

The FMEA and PSTP shall comply with 46 CFR Parts 61.40 and 62.20 as applicable. The FMEA, PSTP and DVTP shall be submitted to the USCG and the Owner's Representative for 380 review and approval.

The Contractor's PSI shall engage the engine, VSP, control system, and other equipment suppliers as required to complete the FMEA, PSTP, and DVTP. The equipment suppliers shall be responsible for providing all data and engineering assistance necessary for completion of these documents in cooperation with interfacing equipment suppliers and the PSI. 385

Upon receiving Regulatory and Owner's Representative approval, the Contractor shall perform the DVTP and PSTP. This testing shall be performed with the guidance of the on-site technical representatives for the propulsion engines, reduction gear, VSPs, and alarm/monitoring system. The Owner's Representative and a USCG representative shall be present during testing for final review and acceptance 390

982.5 Rescue Boat Tests

The Contractor shall demonstrate the launching and recovery of each rescue boat utilizing the installed davits. Once afloat, the rescue boats shall be tested to demonstrate satisfactory operation.


Page: 900-13

982.6 Sea Trials (Contract Performance Trials) 395

Upon satisfactory completion of dock trials, excepting those described in Section 982.5, the Contractor shall conduct sea trials to demonstrate satisfactory vessel operation underway in waters of similar condition to the intended route. Contract Performance Trials for each vessel will occur at or near the Contractor's construction facilities.

The conduct of the trials shall be contingent upon receipt by NYCDOT of written notice from the 400 Contractor of presumptive completion of all physical work, testing, and clean-up provided under the Contract, excepting an allowance for a small quantity of deficiencies, as agreed to by NYCDOT.

The Contract Performance Trials are to demonstrate that each vessel meets, or exceeds, all contractual performance requirements to the satisfaction of NYCDOT. All deficiencies are to be 405 corrected prior to transit to New York, except those that are authorized in writing by NYCDOT.

A Contract Performance Survey, including a compartment sign off, shall be conducted after these trials to affirm that the construction of the vessel is complete; the form, fit and function of installed materials are satisfactory, and the vessel is clean and clear of rubbish, excess material, etc., in accordance with Final Clean-up as outlined below. Detail provided in survey 410 documentation must be satisfactory to NYCDOT.

The existence of any uncorrected deficiency affecting the safety, operation, performance, or immediate efficient use of the vessel for its intended service will be sufficient cause to reject Contract Performance Trials. The existence of a significant number of uncorrected deficiencies will likewise be a cause for rejection. 415

The Contractor shall immediately take appropriate action to correct and complete any work that is determined to be unsatisfactory or incomplete, and shall be responsible for any delay in the project associated with correcting deficiencies. The cost of such delay and required retesting shall be at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor is responsible for conducting sea trials with a clean bottom and clean sea chests. 420 The hull shall be free of fouling and growth. Approximately 14 days prior to scheduled sea trials, the Contractor shall determine the condition of the bottom and sea chests and notify the Owner's Representative of their condition.

If necessary, for the purpose of conducting proper trials, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the underwater surface of the hull. If the vessel has been in the water for more than 90 days prior 425 to sea trials, the vessel shall be dry-docked and underwater surfaces including appendages, propulsors, and sea chests shall be thoroughly cleaned and inspected. Alternatively, upon acceptance by the Owner, the vessel hull and propellers may be cleaned afloat and a video of the hull condition provided to the Owner's Representative.

With the exception of the light condition trials, all sea trials shall be conducted with the vessel 430 ballasted to a draft of 13 feet with zero trim. The Contractor is advised that supplemental weights on the Main Deck may be required to achieve the target draft. The Contractor shall operate the vessel for a minimum of 12 hours. The Contractor shall demonstrate and verify the proper operation of all vessel systems, including, but not limited to the operation and capability


Page: 900-14

of the entire propulsion system, supporting auxiliary systems, and their components in all modes 435 of operation as recommended in SNAME T&R 3-47, Guide for Sea Trials.

The Contractor shall provide vessel-operating crew for sea trials.

For all trials, the following parameters, including, but not limited to the following list shall be measured and recorded:

Shaft rpm Shaft torque

Fuel rack position (or equivalent) Fuel consumption (each engine)

Propeller pitch Vessel speed through water

Shaft bearing temperatures Jacket water circuit press/temp

Aftercooler circuit press/temp Exhaust system temperatures/back pressure

Charge air system temp/pressure Turbocharger rpm

Lube oil system temp/press Fuel oil system temp/press

Reduction gear lube oil temp/press VSP control oil temp/press

VSP lube oil temp/press Voith turbo coupling temp

440

982.6.1 Propulsion Trials

Propulsion trials shall be conducted in order to establish the fuel consumption and speed vs. power relationships of the propulsion system. Within this series of tests, fine-tuning of the control system shall be performed as needed to optimize plant performance. Such adjustments shall be made between trials so that each trial run represents the control system with a fixed 445 configuration. The control system shall be optimized for a transit speed of 16.3 knots.

Table 900-2 lists the required propulsion trials as described in SNAME T&R 3-47, Guide for Sea Trials.

Table 900-2: Propulsion Trials

Propulsion Trials Vessel

Applicability

SNAME T&R 3-47

Paragraph

Economy Trials First of Class 2.2

Ahead Endurance Trials All 2.3

Astern Endurance Trials All 2.4

Diesel Propulsion All 2.5

Centralized Propulsion Control All 2.8

450


Page: 900-15

The endurance trials shall be performed to demonstrate the vessel's sustained operation at sprint speed (approximately 17 knots). Sprint speed is defined as the speed at with 100% maximum continuous rating of the main engines is applied. It is acceptable to perform the economy and endurance trials concurrently. By collecting data from additional components, it is also acceptable to perform the diesel propulsion trials concurrently with the endurance and economy 455 trials.

982.6.2 Maneuvering Trials

A series of maneuvering tests shall be conducted to evaluate vessel maneuverability and to measure basic course-keeping and turning qualities. Table 900-3 lists the required maneuvering trials as described in SNAME T&R 3-47, Guide for Sea Trials. 460

Table 900-3: Maneuvering Trials

Maneuvering Trials Vessel

Applicability

SNAME T&R 3-47

Paragraph

Ahead Steering All 3.4

Astern Steering All 3.5

Turning Circles First of Class 3.7

"Z" Maneuver First of Class 3.8

Quick reversal from Ahead to Astern All 3.14

Quick Reversal from Astern to Ahead All 3.15

Anchoring trials shall be conducted in a water depth of approximately 50 feet to ensure correct functioning of the anchor winch, in accordance with manufacture's specifications.

982.6.3 Light Condition Trials 465

The vessel shall be operated at a light condition draft and maximum achievable ahead speed in open water. When the vessel reaches steady state speed, the airborne noise and vibration levels shall be measured in the same areas as in the ahead endurance trial, as described in Section 982.6.4.

Light condition is represented by the following: 470

Fuel tanks between 30 – 80% full

No ballast

Minimal potable water

Empty sewage tank and sewage treatment plant

No passengers 475


Page: 900-16

982.6.4 Noise and Vibration

The Contractor shall perform an independent vibration survey of the major equipment in the locations listed below. The data shall be recorded in the presence of the ABS Surveyor and/or a representative specialist of an ABS Recognized Condition Monitoring Company. Measurements shall be made of equipment and bearing vibration velocities and amplitudes. The results of these 480 measurements shall be delivered in report format, showing comparisons the acceptable vibration levels shown in an applicable standard, such as SNAME’s T&R Bulletin 3-42, Guidelines for the Use of Vibration Monitoring for Preventative Maintenance, to the Owner's Representative for review and approval.

Main Engines 485

Line Shaft Bearings

Voith Fluid Coupling

Reduction Gear Bearings

Voith Schneider Propellers

Ship Service Diesel Generators 490

Emergency Diesel Generator In addition to the major equipment, the Contractor shall perform an independent vibration survey in the manner described above on installed equipment with rotating elements including, but not limited to pumps, motors, and fans in the following systems. The Contractor shall develop a list of equipment testing for review and approval by the Owner's representative prior to carrying out 495 the survey.

Sea Water Cooling System

Fresh Water Cooling

AUS Dosing System

Fuel Oil System 500

Lube Oil and Waste Oil Piping System

Fire Main

Sanitary System

Bilge and Trim System

Tempered Water System 505

Potable Water System

Compressed Air System

Deck De-Icing System

Machinery and Accommodations HVAC Systems


Page: 900-17

The Contractor shall retain the services of an independent subcontractor, approved by the 510 Owner's Representative, to conduct a survey of airborne noise and vibration levels during the endurance trial and light condition trial.

Noise measurements shall be carried out in general accordance with ISO 2923:1996. However, the noise limits in Section 073 shall be used to assess satisfactory performance. Vibration measurements shall be performed in accordance with ISO 6954:2000 using the limits specified in 515 Section 073. Noise and vibration test plans shall be prepared and provided to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to performing testing.

Measurements of noise and vibration in large spaces (such as passenger spaces) shall be performed at spacing no larger than 10 frame intervals in the longitudinal direction. Measurements in passenger spaces shall be performed along the port and starboard sides of the 520 space. Single measurements can be performed in spaces less than 10 frames long. All noise measurements shall be performed at least 3 feet away from structural boundaries where practical and at a height between 4 to 6 feet from the deck.

982.6.5 Thermographic Survey

The Contractor shall hire a firm that specializes in thermal surveying and interpretation to 525 provide a thermographic survey of the main engines, boilers, exhaust piping, generators, motors, switchboards, panel connections, and power distribution circuits under load.

The survey shall be used to identify integrity of insulated surfaces, ensure hot surfaces are insulated to Regulatory Body requirements, ensure hot surfaces readily accessible by crew are less than 135 °F, and to identify anomalies in electrical equipment and major machinery that may 530 require corrective action. Results of this survey, including all observed deficiencies with recommended corrective actions shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative in report format.

983 TRANSIT

Following satisfactory Contract Performance Trials, the vessel, not under its own power, shall be 535 moved under the Contractor's responsibility from the construction site to a shipyard facility having the capability to dry dock the vessel in the port of New York / New Jersey vicinity acceptable to the Owner (Contractor's Completion Facility). The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and equipping the vessel for delivery and arranging for safe transit of the vessel in accordance with the Contract. No ship systems or equipment are to be utilized during the 540 delivery evolution. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the safety and security of the vessel during transit. The Contractor shall be responsible for all customs broker fees.

Upon arrival at the Contractor's Completion Facility, the Contractor shall remove all temporary closures, equipment or other items used during transit and restore the vessel to its condition prior to transit. The Contractor shall perform a joint condition survey with NYCDOT to identify any 545 damage that may have occurred during transit. The Contractor shall report these results to the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs required due to damage during transit.


Page: 900-18

The Contractor shall dry dock the vessel. While in the dry dock, the Contractor shall pressure wash the hull. The Contractor shall repair all coatings damaged during transit and shall apply a 550 full coat of antifouling in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommended procedures.

986 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

986.1 Final Acceptance Trials

Following the completion of repairs and vessel dry docking at the Contractor's Completion Facility the Contractor shall operate the vessel for four (4) days, verifying terminal fit and 555 demonstrating the proper operation of all vessel systems, including but not limited to:

Main Engines and Controls Navigation Equipment CCTV and associated security systems Vessel wireless broadband Ethernet system 560

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing vessel crew and fluids.

The Contractor shall have the option to conduct these trials from the Contractor's Completion Facility or the NYCDOT Ferry Maintenance Facility prior to Final Acceptance of the vessel by NYCDOT. NYCDOT operating personnel shall be given access to the vessel to observe these trials. 565

986.2 Criteria for Substantial Completion and Substantial Completion Survey

The Work has been determined to be substantially complete by the Owner via a joint survey of the vessel and the Final Approved Punch List has been accepted by the Contractor. The Final Approved Punch List identifies the remaining work items to be completed and the date of completion of those items. 570

Following Final Acceptance Trials, a Substantial Completion Survey shall be conducted at the NYCDOT Ferry Maintenance Facility. The results of this survey will be used to determine the Date of Substantial Completion.

The Substantial Completion Survey will be conducted jointly by NYCDOT and Contractor at the Staten Island Ferry Maintenance Facility. The Contractor shall provide appropriate survey 575 check-off lists and related documentation for use by survey personnel. The documentation shall be submitted for NYCDOT approval no less than 21 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. Detail provided in survey documentation shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

This Substantial Completion Survey shall be conducted to demonstrate that the vessel is ready 580 for passenger service. At the time of the Survey, the vessel shall be afloat and ballasted to a service draft of 13 feet with zero trim. The Contractor is advised that supplemental weights on the Main Deck may be required to achieve the target draft.

At the completion of the Survey, the Owner shall provide to the Contractor the results of the Survey, including but not limited to, work items remaining to be completed and proposed dates 585


Page: 900-19

for their completion. This punch list shall be the basis for the Final Approved Punch List as set forth in Book 1, Part H, Article 14 and Book 3 of the Contract.

Upon mutual agreement of the Final Punch List work items, NYCDOT can accept the vessel provided that no remaining work items are such that the safety and normal operation of the vessel is not compromised. 590

The Contractor shall sound all tanks containing valuable fluids, including fuel oil, lube oil, and urea. The soundings shall take place at the NYCDOT Ferry Maintenance Facility, and be witnessed and approved by the Owner's Representative.

Onboard equipment and fluids for delivery shall include cooling system additives, lube oil, fuel oil, hydraulic oil, urea, paper products, and cleaning gear. At delivery, the vessel's fuel load 595 shall be topped off to 95% capacity and the vessel's engines and equipment shall be filled to the 95% capacity with lubricating oil.

The potable water system and storage tank shall have been properly treated and flushed, tested to verify safe for drinking, and shall be full upon delivery.

The Owner shall be responsible for vessel documentation services. 600

986.3 Final Acceptance

The terms and conditions for Final Acceptance of the vessel are described in Book 1, Part H, Article 14 and Book 3 of the Contract.

996 LAUNCHING

The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory launching of the vessel, with times to be 605 mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. Expenses connected with the launching shall be borne by the Contractor.
